JP7060735B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game value such as medals and coins has been inserted, and requests the start of rotation of all reels. Output the signal to be. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do. The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the game value (medals, etc.) is given, and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game value. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chance of giving game value, etc. can be mentioned.

Further, in such a gaming machine, a function of notifying information of a stop operation advantageous to the player so as to increase the probability of establishment of a specific combination (for example, a combination related to imparting a game value), that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as an assist time). , "AT"). In addition, when a specific condition such as displaying a specific symbol combination is satisfied, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay is higher than the normal time is activated, that is, the replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") Some have functions. Further, some have an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which AT and RT operate at the same time.

Conventionally, as described in Patent Document 1, the information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition performance of the game medal and the like, that is, the acquisition performance such as the correct answer pressing order and the appropriate pressing position of the stop button is different. An advantageous section or advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the instruction information for identifying or guessing the combination on the liquid crystal display device or the like (instruction information can be notified), and the inability to operate such the instruction function (instruction information). There is known a gaming machine provided with a normal section or a normal state that makes it impossible to notify (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

Further, a period of the bonus game (the period described in the document is a period during RBB1 operation) is provided (paragraphs 0014 to 0016, etc.).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-50862

However, when an advantageous state (advantageous section) is provided, if the advantageous state continues for too long, the gambling property becomes excessively high.

In addition, if the advantageous state (advantageous section) is suddenly terminated, the player may feel uncomfortable. Further, when activating the limiter that ends the advantageous state during the operation of the bonus, there is a problem as to how the output of the external signal should be.

The present invention does not give the player a sense of discomfort when ending the advantageous state while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous state continuing for too long, and moreover, the bonus operation. It is an object of the present invention to provide an example of an external signal output when a limiter that terminates an advantageous state is activated.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start condition, and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch) capable of detecting an operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for stopping the variable display of the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means.
A privilege granting means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of granting a privilege according to the stop mode of the variable display means, and
A notification means capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player,
A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a non-advantageous state (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which notification by the notification means is not allowed and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the notification means is allowed. ) And,

The advantageous state includes at least a normal advantageous state, which is a period in which the game value decreases, and an increased advantageous state, which is a period in which the game value increases.

When the first end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the first end control means (for example, a game number limiter) for ending the advantageous state, and
In the increased advantageous state, when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, a second end control means (for example, a number limiter ) for terminating the advantageous state is further provided.
The first termination condition is that a predetermined number of games is consumed in the advantageous state.
The second termination condition is that the number of increased game values reaches a predetermined predetermined number in the advantageous state.

When both the first end condition and the second end condition can be satisfied in one game, the end of the advantageous state by only one of the first end control means and the second end control means. Process and

Further equipped with a signal control means capable of outputting a predetermined signal to an external device,
When the advantageous state is terminated by the first end control means, the signal control means controls the predetermined signal in an embodiment indicating the end of the advantageous state, and the second end control means causes the advantageous state. Even in the case of termination, the predetermined signal is controlled by the first termination control means in the same manner as in the case where the advantageous state is terminated.

It is possible to suggest to the player that the termination process of the advantageous state is to be performed when the termination process of the advantageous state is to be performed, and the mode of the suggestion is the termination by the first termination control means or the first. 2 It depends on the type of end control, whether it is the end by the end control means or not.
If the first end condition is satisfied during a special game in which the special role in the winning combination is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed, the above-mentioned is performed without waiting for the end of the special game. A gaming machine characterized by outputting the predetermined signal by a signal control means.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, "when both the first end condition and the second end condition can be satisfied in one game, only one of the first end control means and the second end control means is satisfied. However, instead of this, "when both the first end condition and the second end condition can be satisfied in one game, the first end control is performed." The end processing of the advantageous state may be performed by the means and the second end control means. "

According to the present invention, while suppressing the excessively high gambling due to the advantageous state continuing for too long, the player does not feel uncomfortable when ending the advantageous state, and moreover, It is possible to provide an example of an external signal output when a limiter that terminates an advantageous state during bonus operation is activated.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the selector provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the auxiliary control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of the various registers which a main CPU has in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the security mode of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state between the bonus state and the non-bonus state of pachislot in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section, the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the hit request flag storage area, and the winning operation flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in a normal advantageous section in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of various tables referred to in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the ending effect performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between each game state, internal winning combination, and navigation data in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power-on (reset interrupt) time processing executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game return processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change confirmation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change command generation storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data pointer update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the (external) processing at the time of power failure in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the checksum generation process (non-standard) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-regulation) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-regulation) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the error processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number value acquisition processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the compressed data storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the AND operation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the illegal hit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning check / medal payout processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal payout number check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data transmission processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the WDT setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment LED drive processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment display data generation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the timer update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of power-on of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of inserting a medal of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 2) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 3) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 4) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 5) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows another example of the limiter of the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the control method of the number limiter of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the adjustment hitting method of the number limiter of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of the main CPU of the modification of the present invention [pulling back in an advantageous section is a winning combination + point management]. It is explanatory drawing of the bonus role of the modified example of [additional lottery system using BB with setting difference and MB without setting difference] of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the modified example of the present invention [switching the winning rate and the benefit of the advantageous section according to the RT state at the normal time]. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the modified example of [data reduction by the management method of symbol combination] of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the stop control according to the range priority of the modification [prioritization which adopted the new concept about symbol pull-in] of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the modified example of [RT fall navigation] of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the modified example of [system for eliminating ART preparation] of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the modified example of [ART winning probability fluctuation in non-advantageous section] of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the modified example of the present invention [machine equipped with an advantageous section having a setting difference in RT transition]. It is explanatory drawing of the additional lottery table according to the number of games between JAC flags of the [additional lottery in a shift type bonus in an advantageous section] modification of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having a bonus operation function, an AT function, and an ART function will be described.

<Functional flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, the game medium may be referred to as "game value" or "game value".

When a medal is inserted into a pachislot machine by a player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws lots based on the extracted random number values, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. In the following, the role related to the payout of medals will be referred to as a "small role", and the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) will be referred to as a "replay role". In addition, the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus game) is also referred to as a "bonus role". In addition, a winning combination (that is, a combination of symbols that are permitted to be established) may be simply referred to as a "winning combination", and an internal winning combination is a "winning combination", a "predetermined result", or. Sometimes referred to as "derivation tolerance". Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determining means", a "winning combination determining means", a "predetermining means", or a "deriving allowable condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. conduct. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as a start lever, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. .. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button shape such as a stop button, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the stop operation. ..

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that permits the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means uses a specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the valid line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol on the effective line when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be expressed as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. The stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels will be stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means is that the combination of the symbols displayed along the valid line is related to the winning (or other predetermined one). Judge whether or not there is. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning (or the combination of other predetermined symbols) is established. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. It may be present, or it may be determined whether or not it corresponds to the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently guaranteed, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning is the combination of the symbols for which the winning is permitted. Can be detected, so it is possible to improve security.

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various effects are produced by displaying images by a display device, outputting light by various lamps, outputting sounds by speakers, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for effect is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later. Further, when the main control circuit described later determines the effect content, the effect content determining means may be one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body (game machine main body) 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet (housing) 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door (front door) 2b to which an opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are provided side by side in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (rotational direction of the reel). In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R may be expressed as "design display means", "variable display means", "variable display" and the like. Further, as these components, the symbol display area 4 described later may be included. Further, the "design" may be any information that can be visually identified by the player, and may be expressed as "identification information" in that sense.

The front door 2b includes a door main body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot machine 1. The cabinet 2a may be simply referred to as a "box body", and the front door 2b may be simply referred to as a "door" or a "front door". Further, since the cabinet 2a functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the front door 2b, it may be expressed as a "support body", a "support frame", a "fixed frame", or the like. Further, the front door 2b may be composed of a plurality of door members. For example, it may be composed of an upper door member attached to the upper side of the opening of the cabinet 2a and a lower door member attached to the lower side of the opening of the cabinet 2a, or may be composed of the lower door member when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. The inner door member attached to the opening side of the cabinet 2a and the outer door member attached to the front side of the gaming machine may be used.

The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged to face the display device 11 described later arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin to suppress the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

The lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper part of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and lights are turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in the LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back surface side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has a symbol display area 4, various devices to be operated by the player (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, 3 stop buttons 17L, 17C, etc.). 17R, checkout button (not shown), etc.) are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area superposed on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position on the player side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. A predetermined area in 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. Two symbols are configured to be displayed within the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the design is displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns).

Then, in the present embodiment, within the frame of the reel display window 4, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. The upper area, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the line connecting the upper area of the right reel 3R (top line), the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R. The line connecting the reels (bottom line) is defined (specified) as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won. The valid line may also be referred to as a "winning line" or a "judgment line".

In the present embodiment, for example, a line connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (cross-up line), and the left reel 3L. A line (cross-down line) connecting the upper region, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R may be further defined as an effective line. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective lines are the above-mentioned three lines (or may be five lines as described here), but the number of the lines can be increased or decreased as appropriate. For example, only one line of the center line may be used as an effective line, or only two lines, a top line and a bottom line, may be used as effective lines. Further, when defining an effective line, it is possible to define each line in which the above-mentioned symbols are aligned in a straight line, or together with this, a line in which the symbols are not aligned in a straight line is defined as an effective line. That is, if it is a line that passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols for each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a valid line.

For example, a line (irregular line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as an effective line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 effective lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a valid line.

The reel display window 4 is formed by an opening of a frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, a pedestal region having a substantially horizontal plane is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, the medal insertion slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside into the pachi-slot machine 1 by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of medals deposited in the cabinet 2a to be used for one game. Inside the MAX bet button 15a, a bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided. Further, the settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1-bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are all referred to as "insertion operations".

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal area of the substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a two-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the information of the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as "the number of payouts") as a privilege to the player. To digitally display (notify) information such as (hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is switched from the display mode of the number of payouts to the display mode of the information of the error type.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. Then, in the instruction monitor, the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player by turning on, blinking, or turning off the two-digit 7-segment LED in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified. do.

The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, when the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)" is notified. When the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order "2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)" is displayed, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order is displayed. When notifying "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The mode of notifying the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor (navigation data determined on the main side described later) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45 and the like described later.

Further, the information display 6 is a state display (not shown) for notifying that the information display 6 is an advantageous section advantageous for the player (including a “normal advantageous section” and an “advantageous section” described later; see FIG. 14 described later). Is provided. The status display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. As a general rule, the status indicator lights up at a predetermined timing during the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (for example, any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game), and the advantageous section continues. The lighting continues while it is on. Then, when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends and the light goes out. As a result, all the players are notified that the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player starts, that the advantageous section is in progress, and that the advantageous section ends, so that the fairness of the game is guaranteed. ..

As shown in FIG. 6 described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly performed. It is controlled by the main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another means controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the information of the stop operation. Specifically, the information on the stop operation is notified by the display device 11 described later, which is composed of the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212 (see FIGS. 3 and 6 described later) described later.

When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation to be notified may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said that the notification is direct). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the instruction monitor displays a numerical value "1" uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, display device 11 or the like) display the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified to the user.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. In addition, the presence or absence of notification of such stop operation information can be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, it is possible that the information on the stop operation is not notified in the game state (normal state) in the normal section described later, and the information on the stop operation can be notified in each game state in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section described later. can.

Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially perpendicular to the pedestal region of the substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 13 in the front portion of the door body 9. The sub-display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Has. The sub display device 18 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medal discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, which will be described later. It is a figure which shows the structure of a selector 66.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. A display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 has a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projected member 212a on which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and displays an image by projection mapping. Specifically, the display device 11 generates video light based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projected member 212a, which is a three-dimensional object, and the video light is projected by the projector mechanism 211. It is projected on the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, it is possible to perform an advanced and powerful effect. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member having a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212a, and one of the projected members is provided depending on the gaming state. , Used as a screen on which video light is projected. Therefore, the inside of the cabinet 2a is also provided with a function (not shown) for switching the projected member according to the gaming state. The display device 11 can also use various other display devices (for example, a liquid crystal display device) as long as it is a device capable of displaying an image for the player.

At the lower part of the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when, for example, the number of stored medals exceeds 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. Further, the medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the DC voltage power required in each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged. A sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) described later is mounted on the sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57. The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described later.

The sub-relay board 61 is arranged above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71, which will be described later, is mounted. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and a board arranged around the sub-control board 72, various device units (units), and the like is mounted.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which the wiring for connecting the above is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the front door 2b on the back surface side, and a reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is on the side opposite to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41. A main control board case 55 in which the board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIGS. 7 and 8 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of presence / absence of winning. .. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the main control circuit 90 also controls processing related to determination regarding AT or ART, display processing of navigation information on an instruction monitor, transmission processing of various test signals, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

Further, above the speaker 65L, a selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged. The selector 66 is a device for detecting medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, and a device for selecting whether or not the inserted medals are appropriate medals, and is selected as an appropriate medal. In that case, the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side and driven so as to be housed in the hopper device 51, and if it is selected as not a proper medal, the medal is moved to the medal payout exit 24 side. It is guided so that it is discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. That is, the selector 66 is also a device that distributes the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side.

As shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 has a base 803 on which a medal rail (medal passage) 802 through which medals pass is formed, and a select plate that guides the inserted medals to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout exit 24 side. 804, a medal pusher 805 that pushes the inserted medal to the medal payout outlet 24 side when the inserted medal is not a proper medal, and an upstream medal sensor (first) that detects the inserted medal on the upstream side of the medal rail 802. It includes a medal sensor) 806 and a downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807 that detects the inserted medal on the downstream side of the medal rail 802.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 has a medal guide (which forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the hopper device 51 when the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side by the select plate 804. (Not shown) and a cancel chute (not shown) that forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the medal payout outlet 24 when the medal is placed on the medal payout outlet 24 side by the select plate 804 can be attached and detached. It is attached.

The select plate 804 is driven by a solenoid (not shown) included in the selector 66. The select plate 804 moves to a guide position that guides the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is driven, but does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is not driven. Move to the discharge position (that is, guide to the medal payout exit 24 side). Specifically, when the solenoid is driven, the select plate 804 moves in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot 1 to guide the upper part of the medal, while when the solenoid is not driven, the select plate 804 moves toward the rear side of the pachi-slot 1 and guides the upper part of the medal. It is designed not to move forward and guide above the medal. The medal guide method using the select plate 804 is not limited to this, and for example, the guide position and the discharge position can be moved by using a mechanism that can move the pachi-slot machine 1 in the vertical direction. You may. That is, the select plate 804 has a guide position on the medal rail 802 that does not prevent the passing medal from moving toward the hopper device 51, and the passing medal moves toward the hopper device 51 by the solenoid or other drive source. Any mechanism can be adopted as long as it is a mechanism that hinders the movement and enables the transfer between the discharge position and the discharge position guided to the medal payout outlet 24 side.

For example, when the select plate 804 is moved to the guide position, the medal pusher 805 operates so as not to protrude in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the select plate 804 is not moved to the guide position (discharge position). In the case of (moving to), the pachi-slot machine 1 operates so as to project in the rearward direction. That is, when the medal pusher 805 is in a position where it does not protrude in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1, it becomes a guide position for guiding the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side, and when it is in a position where it protrudes in the rearward direction of the pachislot machine 1, it becomes a guide position. It is a discharge position that does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side (that is, guides it to the medal payout outlet 24 side).

The upstream medal sensor 806 and the downstream medal sensor 807 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting that a medal has passed. Each medal sensor is composed of, for example, a pair or a plurality of pairs of light emitting elements and a reflective sensor composed of a light receiving element, irradiates the medal with light from the light emitting element, and emits the reflected light reflected from the medal. The light receiving element detects the passage of the medal by receiving light. The configuration of the sensor can be changed as appropriate, and for example, a transmissive sensor or the like can be adopted. Further, the passage of medals may be detected only by the downstream medal sensor 807 without providing the upstream medal sensor 806. Further, specific control based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor will be described later.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b, which is a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 and below the reel display window 4 (see the figure below). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and the like. This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting to each of the second interface boards 302 for a testing machine is mounted. Examples of the various buttons and switches include the MAX bet button 15a, the 1-bet button 15b, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77 described later, the start switch 79, and the like.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. The set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the lower the degree of the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player. In this embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus combination described later, and the degree of the player's advantage can be changed. The higher the set value, the higher the AT or ART described later. It is also possible to change the degree of advantage of the player by increasing the winning probability of the lottery.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71 and the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal board 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, and a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, an auxiliary relay board 61, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and a second interface board 302 for a testing machine. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (throwing operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) is pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs (hereinafter, “first LED” to “1st LED” to display the number of medals inserted, which are lit corresponding to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as “the number of inserted medals”). An LED that lights a mark indicating that a medal can be inserted, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for replaying a game, etc., based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81 (referred to as "third LED"). Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights up, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light up, and three medals (game). (Number of startable sheets) When it is turned on, the first LED to the third LED are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1 (testing test). Since these relay boards are not mounted on the Pachislot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the tester and the tester. The various electronic components required to connect to the second interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by, for example, a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19 and a display unit 212 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projected member 212a constituting the display device 11 and another projected member having a curved display surface provided on the back side of the projected member 212a.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, image (video) for directing, audio (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 constituting the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The main control circuit 90 functions as a game control unit that controls game operations, and includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role ratio monitor (power supply means). (Not shown).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for a gaming machine. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (hereinafter, referred to as "main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes") specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be specified in the program. In the present embodiment, the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 is used to improve the processing efficiency and reduce the program capacity. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by the main control circuit described later. do.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power supply management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). Then, the power supply management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the "XSRST" terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 is a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means for outputting (power outage means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5 V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

The combination monitor (not shown) is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and the calculation circuit 107 described later performs a predetermined ratio calculation on the aggregated result regarding the game information aggregated by the main CPU 101 described later. , The result of the ratio calculation is displayed as the ratio information. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculations are performed, and the combination ratio monitor sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the results.

In the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor, "abbreviation" which is the type information indicating the type of the ratio information is displayed, and in the lower two digits, the "ratio" which is the ratio information corresponding to the type information is displayed. It is designed to be displayed. For example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "U" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "7U"). (When is displayed), the ART function that occupies the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is activated (that is, a stop operation that is advantageous for the player) as ratio information in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor. The ratio of the number of games (advantageous section ratio) of the advantageous section in which the procedure of is notified is displayed. Specifically, when the effective interval ratio is 10%, "1" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "0" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed. The advantageous section ratio may display the ratio of the number of games in which the AT function and the ART function are activated.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Y" is displayed. (When "6Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination monitor, as ratio information, the combination of the characters in the number of game media paid out during the specific total number of games (6000 times) is continuous. The actuating device (BB in the present embodiment; if a bonus continuous actuating device (MB) in which the second type special bonus (CB) is continuously actuated is mounted, it is included. The same shall apply hereinafter). The ratio of the number of game media to be paid out in operation (medium-time continuous combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time continuous combination ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) of the role ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation "Y"). (When "7Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the roles in the number of game media paid out during the specific total number of games (6000 times). A thing (BB in this embodiment. In addition to the above-mentioned MB, when the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB) is mounted alone, the above-mentioned second-class special accessory (CB) is alone. If it is installed, if it is equipped with a normal bonus (SB), all of them are included. The same shall apply hereinafter) and the ratio of the number of game media paid out (medium-time bonus ratio) ) Is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time bonus ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Abbreviation" (When "6A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, the number of consecutive characters to be paid out in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the actuating device (total consecutive combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total consecutive combination ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10th place) and "5" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1st place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Abbreviation" 7A ”), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the roles in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the object (total bonus item ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total bonus ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the main control circuit 90 directly includes the combination monitor is described as an example, but the display content of the combination monitor is controlled by the main control circuit 90, and the display content of the combination monitor 90 is controlled. It is sufficient if the display content can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and a configuration that the main control circuit 90 does not directly provide can be adopted. For example, the combination monitor may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display content via the game operation display board 81. Further, in this case, the role ratio monitor is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and one or more of them is used to display predetermined ratio information. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor, the advantageous section ratio, the medium-time continuous combination ratio, the medium-time bonus ratio, the total consecutive combination ratio, and the total bonus ratio are taken as examples. As described above, ratio information other than these may be displayable. For example, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio). , The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (medium time advantageous section acquisition ratio) , The ratio of the number of games in which the character continuous operation device is activated (medium-time continuous combination section ratio) to the specific total number of games (6000 times), the ratio of the specific total number of games (6000 times), The ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses have been activated (medium-time bonus section ratio), and the ratio of the number of games in which the continuous bonus actuation device has been activated (total continuous combination section) among the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are operated (total bonus section ratio), etc., among the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) can also be displayed by performing the predetermined ratio calculation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor, the predetermined total number of games is set to "175,000 times" and the specific total number of games is set to "6000 times". However, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, as a parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios described above, a predetermined total number of games may be set to "17,500 times" and a specific total number of games may be set to "3000 times". .. However, various types of gaming machines are installed and operated in game stores, and the optimum number of games for ratio calculation may differ. Therefore, the number of games for calculating the various ratios described above is described above. It is not limited to the ones that have been made, but can be changed as appropriate. In this case, even if the game store can arbitrarily set the number of games that can be the parameter (denominator) and the number of children (numerator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the ART function is not included in all the characters targeted in the medium-time bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio, but the operation of the ART function is a bonus. It is also possible to consider it as an operation of the above and calculate the ratio of the medium-time bonus and the total bonus ratio. In addition, it goes without saying that even if the information is other than the above, as long as it is useful information, the two values can be aggregated to perform the ratio calculation and the result of the ratio calculation can be displayed as the ratio information. not. Further, in the description of the role ratio monitor, the part described as "the operation of the ART function" may be included or excluded from the "operation of the AT function".

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101 (arithmetic processing unit), a main ROM 102 (first storage unit), a main RAM 103 (second storage unit), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, and the like. It has an arithmetic circuit 107, a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the microprocessor 91 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 to control the game operation in general. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion due to the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 described later.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 to the external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is transmitted by another component (for example, a timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when a "MUL" instruction is executed on a program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on the "MUL" instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 obtains a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard-latch random number, a random number register 1 for obtaining a 2-byte soft-latch random number, and a 1-byte soft-latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 2 to 7 of. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) of signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, power supply management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is also connected to any input port of PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and latches from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at the timing (on-edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. A signal is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power supply management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 issues an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101 has an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, and a timer based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Various interrupt processing such as update processing (see FIG. 79 described later) is performed.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-control means) mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 200 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 200 functions as an effect control unit that controls the effect operation, and is basically configured to include a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay board 87.

The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, the main board communication task for controlling the communication with the main control circuit 90 and the effect registration for extracting the random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and /. Alternatively, it is displayed on the sub display device 18. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data designated by the effect content.

<Various registers of the main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 10. Note that FIG. 10 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 101.

As the main register, the main CPU 101 includes an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as "A register"), a flag register F (flag register), a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as "B register"), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as "B register"). General-purpose register D (hereinafter referred to as "D register"), general-purpose register E (hereinafter referred to as "E register"), general-purpose register H (hereinafter referred to as "H register"), and general-purpose register L (hereinafter referred to as "H register"). , "L register"). Further, as sub-registers, the main CPU 101 includes an accumulator A', a flag register F', a general-purpose register B', a general-purpose register C', a general-purpose register D', a general-purpose register E', a general-purpose register H', and a general-purpose register L'. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of 1-byte registers.

Further, in the present embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as "BC register"), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as "DE register"). Further, in the present embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as "HL register").

As shown in FIG. 10, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing or the like is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, the bit 6 (D6) is set with data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the calculation result is “0” in the calculation result determination process. Specifically, when the calculation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the calculation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the determination process of the calculation result, the main CPU 101 makes a determination (YES / NO) with reference to the data “0” / “1” of the bit 6.

Further, the main CPU 101 has an expansion register Q (hereinafter referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of 1-byte registers. In this embodiment, as described in various processing flows described later, various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes for specifying an address using this Q register are provided in the program, and the instruction code of this instruction code is provided. By using it, the efficiency of processing and the capacity reduction of the main ROM 102 are realized. In various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes that specify an address using the Q register, the address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. Immediately after the reset of the main CPU 101, "F0H" is set as an initial value in the Q register. Further, in the "LDQ, n (8-bit data)" instruction using the Q register, the value of the Q register is changed by setting arbitrary 1-byte data in "n" and executing the instruction. Can be done.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes an interrupt page address register I and a memory refresh register R composed of 1-byte registers, and an index register IX and an index register IY composed of 2-byte registers. , Stack pointer SP and program counter PC as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11C. 11A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 11A, from the head (0000H) side of the address, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and the built-in register area. The XCS decode area is arranged at a predetermined address in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 11B, the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, and the security setting area from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102. In order, they are placed at predetermined addresses.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and various sub-control circuits 200 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player). Data for transmitting control commands (commands), etc.) are stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) consisting of the program area and the data area is required for control processing (process related to game performance) related to the game performance actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

Further, in the non-regulated area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the playability) that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, programs and data used in the pachislot 1 certification test (test firing test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing at the time of power failure and thumb check processing at power recovery, and fraud countermeasure programs. And the data required for it are stored in the non-standard area.

Further, in the program management area and the security setting area, various settings and management information related to the execution of the control program or the security function are stored. For example, setting and management information of the start address and end address (that is, data range) of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information of the number of addresses in the readable RAM area, WDT reset setting and management information, Interrupt setting and management information, read permission / non-permission setting and management information of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information related to activation and update method of the random number circuit 110, and security mode setting described later. And management information and the like are stored in the program management area and the security setting area. In the present embodiment, other settings and management information not related to the security function are stored in the program management area, and settings and management information related to the security function are stored in the security setting area. For example, these settings and management information may be stored as a single management area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 11C, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and the non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary) from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103. Storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program related to the game playability performed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of the predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, and a non-standard stack. In the present embodiment, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, such as a thumb check process, are executed using this non-standard RAM area.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are used for the game in the main ROM 102. It is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at an address different from the ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by such a player are performed using an out-of-specification RAM area arranged at an address different from the game RAM area in the main RAM 103. ..

In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-standard ROM area) where the program or the like cannot be arranged according to the conventional rule. can do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

<Security mode>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a security mode, which is a part of the security function of the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), will be described. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the security mode.

The security mode is, for example, an operating state in which the microprocessor 91 operates when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93. During this security mode, the startup of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area (that is, the main CPU 101 starts execution of the process at power-on (see FIG. 46 described later). Delay that). By starting the main CPU 101 through this security mode, the security of the microprocessor 91 is ensured, and the time required for the start control at the time of turning on the power is secured to stably start the main CPU 101.

In the present embodiment, for example, the reset controller 106 can delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the reset signal input when the power is turned on for a predetermined period, and the interrupt controller 112 can be used. It is also possible to delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the interrupt permission of the reset interrupt process (see FIG. 46 described later) at the time of turning on the power for a predetermined period. It is also possible for each controller to work together to delay the startup of the main CPU 101. Further, for example, a delay circuit may be provided in the microprocessor 91 (or in the reset controller 106 or the interrupt controller 112), and the delay circuit may delay the startup of the main CPU 101. That is, the configuration (security unit) that executes the security function in the microprocessor 91 can be appropriately modified and applied according to the specifications.

As shown in FIG. 12, the delay period in the security mode can be set to a fixed extension time (fixed period) and a random extension time (variable period). In the present embodiment, for example, by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 8 to which different fixed extension times are associated, one fixed extension from a plurality of fixed extension times is set. The time can be set, and by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 4 to which different random extension time ranges are associated, a plurality of random extension time ranges can be set. It is possible to set a range of one random extension time from the inside.

For example, when "mode 4" is selected as the fixed extension time and "mode 4" is selected as the random extension time, and these settings are stored in the security setting area, the microprocessor 91 is turned on for the pachislot 1. When the reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, first, the start of the main CPU 101 is delayed for about 4 seconds (4000 ms) as the fixed extension time, and then the random extension time is in the range of 0 to 500 ms. One extension time is randomly selected to delay the startup of the main CPU 101 for the selected time.

The range of the fixed extension time and the random extension time can be set as appropriate, but in the present embodiment, the range of the random extension time is set from the viewpoint of shortening the time until the setting can be changed when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on. Therefore, it is desirable to set "mode 1" in which the random extension time is always "0".

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, various gaming states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and their transition flows will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. Note that FIG. 13 is a transition flow diagram of the basic gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 14 shows whether or not the notification (AT / ART) function is activated (that is, the gaming section is a normal section). It is a transition flow diagram of the gaming state (distinguished from the advantageous section).

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) is provided as a type of bonus game. The BB is a continuous accessory actuating device having a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the gaming state based on the presence or absence of winning / operating (winning) of the bonus combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the main control circuit 90 wins / operates (wins) a bonus combination (internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later). ) Is present or absent, and three types of gaming states called "bonus non-winning state", "between flags state", and "bonus state" are managed.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is winning and the bonus is not activated.

Whether or not the bonus combination is won is managed based on the data stored in the hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later) and the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Will be done. Further, whether or not the bonus is activated (winning) is managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, in the gaming state in which the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state), the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Six types of states (hereinafter, referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT5 state") are provided from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state. The RT1 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT5 state is a medium probability that the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is medium. It is a game state that becomes. Further, the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state in the bonus non-winning state is any of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state in the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is based on the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof in the gaming state in which the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state). It also manages 6 types of states from RT0 state to RT5 state.

The RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, flags indicating six RT states of the RT0 state flag to the RT5 state flag are provided, and the RT state is managed by managing the on / off states of these flags by the main RAM 103. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag that is on as the current RT state. The RT0 state flag may not be provided, and when all the RT state flags are off, the main control circuit 90 may specify that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state), the bonus combination (the internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Then (“bonus winning” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state (RT5 state). Further, when the bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state (“bonus is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Here, as the bonus state, a BB1 gaming state (BB1 state), a BB2 gaming state (BB2 state), a BB3 gaming state (BB3 state), and a BB4 gaming state (BB4 state) are provided. The main control circuit 90 turns on the BB1 state flag, the BB2 state flag, the BB3 state flag, and the BB4 state flag stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later), which will be described later, as in the RT state. / Manage the bonus status according to the off status. Further, as will be described later, since the RB game state (RB state) is always in the BB1 to BB4 states, this is also the RB stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) described later. It is managed according to the on / off status of the status flag.

In the bonus non-winning state, the name "F_BB1" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination "C_red same color BB" is displayed on the effective line, the main control circuit 90 Shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB1 state. In the BB1 state, it is always in the RB state, and when a specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB1 state, the BB1 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name "F_BB2" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue same color BB" is displayed on the effective line, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB2 state. In the BB2 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB2 state, the BB2 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name "F_BB3" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination "C_red different color BB" is displayed on the effective line, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB3 state. In the BB3 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "165" or more are paid out in the BB3 state, the BB3 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name "F_BB4" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue different color BB" is displayed on the effective line, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB4 state. In the BB4 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "165" or more are paid out in the BB4 state, the BB4 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

In the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT1 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state to the RT1 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the effective line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state. Move to RT3 state.

In the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state to the RT3 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT0 transition rip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT0 transition rip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state. Move to the RT0 state.

In the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT3 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13, "RT1 transition item RT1 transition lip is established"), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT2 transition rip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT2 transition rip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state. Move to RT2 state. When the set value is changed, or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied ("setting change / initialization condition is satisfied" in FIG. 13), the game state is set as the initial state. Is in the RT0 state.

In the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13, "RT1 transition item RT1 transition lip is established"), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT1 state.

In the RT3 state, when a game is played for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, "8" games, that is, during eight games) ("8 game digestion" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit. 90 shifts the game state from the RT3 state to the RT0 state. The period during which the RT3 state continues can be set as appropriate. Further, the period during which the RT3 state continues may not be particularly specified. In this case, in the RT3 state, the internal winning combination in which the combination of symbols described later "S_RT0 transition lip" can be displayed on the effective line may be determined with a predetermined probability.

[Transition flow of game state considering whether or not the notification (AT / ART) function is activated]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not the function (AT / ART function) for notifying the stop operation advantageous to the player is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the above-mentioned bonus non-winning state, inter-flag state, and bonus state, but also the activated / non-activated state of the AT / ART function is managed as a gaming state. In the present embodiment, the section of the game in which the AT function is operating is referred to as "normal advantageous section", and the section of the game in which the ART function is operating is referred to as "advantageous section", and the AT function and the ART function are used. The section of the game in which none of the operations is performed is referred to as a "non-advantageous section" or a "normal section".

Further, in the present embodiment, when a bonus state is obtained in an advantageous section (including "normal advantageous section" and "advantageous section"), the bonus state is considered to be advantageous as a series of advantageous game sections for the player. It is included in the section, and the period during which the above-mentioned status indicator continues to light (notification period during the advantageous section) is counted, and the number of games for forcibly ending the advantageous section (continuation is restricted) is counted. (Regulatory monitoring period) (in this embodiment, "1500" games). However, as will be described later, when a bonus state is reached in the "non-advantageous section", the bonus state may shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state. The state shall be included in the period described above. In addition, when the bonus state is reached in the non-advantageous section, and the player does not shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state (when the "non-advantageous section" continues), the player Assuming that it is not a section of a series of advantageous games, the bonus state is not included in the advantageous section, and the bonus state is not included in the above-mentioned period. However, since the bonus state itself is an advantageous gaming state for the player, the bonus state is always an advantageous section regardless of whether or not it is a "normal advantageous section" or an "advantageous section" before and after that. It can be included and included in the period described above.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 90 has a "normal state" as a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section) and a "high accuracy 1 state" as a gaming state in a normal advantageous section. -"High accuracy 4 state" and "precursor state", "line battle ready state", "line battle state", "right acquisition lottery preparation state", "right acquisition lottery state", "right" as the game state of the advantageous section It manages the "acquisition state", "ending preparation state", "ending 1 state", and "ending 2 state".

(Game state of non-advantageous section (normal section))
The normal state, which is a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section), is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. When it is determined to shift to the normal advantageous section in the normal state (“normal advantageous section transition winning” in FIG. 14), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state to the normal advantageous section according to the determination trigger. Move to one of the gaming states. The details of the flow of the game in the normal state will be described later with reference to FIG. 33 described later.

In the present embodiment, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 33 described later) is won in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, any of the game states in the normal advantageous section (other than the high probability 4 state). It is usually advantageous to win an internal winning combination (other than "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including a bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. If it is decided to shift to the high-probability 4 state of the section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the line battle state of the advantageous section is entered. If it is decided that it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued for a predetermined period (32 games).

In addition, in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, when winning an internal winning combination (“F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”) including a bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between each set value, it is normal. It is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the normal state of the non-advantageous section continues after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination. Further, in the inter-flag state in the normal state, no matter which combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined to shift to the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal state of the non-advantageous section is changed to the gaming state of any of the normal advantageous sections, the above-mentioned notification period during the advantageous section is started (that is, the lighting of the state indicator is started. At the same time, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is started (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is started).

(Normally advantageous section game state)
Each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is a gaming state (AT) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (including the case where it has already been decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal state), the normal advantageous section has ended. In the case (in FIG. 14, “normal advantageous section end advantageous section transition winning”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to any of the advantageous section gaming states according to the determination trigger. In addition, when it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section and the normal advantageous section ends (in FIG. 14, "normal advantageous section end advantageous section transition non-winning"". ), The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the normal advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 described later.

In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 has a small push order (“F_upper left bell 1”, “F_upper left bell 2”, “F_upper middle bell 1”, “F_upper middle bell 1” described later). Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 2 ”,“ F_Middle Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Middle Left Bell 2 ”,“ F_middle middle bell 1 ”,“ F_middle middle bell 2 ”,“ F_middle right / left bell 1 ”,“ F_middle right / left bell 2 ”,“ F_middle right middle bell 1 ”,“ F_middle right middle bell 1 ”,“ F_middle right middle bell 1 ” Bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ” When any of the internal winning combinations of "Bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and it is decided to notify the information. , Information on the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later).

Further, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 performs push order replay (“F_RT0 medium replay 1” to “F_RT0 medium replay 6”, “F_RT1 medium replay 1” to “F_RT1 medium replay 6” described later. , "Internal winning combination of" F_RT2 medium replay 1 "to" F_RT2 medium replay 3 ") is determined as an internal winning combination, and whether or not to notify the player of advantageous stop operation information. Is not performed, and information on the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation capable of shifting to the RT state advantageous to the player or maintaining the advantageous RT state) is not notified (described later). See FIG. 45). In this sense, the RT function does not operate (except when the push order is accidentally answered correctly), and only the AT function operates (AT game state).

Here, in the present embodiment, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT3 state or the RT5 state (that is, during the 8 games after the RT3 transition to be described later is displayed, or when the state is between the flags). In), the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is usually performed until the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once. Therefore, even in the game state of the same normal advantageous section, if the RT state is different, the number of times the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed also changes, so that the profit of the player based on the push order also changes. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the normal advantageous section), the bonus state is set in the normal state. Similar to when (more specifically, when winning a bonus combination during a non-advantageous section), in the bonus state, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, the player gets the most medals). Information on stop operations that can be performed) is not notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any one of the push order small winning combination in the bonus state (internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Does not make a decision as to whether or not to notify.

In the present embodiment, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 34 described later) is won in the bonus non-winning state of each game state in the normal advantageous section, the game is played even between each game state in the normal advantageous section. The state transition is performed, and the period (number of games) in which the normally advantageous section continues is also changed. In addition, when winning the bonus combination, if it has not already been decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is advantageous. When it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the section and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued.

Here, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is other than the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. ), But also the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between each set value. Even if the winning is based on the above, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal advantageous section, if the bonus combination is won regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination including the bonus combination having a difference in the winning probability is determined as a common process in the normal advantageous section, Whether or not to shift to an advantageous section is decided. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the normally advantageous section is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the gaming state in the non-advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state in the normally advantageous section is in the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the status indicator is lit) and also in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period). It is in the state of counting the number of games of "1500" times, which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections. However, when the normal advantageous section ends without shifting to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is, the status indicator is turned off and turned off), and the above-mentioned The regulated monitoring period is terminated (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is terminated, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

(Game state of advantageous section)
Each gaming state in the advantageous section is a gaming state (ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and the gaming is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state and each gaming state in the normal advantageous section. It is a state. In each gaming state of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 basically performs a stop operation advantageous to the player when either the push order small combination or the push order replay described above is determined as the internal winning combination. Information (that is, information on a stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals and can shift to or maintain the advantageous RT state for the player) is notified (described later). See FIG. 45). In this sense, the ART function is activated (ART gaming state). In each gaming state of the advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends without extension (continuation) (including the case where the advantageous section described later is forcibly terminated) (“end of advantageous section” in FIG. 14). , The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section.

Here, in each gaming state of the advantageous section, as a result of the push order notification of the push order small winning combination and the push order replay described above, the RT2 state corresponds (maintains) as the basic RT state. ing. In addition, except for the RT4 state after the end of the bonus state, the RT3 state based on the display of the RT3 transition described later, and the RT0 state after the end of the RT3 state, each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is changed to each gaming state in the advantageous section. In the case of transition, in most cases, the RT state in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section corresponds to the RT1 state. Therefore, the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, which are the game states of the advantageous section, may shift to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state, respectively. When it is determined and the RT state is not the RT2 state, it is positioned as a preparatory state for raising the RT state to the RT2 state.

The main control circuit 90 basically changes the game state to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition lottery state when the RT state shifts to the RT2 state in the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, respectively. And shift to the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 44 described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the advantageous section), the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section are defined. Unlike this, in the bonus state, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any one of the push order small winning combination in the bonus state (internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Is always notified. Therefore, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section, the profit given to the player is larger than when the bonus state is set in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the advantageous section is more advantageous than each gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the advantageous section is during the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the state indicator is lit) and also during the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, a series). The number of games is being counted for "1500" times, which is the upper limit for the advantageous game section to continue. If the number of games played during the advantageous section (including during the bonus state) does not reach the upper limit of "1500" times and the advantageous section ends, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is,). Along with the end of the status indicator lighting and extinguishing, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period ends (that is, the count of the number of games of "1500" which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections is counted. It is finished and the counting result is initialized (cleared)). In addition, when the number of games played in the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500" times, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in the case of the bonus state, only the bonus state). In this case as well, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period is terminated (that is, the status indicator is terminated and turned off), and the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is terminated (that is, that is). , The counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is completed, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number of games played during the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaching the upper limit of "1500" times, for example, the advantageous section. Even if it is decided to continue each of the game states in (given the right to continue), or even if the remaining number of games of each game state in the advantageous section remains, they are After all are initialized (cleared), it shifts to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. Further, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated while the advantageous section is in the bonus state, the push order notification of the above-mentioned push order small winning combination in the bonus state is also terminated immediately. .. However, in this case, as an exception, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination described above may be performed until the bonus state ends. Further, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is not limited to "1500", and the value can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, basically, the number of games (number of games) is set as the period during which each gaming state corresponding to the above-mentioned normal advantageous section and advantageous section continues, or the period during which each gaming state is extended (continuing period). ), But the method of managing the period of each gaming state is not limited to this. For example, among the above-mentioned normal advantageous sections and each gaming state corresponding to the advantageous section, the period of one or more gaming states, the number of medals paid out during that period, and the number of medals inserted from the period can be determined. It may be managed by the reduced difference number (net increase number), or it is managed by the number of times (the number of notifications) that the notification that affects the payout of medals (that is, the notification when the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won) is performed. You may.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 22. The various data tables used in the various lottery performed in each game state related to the game property described with reference to FIG. 14 will be described later together with the description of each game property.

[Design layout table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 15). Refer to the symbol code table of)) and specify the correspondence with).

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, it is displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. In this embodiment, the symbols are "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "bell", "watermelon", "replay", and "blank". Nine kinds of symbols are used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the symbol "red 7" (symbol code 1), and the symbol "blue 7" (symbol code 2) is assigned. "00000010" is assigned as data. The symbol "BAR" (symbol code 3) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "cherry 1" (symbol code 4) is assigned "00000100" as data, and the symbol "cherry 2" (symbol 2) is assigned. "000000101" is assigned to the code 5) as data.

"00000011" is assigned as data to the symbol "bell" (symbol code 6). The symbol "watermelon" (symbol code 7) is assigned "00000011" as data, and the symbol "replay" (symbol code 8) is assigned "00001000" as data, and the symbol "blank" (symbol code 9) is assigned. ) Is assigned "000001001" as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 and 17 are internal lottery tables referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state. Further, FIG. 18 is an internal lottery table referred to in the bonus state.

The internal lottery table is provided for each game state (see FIG. 13), and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is defined for each set value (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus combination or small combination. This setting is changed, for example, by using the reset switch 76 and the setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 7).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) by the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 is assigned to each internal winning combination. Add in sequence at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, when the lottery result exceeds 65535 in the predetermined internal winning combination, it is determined that the internal winning combination has won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example of adding a lottery value to the extracted random number value to perform a lottery has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random number value. It may be determined whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than "0" (whether or not the lottery result is underflowed), and the winning / non-winning of the internal lottery may be determined.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the probability that the internal winning combination having a larger numerical value defined as the lottery value is determined is higher. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

In the internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state, as shown in FIG. 16, basically, the type and the winning probability of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of the RT state. Changes. For example, the replay combination related to the names "F_RT0 medium replay 1 (No. 40)" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6 (No. 45)" is not determined as an internal winning combination except in the RT0 state, and is internally in the RT0 state. It is decided as a winning role.

In FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" is an internal winning combination in which a bonus combination and a replay combination or a small combination are overlapped. For example, in "F_BB1 + F_confirmed rip (No. 1)", the bonus combination "F_BB1" and the replay combination "F_confirmed rip" are duplicated and won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination "F_BB1" is "BB01". (See FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) and the combination of symbols "REP01" to "REP09" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) corresponding to the replay combination "F_fixed lip" are allowed to be derived (winning). Is permitted) It is an internal winning role.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 60" is an internal winning combination that the replay combination wins. For example, in "F_maintenance rip (No. 40)", the replay combination "F_maintenance rip" is won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination "F_maintenance rip" is "REP02" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later). ) Is allowed to be derived (winning is allowed).

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 98" is an internal winning combination that the small combination wins. For example, in "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)", the small role "F_chance eye A1" wins, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role "F_chance eye A1" is "NML14", "NML22", "NML22", " It is an internal winning combination that allows the derivation of "NML26" and "NML30" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) (winning is permitted).

Although not shown, when "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)" to "F_chance eye B4 (No. 68)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "NZR01" (described later) will be described later. (See FIGS. 19 to 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR01" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT3 state (RT3 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not permitted except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "NZR01" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68".

Similarly, when "F_upper left bell 1 (No. 77)" to "F_lower right middle bell 2 (No. 98)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "NZR02" (described later) will be described later. Derivation of 19 to 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR02" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT1 state (RT1 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not allowed except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "NZR02" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98".

In the present embodiment, the bonus combination is not further determined in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), that is, in the state in which the bonus combination has already been determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, "0" is set for the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). ing. However, "No. 2" to "No. 10", "No. 12" so that the winning probability of the small winning combination does not change between the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state) and the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state). -The lottery value related to the small winning combination assigned in the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 38" is "No. 61" to "No. 68", "No. 68" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). 72 ”and“ No. 73 ”are added to the lottery value of the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68", "No. 72" and "No. 73" does not have a high winning probability in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), but is a bonus. The probability is the same between the gaming states other than the states.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, "No. 0" indicates "off" in which derivation of any of the specified combinations of symbols (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) is not permitted. The higher the "missing" allocation (lottery value), the more disadvantageous it is for the player. In the RT0 state and the RT2 state, "off" may not be determined. Further, in the RT5 state, the probability that "off" is determined is described as "22289/65536", but in reality, one of the bonus combinations has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). In that sense, there is no case where "off" is determined.

In FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal lottery table when the set value is “1” (setting 1) is described as an example, but “No. 21”, “No. 30”, and “No.” For the internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination shown in ".39" and "No. 74", a common lottery value is set among the set values. That is, they have the same winning probability. On the other hand, for the internal winning combinations shown in "No. 21", "No. 30", "No. 39" and "No. 74", between each set value (or a predetermined set value and a specific set value). Between)), different lottery values are set. That is, the winning probabilities are different (see (* 1), (* 2) and (* 3) in FIGS. 16 and 17).

Specifically, for example, in the internal winning combinations shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30", when the set value is "1", the lottery value of "22" is set respectively, whereas the lottery value is set. When the set value is "6", a lottery value of "77" is set respectively (that is, as the set value becomes higher, the lottery is done in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30". The value is increasing by "11"). Although not shown, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), as the lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30" increases, "No. 21" and "No. 30" indicate "No. 30". The lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 72" also increases.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 74", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively high, and the lottery value is set to increase as the set value becomes higher.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 39", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively low, and the lottery value is set to decrease as the set value becomes higher. This is to adjust the increase in the lottery value of the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21", "No. 30" and "No. 74". Therefore, for example, in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, the probability that "off" is determined does not change and "0" is maintained. It should be noted that these are examples in which the winning probabilities of specific internal winning combinations differ between the set values.

In FIG. 18, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 7" is an internal winning combination that the small winning combination wins, and when the winning combination is won, the corresponding symbol shown in FIG. 18 is used. Derivation of combinations is allowed (winning is allowed). In the present embodiment, the replay combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the RB state (that is, the BB1 to BB4 states), but one of the replay combinations shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 Alternatively, a plurality of replay combinations may be determined as internal winning combinations.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, a symbol combination table that defines combinations of symbols related to winning or the like in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, it is described by taking as an example that a symbol combination table is provided as data that prescribes a combination of a plurality of symbols, but the combination of symbols displayed on the main control circuit 90 side is identified. If possible, the data may be specified by other methods. For example, a combination of symbol codes may be defined so that the combination of symbols displayed by the combination can be identified.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the symbol combination table prescribes combinations of a plurality of symbols, and data indicating the types of combinations of these symbols is defined as a display combination (winning operation flag). There is. Further, the symbol combination table is composed of 9 bytes of data so as to correspond to the winning request flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later), and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later). At the same time, data indicating a different display combination (winning operation flag) is specified for each bit of each storage area.

In addition, in FIGS. 19 to 22, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. For example, the combination of "HZR01" is a combination of symbols whose left reel symbol is "cherry 1", middle reel symbol is "cherry 1", and right reel symbol is "cherry 1" (that is, "cherry 1-". A combination of "Cherry 1-Cherry 1") and the design of the left reel is "Cherry 2", the design of the middle reel is "Cherry 1", and the design of the right reel is "Cherry 1" (that is, "Cherry 2-"). It shows that "Cherry 1-Cherry 1") and is a combination of corresponding symbols.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR01" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT3 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT3 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR02" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT1 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT1 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "BB01", "BB02", "BB03" and "BB04" are combinations of symbols related to the bonus combination, and when each combination of symbols is displayed on the display valid line. , Activate the corresponding bonus state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP01" to "REP06" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is performed. Activate. The combination of the symbols of "REP01" can be referred to as "parallel rip" or "straight rip", and the combination of the symbols of "REP02" can be referred to as "normal rip", and the combination of the symbols of "REP03" can be referred to as "normal rip". The combination of the symbols can be referred to as "hit rip", the combination of the symbols of "REP04" can be referred to as "special rip", and the combination of the symbols of "REP05" can be referred to as "fake lip". , The combination of the symbols of "REP06" can be referred to as "BAR matching lip".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP07" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT1 state) to an RT0 state (“RT0 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP08" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for transitioning from a state (for example, RT0 state and RT2 state) to an RT1 state (“RT1 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP09" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT0 state) to an RT2 state (“RT2 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML01" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of the "NML01" symbols can be referred to as the "bell" symbol combination.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML02" to "NML13" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML02" to "NML13" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "batting order combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML14" to "NML30" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML14" to "NML30" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "chance combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML31" to "NML33" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, five cards are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML31" to "NML33" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "special role".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML34" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of the "NML34" symbols can be referred to as the "cross-down bell" symbol combination.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML35" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, five medals are paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML35" can be referred to as the combination of the symbols of "watermelon".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML36" and "NML37" are combinations of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight sheets are displayed. The medal will be paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML36" and "NML37" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACA".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML38" to "NML40" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, two sheets are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML38" to "NML40" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACB".

In this embodiment, an example is described in which data indicating one display combination (winning operation flag) includes a combination of a plurality of symbols, but one display combination (winning). It is also possible to configure the data so that only one symbol combination is assigned to the data indicating the operation flag).

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, and the like will be described.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a combination in which the symbol combinations displayed are different according to the player's stop operation order (pushing order), that is, a so-called “pushing order combination” (for example, the above-mentioned “pushing order small combination” or “pushing order”) "Sequential replay") will be provided. Since the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, there are a maximum of six stop operation orders (pushing order).

In FIGS. 23 and 24, it is indicated as "batting order 1" that the stop operation order (push order) is "left, middle, right", and the stop operation order (push order) is "left, right, middle". The order of "batting order 2" is shown as "batting order 2", the stop operation order (pushing order) is shown as "middle, left, right" order as "batting order 3", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is The order of "middle, right, left" is indicated as "batting order 4", and the order of stop operation (pushing order) is "right, left, middle" as "batting order 5", and the stop operation is performed. The order (pushing order) is "right, middle, left", which is indicated as "batting order 6".

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the "F_confirmed lip" is won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the pushing order combination. "Special lip" is established. In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, any of the other winning replay combinations may be established.

Here, "regardless of the timing of the stop operation" means that the effective lines are the "center line", the "top line", and the "bottom line", and the maximum number of sliding pieces is "4". It means that the corresponding symbols are arranged so that they can be stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, they are arranged within the range of 5 symbols). It is something to do. For example, in the left reel 3L, the symbol of "cherry 1" is stopped and displayed at a position where the stop is not displayed within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol positions "10" to "12" are in the middle stage. (When it is done), but if the stop operation is performed at that point, the symbol of "Cherry 2" is placed at the symbol position "13" so that the symbol of "Cherry 2" can be stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is determined, for example, the symbols "cherry 1" and "cherry 2" are allowed to be stopped and displayed as the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination. As a result, even if the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces as a whole, the combination of the symbols is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation". It can be said that it holds. Hereinafter, the same applies to other display combinations (winning operation flags) and the like. However, in the push order combination, the combination of symbols that are preferentially stopped and controlled varies based on the stop operation order. Therefore, even if the symbols are arranged as described above, the type of stop operation order is used. Depending on the case, the symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the valid line.

"F_maintenance rip" is not a push order, but if it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the winning "normal rips" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation. do.

"F_RT0 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, "RT2 transition" regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, "RT2 transition" regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, "RT2 transition" regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, "RT2 transition" regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, "RT2 transition" regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, "RT2 transition" regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT1 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip). When the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the stop control is performed so that the "fake lip" is stopped preferentially over the other "maintenance rips". That is, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "fake rip" is established, and if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing, another "maintenance rip" is established. This also applies to "F_RT1 medium replay 2" and "F_RT1 medium replay 3".

"F_RT1 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

In the present embodiment, when the "RT0 transition lip" is established, the "RT1 transition lip" may be established at the same time. In this case, the main control circuit 90 determines that the "RT0 transition lip" is established by "RT1". Judgment is prioritized over the establishment of "Transition Lip". That is, when the "RT0 transition rip" and the "RT1 transition rip" are established at the same time, it is determined that the "RT0 transition rip" is established and the RT state is shifted to the RT0 state, and the "RT1 transition rip" is established. I do not judge.

"F_RT2 middle replay 1" is a batting order, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition rip" (for example, "normal rip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance rip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition rip" (for example, "normal rip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance rip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 3" is a batting order, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition rip" (for example, "normal rip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance rip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

When "F_upper rip" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, "parallel rip" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel (it becomes the "upper rip").

When "F_middle rip 1" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, "parallel rip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is,). The "replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel (it becomes a "middle rip").

"F_middle rip 2" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" to "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle stage lip 2" is "Batting order 1" to "Batting order 4" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, "fake rip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If not, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 2" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

"F_middle-stage lip 3" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle stage lip 3" is "Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "BAR aligned rip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing is not right, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 3" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

When "F_lower rip" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, "parallel rip" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel).

When "F_hit lip" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "hit lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation (that is, "" The "replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle row of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, but it is established so that it is not displayed in the middle row on the right reel 3R).

"F_JAC1_1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the "JACA" medals will be established and 15 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

Since "Bell" and "JACA" are a combination of symbols in which 8 medals are paid out, if they are established at the same time as described above, "8 + 8 = 16" medals are originally paid out. However, in this embodiment, the upper limit of medals that can be paid out in one game is set as "15", and even if more than 15 medals are won, 15 medals are paid. I try to put it out. This also applies to "F_JAC1_2" to "F_JAC1_6".

"F_JAC1_2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the "JACA" medals will be established and 15 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the "JACA" medals will be established and 15 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the "JACA" medals will be established and 15 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the "JACA" medals will be established and 15 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the "JACA" medals will be established and 15 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the push order is correct (when the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), the "bell" and the "JACA" are duplicated and won a prize. By doing so, 15 medals are paid out, but the number of medals to be paid out is not limited to this, for example, the number of medals to be paid out of "JACA" is set to "15", and if the pushing order is correct, the prize is won. If any of the above "JACA" is established, 15 medals may be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the push order is not correct in the RB state (when the stop operation is not performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), a plurality of "JACBs" are duplicated. By winning a prize, 6 medals (2 x 3 lines) are paid out, but it is not limited to this, for example, the number of "JACB" medals to be paid out is set as "6", and the pushing order is set. If the answer is not correct, six medals may be paid out if any of the winning "JACB" is established.

"F_JAC2" is not a push order, but when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, it is either a "bell" or a winning "JACA" regardless of the stop operation order or the timing of the stop operation. Is established and 15 medals are paid out. Similarly, for example, the number of medals to be paid out for "JACA" is set to "15", and 15 medals are paid out when any of the winning "JACA" is established. You may do it.

When "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning roles instead of push order, the timing of the stop operation is If the timing is appropriate, the "chance role" will be missed and the "RT3 transition" will be displayed on the valid line. In this case, there is no medal payout, but there is a possibility that the RT state will shift to the RT3 state, so it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation that misses the "chance role" and displays the "RT3 transition". Is likely to be. Here, in that sense, it is explained that it is the timing of the "appropriate" stop operation that the "chance role" is missed. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one of the winning "chance roles" will be established and one medal will be paid out, but the RT state will not shift to the RT3 state. ..

Here, when any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. Whether or not the timing is correct is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation at the time of the third stop operation. Specifically, 3/4 of the timings of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation are set as appropriate timings, and when the stop operation is performed at the timings, the "RT3 transition" is set. When it is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/4 timing, the "chance combination" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. As a general rule, the timing of such a stop operation is such that at least a part is different between "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4". Includes what has become. Therefore, it is possible to make the appropriate timing different depending on which internal winning combination is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the stop operation.

In the present embodiment, when "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning combinations, depending on the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, it is assumed that the "RT3 transition" or "chance role" is established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, the "RT3 transition" is established, and if the stop operation is not performed in the correct push order, the "chance combination" is established. May be good. Further, the "RT3 transition" may be established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may be defined as a combination of symbols for which medals are paid out (for example, one medal is paid out).

"F_weak rare combination A" and "F_weak rare combination B" are won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined instead of the pushing order combination. One of the "chance roles" is established and one medal is paid out. As with "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4", the "chance role" may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. You may do so. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, when any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. There are cases where "chance role" is displayed without "chance role" and cases where "chance role" is displayed when either "F_weak rare role A" or "F_weak rare role B" is won. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of the bonus combination winning combination and the expectation of RT3 transition depending on the internal winning combination and the stop operation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are determined not as push order but as internal winning combination, "watermelon" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation. One medal will be paid out. It should be noted that the "watermelon" may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When the "F_fixed combination" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, all the winning "special combinations" are established regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation (that is,). , "S_Special Role 1", "C_Special Role 2" and "S_Special Role 3" are displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 15 medals are paid out. For example, even if the number of medals to be paid out for the "special role" is set to "15" and one of the winning "special roles" is established, 15 medals will be paid out. good.

When the "F_special bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, a "crossdown bell" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, and eight medals are awarded. It will be paid out.

When the "F_upper common bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol will be displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals will be paid out.

When the "F_middle stage common bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol will be displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals will be paid out.

In this embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the "bell" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, the "bell" symbol is each reel. (It becomes the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom), and eight medals are paid out. For example, the internal winning combination of "F_lower common bell" is not provided, but the inside of this "F_lower common bell". It is also possible to provide a winning combination and configure the winning combination to be won with a predetermined probability in a gaming state other than the bonus state.

"F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one sheet is used. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right / left bell 1" and "F_upper right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In this embodiment, "Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2" (that is, the first stop on the left) are the correct answers for the "upper bell" when the batting order is correct. "F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" where "left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" and "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" (that is, the first stop in the middle) are correct answers. "F_Upper right and left bell 1" and "F_Upper right and left bell 2" where "Batting order 5" is correct, and "F_Upper right and middle bell 1" and "F_Upper right and middle bell" where "Batting order 6" is correct. 2 "and are provided. That is, it is stipulated that the correct push order is 4 (4 choices) out of the maximum 6 push orders (6 choices), but this is the correct push order in the push order small winning combination. This is an example of the order, and the correct push order pattern (number of choices) is not limited to this.

For example, it may be specified that the correct push order is 6 ways (6 choices) or 3 ways (3 choices). In the case of 3 ways (3 choices), the left 1st stop ("Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2"), the middle 1st stop ("Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4"), and the right 1st stop ("Batting order 3") The internal winning combination related to the "upper bell" may be configured so that either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6") is in the correct pushing order. The same applies to the internal winning combination related to the above-mentioned "RT0 transition lip" to "RT2 transition lip", the internal winning combination related to the "middle stage bell" and the internal winning combination related to the "lower stage bell" shown below. That is, in the push order combination, the correct push order pattern (choice number) can be appropriately set, and the pattern (choice number) is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

"F_middle left bell 1" and "F_middle left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one sheet is used. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle bell 1" and "F_middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right / left bell 1" and "F_middle right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right middle bell 1" and "F_middle right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, a "bell" is established at the center line (that is, a "middle bell" in which the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower middle bell 1" and "F_lower middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right and left bell 1" and "F_lower right and left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right middle bell 1" and "F_lower right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In this embodiment, any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order. If not, whether or not the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation at the time of the third stop operation. Specifically, half of the timing of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation is set as an appropriate timing, and if the stop operation is performed at that timing, the winning operation is ". When any one of the "batting order combinations" is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/2 timing, the "RT1 transition" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and 8 pieces. Medal will be paid out. Further, when any one of "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" is determined as an internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. Further, when any one of "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as an internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. ..

That is, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the push order small combination is no longer the push order combination (the push order combination does not matter). However, it is not always necessary to configure it in this way, and even in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out if the batting order is correct as described above (“upper row”). "Bell", "Middle bell" or "Lower bell") is stopped and displayed, and if the push order is not the correct answer, one medal will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the omission may occur. In this case, even if the "RT1 transition" is displayed, the gaming state does not shift to the RT1 state, so that the "RT1 transition" may not be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination or the small combination and the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination (including the case where the bonus combination is carried over), the replay combination or the small combination is more than the bonus combination. Although the stop control for preferentially establishing the above is performed, the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination over the replay combination or the small combination may be performed.

Here, the reel stop control (method for determining the stop symbol position) in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the present embodiment, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel stops within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value obtained corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position where the rotation of the reel stops (hereinafter, referred to as "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel is started (hereinafter, referred to as "stop start position").

That is, the number of slip pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the reel display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

With reference to a stop table (not shown), the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel. In the present embodiment, when an appropriate number of slip pieces exists based on the number of slip pieces acquired based on the stop table (hereinafter referred to as “slip piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table (not shown) is referred to. And change the number of sliding pieces. Then, the slip piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of slip pieces.

In the reel stop control of the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table (not shown). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces based on the priority order, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the symbol combination that allows the stop display by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

[Hit request flag storage area and winning operation flag storage area]
First, with reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) will be described. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area (flag data storage area, winning flag data storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (winning flag data storage area) have the same configuration.

In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area is composed of hit request storage areas 1 to 9 represented by 1 byte of data, and the winning operation flag storage area is represented by 1 byte of data. It is composed of storage areas 1 to 9. The data stored in each storage area of the winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 25, but in FIG. 25, for convenience of explanation, each data is stored. "Combination" indicating the symbol combination of each reel associated with the bit of the storage area (in the figure, the symbol of the left reel 3L, the symbol of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol of the right reel 3R are described in this order), and the symbol thereof. The contents (see FIGS. 19 to 22) are also described.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the hit request flag storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has won the internal winning. Further, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the winning operation storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the display combination (winning operation flag) corresponding to the predetermined bit has won a prize. That is, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of internal winning combinations corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the valid line.

The winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area include those to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area, as described above. , One symbol combination may be assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area.

[Carryover storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the present embodiment, the carry-over combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" or "F_BB4" is determined, the internal winning combination (BB combination) is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as a carry-over combination. .. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the hit request storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 2-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit in the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the operation of the bonus state or the RT state corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game state is the BB1 state. Further, for example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2, it indicates that the game state is the RT3 state.

[Activity stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The press order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte.

In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, middle, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 30. In the present embodiment, the symbol code storage area is composed of symbol code storage areas 1 to 9 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively. The symbol code storage area has the same configuration as the winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25).

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be stopped on the valid line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination (winning operation flag) is stored in the symbol code storage areas 1 to 9.

[Relationship between internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number]
In the various game states related to the above-mentioned game playability, various data tables are referred to in various lottery by the main control circuit 90, but as a parameter used at this time, in this embodiment, not only the internal winning combination but also the internal winning combination is supported. Each parameter with a different name (hereinafter referred to as "lottery number") is also used. The lottery numbers are grouped by grouping the internal winning roles that play the same role (whether the winning combination is a lottery target or the winning probability, etc.) and assigning the same lottery number in various lottery related to playability by the main control circuit 90. It is information for making it identifiable. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17), and the lottery number. Since various data tables may be provided for each, the amount of data can be compressed, and it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

Further, in the present embodiment, for the internal winning combination, each parameter (hereinafter, referred to as “winning combination number”) having another name for identifying the internal winning combination in the unit game of this time is also used on the sub-control circuit 200 side. The winning combination number is a grouping of at least a part of the internal winning combination according to the gaming state (more specifically, whether it is a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section). This is information for making the group recognizable by assigning the same winning combination number. As a result, in the present embodiment, unique information for identifying each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) is provided. Since it is not necessary to transmit to the sub-control circuit 200 side, the amount of data can be compressed, the control load can be reduced, and appropriate information can be transmitted according to the gaming state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number will be described. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing an example of the basic correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number.

As shown in FIG. 31, the internal winning combination ("No. 1" to "No. 38" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are won at the same time (including the bonus combination) is The lottery number "13" is assigned to the indicated internal winning combination), except for "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities among the set values. Further, a lottery number "0" is assigned to "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2".

In this embodiment, the non-advantageous section (“normal” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) and the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section (“advantageous” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) are used. Although the lottery numbers are not different in the above, for example, when different lottery or processing is performed between "normal" and "advantageous", different lottery numbers can be assigned between "normal" and "advantageous". For example, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" are won, ART lottery is not performed and it is not decided to shift to the normal advantageous section, but in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is not decided. , "F_BB3 + F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_Watermelon 2" are also drawn in the same way as the internal winning combination including other bonus combinations. Therefore, in "normal", the lottery number is assigned as described above. , In "advantage", a common lottery number "13" may be assigned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, in the internal winning combination including the bonus combination, the winning combination numbers "28" to "41" are selected according to the type of the winning combination and the type of the replay combination or the small winning combination. One of the winning combination numbers is assigned. As a result, on the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the type of the winning bonus combination and the type of the winning replay combination or small combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and "No." shown in FIG. 18 A lottery number of any one of "0" to "12" is assigned to each of the internal winning combinations indicated by ".1" to "No. 7").

Here, for example, "F_RT0 middle replay 1" to "F_RT0 middle replay 6" and "F_RT2 middle" that win in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, which are game states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. The same lottery number "1" is assigned to "Replay 1" to "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3". Further, for example, in the RT state other than the RT5 state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 state, and "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4" which shifts from the non-advantageous section to the normal advantageous section. Is assigned the same lottery number "6".

Further, for example, the same lottery number "10" is used for "F_upper common bell" and "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" where the same "upper bell" may be displayed. The same lottery number "11" is assigned to "F_middle row common bell" and "F_middle row left bell 1" to "F_middle row right middle bell 2" that are assigned and may display the same "middle row bell". The same lottery number "12" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" where the same "lower bell" may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (internal winning combination shown by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and "No." shown in FIG. 18 For the internal winning combination indicated by ".1" to "No. 7"), any winning combination number of "0" to "27" is assigned in "normal" or "advantageous", respectively.

Here, focusing on the winning combination numbers assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2", the same winning combination number "22" is assigned to each in "normal". On the other hand, in "advantage", the winning combination number "23" is assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2", and "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" are assigned. The difference is that the winning combination number "24" is assigned to "2", and the winning combination number "25" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2".

That is, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 35 described later), when the internal winning combination is won, the “bell” symbol is lined up in the middle of each reel (“middle bell”). When the "bell" symbol is lined up on the upper row of each reel (when the "upper bell" is established), and when the "bell" symbol is lined up on the lower row of each reel ("lower bell"). The number of medals paid out is the same in both cases), but the degree of continuation of the line battle state may fluctuate. , "F_Upper left bell 1"-"F_Upper right middle bell 2", "F_Middle left bell 1"-"F_Middle right middle bell 2", "F_Lower middle bell 1"-"F_Lower right middle bell 2" By assigning different winning numbers to "Bell 2", there is a possibility that the "Bell" symbol will be lined up on any effective line before the symbol stop display (before the stop operation) on the sub-control circuit 200 side. In the line battle state, it is possible to perform a production with a different degree of expectation based on the receipt of this winning combination number. An example of the effect in the line battle state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41 described later.

From the same viewpoint, for example, "F_upper rip", "F_middle rip 1" to "F_middle rip 3", and "F_lower rip" are assigned the same winning combination number in "normal". , In "advantage", different winning combination numbers may be assigned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning combination number is set in the communication parameter of the start command as information regarding the internal winning combination by the main control circuit 90, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later. Information corresponding to navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) is set in the communication parameter of the start command (or may be another command) and transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. However, the mode in which the sub-control circuit 200 side transmits information that can recognize the internal winning combination or navigation data is not limited to this.

For example, for "F_RT0 medium replay 1" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT1 medium replay 1" to "F_RT1 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT2 medium replay 1" to "F_RT2 medium replay 3", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. That is, regarding the push order replay, in each game state (advantageous section) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination, which is advantageous to the player. In each gaming state (non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation cannot be notified, the winning combination number may be transmitted as information that cannot be specified by the internal winning combination.

This also applies to the push order small role. In this case, the same winning combination number may be assigned in the non-advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers may be assigned in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. Then, regarding the assignment of the winning combination number in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, for example, which effective line the symbol of "bell" may be displayed on, and the type of stop operation advantageous to the player The winning combination number may be further subdivided and assigned so that both can be identified.

In this way, for example, in each game state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified of a push order small combination or a push order replay, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination. In each game state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified, if the winning combination number is transmitted as information that cannot be specified by the internal winning combination, the navigation data described later (FIG. 45 described later) can be transmitted. It may not be necessary to transmit the information corresponding to (see) to the sub-control circuit 200. In this case, it is possible to omit the process of transmitting the information corresponding to the navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) to the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

In addition, in FIG. 32, as an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number, it is described that the presence or absence of the winning (carry-over) of the bonus combination is not considered, but the bonus combination is carried over. The correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number may be changed depending on whether or not the winning combination is used. For example, in the inter-flag state, various lottery related to playability is basically not performed. Therefore, in the inter-flag state, all the lottery numbers may be assigned to "0".

<Playability in non-advantageous section (normal state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section (normal state) will be described. Note that FIG. 33 shows an outline of the gaming state that is transitioned when each internal winning combination shown in the figure is won in the normal state.

(At the time of winning the role of weak rare)
If a weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A” and “F_weak rare role B”) is won in a non-advantageous section and a bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state with high accuracy 1. Along with shifting to the state (normal advantageous section), the "9" game is set during the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, during at least nine games from the next game, the state is controlled to a high accuracy 1 state from the next game.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state. , The main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the high accuracy 2 state (normal advantageous section), and sets the "9" game in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high accuracy 2 state is controlled from the next game to at least 9 games.

At this time, as a result of the player's stop operation, the "RT3 transition" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, and the "RT3 transition" is not displayed and the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state ( That is, there is a case where the RT state other than the RT3 state continues). In each case, there is no change in shifting to the high accuracy 2 state, but it is advantageous for the player that the RT state is the RT3 state. This point will be described in detail later.

In addition, the chance eye is an internal winning combination that can be won in duplicate with the bonus combination, but if it is winning in combination with the bonus combination, the processing related to the bonus combination (see "When winning the bonus combination" described later). ) Is prioritized, so control to shift to the high accuracy 2 state is not performed.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs an ART lottery. Specifically, for example, with a probability of 8/256, it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section (that is, the ART winning is determined), 248 /. With a probability of 256, it is usually determined to shift to the high probability 3 state of the advantageous section, but not to the advantageous section (that is, to determine the ART non-winning). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section.

In both cases where the ART winning is determined and the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 determines the game period (precursor period) of the normally advantageous section to be transferred based on the watermelon 1 winning. Lottery is done. Specifically, for example, the precursor period of any one of the precursor period "9" to "16" games is determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the precursor period "9" game is determined, the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section, and when the precursor period "16" game is determined, the game period of the normal advantageous section is determined. The "16" game is set in. In this case, the number of one game may be determined with different probabilities depending on whether the transition destination is the present precursor state or the high-accuracy 3 state. For example, in the case of shifting to the present precursor state, the lottery probability can be set so that a relatively long precursor period can be easily determined as compared with the case of shifting to the high probability 3 state.

In this way, when the watermelon 1 is won, if the ART win is determined, it is controlled to the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section during at least the number of games determined by the lottery for the precursor period from the next game, and the present precursor state. After the end of, it is controlled to the ending preparation state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 34 described later). Further, if the ART non-winning is determined, it is controlled to the high accuracy 3 state of the normal advantageous section from the next game to at least the number of games determined by the lottery during the precursory period.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs an ART lottery. If "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery will not be performed. That is, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the state between the flags of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is reached without shifting to each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. After that, it becomes a bonus state in the non-advantageous section (normal state), and when the bonus state ends, it returns to the bonus non-winning state in the non-advantageous section (normal state).

In the ART lottery at the time of winning the bonus role, specifically, for example, with a probability of 64/256, it is possible to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state. It is decided (that is, the ART winning is decided), and it is decided that the probability of 192/256 is to shift to the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (that is, the ART non-winning is decided). do). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the ending preparation state of the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

In either case, when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 first shifts the gaming state to the high-accuracy 4 state (normally advantageous section). As a result, it is controlled to the high accuracy 4 state from the next game. The period during which the high-accuracy 4 state continues in the inter-flag state may be until the transition from the inter-flag state to the bonus state (until the carried-over bonus combination is established), or after the high-accuracy 4 state is established. It may be during the "9" game (that is, the same as the high accuracy 1 state and the high accuracy 2 state). Further, when the ART winning is determined, the inter-flag state may be shifted to the present precursor state (normally advantageous section) instead of the high accuracy 4 state. Further, in the inter-flag state, various lottery as the high-accuracy 4 state is not actually performed. Therefore, this inter-flag state is usually an advantageous section, but the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 states and this precursor. It may be defined as a state different from the state (for example, "normal advantageous state between flags"), and when a bonus combination is won, the state may be shifted to the normal advantageous state between flags (normal advantageous section).

Then, after the bonus state is reached, when the bonus state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section if the ART winning is determined, and if the ART non-winning is determined. , The high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued, and the "32" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, it is controlled to a high accuracy 4 state for at least 32 games after the end of the bonus.

<Playability during normal advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 34 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, the high accuracy 1 state that is transferred based on winning the weak rare role, and the high accuracy that is transferred based on winning the chance. It has been decided to move to 2 states, 3 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the watermelon 1, 4 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the bonus combination, and an advantageous section (ART). Has this precursory state.

First, the main CPU 101 is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) or the bonus state, and is in the bonus non-winning state and is in the present precursor state (that is, when it has already been determined to shift to the advantageous section). ), The ART transitionable state lottery is performed for each unit game. In this ART shiftable state lottery, it is determined whether or not it is a state (ART shiftable state) in which it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when the bonus combination is won in the normal advantageous section. In this ART transitionable state lottery, if it is decided to be in the ART transitionable state lottery (if the ART transitionable state lottery is won) and the bonus combination is won, it is based on the bonus combination. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, and it is not decided to make it into the ART transitionable state (when the ART transitionable state lottery has not been won), and the bonus combination is won. Is determined not to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and to continue the normal advantageous section (more specifically, the high probability 4 state).

In the ART transitionable state lottery, specifically, for example, in the case of high accuracy 1 state and high accuracy 2 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 64/256 (winning to the ART transitionable state). , 192/256 probability of not setting the ART transitionable state (not winning the ART transitionable state). Further, for example, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state and the high accuracy 4 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 128/256 (winning to the ART transitionable state), and the ART transition is performed with a probability of 128/256. Do not set the possible state (not win the ART transitionable state). The winning probability of the ART transitionable state is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the winning probability to increase in the order of high accuracy 1 state, high accuracy 2 state, high accuracy 3 state, and high accuracy 4 state, or simply make the winning probability different in each gaming state. It can also be set to.

In addition, the ART transitionable state lottery is performed for each unit game, but once the ART transitionable state is set in the normal advantageous section, the lottery is performed until the normal advantageous section ends. It is also possible to maintain the ART transitionable state. In this case, once the ART transitionable state is set, it is not necessary to perform the ART transitionable state lottery until the end of the normally advantageous section thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of performing each unit game, at the start of the unit game, before determining whether or not the bonus combination has been won, first, whether or not the unit game can be transferred to ART is determined. The lottery may be performed, and then it may be determined whether or not the bonus combination has been won in the unit game.

Further, in the non-advantageous section, if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. However, in the normal advantageous section, even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, if it is in the ART transitionable state, it is based on the bonus combination. It is decided to move to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs control processing such as transition between states. In this inter-state transition control process, based on the internal winning combination, the transition control of each gaming state within the normal advantageous section is performed, and the game period of the normal advantageous section is reset according to a predetermined condition. conduct. The details of the control process such as transition between states will be described in detail below.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1"-"F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1"-"F_chance eye B4") is won when it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won. If the current state is the high-accuracy 1 state or the high-accuracy 2 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the main CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy 2 state and plays a "9" game during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. For example, if a player wins a chance when playing 5 games in a high-accuracy 1 state (9 games), the "9" game is reset, which is substantially a normal advantageous section. The game period will be extended by 5 games.

Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 3 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the "9" game is reset in the game period of the normal advantageous section. Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 4 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the number of remaining games in the game period of the current normal advantageous section is 8 games or less, the game period of the normal advantageous section is ". 9 ”Reset the game. That is, the game period of the normal advantageous section is appropriately extended based on the winning of the chance.

In the above, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset even if the player wins the chance. In the RT3 state, the winning probability of the replay role advantageous to the player is set. Although it is a game state that has been played, it is basically a game state that continues only for 8 games, and as will be described later, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, as in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state), Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed without limitation, the end of the normal advantageous section and the end of the RT3 state are linked, and the player's expectation for the bonus winning combination even in the RT3 state. This is so as not to spoil the feeling.

However, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, the game period of the normal advantageous section is set so that the end of the normal advantageous section is always one game later than the end of the RT3 state. That is, the game period of the normally advantageous section is set to be at least longer than the game period (8 games) in the RT3 state. In the present embodiment, when the normal advantageous section is started, the lighting of the status indicator is started, and when the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section, the lighting is continued, while the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section. If not, the lighting usually ends when the advantageous section ends.

Therefore, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, when the same expectation effect (effect of making the player expect the bonus winning combination or the ART winning) is performed, the normal advantageous section and RT3 If the game ends in the same state as the state, the lighting of the state indicator may end during the execution of the expectation effect. In this case, the player will be recognized as non-winning before the result is finally notified by the expectation effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section and the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same expectation effect is executed for eight games, and the expectation effect is finally achieved in the eighth game. Although we are trying to notify the correctness of the game, by continuing the advantageous section for one game after that, it is not possible to recognize the result depending on the lighting mode of the status indicator, and the player's interest is maintained. Is possible.

Further, in the normal advantageous section, even when the RT3 state ends, the remaining period (for example, between one game) is still the normal advantageous section, so it is usually advantageous depending on the type of the internal winning combination here. Since the section may be extended, for example, even if it is notified that the bonus role has not been won in the expectation production, the player usually wishes to extend the advantageous section and continues the game. I think. In this sense as well, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player.

The expected effect that can be executed may be, for example, a continuous effect by the image displayed on the display device 11, or a continuous effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). There may be. Further, it is not always necessary to be a continuous production, and any production may be used as long as it is performed to raise the expectation of the player. For example, in the predetermined number of times (for example, the eighth game) of the game in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the success or failure may be notified. In this case, the number of games in which the predetermined number of games is played may be arbitrarily determined within the range not exceeding 8 games, or by lottery.

Further, regardless of the RT state, the above-mentioned expectation effect may be performed in the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, the period during which the expectation effect can be executed may be the same as the RT3 state or the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, or may be executed over a longer period.

In addition, when the current state is the present precursor state and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state (that is, when the "RT3 transition" is displayed), the "8" game is played during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. In this case, when the normal advantageous section ends, the section shifts to the advantageous section. Therefore, by completely linking the end of the RT3 state and the end of the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section more advantageous to the player (without leaving the normal advantageous section). Priority is given to the transition to. Further, in this case, if the above-mentioned expectation effect has already been performed, the expectation effect may be performed as it is until the end, or a new expectation effect may be performed again over the eight games. You may be asked. Further, the expectation effect may be extended based on the shift of the RT state to the RT3 state.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
If the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 must be in the present precursor state (that is, the ART winning state has not been determined yet). B), ART lottery will be conducted in the same way as in the non-advantageous section.

Then, if the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 3 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART is not won, the main CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy 3 state. Normally, the game period of the advantageous section is not reset. In addition, if the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART is won, this precursor state is set and the number of remaining games in the RT3 state is reached. The number of games is reset to the normal game period of the advantageous section.

Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 1 or high accuracy 2 state, the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the ART is not won, the high accuracy 3 state is set, and the above-mentioned precursor period lottery is performed again. Determine the game period of the normally advantageous section to be set. In addition, if the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 states, and the RT state is not the RT3 state but the ART win, this precursor state is set, and the high-accuracy 1 state and high-accuracy state are set. In the case of 2 states or 4 high accuracy states, the above-mentioned precursor period lottery is performed again to determine the game period of the normally advantageous section to be reset. In addition, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 has the current normal advantageous section ART. If it is not in the transitionable state, the high accuracy 4 state is set, and the "32" game is reset in the game period of the normal advantageous section in the high accuracy 4 state after the end of the bonus state. If the current normal advantageous section is in the ART transitionable state, the present precursor state is set, and the "0" game is reset to the game period of the normal advantageous section in the present precursor state after the end of the bonus state (that is,). Immediately after the end of the bonus state, shift to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section).

When the push order small combination is won in the normal advantageous section, the bonus non-winning state and the flag-to-flag state, the main CPU 101 notifies the push order of the push order small combination. Specifically, on the instruction monitor, the numerical value corresponding to the navigation data is displayed, and a command including information corresponding to the navigation data is transmitted so that the push order notification can be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Here, in the present embodiment, if the RT state is the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won, while the RT state is the RT3 until the end of the normal advantageous section. Except for the state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed only once during the normal advantageous section. When the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the upper limit of the push order notification is not limited to one time, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be "twice" or "three times".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won until the normal advantageous section ends. For example, the RT state is the RT state. After 8 games have been digested in the RT3 state, the RT3 state ends, but the normal advantageous section may continue. In this case, once the RT3 state is reached, the push order notification of the push order small combination may be continued until the end of the normal advantageous section even after the end of the RT3 state, or the RT3 state may be continued. In conjunction with the end of, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is also terminated, and only the normal advantageous section may be continued. That is, it is also possible to perform push order notification only during the period when the RT state is the RT3 state.

Further, for example, when the RT state is not the RT3 state, the transition to the normal advantageous section may occur, and the RT state may become the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section. In this case, if the push order notification has already been performed once, the upper limit number of times may be valid even in the subsequent RT3 state so that the push order notification is not performed, and the upper limit number of times is not performed in the subsequent RT3 state. May be disabled so that the push order notification is performed. Further, in this case, if the push order notification has not been performed even once, the push order notification may be performed only once by validating the upper limit number of times even in the subsequent RT3 state. In the RT3 state of, the upper limit number of times may be invalidated so that the push order notification is performed. The same applies to the case where the RT state shifts to the normal advantageous section when the RT state is not the RT5 state, and the RT state becomes the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section.

Assuming that the upper limit of the push order notification is once when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the RT state is the RT3 state or when the push order notification is performed twice or more in the normal advantageous section. It is confirmed that the state is RT5. In the present embodiment, since the chance eye can be won at the same time as the bonus combination, for example, in the non-advantageous section, the chance eye is won and the RT3 transition is not displayed and the normal advantageous section is entered. If so, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination has been won (that is, whether or not the RT5 state is the inter-flag state) when the first push order notification is performed. When the second push order notification is performed, it is confirmed that the player is not in the RT3 state, and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the bonus role has been won.

On the other hand, for example, when the RT3 transition is displayed and the transition is made to the normal advantageous section, whether or not the bonus combination is won in the number of push order notifications (that is, whether the RT5 state is the inter-flag state). Whether or not) is difficult to recognize, and for example, it is possible to recognize that the bonus role is won by the final production content of the above-mentioned expectation effect.

That is, the RT3 state has a high probability of winning the replay combination, and is, for example, a gaming state in which the RT state does not change even if the RT1 transition or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, and if it is a normal advantageous section, the number of times is increased. Since the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed without limit, it is possible to advance the game in the normal advantageous section more advantageously than playing the game in the normal advantageous section in another RT state, but on the other hand, it is normal. In the advantageous section, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the player has won the bonus role.

In the present embodiment, when a bonus combination is won during an advantageous section and a bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, information (pushing order) of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified in the bonus state. On the other hand, if the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed in the bonus state. Information (pushing order) is not notified. This is the same even when the bonus combination is won when the ART transition is possible in the normal advantageous section. In this case, although the interval shifts to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, the information (pushing order) of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified during the bonus state. The specific content of the push order notification will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 24, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, unlike the bonus non-winning state, the "upper bell" and the "middle stage" are irrespective of the stop operation order. "Bell" or "lower bell" is established and eight medals are paid out, but even on this premise, the normal advantageous section ends in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantageous section. Until, the push order notification similar to the bonus non-winning state is made. That is, in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same push order notification as in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section is sent regardless of whether or not the profit actually given by the push order changes at the time of winning the push order combination. It is supposed to be done. As described above, this is done from the viewpoint that it is difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus role is won, and the expectation is to be continued.

As described above, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, the number of medals to be paid out can be changed according to the stop operation order as in the bonus non-winning state. In this case, in the normal inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the advantageous section, there is a high possibility that the profit given by the push order notification will increase, so is it a bonus role? Not only can you raise your expectations about whether or not you will be granted, but you can also raise your expectations regarding the benefits that will be granted.

Further, when it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won, the main CPU 101 updates the game period of the normal advantageous section for each unit game. Specifically, whether or not the number of games during the game period of the normal advantageous section is subtracted by "1", and then the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted (that is, whether the subtraction result is "0"). To judge. In updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, the number of games is added by "1" for each unit game, and then whether or not the addition result reaches the number of games of the game period of the normal advantageous section. It may be determined whether or not the game period of the normally advantageous section has been exhausted by the determination of.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the game period of the normal advantageous section has not been exhausted (“period undigested” in FIG. 34), the normal advantageous section is continued and the bonus of the normal advantageous section is not won. The game in the state will be repeated.

In addition, as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section has been exhausted and it has not been decided to shift to the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period digestion ART non-winning". In "), the normal advantageous section is terminated and the non-advantageous section is shifted to the bonus non-winning state.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, even if the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed even once in the normal advantageous section ( That is, if the push order small combination is not won), the normally advantageous section may be continued until the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed once. By doing so, it is possible not only to guarantee that the player obtains the minimum profit in the normally advantageous section, but also, for example, until the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed after the period is exhausted. , If it becomes possible to shift to ART and win a bonus role, it will be possible to shift to an advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, so that the gameplay will be more diverse and the interest of the game will be improved. Can be done.

In addition, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the "digestion line battle win"), the normal advantageous section is terminated and the state is shifted to the line battle preparation state (bonus non-win state) of the advantageous section. In addition, since the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the line battle state of the advantageous section, the line battle preparation state is shifted as a preparation period until the transition to the RT2 state. However, if the RT2 state is accidentally set at the end of the normally advantageous section, the line battle state may be directly shifted to the line battle state without going through the line battle preparation state. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are gaming states having the highest winning probability of the replay combination (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set at the end of the normal advantageous section. If so (or if the RT3 state has ended and the RT0 state has been entered), the line battle ready state may be directly shifted to the line battle state.

Further, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the digestion ending 1 winning state), the normal advantageous section is terminated and the transition is made to the ending preparation state (bonus non-winning state) of the advantageous section. It should be noted that, when the advantageous section usually ends, the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section, until the transition to the RT2 state is performed. As a preparation period, it is made to shift to the ending preparation state, but if it is accidentally in the RT2 state at the end of the advantageous section, it is made to shift directly to the ending 1 state without going through the ending preparation state. You may. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are gaming states having the highest winning probability of the replay combination (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set at the end of the normal advantageous section. If so (or if the RT3 state has been shifted to the RT0 state), the ending 1 state may be directly shifted to without going through the ending preparation state.

<Summary of playability of non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section>
In the following, the main points of the playability in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section (including a part of the playability in the advantageous section) will be briefly described.

(1) The "chance eye" can be determined as an internal winning role at the same time as the bonus role.
(2) In the case of winning the "chance eye", if the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state becomes the RT5 state. In this case, if it is a non-advantageous section, it shifts to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high probability 4 state" or "normal advantageous state between flags").
(3) When the "chance eye" is won, the "RT3 transition" is displayed based on the fact that the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination at the same time and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. If so, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. In this case, regardless of whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed, if it is a non-advantageous section, it shifts to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 2 state").
(4) The normal advantageous section (for example, "high probability 2 state") that has been transferred by winning the "chance eye" is at least a longer period (for example, between 8 games) than the period during which the RT3 state continues (for example, 9). (Between games), it is possible to continue.

(5) Win a bonus combination in a non-advantageous section, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is determined, shift to the advantageous section (for example, "line battle ready state").
(6) When a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is not determined (if the ART non-winning is determined), a specific period (for example, if the ART non-winning is determined) (For 32 games), shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 4 state").
(7) If a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section, and if the bonus combination is a bonus combination with the same winning probability among a plurality of set values, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART). However, in the case of a bonus combination in which the winning probabilities differ among a plurality of set values, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).
(8) When a bonus combination is won in a normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is a bonus combination having the same winning probability among a plurality of set values, and a bonus combination having a different winning probability among a plurality of set values. In any case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).

(9) When the RT state is the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the normal advantageous section ends.
(10) When the RT state is the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the normal advantageous section ends.
(11) In the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is not the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed only a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
(12) When the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, but when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the push order notification of the push order small combination is not performed regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to control the normal advantageous section for at least 9 games, and when the ART winning combination is determined, the advantageous section. It is possible to shift the RT state to the RT3 state when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, and when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state is changed to RT5. It is possible to change to a state. In addition, it is possible to determine the "chance eye" and the bonus role as the internal winning role at the same time. Then, in the case of the RT3 state and the RT5 state, which are usually advantageous sections, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified about the push order small combination.

As a result, in the normal advantageous section, the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded will increase as compared with the non-advantageous section, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the bonus state will increase, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the normally advantageous section can be continued (9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the RT3 state can be continued (8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player regardless of whether or not the specific game state (RT3 state) ends, and thus the interest in the transition to the state advantageous to the player is further improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "chance eye" is a case where the "RT3 transition" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, an appropriate timing) and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of an internal winning combination in which "RT3 transition" is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, it is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination until the normal advantageous section ends. When the procedure of the stop operation is notified and the normal section is not in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Is to be notified.

As a result, when the "chance eye" is won, the degree of advantage and the content of the normal advantageous section are determined by whether or not the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed. Since it can be changed, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state based on the winning bonus combination in the non-advantageous section ends, if the ART winning is determined, the game is shifted to the advantageous section, and the ART winning is not determined. Is designed to shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, high accuracy 4 state) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the present embodiment, either a bonus combination in which the winning probability is the same among the plurality of set values or a bonus combination in which the winning probability is different among the plurality of set values when the game is in any of the normally advantageous sections. Even if you win, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, but if it is a non-advantageous section, it is advantageous if you win a bonus combination with different winning probabilities among multiple set values. It is not decided whether or not to shift to the section.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent gaming state (game section) can be made more diverse depending on the gaming state and its type when the bonus role is won, so that the interest regarding the transition of the state advantageous to the player is further. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the push order small combination, and even when the push order is controlled to the bonus state in the advantageous section, the push order is small. It is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the combination, but if the bonus state is controlled in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is performed. It is not possible to notify.

As a result, it is possible to provide a normal advantageous section, which is a gaming section in which the expectation of shifting to the advantageous section increases and the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded increases increases. It is possible to improve the interest, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is excessively agitated. It can also be suppressed.

<Playability during line battle>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41, the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 35 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section. Further, FIG. 36 shows an example of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102, which are various tables referred to at least in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state in the advantageous section. Further, FIGS. 37 to 41 show a display example of the display device 11 in order to explain an mode in which the degree of continuation of whether or not the line battle state is continued varies. In the present embodiment, the line battle state has an interval state, a battle state, and a continuous lottery state. Further, in the present embodiment, the line battle state is basically a gaming state that is transferred via the line battle preparation state.

(Preparing for line battle)
When the ART winning is determined based on winning the bonus combination in the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. .. In addition, in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, the line battle preparation state is entered (that is, the line battle state is restored). ). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the line battle ready state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order small winning combination and the push order replay are not notified until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the RT3 state is entered, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the RT3 state is entered, the line battle preparation state may be terminated and the line battle state may be entered.

Further, as described above, for example, in a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section, when an ART lottery is performed based on winning a specific combination other than a bonus combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), the winning result. When it is possible to decide to shift to the line battle state, when the normal advantageous section ends, the line battle ready state is shifted. Also in this case, the line battle ready state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

However, for example, when the RT state is the RT0 state, the stop operation is performed without following the push order notification even though the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is performed. As a result, when "RT1 transition" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the line battle state may be shifted even if the RT state is not the RT2 state. .. The same applies to the right acquisition lottery preparation state and the ending preparation state. That is, when a push order error occurs in each preparation state, the game state may be shifted to the corresponding gaming state even if the RT state is not the RT2 state.

In the line battle preparation state, an enemy selection table lottery, an ally selection table lottery, and an ally acquisition lottery are performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the line battle preparation state. In addition, the lottery related to these game characteristics can be made to be performed even in each game state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, if the normal advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery result in the normal advantageous section is reflected in the line battle state, and if the normal advantageous section does not shift to the advantageous section, the lottery in the normal advantageous section is performed. The result may be discarded (cleared).

In the enemy selection table lottery, an enemy selection table for selecting information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the enemy selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36A, and selects one of the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Here, the number of times the enemy is defeated is the number of times the enemy HP becomes "0" in the battle state described later and is transferred to the right acquisition state, and the number of times the line battle state is determined to continue in the continuous lottery state described later. As the cumulative number of times (that is, the number of times the line battle state has continued), the number of times stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103 is shown.

In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, each information is assigned so that the continuation degree of the line battle state can be changed according to the number of times the enemy is defeated. In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, "low" indicates that the player's degree of advantage with respect to the continuation degree of the line battle state is relatively low, and "medium" indicates the continuation degree of the line battle state. Indicates that the degree of advantage of the player is medium, and "high" indicates that the degree of advantage of the player is high with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the present embodiment, "A" (enemy character A), "B" (enemy character B), "C" (enemy character C), and "D" (d) as information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled. Enemy character D) is set, and one of them is determined in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the degree of expectation that the line battle state will continue in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D" is gradually increased. That is, the degree of advantage of the player is gradually increased in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D".

Then, in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "low", the enemy character (for example, "A") having a relatively low degree of advantage of the player is determined. It is difficult to determine an enemy character (for example, "D") that is easy to be used and has a relatively high degree of advantage for the player, and if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "high", the player's It is difficult to determine an enemy character (for example, "A") having a relatively low degree of advantage, and it is easy to determine an enemy character (for example, "D") having a relatively high degree of advantage of a player. If the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "medium", the probability is between them. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally selection table lottery, the ally selection table for selecting the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the ally selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36B, and selects one of the ally selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Since the number of times the enemy has been defeated has already been explained, the explanation here will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously, "1" (friend character 1), "2" (friend character 2), "3" (friend character 3), and "4". "(Friend character 4) is set, and it is determined whether or not one or more ally characters are given in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the higher the number of assigned ally characters, the higher the expectation that the line battle state will continue. That is, as the number of assigned ally characters increases, the degree of advantage of the player gradually increases.

Then, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "extremely low", the ally character is rarely given, and the information indicated by the determined ally selection table. If is "low", it is difficult to give a ally character, and even if it is given, it is one, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "medium", it is easy to give a ally character. However, it is difficult to assign a plurality of ally characters, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "high", the ally character is likely to be assigned and a plurality of ally characters are likely to be assigned. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally acquisition lottery, it is determined in advance whether or not to grant the right to acquire the ally character, in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Whether or not the main CPU 101 acquires an ally character with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) based on winning a specific role (for example, "chance eye" or "watermelon 1"). decide. The table referred to in the ally acquisition lottery is not shown.

Here, if it is decided to grant the right as a result of the ally acquisition lottery, the number of the ally character that was not given as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle described later at the time of entering the battle state is the most. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. That is, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the ally character is given including the specific ally character type, whereas in the ally acquisition lottery, at least one of the ally characters is given. It is decided whether or not to decide.

In addition, the right decided to be granted as a result of the ally acquisition lottery basically disappears when the subsequent battle state ends, and in order to regain the right, it is necessary to win the ally acquisition lottery again. .. In this sense, the right may be said to be a "limited right" different from the "permanent right" described later.

(Interval state)
As described above, when the line battle preparation state is completed, the main CPU 101 first shifts to the interval state at the start of the line battle state. The interval state is a state in which the game continues for three games, and when the game period in the interval state elapses three games, the battle state is entered. In the interval state, the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery is performed.

When the interval state ends, the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle and the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle are performed.

In the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the enemy selection table (any of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned enemy selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("low" ~ Any of "high") is referred to, and information (any of "A" to "D") corresponding to the enemy character to be battled is determined. The table referred to in the lottery by enemy type at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

In the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the ally selection table (one of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned ally selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("extremely low"" -Any of "high") is referred to, and the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle in an advantageous manner is determined. In the lottery by ally type at the time of entering the battle, for example, "1" wins, "2" wins, "3" wins, "4" wins, "1.2". While it can be decided that multiple ally characters will be granted, such as "winning", ... "winning" 1 to 4 "", as a permanent right (or limited right) described later, " If "1" is given and "winning for" 1 "" is determined, the lottery result is discarded (not reflected). Also, in this case, if "winning in" 1 and 2 "" is determined, only the part of "winning in" 1 "" is discarded (not reflected), and "winning in" 2 "". The part of is reflected. Therefore, if no other right is granted in the ally acquisition lottery, the ally characters in this case are "1" and "2". In addition, the table referred to in the lottery by ally type at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

Further, when the interval state ends, the initial value "32" is set in the enemy HP and the ally HP. Then, the enemy type is set according to the result of the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, and as a result of the lottery of the ally type at the time of entering the battle, the existence of the limited right granted based on the result of the ally acquisition lottery, and the permanentity described later. The ally type is set according to the presence or absence of the permanent right granted based on the result of the right acquisition lottery.

(Battle state)
As described above, when the interval state ends, the main CPU 101 then shifts to the battle state during the line battle state. The battle state is a state that continues for at least 31 games, during which time if the ally attacks, the enemy HP decreases by the damage of the attack, and if the enemy attacks, the damage of the attack ally It has the playability of reducing HP. Then, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less before the end of the battle state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state, and if the enemy HP does not become "0" or less before the end of the battle state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. , Shift to the continuous lottery state described later.

In the battle state, when the "weak rare role" or the "chance eye" is won, the winning game is not included in the count target of the game period in the battle state. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of times the "weak rare role" or "chance eye" is won. Also, in the battle state, if the "chance eye" is won and the "RT3 transition eye" is displayed and the RT state becomes the RT3 state, the game period of the battle state is counted during the eight games in the RT3 state. Is not included in. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of games in which the RT3 state continues.

In the battle state, a counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the counter, a defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, and a damage lottery at the time of hitting can be performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the battle state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the relationship between the lottery related to various playability performed in the battle state and the information corresponding to the ally character will be described.

FIG. 37 shows the case where there is no ally in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when none of "1" to "4" is given as the information corresponding to the ally character). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device 11.

First, the display device 11 displays the current "status" of the self-character ("self" in FIGS. 37 to 41) on the ally side corresponding to the player himself as the basic display content during the battle state. At the same time, the enemy character on the enemy side determined as a result of the above-mentioned lottery for the enemy type at the time of entering the battle (“enemy A” in FIGS. 37 to 41. In this case, it is assumed that the enemy type “A” is selected). Shows the current "status" of.

The status is information corresponding to the remaining numerical range of the ally HP and the enemy HP set at the time of entering the battle state, and in this embodiment, the remaining numerical range is "32 to" for each of the ally HP and the enemy HP. When "25", the status "normal" is set, when the remaining numerical range is "24 to 17", when the status "small damage" is set, and when the remaining numerical range is "16-9". , When the status "Medium damage" is set and the remaining numerical range is "8 to 1", the status "Great damage" is set and when the remaining numerical range is "0" or less, the status "Defeat" Is set. In addition, the status "defeat" may be set for the enemy HP, but the status "defeat" may not be set for the ally HP, and when the remaining numerical range of the ally HP is "1" or less, The ally HP is fixed at "1" and cannot be subtracted below it.

Then, the display device 11 displays that "middle line attack is effective" when there is no ally. This is related to the change in the continuation degree of the line battle state only for the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) when none of the ally characters “1” to “4” is assigned in the battle state. It means that it functions as a judgment line.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of no ally, when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed, the internal winning combination is determined. (When it is done), it becomes an attack on the ally side, and while the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". (The internal winning combination that can be displayed is not determined), and if you win the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip"), it will be an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later will not be performed, and the hit rip described later will be performed. When damage is drawn, lottery is done.

FIG. 38 shows the display device 11 in the case of acquiring the ally "1" (that is, when "1" is given as the information corresponding to the ally character) in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of. Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description thereof is omitted here.

When the ally "1" is acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective" and "upper line attack effective". This is because when the ally character "1" is assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) are line battles. It means that it functions as a judgment line regarding fluctuations in the degree of continuation of the state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring the ally "1", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed as an internal winning. When the winning combination is determined) and when the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is determined). Will be an attack on the ally side, and the damage lottery described later will be performed, while the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" will not be displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" may be displayed. The internal winning combination is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not determined), and " When a hit is made to a "hit rip" ("F_hit rip"), the attack is on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip described later is performed.

In FIG. 39, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2" (that is, "1" and "2" are given as information corresponding to the ally character. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device 11 (if any). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description thereof is omitted here.

When the ally "1" and "2" are acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", and "lower line attack effective". This means that when the ally characters "1" and "2" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) means that the line battle state functions as a determination line regarding a change in the degree of continuation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed. When the above-mentioned "upper rip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper rip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is determined. When the above-mentioned "lower rip" or "lower bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "lower rip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is determined), the ally side While the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed. (Not), the above-mentioned "upper rip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper rip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower rip" Or when the "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower rip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined) and the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is won. Is an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip described later is performed.

In FIG. 40, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "3" (that is, "1" to "3" are given as information corresponding to the ally character. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device 11 (if any). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description thereof is omitted here.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", and "counter available" when allies "1" to "3" are acquired. This means that when the ally characters "1" to "3" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit lip” (“F_hit lip”) is won. It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting and the damage lottery at the time of the counter, which will be described later, can be performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "3", the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later, and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later are performed. Is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above. The "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is not displayed. Is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower rip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined), and when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is won, the hit rip described later is performed. Before the time damage lottery is performed, a counter lottery is performed at the time of hitting to determine whether to activate the counter attack, and if this is won, it will be an attack on the ally side, and the counter time damage lottery described later will be performed. Is performed, and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, is not performed.

In FIG. 41, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "4" (that is, "1" to "4" are given as information corresponding to the ally character. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device 11 (if any). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description thereof is omitted here.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", "counter available", and "defense available" when allies "1" to "4" are acquired. are doing. This means that when the ally characters "1" to "4" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit lip” (“F_hit lip”) is won. It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter can be performed, and the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip described later can be performed even if the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is not won. ing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "4", in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later, the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip described later, and the impact described below. The mode in which the counter lottery at the time of rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter are performed is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". The internal winning combination that can display "" is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper rip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display "upper rip" or "upper bell" is determined. (Not), the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the "hit lip" ("" In the case of winning "F_Bombardment Lip"), a counter lottery at the time of the impacted rip is performed to determine whether or not to activate the counter attack before the damage lottery at the time of the impacted rip described later is performed, and this is the winning. If you do not do so, a defense lottery will be performed at the time of hitting rip, and if you win this, it will be an attack on the enemy side, but the defense will be successful and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, will not be performed. ..

In this embodiment, the damage lottery described later is performed only when the "replay" symbol and the "bell" symbol are actually aligned on the line set as the determination line. If the "bell" symbols are not actually aligned due to a player's push order error even though the push order notification has been made, the damage lottery described later may not be performed. , If the internal winning combination that the "replay" symbol or "bell" symbol can be aligned (can be displayed) is determined on the line set as the judgment line, the "replay" symbol or "bell" is actually determined. The damage lottery described later may be performed regardless of whether or not the symbols of "" are aligned. Any of these methods can be adopted. When the latter method is adopted, the "judgment line" is no longer the line where the "judgment" itself is actually performed, but it has the meaning of making it possible to notify the player, for example, that the damage lottery will be performed. As it becomes a thing, it still has an important meaning for the player.

Further, in FIGS. 37 to 41, an example in which the ally characters "1" to "4" increase in order is described. However, depending on the result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, for example, " It may be given only "2", only "3", only "4", or "2" and "3", "3" and "4". Therefore, in the following, the functions of the information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character will be briefly described again.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) is in a line battle state in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41). It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the bottom line ("DL3" in FIGS. 39 to 41) is in a line battle state in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41). It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of.

When the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, even if the attack is originally on the enemy side and the ally HP is reduced, on the contrary, the attack is on the ally side and the enemy HP is reduced. Will come to be.

When the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, the ally HP may not be reduced even if the ally HP is originally reduced due to the attack on the enemy side.

Here, regardless of whether the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). When the winning combination numbers "7", "8", or "24" are transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks, for example, the part displayed as "middle line attack valid" on the display device 11. Perform processing such as making it appear or highlighting it. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "6" is set for the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side) from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side). Or, when "23" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as blinking or highlighting the portion displayed as "upper line attack valid" in the display device 11, for example. I do. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "10" is set for the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side) from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side). Or, when "25" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks or highlights the portion displayed as "lower line attack valid" in the display device 11, for example. Is processed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

However, the mode of production that makes the ally side expect to attack is not limited to this. For example, it may be an effect performed by another effect device (for example, a speaker group 84 or an LED group 85). Further, even when the winning combination number of the internal winning combination that is not in the above-mentioned correspondence relationship is transmitted, one of the above-mentioned effects may be performed with a predetermined probability.

The types and functions of information corresponding to the ally character are not limited to those described above. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the damage dealt determined in the damage dealt lottery described later increases (for example, the determined damage dealt is doubled). ) May be provided. Further, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, the damage received in the damage damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, is reduced (for example, the determined damage is received). May be halved).

Further, the line that functions as the determination line is not limited to the effective line. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character is set, even if the line is different from the effective line, it may be set as a special line and this special line may be made to function as a determination line. Specifically, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the cross-down line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. You may try to do it. Further, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, in addition to the center line, the cross-up line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state. You may.

In such a case, the symbols displayed on the actual valid line are not the "replay" symbol alignment or the "bell" symbol alignment, but the symbols displayed on such a special line are the "replay" symbols. If it is configured to match the symbols of "" or "bell", the player can recognize that the degree of advantage fluctuates as well as the effective lines, regardless of the actual number of effective lines. However, it is possible to provide the same playability. From this point of view, the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state does not necessarily have to include the effective line. For example, when the effective line is one line of the cross-up line, the line battle The determination line regarding the change in the degree of continuation of the state may be composed of a maximum of three lines, a center line, a top line, and a bottom line. That is, it is also possible to configure the determination line regarding the change in the continuation degree of the line battle state from only the special line different from the effective line.

Further, when defining the determination line, similarly to the above-mentioned effective line, it is possible to define each line in which the symbols are aligned, or together with this, a line in which the symbols are not aligned as an effective line. .. That is, if it is a line that passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols for each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a judgment line.

For example, a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (irregular line at V) may be defined as a determination line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 types of determination lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a determination line.

Here, the explanation of the battle state is returned to again. As described above, when the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is won, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip is performed. In the counter-lottery at the time of hitting, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the counter attack (winning) or not to activate the counter-attack (non-winning). The table referred to in the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If the counter lottery at the time of hitting is won, the damage lottery at the time of the counter is subsequently performed. In the counter time damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the counter time damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36C, and determines the value of any one of the damages inflicted based on the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate. Further, in this case, the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip is not performed.

On the other hand, when the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not won and the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, and the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is not set, but " If "4" is set, a defensive lottery will be performed at the time of hitting. In the hit counter lottery, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the defense (winning) or not to activate the defense (non-winning). It should be noted that the table referred to in the defense lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If you win the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip will not be performed. On the other hand, if the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip is not won, the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is not set but "3" is set, and the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip is won. If not, and if the information "3" and "4" corresponding to the ally character are not set and the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is hit, the hit rip is received. Damage lottery is done.

In the hit rip damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit rip damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36D, and determines one of the damage values based on the enemy type and the lottery value. .. When the value of the damage received is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the ally HP, and the value of the ally HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the ally is updated as appropriate.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are not set, and the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is determined, and the watermelon (in this case). , "F_watermelon 1" or "F_watermelon 2" may be included. The same shall apply hereinafter in this section), the damage lottery will be performed. It will be.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" or the "upper rip" or "upper bell" can be displayed has been determined. If, and if the watermelon is determined to be the internal winning combination, a damage lottery will be held.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" or the "lower rip" or "lower bell" can be displayed has been determined. If, and if the watermelon is determined to be the internal winning combination, a damage lottery will be held.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set, "middle rip" or "middle bell", "upper rip" or "upper bell", or "lower rip" or "lower rip" or " When the internal winning combination in which the "lower bell" can be displayed is determined, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, a damage lottery is performed.

In the damage-damaged lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage-damaged lottery table shown in FIG. 36E, and determines any one of the damage-damaged values based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate.

Here, focusing on the RT state, the line battle state in the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, but when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, it may also be the RT3 state. Referring to FIG. 16, in the RT2 state, the lottery value of "F_middle rip 1" is "5000", the lottery value of "F_upper rip" and "F_lower rip" is "2450", and "F_shot". While the lottery value of "rip" is "8970", in the RT3 state, the lottery value of "F_middle stage lip 2" is "32768", and the lottery value of "F_hit lip" is "0".

That is, if it is possible to shift to the RT3 state in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, it does not matter whether the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set. As a result of determining the internal winning combination that can display the "middle rip" with a high probability, it is possible to make the damage lottery performed with a high probability, and the internal winning combination that can display the "hit rip". As a result of not being determined, it is possible to prevent the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip. Therefore, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, the RT3 state is the most advantageous RT state.

In the battle state, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less (that is, "defeat" as the status) before the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right grant lottery state of the advantageous section from the next game. If the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state has not ended, the battle state is continued. In addition, if the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state is over, the game shifts from the next game to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state.

In this embodiment, when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is hit, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip are performed. The lottery method in the battle state is not limited to this. For example, if an internal winning role (excluding "weak rare role", "chance eye", and bonus role) that is not subject to the damage lottery is determined, "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") ), The counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is hit, the combination of the "hit rip" symbols is displayed on the center line. Configured as a different internal winning combination, or configured as a push-order replay with the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip"), and the combination of the "hit rip" symbols is displayed on the top line according to the stop operation procedure. , Or may be displayed on the bottom line. In this case, if the top line or bottom line is the determination line, the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip may be performed. The lottery may not be done. In addition, when the top line or bottom line is the judgment line, the stop operation procedure is notified so that the combination of the "hit lip" symbols is not displayed on the top line or bottom line. good.

(Continuous lottery state)
As described above, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 next shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state. The continuous lottery state is a state in which it continues for 4 games or 7 games, and finally, if it is decided to shift from the line battle state to the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is entered. If it is decided to continue the line battle state, the game shifts to the interval state during the line battle state again, and if none of these decisions are made, the line battle state ends ( That is, the advantageous section ends), and the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered.

In the continuous lottery state, continuous lottery and continuous lottery result rewriting lottery can be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the continuous lottery state.

First, the main CPU 101 performs continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state when shifting from the battle state to the continuous lottery state. In the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, the main CPU 101 refers to the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, and determines the enemy type, the damage state (that is, synonymous with the above-mentioned "status"), and the lottery value. Based on the above, the game period in the continuous lottery state is 4 games, but it is not decided whether to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state (“4G defeat”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state. Is 7 games, but it is not decided whether to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state ("7G defeat"), the game period of the continuous lottery state is 4 games, and the line battle state It is decided to continue ("4G continuation"), the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games, and it is decided to continue the line battle state ("7G continuation"), the continuous lottery state The game period is 4 games and it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state (“4G promotion”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games and it is possible to shift to the right acquisition lottery state. One of the things to be decided (“7G promotion”) is decided.

In addition, in the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, at least the lottery result (“4G continuation”, “7G continuation”, “4G promotion”, and “7G promotion” described above) in which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. As a general rule, the probability increases in the order of "A", "B", "C", "D" for the enemy type, and the ally status is "Great Damage", "Medium Damage", "Small Damage". The order of "break" and "normal" is increased, and the enemy status is increased in the order of "normal", "small damage", "medium damage", and "wreck". That is, the three parameters of the enemy type, the ally status, and the enemy status are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section continues.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the battle state is entered, the information corresponding to which enemy character is set, how the ally status changes during the battle state, and which enemy status is during the battle state. It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the line battle state depending on how it changes. In addition, when changing the ally status and the enemy status, the type of information corresponding to the ally character (for example, the number of judgment lines) is important, and the degree of continuation of the line battle state is advantageous to the player. The probability of fluctuating to a certain degree or fluctuating to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player also fluctuates.

In the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, when the ally status is "wreck" and the enemy status is "wreck", it is exceptionally determined that the lottery result at which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. It has become. In this way, when the ally status is a specific status and the enemy status is a specific status, the probability that the advantageous section will continue is increased or the probability that the advantageous section is continued is decreased, contrary to the above-mentioned principle. You can also do it.

Further, when the main CPU 101 shifts from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the lottery result of the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state is the lottery result (the above-mentioned "4G defeat" and "4G defeat") in which the advantageous section ends. In the case of "7G defeat"), the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed in the continuous lottery state. Specifically, in the continuous lottery state, if the "chance eye" or the bonus role is won, for example, if "4G defeat" is determined as the lottery result of the continuous lottery, rewrite it to "4G continuation", for example. If "7G defeat" is decided, rewrite it as "7G continuation". Further, when a watermelon (in this case, only "F_watermelon 1" or "F_watermelon 2" may be included) is won, a continuous lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Decide to rewrite the lottery result of. When it is decided to rewrite the lottery result of the continuous lottery, the lottery result of the continuous lottery is appropriately rewritten in the same manner as described above.

In the present embodiment, after the continuous lottery is performed according to the enemy type and the damage state, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed, but the lottery method in the continuous lottery state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state, first, a continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed (that is, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to continue the line battle state for each game based on the internal winning combination), and the lottery is performed. If it is not decided to continue the line battle state as a result of, when the continuous lottery state ends, the continuous lottery may be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous section. It is possible to determine, and in the battle state during the line battle state, when the "replay" or "bell" symbols are displayed side by side on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is set to the degree advantageous to the player. It is possible to make fluctuations, and in the continuous lottery state during the line battle state, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous section based on the degree of continuation of the determined advantageous section.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the battle state during the line battle state, when, for example, a combination of symbols of "hit rip" is displayed on the determined determination line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to change it to a certain degree.

As a result, it is possible to increase the tension during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the game during the advantageous section does not become monotonous, and the interest regarding the continuation of the state advantageous to the player is It can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section to the RT2 state, and when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section is displayed. Can be transferred to the RT3 state, and a specific internal winning combination (for example, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip 1") in which the combination of the symbols of the "middle rip" can be displayed on the determined judgment line The probability of determining any of the "rip 2") is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RT2 state, it is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_hit lip") in which the combination of the symbols of the "hit rip" can be displayed, and in the RT3 state, this predetermined combination. It is not possible to determine the internal winning combination of.

As a result, in the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which RT state is in the game. It is possible to make the game more versatile and to improve the interest in continuing the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, "F_upper left bell 1" and "batting order 1" in which a combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 1". When the stop operation is performed with, "F_middle left bell 1" where the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line, and when the stop operation is performed with "batting order 3", at the top line "F_upper middle bell 1" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols and "F_" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols on the center line when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 3" "Middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 32, for example, "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined in the advantageous section. In that case, "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. It has become. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, when the player has a playability in which the degree of the player's advantage varies depending on the line on which the symbol such as the line battle state of the advantageous section is displayed, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

<Right acquisition lottery state and playability during the right acquisition state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 42 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state.

(Preparation for lottery to acquire rights)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the right acquisition lottery preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. (That is, return to these states). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the right acquisition lottery preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus role is the right acquisition state, it shifts to the right acquisition state, and if the bonus role wins the right acquisition lottery state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. Let me.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order small winning combination and the push order replay are not notified until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the RT3 state is entered, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. In addition, when the state shifts to the RT3 state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state is terminated, the right acquisition state is restored when returning to the right acquisition state, and the right acquisition lottery state is restored when returning to the right acquisition lottery state. You may try to restore it.

(Right acquisition lottery status)
As described above, when the right acquisition lottery preparation state is completed and when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. The right acquisition lottery state is in a state of continuing for 20 games, and of course, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during this period. And, even if it does not shift to the right acquisition state, it returns to the line battle state. Therefore, this right acquisition lottery state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state lottery state, the right acquisition state transition lottery is performed.

In the right acquisition state transition lottery, for example, in the right acquisition state lottery, the main CPU 101 may be only the "chance eye" or the watermelon (in this case, "F_watermelon 1" or includes "F_watermelon 2". If you win, it is decided to move to the right acquisition state from the next game. Further, when the common bell (“F_upper common bell” and “F_middle common bell”) is won, it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4). Even if it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the transition to the right acquisition state may occur when the game period (20 games) in the right acquisition lottery state ends. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the precursor period is determined within the range of the remaining number of games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state, and when this precursor period elapses, the transition to the right acquisition state is performed. You may do so. In addition, when shifting from the right acquisition lottery state to the right acquisition state, if the number of remaining games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state occurs, the remaining number of games will be added to the game period in the right acquisition state. Alternatively, it may be added to the game period in the right acquisition lottery state next time (when the right acquisition state returns to the right acquisition lottery state).

(Right acquisition status)
As described above, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state, and when returning from the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition state. The right acquisition state is a state of continuing for 10 games, and of course, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during this period. Then, regardless of whether or not the permanent right is acquired, the right acquisition lottery state is returned. Therefore, this right acquisition state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed.

In the permanent right acquisition lottery, it is decided in advance whether or not to grant the right to permanently acquire the ally character (until the end of the advantageous section), in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. The right. The main CPU 101 decides to grant a permanent right, for example, when the bonus combination is won in the right acquisition state. In addition, for example, based on winning a specific combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), it may be decided to grant a permanent right with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4).

Here, if it is decided to grant the permanent right as a result of the permanent right lottery, every time the battle state is entered, the number of the ally character that was not granted as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle is the most. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the permanent right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. The function of the perpetual right granted is not limited to this. For example, if it is decided to grant the perpetual right as a result of the perpetual right lottery, the number of the ally character to which the perpetual right is not granted is fixedly assigned to the smallest number. You may. For example, when the permanent right is first granted, the ally character "1" is granted as the right content of this permanent right, and when the permanent right is granted next, the ally character "2" is granted as the right content of this permanent right. May be given.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the permanent right is granted in the right acquisition state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned limited right is granted in the right acquisition state. It may be decided whether or not to do so. In this case, for example, the same lottery as the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery may be performed, or the above-mentioned limited right is provided so that the probability of granting the limited right is higher than that of the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery. It may be decided whether or not it is granted. Further, for example, in the right acquisition state, whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted is determined for each unit game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10) regardless of the internal winning combination. May be good. In addition, if a permanent right or a limited right is granted at an opportunity other than the bonus combination, it is possible to acquire a plurality of rights in the right acquisition state.

In this case, as described above, for example, when two rights are granted (when the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set), the judgment line is the upper limit number in the battle state. (DL1 to DL3) will be set. In addition, for example, when three rights are granted (when the information "1" to "3" corresponding to the ally character is set), in addition to this, the counter may be activated in the battle state. It will be like. In addition, for example, when four rights are granted (when information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character is set), in addition to this, defense may be activated in the battle state. It will be like. Here, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, the rights for more than four may be carried over to the next battle state or destroyed (cleared). May be done. Further, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, it may be determined that the advantageous section will always continue in the continuous lottery state after the end of the next battle state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a permanent right is granted so that the line battle state of the advantageous section can be advanced advantageously (information corresponding to the ally character can be set) in the right acquisition state. However, the content of rights that can be granted in the state of acquisition of rights is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, the continuation right that the line battle state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section. "Stock" or "number of sets" It may be decided whether or not the right acquisition lottery state is granted, or the right acquisition lottery state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result in the right acquisition lottery state. It may be determined whether or not the right to continue (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section, which may be referred to as "stock", "number of sets", etc.) is granted. That is, in the right acquisition state, the content of the right that can be granted can be appropriately set as long as it brings benefits to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous section. It is decidable, and the result of the decision varies depending on whether or not the right has been granted in the state of acquisition of the right. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in the right acquisition state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the judgment line is granted in the right acquisition state, first, the judgment line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the battle state during the line battle state, for example, when the combination of the symbols of "hit rip" is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous section is continued. If the degree is changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and the granted right remains, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous section to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the permanent right is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the permanent right is not granted, one or more determination lines are determined when the determination line is determined. One of the lines is determined as the determination line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous section can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be varied in various ways. be able to.

<Playability during ending 1 state and ending 2 state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 43 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state. Further, FIG. 44 shows an outline of the ending effect performed during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state.

(Preparing for ending)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the ending preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends (that is, these). (Return to the state of). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the ending state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus combination is in the ending 1 state, the process shifts to the ending 1 state, and if the bonus combination is won in the ending 2 state, the process shifts to the ending 2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order small winning combination and the push order replay are not notified until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the RT3 state is entered, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the RT3 state is entered, the ending preparation state is terminated, the ending 1 state is restored when the ending 1 state is restored, and the ending 2 state is restored when the ending 2 state is restored. You may.

Further, when the main CPU 101 is determined to shift to the ending 1 state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, for example, by ART lottery at the time of winning the watermelon 1, the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted. At that time, it shifts to the ending ready state (that is, waits for the transition to the ending 1 state until it shifts to the RT2 state).

(Ending 1 state)
As described above, when the ending preparation state is completed and the process shifts (returns) to the ending 1 state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 1 state. The ending 1 state is a state in which the game continues for 100 games, and during this period, of course, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Then, when the ending 1 state is completed, the line battle state is entered. It is the same as the line battle state in that it is in the gaming state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section transitioning from the normal advantageous section, but the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the line battle state. In the ending 1 state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed as in the right acquisition state.

As with the lottery in the right acquisition state, in the ending 1 state, it may be determined whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted, or the continuation right for extending the advantageous section is granted. It may be decided whether or not it is done.

Further, for example, in the ending 1 state, if the bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the ending 1 state is restored via the ending preparation state, the game period of 100 games is again. It may be counted from the beginning, or it may be counted by taking over the game period in the game that won the bonus role. In the latter case, for example, the bonus combination is won in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the player returns to the ending 1 state via the ending preparation state. In that case, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 90 games.

Further, the game period in the bonus state may be included in the game period in the ending 1 state. For example, in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus role is won, the game period in the bonus state based on the bonus role is 17 games, the bonus state ends, and the game goes through the ending preparation state. When the game is returned to the ending 1 state, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 73 games.

(Ending 2 state)
When the number of games played in the advantageous section is "1200" or more and the interval state of the line battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 2 state. The ending 2 state is a state in which it continues for 131 games, and of course, information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during this period. Then, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself also ends, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

In this case, when the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1200" times (or more times, for example, "1369" times), the game may be shifted to the ending 2 state. good. Further, in this case, even when there are other gaming states in the advantageous section, the transition from these gaming states to the ending 2 state may be made. Further, the mode of counting the game period in the ending 2 state is the same as the mode of counting the game period in the ending 1 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself also ends, and the transition to the non-advantageous section is made, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the ending 2 state ends, if the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period has not yet reached "1500" times, the line battle state may be entered again. Alternatively, the ending 2 state may be continued until the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

(Ending production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the ending effect that can be performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state will be described.

As the phrase indicates, the ending effect is basically an effect that suggests that the advantageous section will be terminated soon when the period controlled by the advantageous section becomes "1200" times or more. It has become. Further, considering the probability that the period controlled in the advantageous section is "1200" times or more, the probability of being executed is lower than that of other effects, which is a special effect.

The ending production is configured as, for example, a series of story productions consisting of episodes 1 to 8 and the final episode, and as the game period in the ending 2 state progresses, the content of the story also progresses. There is. As described above, in the case where the ending 2 state is configured to be continuous from the period controlled in the advantageous section to "1200" times until the regulation monitoring period becomes "1500" times. The content of the story may be advanced according to the game period until the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

Here, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state when the advantageous section is started, the ending 1 state is started even though the advantageous section has just started. The ending effect is executed inside.

However, in the ending 1 state, a part of the above-mentioned series of story effects is executed, and all of them are not executed. Specifically, the first to eighth episodes of the first to eighth episodes and the final episode are executed, but the final episode is not executed. In this case as well, as in the ending 2 state, basically, the content of the story progresses as the game period in the ending 1 state progresses.

A specific example in which a part of the above-mentioned series of story effects is executed in the ending 1 state will be described with reference to FIG. 44. For example, in the ending preparation state, the introduction effect of the ending effect is performed. Then, when the ending 1 state is started (ART start), the ending effect is started, and the story progresses in sequence, such as the first episode, the second episode, and the eighth episode. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, a character such as "continue" is displayed on the display device 11, indicating that the story is not completed.

On the other hand, in the ending 2 state, when the ending 2 state is started (advantageous section ≧ 1200 interval state end), the ending effect is started, and the first episode, the second episode, ... The story goes on. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, the story of the final episode is developed next, and when the story of the final episode is completed, a character such as "THE END" is displayed on the display device 11 to indicate that the story is completed. ..

It should be noted that the above-mentioned effect content of the ending effect shows an example of the effect content of the ending effect that can be executed over a plurality of games, and the effect content of the ending effect is not limited to this. Any production content may be used as long as it is a production content that is valuable to the player.

For example, if there is an animation or character used as a motif of pachislot 1, in the ending effect in the ending 2 state, a special image of the animation or a special image of the character that cannot normally be seen is displayed on the display device 11. It should be. In this case, in the ending effect in the ending 1 state, the contents of these images are shorter than the ending effect in the ending 2 state (for example, summarized, halfway through, or as different contents) and displayed on the display device 11. It should be. However, instead of or in combination with these, each ending effect can be performed by the music and sound output from the speaker group 84 and the light emitting mode by the LED group 85.

Further, the ending effect may be such that the effect content progresses regardless of the number of remaining games. For example, the time required for a unit game is tentatively set to "6 seconds" (this value is arbitrary), and the ending effect in the ending 2 state is set as a series of "6 seconds x 131 games = 786 seconds". This series of effects is started at the timing controlled by the ending 2 state, and the ending effect in the ending 1 state is a part of the series of effects of "6 seconds x 100 games = 600 seconds". It is also possible to start a part of this series of effects at the timing controlled to the ending 1 state. By doing so, it is not necessary to advance the ending effect according to the number of games, so that the control burden related to the effect can be reduced. Further, in this case, when the execution of the above-mentioned series of effects is completed at the timing before the end of the advantageous section, the screen at the end is displayed as it is until the end of the advantageous section. Alternatively, the series of effects described above may be started again from the beginning (or from the middle) (that is, may be executed in a loop). Further, in this case, if the advantageous section ends at the timing before the execution of the above-mentioned series of effects is completed, the above-mentioned series of effects may be forcibly ended even in the middle of the process. However, the series of effects described above may be executed to the end.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, until the game period in the advantageous section becomes "1200" times (or until the game shifts to the ending 1 state). , It is decided to continue the advantageous section (for example, it is decided to continue the line battle state in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, or the right acquisition lottery state ends, and then the interval state is entered. ) Every time, the display device 11 executes a suggestion effect suggesting a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous section.

Specifically, for example, a progress bar or a map divided into 12 squares is displayed in a predetermined area in the display device 11, and 1 square is displayed every time 100 games are played during the game period in the advantageous section. Suggestion effects such as making the display mode different one by one are executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the approximate number of game periods in the advantageous section. In addition, for example, a section such as a progress bar or a map may be set to 15 squares, and the degree of digestion during the regulation monitoring period may be displayed. Further, these are examples of the display contents of the suggestion effect, and the display contents are not limited to this. For example, the actual number of games during the game period in the advantageous section may be displayed.

Further, the suggestion effect may be displayed only during the first game of the interval state, or may be displayed during the interval state (between three games). Further, it may be displayed only in the line battle state where the advantageous section may end, or it may be always displayed in each game state in the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the ending effect (special effect) when the ending 2 state is reached, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the ending 1 is performed. When it is decided to shift to the state, it is possible to execute a part of the ending effect (special effect) in the ending 1 state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special effect, which is a part of the special effect that can be normally executed at the end of the game in a state advantageous to the player, satisfies a predetermined execution condition. , Can be performed early in the game while in the player's favor. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation monitoring period is "1500" times, which is advantageous from the time when the ending 2 state is reached to the end of the advantageous section after 131 games have elapsed, or from the time when the ending 2 state is reached. It is possible to execute the ending effect (special effect) until the end of the section. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time it is determined to continue the advantageous section until the game period in the advantageous section becomes "1200" games or until the ending 1 state is entered, the advantageous section is controlled. It is possible to carry out a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline for the period. As a result, the player can generally grasp when the execution of the special effect starts and when the advantageous section ends, so that it is possible to provide appropriate information to the player while enhancing the interest of the game. can.

(Other examples of ending control)
In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but the stage where it is confirmed that the limit process will be performed in the future. (For example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or higher than the specified value), the main control board 71 changes the payout state to the "ending" (for example, the ending 2 state). Transition. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state of the sub-side to the "ending" even when the ball ejection state is shifted to the "ending" on the main side, and is predetermined. The production state is shifted to "ending" with the condition as an opportunity. In particular, the details of the control in which the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” will be described below. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section may include the "normal advantageous section" and the like, but in this example, it is assumed that the "advantageous section" and the "ART" are in exactly the same gaming state.

In this example, it is assumed that a main side counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and a sub side counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side are provided in relation to the advantageous section. The main control board 71 counts the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (number of digested games) using the first counter, and the period during which the advantageous section can be continued using the second counter (number of remaining games). ) Is counted. When the value of the first counter reaches "1500", the main control board 71 performs limit processing, ends the advantageous section regardless of the value of the second counter, and the value of the first counter becomes "1500". If the value of the second counter reaches "0" before reaching, the advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 counts the number of games (the number of digested games) that have passed during the advantageous section using the third counter, and the period during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fourth counter (the number of games that have been digested). The period of notification to the player (number of games remaining) is counted, and the game during the period (number of games remaining) during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter. The period of unreported to the person (the number of unreported games (= the number of hidden additional games)) is counted. When the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games, the number of notified games is added and the number of unreported games is subtracted by the number of notified games.

Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and sub is basically the same, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side are the same (note that the advantageous section). If "ART" and "ART" do not match, the limit processing is not performed on the sub side, so there is no need to count the number of digested games in the advantageous section on the sub side, and the number of digested games in "ART" should be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but they are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub side are counted individually in order to individually count the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are held unreported. It does not match the value of, and also does not match the value of the second counter on the main side and the value of the fifth counter on the sub side. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub The sum of the value of the 4th counter and the value of the 5th counter on the side are the same.

The main control board 71 controls the transition to the "ending" based on the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. For example, as a result of adding the number of games, the advantageous section When the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games exceeds the specified value, the payout state is shifted to "ending".

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 "ends (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games) of the sub-side effect state according to the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section. END) ”. Here, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending" by referring to, for example, a sub_ending transition lottery table (not shown).

For example, the sub_ending transition lottery table defines the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and the lottery result (non-winning, whether or not to shift to the "ending" for each total value. The lottery value information for the winning) is specified. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games is "1000 to 1199G", there is a probability of 24576/32768 to the "ending". The transition lottery is not won, and the transition lottery to the "ending" is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

Further, for example, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending" with a higher probability as the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. Then, when the effect state is shifted to the "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to the dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the effect stage as the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. If the ball ejection state has not shifted to the "ending" on the main side, it is not necessary to perform a lottery to shift to the "ending" on the sub side, so that the sub control board 72 is in the ball ejection state on the main side. Only when the game shifts to the "ending" (that is, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side), the sub-side production A lottery may be performed as to whether or not to shift the state to the "ending".

By shifting to the dedicated production stage at the time of shifting to the "ending" in this way, the player can know in advance that the limit processing will be performed. Since it is confirmed that the limit processing will be performed after the transition to the "ending stage", there is no point in performing an additional notification effect on the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the "ending stage".

In addition, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the total value on the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases while the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games held unannounced (number of unannounced games) is smaller, and the greater the number of additional games held unannounced. It has a low probability.

In addition, after shifting to the "ending stage", in principle, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, the production of the "ending stage" is ended in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game ends. At the time or at the start of the next game, the stage shifts to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

Also, during the stay of the "ending stage", even if the bonus is activated, the limit processing will still be performed in the near future, so it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage". Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is "1499"), a predetermined number of games such as BB1 to BB4 are applied to the bonus required for digestion, and the bonus is activated. In this case, the first counter reaches "1500" during the operation of the bonus, the limit processing is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is terminated and the stage is shifted to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage during the bonus operation) even though the bonus operation is in a state where the number of balls is increased. , May give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the operation of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage as the "ending stage" until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (of the advantageous section). It may be possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing end notification, immersive prevention display, etc.).

Further, even if the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated such that the value of the first counter is "1498" to "1500" and is carried over without winning, the sub-control board 72 will be placed on the sub-control board 72. It is preferable to perform the delay processing of the end of the ending state in which the "ending stage" is continued, the bonus combination being carried over wins a prize, and the end of the activated bonus is waited for the end of the "ending stage". In this case, the sub-control board 72 is used because the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even if the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing and the notification such as the push order is not performed (normal section). It is preferable that the "ending stage" in such a non-advantageous section has a different effect from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not out of order. Further, in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won (a game that does not win a role that hinders the winning of the bonus role such as replay). It is also possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying the player that the instruction function has ended and the "ending stage" will end after the end of the bonus. Further, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the bonus operation, or when there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 is different from the other bonus operating. The effect (for example, an effect that congratulates a large amount of acquisition or an effect that includes some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, operation, or end of the bonus.

Further, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an operation of inserting a medal for the next game, an automatic re-insertion operation by operating a re-game, or a start operation) for a predetermined time after all reels are stopped. Etc.) may not be accepted, and freeze processing may be performed at the end of the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section, the number of digested games, or the number of sets. In addition, the squeeze prevention display may be displayed in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section due to the limit process occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section due to the limit process so as not to interfere with the digestion of the bonus. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. In addition, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, for the purpose of securing time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals won during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus, a predetermined time at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 Only the freeze at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and the sub-control board 72 may display information on the advantageous section, a display for preventing entanglement, and the like during the freeze at the end of the bonus. By suppressing the occurrence of multiple delays in the game due to freeze, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing of another example described later, and the specification designer may apply the above depending on the type of the limiter to be activated. It can be arbitrarily decided whether to apply the process or not, considering the flow of the effect.

(Variable limiter)
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit processing for ending the advantageous section have been described on the premise that the execution conditions for the limit processing are constant, for example, when the advantageous section reaches 1500 G after the advantageous section is started. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and it is sufficiently excessive gambling if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section). Can exert the effect of suppressing. Therefore, when the first counter (number of digested games) satisfies a predetermined end condition, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section before the first counter (number of digested games) exceeds the upper limit value. You may perform limit processing to end.

For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the timing is halfway for the number of games in one set due to the period of "normal advantageous section" and the bonus during "ART". For example, the "ART" of this set may end at 1480G), which is the remaining 20G up to the upper limit. In such a case, the "ART" of the next set cannot be performed for all one set (50G), and the limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. Even though the next set of "ART" has started, the player may be dissatisfied if it is forcibly terminated immediately. Therefore, the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the "ART" of this set, which has a good delimiter, although it is before the upper limit is reached. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a well-separated timing, so that the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

Further, depending on the pachi-slot machine, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing limit processing, and therefore, a case of performing such ending control will also be described. For example, in a set number management type pachislot in which "ART" is fixed at 50 G per set, the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450 G (with a predetermined end condition). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50G as one set for the ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for the ending is set. It is also possible to execute the limit process on the assumption that a predetermined end condition is satisfied at the time of end and end the advantageous section. That is, the limit processing is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed from 1450 to 1500G. By allowing the limit processing to have a certain range of execution timings in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of discomfort. .. In addition, even if the number of games per set of "ART" is fixed, the timing at which one set for the ending is decided is due to the addition of bonus activation and additional specialization state that is different from the basic set. Since it is not always exactly 1400 games, which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to have a range in the setting range of the predetermined end condition (the period during which the limit processing can be reserved).

As will be described later, the limit processing can be performed not only based on the number of games but also based on the difference number of medals acquired by the player during the advantageous section and the number of occurrences of navigation (number limiter, payout number limiter, which will be described later). Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 is not limited to the case where the limit processing execution timing reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value) of the limit processing activation counter (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation count counter, etc.). When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold value is reached. The predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the "ART" of the next set is started in the set number management type "ART", the limiter is activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set. It can be adopted that it is predicted that the game will be done (in pachislot, the amount of increase in medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications. Even when the number limiter, the payout number limiter, or the navigation number limiter described later is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas on this point can be summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games that can be continued in the advantageous section, the number of differences, the number of navigations), which indicates the remaining period during which a specific game state (advantageous section) can be continued, becomes the end threshold (0 games remaining, 0 cards, 0 times). When it reaches, the specific gaming state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value (number of digested games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined termination condition (for example, advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Or, if a range is allowed for the execution timing of the limit processing as in the modified example, the value of the second numerical value is the end if any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, etc.). Specific state termination means (main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the threshold has not been reached.
In addition, as the specific state termination means, both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section becomes zero such as "ART" and the case of ending the advantageous section by the limit process are described collectively. , It may be provided as a separate process in the program.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery using the various data tables (including those not shown) described so far (including the lottery not particularly described as the lottery using the table), the random number circuit 110 Random number values for lottery (random number values for production) extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 255) are sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery values by the random number registers 2 to 7, and the result of the subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). That is, the winning / non-winning is determined by subtracting the lottery value from the lottery random number value, but the lottery method is not limited to this, and the lottery value is added to the extracted lottery random number value, and the addition result is It may be determined whether or not it exceeds 256 (whether or not a so-called "digit overflow" has occurred), and the winning / non-winning may be determined.

<Notification function controlled by the main side>
In the conventional pachi-slot machine, it is determined by the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) whether or not to notify the player of advantageous stop operation information (pushing order, etc.). However, since the presence or absence of this notification affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection), in recent years, it has been required to control the profit of the player on the main (main control board 71) side. .. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the information display 6 controlled on the main side is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation, and is controlled by the main side. A function is provided to notify (instruct) information on the reel stop operation.

Here, FIG. 45 shows the correspondence between each gaming state controlled on the main side, the internal winning combination, and the navigation data in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The navigation data "1" to "6" shown in FIG. 45 represent the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor and the notification contents of the stop operation information. Further, the navigation data "0" shown in FIG. 45 indicates that the stop operation information is not notified. Further, in FIG. 45, only the push order small winning combination and the push order replay are described and described. However, the navigation data is basically "0" for the internal winning combination other than the pushing order small winning combination and the pushing order replay.

In each gaming state in the non-advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set and the information on the stop operation is not notified regardless of which internal winning combination shown in FIG. 45 is determined. When the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, none of the numerical values is displayed on the instruction monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the numerical value of "0" is displayed on the instruction monitor. You may do so. Further, when the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to this is not transmitted to the sub side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to this is transmitted to the sub side. You may try to do it.

Navi data "1" is set when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_middle left bell 1" is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the flag-to-flag state in the normal advantageous section. The flag. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 2" or "F_middle left bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2".

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 1", "F_middle middle bell 1", and "F_lower middle bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 2", "F_middle middle bell 2", and "F_lower middle bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4".

In addition, "F_upper right / left bell 1", "F_upper right / left bell 2", "F_middle right / left bell 1", "F_middle right / left bell 2", "F_lower right / left bell 1", and "F_lower right / left bell 2". If any of the internal winning combinations of, is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, "F_upper right middle bell 1", "F_upper right middle bell 2", "F_middle right middle bell 1", "F_middle right middle bell 2", "F_lower right middle bell 1", and "F_ If any of the internal winning combinations of "Lower right middle bell 2" is determined, and if any of the internal winning combinations is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6".

In the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" is determined, if it is "batting order 1" or "batting order 2", Since the batting order is correct, the navigation data can be used as common navigation data. However, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the internal winning combination, a maximum of 6 selections of push order can be set for the small combination of push order, but this is set as a 4-choice push order. If the internal winning combination is determined for "F_upper left bell 1", the navigation data "1" is set, and the internal winning combination is determined for "F_upper left bell 2" so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. In that case, the navigation data "2" is set. The same applies to other push order small roles.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any of the push order replays is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the flag-to-flag state in the normal advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, the push order notification of the push order replay is not performed in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, when the internal winning combination of any of the pushing order small winning combination is determined, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed.

When the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 1" or "F_RT1 medium replay 1" is determined in each gaming state of the advantageous section, the navigation data "1" is set. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "1" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "1" is also determined. 1 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "1" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 2" or "F_RT1 medium replay 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "2" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "2" is also determined. 2 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "2" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_RT0 medium replay 3" and "F_RT1 medium replay 3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "3" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "3" is also determined. 3 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "3" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_RT0 medium replay 4" and "F_RT1 medium replay 4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4". Also, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "4" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "4" is also determined. 4 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "4" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_RT0 medium replay 5" and "F_RT1 medium replay 5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, the navigation data "5" is also determined when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 3" is determined and the navigation data "5" is determined by lottery (probability of 1/2). 5 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "5" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_RT0 medium replay 6" and "F_RT1 medium replay 6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6". Also, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "6" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "6" is also determined. 6 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "6" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main (main control board 71) side notifies the information of the reel stop operation by displaying the numerical values of "1" to "6" on the instruction monitor. Further, the numerical values of "1" to "6" displayed on the instruction monitor uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each.

Although the numerical values "1" to "6" notified on the main side (instruction monitor) uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, all players are clear based on the numerical values. It is not always possible to grasp the content of the notification. For example, it may not be possible for some players to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying the numerical value "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information related to the stop operation of the stop button is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211 and display unit 212) controlled on the sub side is used to notify information related to the stop operation under the control of the sub side.

For example, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right" (batting order 3), the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the middle reel 3C in the display screen of the display device 11 is displayed on the sub side. The numerical value "1" is displayed above the left reel 3L, the numerical value "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and the numerical value "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R. Notify that the order is "right".

The timing of notification on the main side can be set to any timing as long as it is at least the period of one game in which notification is performed. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the player's start operation is detected (accepted), the main side may be notified when the reel rotation starts, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the stop operations is detected. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, after the internal lottery process (see S204 of FIG. 56 described later), the reel stop control process (see FIG. 56 described later). Before S213) is started, a command including this navigation data (or information corresponding thereto) is transmitted from the main (main control board 71) side to the sub (sub control board 72) side. It should be. In this case, the existing command (for example, the start command or the reel rotation start command) may include the parameter of the navigation data (or the corresponding information), or the navigation data (or the equivalent thereof). You may send a dedicated command to send the information to be sent. This makes it possible to notify the stop operation information on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display device 11 on the sub side.

Further, as another method, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, as described above, the winning combination number may be transmitted from the main side to the sub side as information that can identify the internal winning combination. good. According to this method, the sub-side can specify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player without sending the information corresponding to the navigation data, so that the amount of data to be transmitted can be reduced.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 84, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 by using the program will be described.

[Processing when power is turned on (reset interrupt)]
First, the power-on (reset interrupt) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing when the power is turned on (reset interrupt). In the power-on (reset interrupt) processing shown in FIG. 46, when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 has started, the reset signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. It is output to the "XSRST" terminal, and after a delay operation by the security mode, it is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S1). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the initial setting of the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the division ratio in the timer prescaler register (not shown), sets the timer control register (not shown) to interrupt enable, etc., and sets the timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) for the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200, and the second serial communication circuit 115 (SCU2) for the second interface board. Initialization processing is performed (S2). Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 (S4).

Next, as a result of the write test, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the writing to the main RAM 103 is normally performed (S5).

In S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (when the determination in S5 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (when the determination in S5 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. (S6).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process based on the acquired state of the timer control register (S7). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of the timer count based on the acquired state of the timer control register.

In the present embodiment, when the timer time 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 of S2, the count process of the CPU built-in timer is started. After that, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be acquired by reading the information of the timer control register (not shown). Then, in the present embodiment, a bit (discrimination bit) capable of discriminating (seeing) whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (whether or not it is the timer interrupt state) in the timer control register. ) Is provided.

Therefore, in the process of S6, the main CPU 101 reads the information of the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 is in the ON / OFF state of the discrimination bit in the timer control register (not shown). By referring to "1" / "0"), it is determined whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process. When 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of counting by the timer circuit 113 (if the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the discrimination bit is turned on.

In S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (when the determination in S7 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S6 and repeats the processes after S6.

On the other hand, in S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (when the determination in S7 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the command transmission start timer (S8). The command transmission start timer is a timer for managing the start delay period (see FIG. 85 described later) described later, and the period from when the command transmission start timer is set until it becomes 0 is the main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 85 described later). Command data is not transmitted from the main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72) (see FIG. 80 described later). As a result, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the time required for the activation control of the sub CPU 201 (the time until the command can be received) is secured. That is, when the command transmission start timer is set, the transmission of communication data (command data) by the communication data transmission process is delayed for a period corresponding to the timer. In this embodiment, in S8, "21801" (21801 × 1.1172 ms = about 24.3561 seconds) is set as the value of the command transmission start timer. However, the value of the command transmission start timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the sub-control circuit 200 mounted at the same time.

The command transmission start timer is a software timer allocated in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 in 2 bytes, and is arranged at an address that is not erased by the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process (out of regulation) (S9). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process of the main RAM 103, and this process is performed in an unspecified work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this thumb check process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the thumb check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 described later.

After the processing of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S10).

In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described later. On the other hand, in S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the thumb check based on the result of the thumb check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is not normal (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is normal (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the state of the game to the state before the power failure detection. The details of the game return process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 described later.

When the determination in S5 or S11 is NO, the main CPU 101 displays the character string "88" indicating the occurrence of an error on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). After that, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clearing process (S14).

Here, the process returns to S10 again, and if S10 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of generating and storing a setting change command at the start of setting change. The details of the setting change confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area. Then, after the processing of S16, the main CPU 101 starts the main processing described later (see FIG. 56 described later).

[Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the game return process performed in S12 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game return process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer (SP) at the time of power failure (S21). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S22). In S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not been counted up (when the determination in S22 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S22.

On the other hand, in S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S22 is YES), the main CPU 101 has the on-edge data before the input port interrupt processing and the current state. Clear (off) the set on-edge data (S23). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the backup data of the output port from the output port backup storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and sets the backup data in the output port (S24). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data of the input port and stores the data in the data storage area (input port storage area 1 and input port storage area 2) of the input port at present and before the interrupt processing (S25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the rotating cylinder control data storage area (S26). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of reels to be checked (“3” in this embodiment) (S27).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires reel control management information (data related to fluctuation control of the display column when a power failure occurs) of a predetermined reel based on the address of the set rotation cylinder control data storage area (S28). The reel control management information (variation control management information in the display column) is information related to the control state (rotation status) of each reel, and is backed up and saved at the time of power failure.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel control management information is information corresponding to a rotation state during reel acceleration, constant speed waiting, or constant speed (S29).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S29 that the condition of S29 is not satisfied (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S32 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S29 that the condition of S29 is satisfied (YES in S29), the main CPU 101 clears the spinning control data (reel control management information) (S30). By this process, after returning to the game, the reel rotation control is started from the acceleration process. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the reel operation timing value (execution start timing “1” of the rotation cylinder control data) (S31). When "1" is set for the reel operation timing, the excitation change timing is set in the reel control process (see S903 in FIG. 79 described later), so that the main CPU 101 accelerates the reel rotation control. Start from.

After the processing of S31 or when the determination in S29 is NO, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reels (S32). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (S33).

In S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S33 is NO), the main CPU 101 changes the reel to be checked and shifts the processing to the processing of S28. Return and repeat the processing after S28.

On the other hand, in S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S33 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S34). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of power recovery" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the final address of the game RAM area is set from the start address. Delete (clear) the information up to the address.

Next, the main CPU 101 restores the data of all the registers saved at the time of power failure detection to all the registers (S35). Then, after the processing of S35, the main CPU 101 ends the game return processing, and returns the processing to the processing at the time of power failure detection.

In the present embodiment, the game return process is performed as described above. In the game return processing of the present embodiment, as described above, the input / output state of each port at the time of power failure is secured at the time of power recovery, and when the reel is rotating at the time of power failure, the reel control management is performed at the time of power recovery. The processing necessary for starting the re-rotation of the reel by acquiring the information is also performed (see the processing of S26 to S33). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reel rotation control can be stably performed even when the reel is recovered from the electric power failure during the rotation of the cylinder, and the player is not uncomfortable.

[Setting change confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting change confirmation process performed in S15 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process. If the setting key type switch 54 is turned on (that is, in the case of "setting confirmation" to confirm the current setting value) after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, this setting change confirmation is performed from S44 described later. The process may be started.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of an unspecified RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S41). Next, the main CPU 101 performs one interrupt wait process (S42). In this process, when the command transmission start timer is counting up, a non-operation command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) described later. If the command transmission start timer is not counted up, none of the commands is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, if the command transmission start timer is not counted up, this process is omitted. You may.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S44). The setting key (not shown) inserted into the setting key type switch 54 is an operation key for setting the setting value (settings 1 to 6) of the pachi-slot machine 1, and is set when the setting key is turned on. The key type switch 54 is turned on.

In S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S44 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation process and turns on the power (reset interrupt). ) Move to the processing of S16 of the time processing (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (YES determination in S44), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S45). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change start or setting confirmation start information (005H: first value) in the L register, and performs the generation / storage process of the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (S46). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (first command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and uses the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation / storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the error count relay to the ON state (S47). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display setting process of the set value (S48). By this processing, the current set value can be displayed by the 7-segment LED in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change or the setting confirmation has been performed (S49). In S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S54 described later.

On the other hand, in S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is YES), is the reset switch 76 in the main CPU 101 in the ON state? Whether or not it is determined (S50).

In S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the set value (S51). That is, each time the reset switch 76 is operated, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the set value within the range of "1" to "6". After the processing of S51, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S48, and repeats the processing after S48. On the other hand, in S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S52). ..

When the main CPU 101 determines in S52 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S48 and repeats the processing after S48. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S52 that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 101 is set in the set value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Store the value (S53).

When the determination in S49 is NO or after the processing in S53, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (S54).

In S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the off state (when the determination in S54 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S54. On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. (S55).

In S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S57 described later. On the other hand, in S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S56). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address (the address next to the setting value storage area) at the end of the setting change (the address next to the setting value storage area) in the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start. It is set and the information from the start address to the final address of the game RAM area is erased (cleared).

After processing S56 or when S55 is NO determination, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change end or setting confirmation end information (004H: second value) in the L register, and sets the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end). ) Is generated and stored (S57). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (second command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the end of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and uses the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation / storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the processing of S57, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S16 of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46).

[Setting change command generation and storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the setting change command generation / storage process performed in S46 and S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. Note that FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change command generation / storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the information of the set values (1 to 6) in the E register (S61). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state information in the C register (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the command type information (02H) of the setting change command in the A register (S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (S64). In this process, the main CPU 101 has the information set in each register in S61 to S63 and the information set in the L register in S46 or S58 (see FIG. 48) (setting change start / setting change end / setting status). Setting change start / setting confirmation end) is used to generate setting change command data, and the generated command data is saved in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50 described later.

After the processing of S64, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation and storage processing. When the setting change command generation / storage process performed in S46 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is terminated, the main CPU 101 performs the process after the process of S64 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48). Move to the processing of S47. Further, when the setting change command generation / storage processing performed in S57 during the setting change confirmation processing (see FIG. 48) is terminated, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation / storage processing after the processing of S64, and also sets the settings. The change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is also completed.

[Communication data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, for example, the communication data storage process performed in S64 during the setting change command generation / storage process (see FIG. 49) will be described. The communication data storage process is executed not only when the setting change command is generated but also when other commands are generated. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of communication data storage processing.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the A register as communication command type data in the communication data temporary storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S71). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the H register and the L register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as parameters 1 and 2 of the communication command, respectively (S72).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the D register and the E register as the parameters 3 and 4 of the communication command in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S73). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the B register and the C register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as the data of the parameter 5 and the RT state of the communication command, respectively (S74).

Next, the main CPU 101 generates BCC data (sum value) of the communication command from the data values set in the A register to the L register (S75). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the generated BCC data in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S76).

After the processing of S76, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a vacancy in the communication data storage area in the main RAM 103 (S77). In this embodiment, up to nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S77 that there is no free space in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage process and, for example, a setting change command generation / storage process (when the communication data storage area is NO). (See FIG. 49) also ends.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S77 that there is a vacancy in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is YES), the main CPU 101 is stored in the communication data temporary storage area by the above-mentioned processes S71 to S76. Each of the data is stored (registered) in the communication data storage area as communication data (command data) (S78).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data pointer update process (S79). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly updates the communication data pointer indicating the storage address of the communication data in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data pointer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 described later.

Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage processing and, for example, the setting change command generation / storage processing (see FIG. 49).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when creating one packet (8 bytes) of communication data (command data), various parameters are transferred from the register and stored in the communication data temporary storage area (communication buffer). In such a command data creation method, the data stored in each register at the time of command generation is directly stored in the communication data temporary storage area as various parameters of the command data. Therefore, when command data including unused parameters is created, the value of the unused parameters becomes an undefined value each time it is created. This makes it difficult to analyze the communication data and suppresses fraudulent acts such as goto, and since it is not necessary to add unnecessary goto countermeasure processing, the program of the main control circuit 90 by adding the goto countermeasure processing. The pressure on the capacity can be suppressed.

[Communication data pointer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the communication data pointer update process performed in S79 during the communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) will be described. Note that FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data pointer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the currently set communication data pointer (S81).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds and updates the value of the communication data pointer by one packet (8 bytes) (S82). In this process, when the value of the updated communication data pointer is equal to or larger than the upper limit size of the communication data storage area, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the updated communication data pointer to "0". This invalidates all the command data stored in the communication data storage area (makes it the same state as the discarded state).

In the present embodiment, the amount of data (1 packet) transmitted in one transmission operation is 8 bytes. That is, in the present embodiment, one command data can be transmitted by one transmission operation. Further, in the present embodiment, since a maximum of nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area, the upper limit size of the communication data storage area is 72 bytes (= 8 bytes × 9). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the range of the communication data pointer is set to "0" to "71", and the value of the communication data pointer after the update (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8) is "71 (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8) in the process of S82. If the value exceeds "upper limit value)", set the updated communication data pointer value to "0" (return the communication data storage destination address to the start address) and store the communication data. Disable all command data stored in the area (make it the same as the discarded state). If the value of the communication data pointer is set to "0", the next time the command data is stored in the communication data storage area, it is stored from the start address of the communication data storage area, so it is stored before that. The command data will be overwritten with new command data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to initialize (clear) the communication data storage area when the value of the communication data pointer exceeds "71 (upper limit value)".

Then, after the processing of S82, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data pointer update processing and also ends the communication data storage processing (see FIG. 50).

[Processing at the time of power failure (external)]
Next, the power failure (external) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the (external) processing at the time of power failure. In the power interruption (external) process shown in FIG. 52, when the power supply management circuit 93 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage (power interruption) supplied to the microprocessor 91, the power interruption detection signal is transmitted to the microprocessor 91. Is output to the "XINT" terminal of the above, and is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the data set in all the registers (S91). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data set in the power failure detection port (S92).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection port is in the ON state (S93).

In S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is not in the ON state (NO determination in S93), the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt processing permission (S94). Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 101 ends the (external) processing at the time of power failure. It should be noted that these processes performed when the determination in S93 is NO corresponds to the process of countermeasures against momentary power failure that occurs when the power supply management circuit 93 momentarily detects a power failure.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is in the ON state (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets that the medal cannot be inserted and sets the stop of the hopper device 51. (S95).

Next, the main CPU 101 saves the value of the currently set stack pointer (SP) in the stack area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S96).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a checksum generation process of the main RAM 103 (S97). This process is performed in the non-standard work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this checksum generation process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the checksum generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets access prohibition to the main RAM 103 (S98). Then, after the processing of S98, an infinite loop processing is performed until the power supply is stopped (until the power supply voltage reaches a voltage at which the main CPU 101 cannot operate).

[Checksum generation process (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the checksum generation process performed in S97 during the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52) will be described. Note that FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum generation process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the value of the current stack pointer (SP) (the used address of the stack area of the game RAM area) in the non-standard stack area of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103 (S101). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the non-standard stack area in the stack pointer (S102). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address value (F0H) on the upper side of the RAM address (address of the non-standard stack area) in the Q register (S103). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure generation flag (S104).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer to the calculation start address of the sum value in the game RAM area, and sets the sum calculation counter to the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2". Set (S105). The sum calculation counter is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation, and is provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the sum calculation counter set in S105 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the HL register to 0 (sets the value "0") (S106). By this process, the initial value "0" of the sum value is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an instruction code called a "POP instruction", and stores data (stored value) in an area of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) in the DE register. Read (S107).

When the "POP" instruction is executed, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the lower register of the pair register and specified by the stack pointer. The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address where the added address is updated by 1 is loaded into the upper register of the pair register. Further, when the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding "2" to the address) is performed for the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Therefore, in the processing of S107, the data (memory contents) stored at the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and stored at the address specified by the stack pointer plus "1". The data (memory contents) is loaded into the D register.

After the processing of S107, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation processing (S108). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the DE register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S109). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S110 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S107, and repeats the processing after S107. That is, the processes of S107 to S110 are repeated until the sum value calculation process of the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 103 is completed.

On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S110 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-specified RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S111). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard storage area. Therefore, when the sum calculation counter set in S111 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103, that is, the sum value calculation process of the entire main RAM 103 is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S112).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S113). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S114). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S115).

In S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S115 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S112 and repeats the processing after S112. That is, the processes of S112 to S115 are repeated until the process of adding the sum value of the non-specified RAM area of the main RAM 103 to the sum value of the game RAM area is completed.

On the other hand, in S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S115 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines that the value stored in the HL register is a power failure. As the sum value of, it is stored in the sum value storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S116). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) stored in the non-specified stack area in S101 in the stack pointer (S117). Then, after the processing of S117, the main CPU 101 ends the checksum generation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S98 at the time of power failure (external) processing (see FIG. 52).

[Sum check processing (non-regulation)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the thumb check process performed in S9 during the power-on process (see FIG. 46) will be described. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the thumb check process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the value of the current stack pointer (SP) in the non-specified stack area (S121). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the sum value storage area in the stack pointer, and sets the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2" in the sum calculation counter (S122). The sum calculation counter set here is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation (sum value subtraction process), and is provided in the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a sum value (checksum) from the sum value storage area (S123). By this process, the checksum (initial value before subtraction) generated when the power failure occurs is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the "POP" instruction and reads the data (stored value) of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) into the DE register (S124). .. At this time, by executing the "POP" instruction, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register, and the address specified by the stack pointer is used. 1 The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the updated address is loaded into the D register. Further, when the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding 2 addresses) is performed for the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S125). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the DE register from the value stored in the HL register (initial value of the sum value or the sum value after the previous subtraction process), and the subtraction is performed. Store the value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S126). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S127).

In S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S127 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S124, and repeats the processing after S124. That is, the processes of S124 to S127 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S127 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-specified RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S128). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S129).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S130). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the A register from the value stored in the HL register, and stores the subtracted value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S131). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S132).

In S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S132 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S129, and repeats the processing after S129. That is, the processes of S129 to S132 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the non-specified RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S132 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "sum error" in the determination result of the thumb check process. (S133). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the calculated sum value is “0” (S134).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the state (1/0) of the zero flag (bit 6) of the flag register F to determine whether or not the sum value is “0”. In the present embodiment, the sum value becomes "0" when the value of the sum calculation counter set in S128 becomes "0", that is, when the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the main RAM 103. If, "1" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F, and "0" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F if the sum value is not "0". Therefore, if "1 (on state)" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F at the time of processing in S134, the main CPU 101 determines that the sum value is "0".

In S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is not "0" (when the determination in S134 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is "0" (when the determination in S134 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "power failure abnormality" in the determination result (S135). ).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the power failure generation flag (S136). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure generation flag is in a state without power failure (off state) (S137).

In S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is in the state of no power interruption (when the determination in S137 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is not in the state of no power interruption (when the determination in S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets "normal" in the determination result (S138).

After the processing of S138, if S134 is a NO determination or S137 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 saves the determination result in the thumb check determination result and clears (offs) the power failure occurrence flag (S139). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) stored in the non-specified stack area in S121 to the stack pointer (S140). Then, after the processing of S140, the main CPU 101 ends the thumb check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S10 of the power-on processing (see FIG. 46).

[Main processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main processing (main operation processing) of the pachi-slot machine 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (hereinafter referred to as a main flow).

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the end of one game" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address to the game RAM area. Delete (clear) the information up to the final address. The storage area in this range is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input check process for each medal sensor (see FIG. 5), a start switch 79, and the like. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: a value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes a hard latch random number) and a random number value for production used in various lottery related to playability (0 to 65535). 0 to 65535: the value of the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number, 0 to 255: the values of the random number registers 2 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number), etc. The random number value is stored in the random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random number value acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the internal winning combination by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101 is, for example, a process of generating an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), a process of expanding the hit request flag data, and a process of storing the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. And so on. The details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data for a start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The start command is configured to include a parameter (winning combination number, etc.) for specifying an internal winning combination or the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second interface board control process (S207). The second interface board control process is executed in the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process for outputting, for example, a test signal related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 via the second interface board 302 for the tester.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state-based control process (S208). In this process, the main CPU 101 is at the start of the game among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S209). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and acquires the attraction priority table selection table number, the attraction priority table number, and the stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the game state. And the process of storing "3" in the stop button non-operation counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S210). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 79 described later) executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. Each reel is then accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which it is controlled to maintain that constant speed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has been started.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the rotation stop of the corresponding reel based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the valid line, and sets the number of medals to be paid out based on the determination result. The details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an illegal hit check process (S215). In this process, the main CPU 101 synthesizes a hit request flag (internal winning combination) and a winning operation flag (display combination), and determines whether or not there is an illegal hit error based on the combined result. The details of the illegal hit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Further, as long as each reel is stopped without causing an erroneous winning by the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72 described later), this illegal hit check process can be omitted from the viewpoint of reducing the control load.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning check / medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating a winning operation command. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the number of credits based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S214, and performs the medal payout process. The details of the winning check / medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a BB check process (S217). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. The details of the BB check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an RT check process (S218). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs RT state transition control based on the symbol combination displayed as a stop on the effective line. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state-based control process at the end of the game (S219). In this process, the main CPU 101 has, among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44, at the end of the game. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed. Then, after the processing of S219 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S201.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the procedure of medal acceptance / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. Further, the automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

In S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described later.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process, an LED lighting control process for the number of medals inserted, and the like. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). In this process, the main CPU 101 may subtract the value of the automatic insertion medal counter at once (for example, "3") or may subtract "1" at a time. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is "0" (S224).

In S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S224 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S222 and repeats the processing after S222.

On the other hand, in S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when S224 is a YES determination), or when S221 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 is used for medal auxiliary storage. The warehouse switch check process is performed (S225). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the on / off state of the medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S226). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted based on the result of the medal insertion state check process (S227).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal can not be inserted (when the determination in S227 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal can be inserted (when the determination in S227 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S228). In this process, the main CPU 101 credits the medal, for example, based on the medal sensor input state, a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally, or when the number of medals inserted exceeds a specified number. Perform processing etc. The details of the medal insertion check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted or credited based on the result of the medal insertion check process (S229).

When it is determined in S229 that the main CPU 101 is in a state where medals can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S229 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S229 that the main CPU 101 is not in a state where medals can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S229 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S230). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

After the processing of S230, if S227 is a NO determination or S229 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of inserted medals is the number of playable starts (S231). In this embodiment, the number of cards that can be started is 3 regardless of the game state (that is, the game can be started only when 3 cards are inserted).

In S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is the number of playable start numbers (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S234 described later. On the other hand, in S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is not the playable start number (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a medal inserted (S232). ).

In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal has been inserted (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S232 that no medal has been inserted (NO determination in S232), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 48 (S233). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating and storing a setting change command at the start of setting confirmation. This makes it possible to check the set values and hall menus (various history data (errors, power interruption history, etc.)) regardless of whether the game state is a bonus state (special prize operation state). It is possible to suppress cheating. In the setting change confirmation process performed in S233, even if the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state, a setting change command (setting confirmation start) including at least information on the current setting value is generated and stored. Therefore, the command data may be stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Thereby, it may be possible to check whether or not the set value is appropriate (whether or not it is within the range of settings 1 to 6) for each game.

After the processing of S233 or when the determination in S231 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S234).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S234 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S234 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S234 that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (YES in S234), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S235). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a timer value (“72” in this embodiment) in the medal monitoring timer (S236). The medal monitoring timer is a timer for monitoring the period until the excited solenoid is degaussed (that is, the period until the select plate 804 moves from the guide position to the ejection position) in the selector 66. (See FIG. 86 described later), for example, when the period until the excited solenoid completes degaussing is 80 ms, a timer value for measuring at least a longer period (“about 80.44 ms”). Is set. That is, the medal monitoring timer actually operates after the start lever 16 is operated (the start switch 79 is turned on) and the medal acceptance prohibition control is started when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. Monitor a specific period until the acceptance of medals is (physically) banned. As a result, when a medal is inserted in the specific period in combination with the start lever ON flag described later, the medal insertion check 2 process described later, etc., the medal is mistakenly swallowed (that is, the medal is inserted). However, it is prevented from being housed in the hopper device 51 without being counted. The value of the medal monitoring timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the selector 66 (mainly the solenoid). Further, as long as it is guaranteed to prevent the medal from being swallowed, the period until the solenoid that has been excited is demagnetized can be set to a period shorter than the period until the demagnetization is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag to the ON state (S237). The start lever ON flag is information for identifying whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated (the start switch 79 has been turned on) when medals corresponding to the number of playable start medals have been inserted. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check 2 process (S238). In this process, the main CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the medal insertion check process. The details of the medal insertion check process and the medal insertion check 2 process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is not in the off state (that is, is in the ON state) (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S240). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (when the determination in S240 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S238, and after S238. Repeat the process of.

On the other hand, in S240, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is "0" (when the determination in S240 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and performs the process in the main flow (when the medal monitoring timer is determined to be YES). See FIG. 56) and move to S203.

[Medal insertion process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the medal insertion performed in S222 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) and S265 during the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 60 and 61) described later. The processing will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal insertion process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the medal counter (S241). The medal counter is a counter for counting the number of inserted medals, and is provided in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S242). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. That is, the medal insertion command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 each time one medal is inserted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 turns off the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals included in the LED 82 (see FIG. 6) (S243). Next, the main CPU 101 calculates LED lighting data (lighting control data) corresponding to the number of inserted medals based on the number of inserted medals (value of the medal counter) (S244). In this process, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one, LED lighting data for lighting only the first LED for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated, and for example, when the number of inserted medals is three. LED lighting data for lighting all of the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated. The method for calculating the LED lighting data will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the calculated LED lighting data to light the corresponding LED for displaying the number of inserted medals (S245). Then, after the processing of S245, the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion processing, and performs the processing in S223 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) or the medal insertion check processing described later (FIGS. 60 and 61). See), move to S253.

[Medal insertion check process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the medal insertion check process and the medal acceptance / start check process (FIG. 57 and FIG. 58) performed in S228 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58). The medal insertion check 2 process performed in S238 in (see) will be described. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the medal insertion check process. The medal insertion check 2 process is started from S253 of the medal insertion check process, and the processes of S253 to S268 are the same as those in the medal insertion check process. This will be described as a procedure for the input check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is being replayed (S251).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S251 that the replay is in progress (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process, and processes the medal acceptance / start check process (FIGS. 57 and 57). (Refer to 58), move to S229.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S251 that the game is not being replayed (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 101 permits medal acceptance (S252). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven (the solenoid that has been degaussed is excited), and the select plate 804 shifts from the ejection position to the guide position, so that the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 14. The medals that have been awarded are counted and accommodated in the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bet button check process (S253). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) has been operated based on the ON / OFF state of the BET switch 77. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet operation is completed based on the result of the bet button check process in S253 (S254).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S254 that the betting operation is completed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or the medal insertion check 2 process) and accepts the medal. Move to S229 of the start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation has not been completed (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state (game medium acceptance state) at the time of the current processing. Acquires the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S255). The medal sensor input state is information indicating the passing status of the medal received in the medal insertion slot 14 in the selector 66, and is generated based on the detection result of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5) of the selector 66.

In the present embodiment, the medal sensor input state is represented by 1-byte (8-bit) data, and the detection result of the first medal sensor 806 on the upstream side provided side by side in the medal passing direction at the exit of the selector 66 is obtained. It corresponds to the information of bit 0 (“0” or “1”), and the detection result of the second medal sensor 807 on the downstream side corresponds to the information of bit 1 (“0” or “1”). When the passage of the medal is detected by the first medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 0, and when the passage of the medal is detected by the second medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 1. Will be done. Therefore, the medal sensor input state "0000000000B" indicates the state before or after passing the medal (at the time of passing), and the medal sensor input state "00000001B" indicates the state at the start of passing the medal, and the medal sensor input state "00000001B". "00000011B" indicates a state in which the medal is passing, and "00000010B" in which the medal sensor is input indicates a state immediately before the completion of passing the medal.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S256).

In S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has not changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is NO), the main CPU 101 is described in S262, which will be described later. Perform processing.

On the other hand, in S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag. If is on, the start lever ON flag is set to the off state (S257). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 inserts medals in a specific period from the start operation to the start of the medal acceptance prohibition control until the medal acceptance is actually (physically) prohibited. If it is detected, a process of invalidating the start operation is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 generates a normal value (normal change value) of the medal sensor input state obtained at the current processing by arithmetic processing based on the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S258).

In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "0000000000B" (when both the first and second medal sensors have not detected medals), it is regarded as a normal change value of the medal sensor input state. When "00000001B" (when the first medal sensor is medal detection and the second medal sensor is not medal detection) is generated and the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000001B", the medal sensor "00000011B" (when both the first and second medal sensors are medal detection) is generated as a normal change value of the input state. Further, in this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "00000011B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000010B" (the first medal sensor has not detected a medal, and the second (When the medal sensor is medal detection) is generated, and when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000010B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "0000000000B" (first and second medals). If both sensors do not detect medals) is generated.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (S259). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal retrograde error has occurred, and if the determination condition of S259 is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal retrograde error has occurred.

In S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the processing of S263 described later. conduct.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 101 is at the time of the current processing. It is determined whether or not the medal sensor input state of the above is the state at the time of passing the medal (“00000000B”) (S260). In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the processing of S264 described later.

In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal passing check timer (S261). The time set in the medal passage check timer in this process can be set to any time as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the medal has passed the selector 66. Further, the timer value set in this process may be changed, for example, according to the medal sensor input state at the time of the current process.

After the processing of S261 or when the determination of S256 is NO, the main CPU 101 has the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing being the medal passing state (“000000111B”), and whether or not the medal passing check timer is stopped. (S262). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal passing error (inserted medal passing time error) has occurred, and if the determination condition of S262 is satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

In S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is not satisfied (NO determination in S262), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253 and repeats the processes after S253.

On the other hand, in S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is satisfied (when S262 is a YES determination), or when S259 is a NO determination, that is, a medal passing error or a medal retrograde error has occurred. If it is determined, the main CPU 101 performs error processing (S263). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when an error occurs, such as an error command generation / storage process. The details of error handling will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 described later. Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

Here, returning to the process of S260 again, if S260 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified number of medals (three in this embodiment) have already been inserted (S264). ..

In S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that the specified number of medals have not been inserted (when the determination in S264 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process described with reference to FIG. 59 (S265). Then, after the processing of S265, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

On the other hand, in S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that a specified number of medals have already been inserted (when the determination in S264 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (S266). ). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S267). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of credits for medals is the upper limit value (50 in the present embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (S268).

In S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S268 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253 and repeats the processing after S253. On the other hand, in S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is the upper limit (when the determination in S268 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or medal insertion check 2 process). , The process is transferred to S229 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

[Error handling]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, for example, the error processing performed in S263 during the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an error processing procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 turns off the medal solenoid (S271). Specifically, the main CPU 101 stops driving the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of saving the medal payout number display data (S272). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error table setting process (S273).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires an error factor (S274). The error factor acquired in this process changes according to the process in which the error process currently being processed is read. The error factors targeted in this embodiment include "hopper empty error", "hopper jam error", "inserted medal passing count error", "inserted medal passing check error", and "inserted medal passing check error". "Insert medal passing time error", "Insert medal retrograde error", "Insert medal auxiliary storage full error", and "Illegal hit error" are specified. For example, when the error process is read after the process of S259 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal retrograde error (Cr)" is acquired as an error factor in this process. Further, for example, when the error process is read after the process of S262 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal passing time error (CE)" is acquired as an error factor in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires error display data from the error table and the error cause (S275). For example, when the error factor is "insertion medal retrograde error (Cr)", the 1-byte data "01001110B" is used as the error display data to be output to the upper digit 7-segment LED among the 2-digit 7-segment LEDs in this process. Is acquired, and 1-byte data "000001001B" is acquired as error display data to be output to the lower digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the two characters "Cr" are displayed as error information on the two-digit 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (generation) generation / storage process (S276). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates error command data at the time of error occurrence to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command when an error occurs stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command when an error occurs includes a parameter indicating the occurrence of an error.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process for 1 interrupt time (1.1172 ms) (S277). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the error has been cleared (S278).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S278 that the error has not been cleared (when the determination in S278 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S277 and repeats the processes after S277.

On the other hand, in S278, when the main CPU 101 determines that the error has been cleared (when the determination in S278 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs an error factor clearing process (S279). In addition, this processing is performed in the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restoration process of the payout number display data of the medals saved in S272 (S280).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (release) generation / storage process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command at the time of error cancellation to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command at the time of error cancellation stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command at the time of error cancellation includes a parameter indicating error cancellation. Then, after the processing of S281, the main CPU 101 ends the error processing, and shifts the processing to, for example, S253 in the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61). In the error cancellation, the generated error factor is canceled, and the error state is canceled by pressing the reset switch 76.

[Random value acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the random number value acquisition process performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number value acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires a hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the acquired random number value as a random number value for the internal winning combination lottery, and uses the random number value storage area (not) in the main RAM 103. It is stored in (shown) (S291).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a set process of the soft latch random number acquisition register for generating soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535 or 0 to 255) of the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the acquisition number (for example, 7) of the soft latch random numbers (S293). The number of acquisitions can be appropriately increased or decreased according to the number of lottery that can be performed in one game.

Next, the main CPU 101 collectively acquires the soft latch random numbers corresponding to the acquired number, and stores the soft latch random numbers corresponding to the acquired number in the random number value storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random numbers (random number values for production) acquired from the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 are hard latch random numbers (hard latch random numbers) acquired from the random number registers 0 of the random number circuit in the random number value storage area. It is stored in an area different from the area in which the internal winning combination lottery random number value) is stored. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 101 ends the random number value acquisition processing and shifts the processing to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). In this embodiment, in order to store one 2-byte random number (random number value for internal winning combination lottery) and six 1-byte random numbers (random number value for production), an 8-byte storage area is stored in the main RAM 103. It is allocated as a random number storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the soft latch random number of the 2-byte random number is not used.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S301). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the set value (any of 1 to 6) of the current game and the number of medals inserted (three in this embodiment).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for general games (see the internal lottery table in the "RT0" state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) and the number of lottery (98 times in this embodiment) (S302). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is in operation (S303). When the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is not in operation (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S305 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S303 that the main CPU 101 is operating the RB (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 101 has an internal lottery table for RB (see the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 18) and The number of lottery (7 times in this embodiment) is set (S304). In this process, the internal lottery table for general games and the number of lottery sets set in S302 are overwritten by the internal lottery table for RB and the number of lottery.

After the processing of S304 or when the determination in S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data related to the address) of the lottery target combination from the set internal lottery table and updates the lottery table address (S305).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data is RT state-specific data (S306). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the lottery value selection table (not shown) for each RT state. ..

When the main CPU 101 determines in S306 that the determination data is not RT state-specific data (when the determination in S306 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described later. On the other hand, in S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the RT state-specific data (when the determination in S306 is YES), the main CPU 101 selects data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. Is acquired, and the acquired selection data is set in the determination data (S307).

After the processing of S307 or when the determination in S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data of the lottery target combination is the data for each setting (S308). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the internal lottery value table (not shown) for each setting.

In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the setting-specific data (when the determination in S308 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, in S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the setting-specific data (when the determination in S308 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds the set value data (any of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set in the determination data (S309). The set value data added to the determination data in this process is the data associated with the set value, but the set value data "0" to "5" are not the values of the set value itself, but are "5", respectively. It is the data corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6".

After the processing of S309 or when the determination in S308 is NO, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area in which the lottery value of the lottery target combination is stored based on the set determination data (address data), and sets the address to the address. The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

For example, in the case of an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to both the RT state and the set value, the lottery value is referred to both the RT state lottery value selection table and the internal lottery value table for each setting. Is obtained. That is, for example, in an internal lottery table for a general game state (see FIGS. 16 and 17), an internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip") in which the lottery value fluctuates when the RT state is different based on the RT0 state. For the internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip"), the lottery value is changed according to the game state (RT1 to RT5 state), and the lottery value is changed when the set value is different. The lottery value is changed according to the set value (settings 1 to 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value (any of 0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery execution process (S312). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the random number value acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the lottery target combination). In this lottery execution process, if the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (overflow), it is determined that the lottery target combination has been won (the lottery target combination has been determined as the internal winning combination). To.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores a value obtained by adding the lottery value to the random number value (random number value after the lottery execution) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery execution process has won (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination has been won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table and refers to the winning request flag status (corresponding to the winning internal winning combination). For example, the special prize winning number (that is, information that can identify the type of the winning bonus combination) and the small winning combination winning number (that is, the winning small winning combination or replay combination) corresponding to "No." in FIGS. 16 to 18 Value) (information that can identify the type) is acquired (S315). Then, after the processing of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery has not been won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is NO), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery target combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and the lottery target combination is selected. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (S317).

In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S317 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S305 and repeats the processes after S305.

On the other hand, in S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S317 is YES), that is, when the internal winning combination is "missing", the main CPU 101 determines. Set the loss status (S318). The "missing status" corresponds to the winning request flag status in which both the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number are "0". Then, after the processing of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 extracts a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number based on the winning request flag status acquired in the internal lottery process, and extracts the extracted special winning winning number and the small winning combination winning number in the main RAM 103. It is stored in the winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

In the present embodiment, the special prize winning numbers "1" to "4" are associated with the internal winning combinations "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4", respectively. In addition, the small winning combination "1" to "23" are associated with the internal winning combination "F_confirmed lip" to "F_shot lip" (see FIG. 23), and the small winning combination numbers "24" to "23" are associated with each other. "61" is associated with the internal winning combination "F_chance eye A1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" (see FIG. 24), and the small winning combination numbers "62" to "68" are associated with each other. Internal winning combinations "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC2" are associated with each other (see FIG. 23). Then, the value of the winning request flag status is composed of a value obtained by multiplying the special prize number indicating these values by the value of the special prize winning number and adding the small winning combination winning number. Therefore, in order to extract the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number from the value of the winning request flag status in the processing of S321, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 divides the value of the winning request flag status by the special winning number. This is an example of data compression for identifying the internal winning combination, and other data structures can be appropriately adopted as long as the special prize winning number and the small winning combination can be extracted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has been won based on the extracted small winning combination winning number (S322). In this process, if the small winning combination winning number is any of 1 to 68, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won, and if the small winning combination winning number is 0, the small winning combination winning number is 0. , The main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replaying combination) did not win.

In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replaying combination) has not been won (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S331 described later. On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has been won (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small winning combination winning number as the initial value of the subtraction result (when it is determined that S322 is YES). S323).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a hit request flag table (not shown) (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0" (S326).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is not less than "0" (NO determination in S326), the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S327). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the small winning combination winning number specified in the hit request flag table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process of S328, the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit specified in the hit request flag table is calculated.

The above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 are repeated as many times as the number of small winning combination winning numbers. When the processes of S325 to S328 are repeated a plurality of times, the number of blocks acquired in the bit number calculation process of S327 and S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data for each block are stored in another storage area. Will be done. Further, the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit are information (on-bit information) for designating the storage destination of the hit request flag data.

Here, returning to the processing of S326 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the hit request flag storage area ( The internal winning combination storage area) is set (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 is a hit request flag to be checked (updated) based on the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes (on-bit information) of the hit request flag data in block units. Set only the storage area. Specifically, the address of the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated) is stored in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a compressed data storage process (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated). The details of the compressed data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

After the processing of S330 or when the determination in S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26) and determines whether or not there is a carry-over combination (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is no carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the bonus combination (BB1 to BB4) based on the special prize winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Is determined (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has not been won (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process and shifts the process to S206 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has been won (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the winning special prize winning number in the carry-over combination storage area (S333).

After the processing of S333 or when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the special prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area, and sets the RT state to RT5. Set to the state (S334). Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting processing and shifts the processing to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Compressed data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, for example, the compressed data processing performed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the compressed data storage process.

The compressed data storage process shown in FIG. 66 is executed not only in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) but also in S649 during the symbol code acquisition process (see FIG. 68 described later) described later. In the compressed data storage process executed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65), the flag data to be processed is the hit request flag data (flag data related to the winning combination), but the symbol code acquisition process described later. In the compressed data storage process executed in S649 in (see FIG. 68 described later), the flag data to be processed is the winning operation flag data (flag data related to the winning combination). Then, both processes are the same except that the types of flag data to be processed are different.

Therefore, in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the flag data to be processed is referred to as “process target flag data”, and the flag table to be processed is referred to as “process target flag table”. In addition, in accordance with this description, in the following description of the compressed data storage process, the winning request flag data or the winning operation flag data is referred to as "processing target flag data", and the winning request flag table or the symbol-corresponding winning operation table described later is used. (Not shown) is referred to as a "process target flag table".

First, the main CPU 101 sets the storage destination check bit (S341). In this process, the storage destination check bit is stored in a register other than the A register.

The storage destination check bit is 1-byte data for designating a block that is a storage destination (transfer destination) of the processing target flag data. In the present embodiment, both the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area are composed of two blocks (blocks of storage areas 1 to 8 and blocks of storage area 9). Then, for example, when the internal winning combination “F_JAC1_1” is determined, the number of blocks of the storage destination becomes “2”, so that “00000011B” is set as the storage destination check bit in the processing of S341. The value (1/0) of bit 0 of this 1-byte data corresponds to the presence or absence of a storage destination in the blocks of the storage areas 1 to 8, and the value of bit 1 (1/0) corresponds to the block of the storage area 9. Corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the transfer counter in byte units to "8" (S342). In the present embodiment, since the number of bytes in at least one block is "8", "8" is set as the initial value of the transfer counter.

Next, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted from the storage destination check bit (S343). The transfer instruction bit corresponds to the data of bit 0 in the storage destination check bit, and in the processing of S343, the storage destination check bit stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once (for 1 bit). As a result, the transfer instruction bit is extracted. Specifically, when the 1-byte register (register other than the A register) in which the storage destination check bit is stored is shifted to the right once, the data stored in bits 7 to 1 are changed to bits 6 to 0, respectively. As it moves, the data of bit 0 before the shift is output. Then, the data output by this shift process becomes the value of the transfer instruction bit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit (S344). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is "1". For example, when "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit, transfer is performed in the first (corresponding to the first block of the storage area) and second (corresponding to the second block of the storage area) determination process of S344. It will be judged that there is an instruction.

In S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S344 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S354 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S344 that there is a transfer instruction (YES in S344), the main CPU 101 acquires byte unit storage destination designation information from the processing target flag table (S345). In this process, the transfer destination is stored in the start address of the area in which the flag data of the process target combination (winning combination or winning combination) in the processing target flag table is stored as the byte unit storage destination specification information. Byte data is retrieved.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) to be referred to in the process target flag table (S346). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets an address that specifies the head storage area of the block that is the storage (transfer) destination of the processing target flag data as the initial address. For example, in the processing of the first block, the address of the storage area 1 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346, and in the processing of the second block, the address of the storage area 9 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit from the byte unit storage destination designation information (S347). The transfer instruction bit referred to here corresponds to bit 0 of the byte unit storage destination designation information, and in the processing of S347, the byte unit storage destination designation information stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once. Extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit (outputs the data of bit 0).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the transfer instruction bit extracted in the process of S347 (S348). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is "1". For example, when "00000001B" is set as the byte unit storage destination designation information, the bit 1 data "1" is processed in S347 of the first time (the storage area 1 of the first block or the storage area 9 of the second block). Is output as the value of the transfer instruction bit, and it is determined that there is a transfer instruction. However, in the second to eighth processes of S347, it is determined that there is no transfer instruction.

In S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S351 described later.

On the other hand, in S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is YES), the main CPU 101 is the processing target flag stored in the address in the currently set processing target flag table. The data (hit request flag data or winning operation flag data) is transferred (copied) to the designated storage area (S349).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) to be referred to in the process target flag table (S350).

After the processing of S350 or when the determination in S348 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs an address update processing (processing of adding 1 to the address) for designating the storage area to be the storage destination of the processing target flag data (S351). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the transfer counter (S352).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the transfer counter is "0" (S353). In S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is not "0" (when the determination in S353 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S347 and repeats the processing after S347.

On the other hand, in S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is "0" (when the determination in S353 is YES), does the main CPU 101 have a transfer referent remaining in the current storage destination check bit? Whether or not it is determined (S354). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit at the time of the current process. Then, when the bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit, that is, when the block to be processed exists, the main CPU 101 gives a transfer instruction to the current storage destination check bit. It is determined that the target remains.

In S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S342 and processes after S342. repeat. On the other hand, in S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target does not remain in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the compressed data storage process and performs the process. For example, it is transferred to S331 in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65).

[Retract priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S212 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pull-in priority storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets "3" to the number of search reels (S621). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S622). In this process, a pull-in priority table (not shown) is selected based on the internal winning combination and the operation stop button.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage area selection process (S623). In this process, the pull-in priority data storage area of the reel to be searched is selected. Next, the main CPU 101 sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (number of times) (S624).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S625). In this process, the symbol code is acquired by referring to the winning operation flag storage area and the symbol code storage area corresponding to the number of symbol checks. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation process (S626). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating the winning operation flag data. The details of the AND operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S627). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the bit is set to "1" in the winning operation flag (winning combination) storage area (see FIG. 25), and the bit is set to "1" in the hit request flag storage area. For the winning combination, refer to the pull-in priority table (not shown) to acquire the pull-in priority data. The details of the attraction priority acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S628). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of main reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding main reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of slip pieces exists in addition to the number of slip pieces determined based on the stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority. By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the pull-in priority storage area (S629). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a pull-in priority data storage area for the next check symbol. Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S630). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S631).

In S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S631 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S625 and repeats the processing after S625. On the other hand, in S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S631 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a search target reel change process (S632).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of search reels (S633). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of search reels is "0", that is, whether or not the series of processes described above has been performed on all the main reels (S634).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S634 that the number of search reels is not "0" (when the determination in S634 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S622 and repeats the processing after S622. On the other hand, in S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is "0" (when the determination in S634 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56), move to S213.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S625 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol code acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 clears the winning operation flag storage area (S641). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets "0" in all the storage areas in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the first reel symbol arrangement table (not shown) (S642).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (S643).

In S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (when the determination in S643 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is not stopped (NO determination in S643), the main CPU 101 sets the second reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S644). In this process, the first reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S642 is overwritten by the second reel symbol arrangement table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (S645).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S645 that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (YES in S645), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is not stopped (NO determination in S645), the main CPU 101 sets the third reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S646). In this process, the second reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S644 is overwritten by the third reel symbol arrangement table.

After the processing of S646, or when S643 or S645 determines YES, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol check process at the time of executing the stop operation on the reel to be stopped controlled, and corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the symbol acquired by the symbol check process. Acquire a winning operation table (not shown) (S647). The symbol-corresponding winning operation table is a table for identifying the type of winning combination (symbol combination) that can be won if the corresponding symbol stops on the effective line in the reel to be stopped and controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area (S648). Next, the main CPU 101 performs the compressed data storage process described with reference to FIG. 66 (S649). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the winning operation flag data stored in the symbol-corresponding winning operation table to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area.

For example, when the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped and the symbol located on the effective line during the stop operation is "blank", the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be won are FIGS. 19 to 22. As shown in, "S_XD lip", "S_bar lip 2", "S_RT1 transition lip", and "S_special role 1".

After the processing of S649, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area updated by the compressed data storage processing, sets the symbol code storage area, and the data length of the winning operation flag storage area (9 bytes in this embodiment). Is set (S650). Then, after the processing of S650, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol code acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S626 of the pull-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[Logical product operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, for example, the logical product calculation process performed in S626 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the AND operation processing. The logical product calculation process shown in FIG. 69 is performed not only in S626 in the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) but also in S686 in the attraction priority acquisition process (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later) described later. Is also executed.

In the logical product operation process executed in S626 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67), the two data to be ANDed are stored in the winning operation flag set in S650 during the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process. It is the data of the area and the data of the symbol code storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "9" of the data length (9 bytes) set in S650 during the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process corresponds to the "number of logical products" described later.

On the other hand, in the logical product calculation process executed in S686 in the pull-in priority acquisition process described later (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later), the two data to be logically ANDed are in the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area. And the data of the winning operation flag storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes “1” of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag described later corresponds to the “number of logical products” described later.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the logical product source data (for example, the data in the symbol code storage area) (S661). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product operation of the logical product source data and the logical product destination data (for example, data in the winning operation flag storage area), and saves the operation result as the logical product destination data (S662).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the AND source data to be acquired (S663). Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical AND destination data to be referred to (S664).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of logical products (S665). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of logical products is "0" (S666).

In S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is not "0" (when the determination in S666 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S661 and repeats the processes after S661. On the other hand, in S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is "0" (when the determination in S666 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the logical product calculation process and stores the process, for example, in the pull-in priority order. Move to S627 of the process (see FIG. 67).

[Pull-in priority acquisition process]
Next, the attraction priority acquisition process performed in S627 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. 70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the attraction priority acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is time to check the right reel 3R (specific display column) (S671).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S671 that it is not the time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S671, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is the time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is YES), the main CPU 101 has "ANY role" in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not (a combination of predetermined symbols) is included (S672). The "ANY combination" here means a combination in which the winning is confirmed regardless of at least the stop symbol of the right reel 3R (at least the winning combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 3R is an arbitrary symbol). However, in this embodiment, the "ANY role" is not defined.

In S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination does not include the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination includes the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the winning operation flag storage area "ANY". The storage area corresponding to the "combination" is masked (S673). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "1" in the bit corresponding to the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. If the "ANY combination" is not specified in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination, the processes of S671 to S673 may not be required. Further, when the "ANY combination" defines the stop symbol of the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C as an arbitrary symbol, the processing of S672 and S673 is performed even when the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C is being checked. It may be done (the same applies to the processes of S681 to S683 described later).

After the processing of S673, or when S671 or S672 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 is an address obtained by adding "1" to the address of the storage area at the end of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Is set, the stop prohibition data is set, and the winning operation flag data length (data length of the winning operation flag storage area: 9 bytes in this embodiment) is set (S674). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the stock button operation counter and the stop button operation state (S675). The stop button operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation is detected. Further, the operation stop button operation state is acquired by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the address of the set winning operation flag storage area by 1 (S676). Next, the main CPU 101 generates hit request flag data from the set winning operation flag storage area and the corresponding hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25), and based on the generated hit request flag data. Generate a prohibited winning operating position (S677).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (S678).

In S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is not the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is YES), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the value of the third stop. Whether or not it is determined (S679).

In S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later. On the other hand, in S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is NO), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is a value (S680).

In S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is YES), whether or not the main CPU 101 is after the right reel 3R is stopped. (S681).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S681 that the right reel 3R has been stopped (YES in S681), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has not been stopped (NO determination in S681), the main CPU 101 has a flag that the hit request flag may be interfered with by "ANY combination". It is determined whether or not (whether or not the "ANY combination" is not included in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination) (S682).

In S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is not a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is NO), the main CPU 101 currently checks "ANY". It is determined whether or not it is time to check the hit request flag including the "combination" (S683).

In S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is the time to check the hit request flag including the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S683 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later.

On the other hand, in S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is not the time to check the hit request flag including "ANY combination" (when S683 is NO determination), when S678 or S680 is NO determination, or S681. Alternatively, if S682 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the winning operation flag data length (S684). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning operation flag data length is “0” (S685).

In S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is not "0" (when the determination in S685 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S676 and repeats the processing after S676.

On the other hand, in S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is "0" (when the determination in S685 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a stop control pull-in request flag setting process (S686). .. In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 performs the logical AND operation process described with reference to FIG. 69. In the logical product operation process executed in the process of S686, as described above, the data of the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area is set in the "logical product destination data", and the data of the winning operation flag storage area is set. It is set in the "logical product source data", and the number of bytes "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag is set in the "logical product count". The RT operation combination display flag is a storage area in which the symbol combination related to the RT transition is defined in the winning operation flag storage area, and in the present embodiment, it is only the storage area 1 as shown in FIG. 25.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the pull-in priority table address storage area and acquires the pull-in priority table (S687). In this process, the initial value "1 (001H)" of the pull-in priority data is set to the currently set address, and one of the pull-in priority tables is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (000H) (S688).

In S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is an end code (when the determination in S688 is YES), the main CPU 101 is described in S705 described later. Process. On the other hand, in S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is not an end code (when the determination in S688 is NO), the main CPU 101 operates a winning operation. The flag storage area is set (S689).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the pull-in priority data based on the pull-in priority table stored in the currently set address (S690). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the block counter of the pull-in priority table (S691).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks of the attraction priority table, and adds 1 (+1 update) to the address of the attraction priority table to be referred to (S692).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires check data based on the updated pull-in priority table address, and extracts check bits from the check data (S693).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the extracted check bit is "1" (S694).

In S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is not "1" (when the determination in S694 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is "1" (when the determination in S694 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the reference pull-in priority table. (+1 update), and based on the updated address, the determination data is acquired from the pull-in priority table (S695).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target based on the determination data acquired in S695 (S696). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the currently acquired winning operation flag data with the determination data, determines whether or not the former corresponds to the latter, and the former corresponds to the latter. In that case, it is determined that the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target.

In S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is not the determination target (NO determination in S696), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is the determination target (YES determination in S696), the main CPU 101 updates the attraction priority data (S697). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates (overwrites) the currently set attraction priority data with the attraction priority data associated with the determination data acquired in S697.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the check data (S698). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the check data by one bit to the right (direction from bit 7 to bit 0). In this process, "0" is set in the bit 7 of the check data after the shift.

After the processing of S698, or when the determination in S694 or S696 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the check data has a bit to be checked (a bit in which "1" is set) (S699).

In S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that the check data does not have a bit to be checked (NO determination in S699), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S702 described later. On the other hand, in S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that the check data has a bit to be checked (when the determination in S699 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be checked (+1 update). ), And the number of checks is subtracted by 1 (S700).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S701). When the main CPU 101 determines in S701 that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S701 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S698 and repeats the processing after S698.

On the other hand, in S701, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S701 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently referred to. Addition is performed to update the address of the winning operation flag storage area, and the value of the block counter is decremented by 1 (S702). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the block counter is "0" (S703).

In S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is not "0" (when the determination in S703 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S692 and repeats the processing after S692.

On the other hand, in S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is "0" (when the determination in S703 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the pull-in priority table to be referred to (+1 update). ) (S704). Then, after the processing of S704, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S688, and repeats the processing after S688.

Here, returning to the processing of S679, S683 or S688 again, if S679, S683 or S688 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 uses the attraction order data set at this point as the final attraction priority data. Set (S705). If S679 or S683 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets "0 (00H)" as the final pull-in priority data. In this case, since the end code is assigned to the attraction priority data "0 (00H)", no attraction data (stop prohibition) is set. Then, after the processing of S705, the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority acquisition process, and shifts the process to S628 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S711). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs port output process of reel stop enable signal OFF data. Further, this processing is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not the "constant speed" has been reached) (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels are not "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S712.

On the other hand, in S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal ON process (S713). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs port output process of the reel stop enable signal ON data. Further, this processing is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S714).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S714 that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO determination in S714), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S713 and repeats the processes after S713. On the other hand, in S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S714 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28), and the stop button is not yet pressed. The value of the operation counter is subtracted by 1 (S715).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S716). Further, in this process, the address (start address) set process of the rotation cylinder control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S717). This process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103, similarly to S711. Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop selection process (S719). Although detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the number of slip pieces to the stop start position, and sets the addition result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the symbol code storage process (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the scheduled stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) (S722). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) based on the value of the stop button non-operation counter, and the value of the stop button non-operation counter is set. When it is "0", it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop.

In S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the reel of the final stop (NO determination in S722), the main CPU 101 performs a control change process (S723). In this process, when the reel is at a specific stop position, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated. Next, the main CPU 101 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 67 (S724).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a stop interval remaining time standby process (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process until a predetermined reel stop interval time set in advance elapses. Then, after the processing of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S711, and repeats the processing after S711.

Here, returning to the processing of S722 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S722 that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is YES), the main CPU 101 excites all the reels. Determines whether or not is in the stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is not in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

On the other hand, in S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is YES), the main CPU 101 keeps the stop button operated for the third stop in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (the stop button is not released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation remains in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, in S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation is not in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process. Move to S214 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Prize search process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the winning search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning search process.

First, the main CPU 101 transfers and stores the data of each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) to the corresponding storage area of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S761). .. Then, at the end of this processing, the address at the end of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout number data table (not shown) that defines the payout number (see FIGS. 19 to 22) of the winning combination (symbol combination) in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of payout number tables (for example, "4" in this embodiment) as the initial value of the winning search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the number of medals to be paid out (in this embodiment, any one of 1, 2, 5, and 8) in the C register based on the address set in the HL register. , The determination target data is set in the A register, and "2" is added (+2 update) to the address set in the HL register (S764). In the payout number data table, the data of the payout number of medals is defined as, for example, "payout number (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0". Further, in the following, the data "0" in the data "number of medals to be paid out (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0" set in the C register is referred to as a "determination bit". This determination bit is information indicating whether or not the block is a determination target block of the winning search.

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the data of the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the block is a determination target block based on the value of the extracted determination bit (S766). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is a determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is "1". In this embodiment, regardless of the number of medals to be paid out, the value of the determination bit is always defined as "0", so that the processing of S766 is always a NO determination.

In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S768 described later. On the other hand, in S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register (-). 1 update) (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination in S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data of the storage area specified by the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result is a prize based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a prize.

In S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is not a prize (when the determination in S769 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S776 described later. On the other hand, in S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is a prize (when the determination in S769 is YES), the main CPU 101 has three current games (three bets on medals). ) (S770).

In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described later. On the other hand, in S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is not a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is NO), the main CPU 101 pays out the two-card game (a game in which the number of medals bet is two). The number of sheets is set in the C register (S771). In this embodiment, since there is no two-card game, the processing of S770 and S771 becomes unnecessary.

After the processing of S771 or when the determination in S770 is YES, the main CPU 101 updates the number of payouts (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register to the value of the current winning number counter, and sets the added value to the number of payouts.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (S773).

In S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S775 described later. On the other hand, in S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is not less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum number of payouts "15" to the number of payouts. (S774).

After the processing of S774 or when the determination in S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

After the processing of S775 or when the determination in S769 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another prize (S776). In S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is another prize (when the determination in S776 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769 and repeats the processes after S769.

On the other hand, in S777, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no other winning (when the determination in S776 is NO), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (updates -1) the value of the winning search counter (S777). For example, when there is only one valid line, a plurality of small winning combinations will not be won in duplicate, so that the determination process of S776 is always a NO determination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning search counter is "0" (S778).

In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is not "0" (when the determination in S778 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S764 and repeats the processing after S764. On the other hand, in S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is "0" (when the determination in S778 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning search process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S215 in.

[Illegal hit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the illegal hit check process performed in S215 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the illegal hit check process. The illegal hit is a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number (internal winning combination) that are drawn by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64) and stored in the winning number storage area by the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65). Based on this, it is a term indicating that the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped on the effective line with a combination of symbols that cannot be established (symbol combination is not established).

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S781). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the size of the winning operation flag storage area (the number of bytes, “9” in the present embodiment) to the value of the check counter (S782).

Next, the main CPU 101 is based on the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently set, and the internal winning combination stored in the storage area in the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) corresponding to the address. Data (hit request flag data) is acquired (S783). Next, the main CPU 101 synthesizes the data of the winning combination (winning operation flag data) stored in the address of the currently set winning operation flag storage area and the data of the internal winning combination (winning request flag data) ( S784).

In this synthesis process, first, the main CPU 101 obtains an exclusive OR of the winning combination data (winning operation flag data) and the internal winning combination data (winning request flag data). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains a logical product of the obtained exclusive OR calculation result and the winning combination data (winning operation flag data), and the calculation result of the logical product is used as the synthesis result. If no illegal hit error has occurred, the value of this synthesis result is "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an illegal hit error has occurred based on the result of the synthesis process of S784 (S785).

In S785, when the main CPU 101 determines that an illegal hit error has not occurred (NO determination in S785), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be referred to by +1 (S786). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the check counter (S787). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the check counter is "0" (S788).

In S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is not "0" (when the determination in S788 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S783 and repeats the processing after S783. On the other hand, in S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is "0" (when the determination in S788 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S216 in.

Here, returning to the processing of S785 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S785 that an illegal hit error has occurred (when the determination in S785 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the error processing described with reference to FIG. 62. (S789). By this processing, the two-character "EE" indicating the occurrence of an illegal hit error is displayed as error information on the 2-digit 7-segment LED (both for displaying the number of payouts and for displaying the error) included in the information display 6. Error display data is output. The state of occurrence of the illegal hit error (error state) is released by pressing the reset switch 76 (see FIG. 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the winning number counter and the data of the winning request flag storage area (S790). Then, after the processing of S790, the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, since the configuration of the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) is the same as that of the winning request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning operation flag The winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area arranged in the main RAM 103 at the time of combining the combination of the storage area combination and the internal winning combination can be configured in the same configuration. Therefore, the calculation result of S784 (the result of synthesizing the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination) in the illegal hit check process of the present embodiment is simply a logical product of the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination. (For example, executed by the "AND" instruction). As a result, in the present embodiment, the illegal hit check process can be streamlined and simplified, the free space of the main control program can be secured (increased), and the increased free space can be used for playability. It will be possible to increase.

[Prize check / medal payout process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the winning check / medal payout process performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning check / medal payout processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the winning operation command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The winning operation command is configured to include a parameter for specifying a winning operation flag (display combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S802). By this process, the winning operation command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is "0" (when the determination in S803 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and performs the process in the main flow (when the winning check / medal payout process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S803 is NO), the main CPU 101 has the maximum number of medals credited (stored). In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number is 50 or more (S804).

In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (when the determination in S804 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (updates +1). S805). The added value of the credit counter is displayed by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout number check process (S806). The details of the medal payout number check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (S807). In S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the payout of medals has been completed (when the determination in S807 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S217.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S807 that the payout of medals has not been completed (NO in S807), the main CPU 101 performs a payout interval standby process (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until the preset medal payout interval time (60.33 msec in this embodiment: 54 cycles of the interrupt process (1.1172 msec cycle) described later with reference to FIG. 79) elapses. Wait. Then, after the processing of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S803, and repeats the processing after S803.

Here, returning to the process of S804 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S804 that the number of credits for medals is equal to or more than the upper limit number (50) (when the determination in S804 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines. The medal payout process is performed (S809). By this process, the medals that are not stored as the number of credits are paid out. Also in the processing of S809, the processing of S806 to 806 may be repeated every time one medal is paid out until the payout of medals is completed. Then, after the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Medal payout number check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the medal payout number check process performed in S806 during the prize check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75) will be described. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal payout number check process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the medal OUT counter (S811). The medal OUT counter is a counter for counting the number of times the medal is paid out. Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the payout number counter (S812). The payout number counter is a counter for counting the payout number of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number 7SEG display process (S813). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process of displaying the value of the payout number counter by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the payout number included in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process of the winning combination end number counter (S814). In addition, the bonus combination will win the winning combination counter (combination "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB"). Then, when the bonus game starts, the number of payouts that can be paid out in the bonus game is set (see Fig. 77 below), the remaining number of medals to be paid out during the bonus game is counted, and the end of the bonus game is completed. It is a counter for making a judgment (see S822 of FIG. 77 described later). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the value of the combination end number counter with the lower limit value “0”, and if the value of the combination end number counter is larger than the lower limit value “0”, the combination end number counter. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (updated by -1), and when the value of the winning combination end number counter is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the value of the winning combination ending number counter is held at "0". The number of payouts set in the combination end number counter is not the number actually paid out to the player. For example, 240 pieces are set in the combination end number counter and the combination end number counter is 240. If 15 medals are paid out in this state, the actual number of medals to be paid out will be 255. After 240 cards are paid out, the number-of-sale counter becomes "0", and thereafter, the lower limit of the value of the number-of-sale counter is maintained as "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the value of the winning number counter by 1 (S815).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a credit information command generation process (S816). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the credit information command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The credit information command is configured to include a parameter for specifying the number of credits for medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S817). By this process, the credit information command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the processing of S817, the main CPU 101 ends the medal payout number check process, and shifts the process to the process of S807 in the winning check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75).

[BB check process]
Next, the BB check process performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Note that FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BB check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state (S821). In S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not the bonus state (when the determination in S821 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S831 described later.

On the other hand, in S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is a bonus state (when the determination in S821 is YES), is the main CPU 101 having a value of "0" or less for the number of consecutive end sheets? Whether or not it is determined (S822). In S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is not "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S218 in.

On the other hand, in S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus end processing (S823). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears various information in the bonus state. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT4 state flag to the on state (S824). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state after the end of the bonus state to the RT4 state. Then, after the processing of S824, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

Here, returning to the processing of S821 again, when the determination in S821 is NO, the main CPU 101 uses the symbol combination (combination "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB") related to the BB combination. Or, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "C_blue different color BB") is displayed (S825). In S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not displayed (when the determination in S825 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S218 inside.

On the other hand, in S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is displayed (when the determination in S825 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a bonus operation time process (S826). In this process, various processes necessary for starting the operation of the bonus, such as setting the bonus state in the game state of the next game, are performed. Next, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (the number of payouts that triggers the end of the bonus: "240" in BB1 and BB2, and "165" in BB3 and BB4) in the value of the combination end number counter (in this embodiment). S827). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT5 state flag to the off state (S828). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the RT state before the start of the bonus state. Then, after the processing of S828, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check process performed in S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Note that FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the RT check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S831). In S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT5 state (inter-flag state). Is determined (S832). In S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of.

On the other hand, in S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT state is the RT3 state (S833). When the main CPU 101 determines in S833 that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S837.

On the other hand, in S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the RT game number counter (S834). That is, the main CPU 101 manages the game period in the RT3 state. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT game number counter has become 0 (S835). In S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S835 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter has become 0 (when the determination in S835 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the on state and turns the RT3 state flag to the off state. Set (clear) to (S836). By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S836, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), has the main CPU 101 displayed a combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition (combination "S_RT3 transition")? Whether or not it is determined (S837). In S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is displayed (when the determination in S837 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT3 state flag to the ON state and sets the RT game number counter to the RT game number counter. 8 is set (S838). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. Then, after the processing of S838, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S837 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition (combination "R_RT1"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "transitional eyes") is displayed (S839). In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S839 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip (combination "S_RT1 transition lip"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination) is displayed (S840).

In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition is displayed (when the determination in S839 is YES), and in S840, the main CPU 101 displays the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition lip. When it is determined (S840 is YES determination), the main CPU 101 sets the RT1 status flag to the ON status (S841). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT1 state. Then, after the processing of S841, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S840 that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S840 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip (combination "S_RT2"). It is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols of "Transition Lip") is displayed (S842). In S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S842 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT2 state flag to the ON state (S843). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT2 state. Then, after the processing of S843, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S842 that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S842 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip (combination "S_RT0"). It is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols of "Transition Lip") is displayed (S844). In S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S844 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state (S845). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S845, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). On the other hand, in S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S844 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (when it is determined). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S219.

[Interruption process controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)] Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the interrupt process performed by the main CPU 101 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interrupt process. The interrupt process repeatedly executed in a cycle of 1.1172 msec occurs based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (see S2 in FIG. 46). This is a process executed when the interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S902). In this process, various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch connected via the external bus interface 104, and index sensors (not shown) provided on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, etc. The signals input from various sensors of are checked. In the present embodiment, the various switches and various sensors are connected to the input port IC (not) via the external bus interface 104 via the cabinet side relay board 44, the door relay terminal board 68, the reel relay terminal board 74, and the like. It is connected to the input terminal of the input IC connected to the output terminal (shown in the figure). Further, in the main RAM 103, an input port storage area (not shown) for the main CPU 101 to store the state of the input port IC (simply referred to as "input port" in this embodiment) connected to the external bus interface 104. ) Is assigned. Here, the input port storage area includes, for example, an input port storage area 1 for storing the current state of the input port and an input port storage area 2 for storing the state of the input port before the interrupt processing. Consists of. Then, in this process, the main CPU 101 first stores various information stored in the input port storage area 1 in the input port storage area 2, and then stores various information read from the input port in the input port storage area 1. do. The connection configuration of various switches and various sensors and the configuration of the input port storage area are not limited to those described above. That is, the configuration may be such that the main CPU 101 can recognize the on / off states of various switches and various sensors.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all the reels is requested, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 101 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S904). In this process, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 8) of the main control circuit 90. The details of the communication data transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal passing check process (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the inserted medal has passed the selector 66 based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S906). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display 6, and displays, for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of credits, the stop button pressing order data, and the like. The details of the 7-segment LED drive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S907). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a count (subtraction) process of various set timers. The details of the timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S908). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S909). In the door open / close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open / closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on (door closed) / off (door open) state of the door open / close monitoring switch 67.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a test firing test signal control process (S910). In this process, control process for outputting various test signals to the tester via the second interface boat or the like is performed. Further, this process is executed using the non-standard work area (see FIG. 11C) of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, this process is also performed at times other than the test firing test (after the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in the game store), but at this time, the main control board 71 passes through the second interface boat or the like. Since it is not connected to the testing machine, various test signals are generated but not output.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S911). Then, after the processing of S912, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt processing.

[Communication data transmission process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the communication data transmission process performed in S904 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data transmission process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a WDT setting process (S961). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restarting the WDT in the reset controller 106 and the like. The details of the WDT setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S962). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is being delayed. In S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not been counted up (when the determination in S962 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (FIG. 79). (See) Move to the process of S905 in.

On the other hand, in S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S962 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the communication data transmission is completed (S963). .. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the data stored in the command status register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and if the data indicating the completion of transmission is stored, the communication data. Determines that the transmission is completed, and if the data indicating the transmission completion is not stored, it is determined that the communication data has not been transmitted.

In S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data transmission has not been completed (NO determination in S963), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). Move to the processing of S905 inside. On the other hand, in S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has been transmitted (YES in S963), the main CPU 101 performs the communication data acquisition process (S964). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring communication data (command data) from the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (S965). In S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S969 described later.

On the other hand, in S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the non-operation command data in each register (S966). ). The non-operation command data is information related to the player's game operation (for example, input operation, start operation, stop operation, etc. as an operation for advancing the game) (for example, these operations have been performed). Each parameter is set so as not to include the information indicating the above, or, for example, the information indicating the internal winning combination determined based on the start operation). Note that each parameter of the non-operation command data includes, for example, a parameter indicating the on / off state of each switch in the pachi-slot machine 1 and a parameter indicating the on / off state of each sensor (for example, the input port storage area 1). And the information stored in the input port storage area 2) may be set. As a result, the possibility of malfunction or failure of these switches and sensors may be determined on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) (S967). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the non-operation command data generated in S966 in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data acquisition process (S968). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring non-operation command data stored in the communication data storage area in S967.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at least no operation command is transmitted for each interrupt process (see FIG. 79) even when there is no communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized communication data from being transmitted from the outside due to the absence of communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. From this point of view, the non-operation command data does not include information related to the player's game operation, but the content of each parameter to be set is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

After the processing of S968 or when the determination in S965 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets the buffer size for one packet in the transmission counter (S969). In the present embodiment, since the transmission data for one packet is 8 bytes, the buffer size for one packet is also composed of 8 bytes. Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of communication data (command data) are stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted in the order in which they are stored (first in the oldest storage) (FIFO format). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires transmission data from the communication buffer and sets it in the transmission data register (S970). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the transmission data in the transmission data register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) in 1-byte units. As a result, the set transmission data is transferred to the transmission shift register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and is transmitted one packet at a time.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates (+1) the address of the communication buffer (S971). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the transmission counter (S972). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission counter is "0" (S973). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of the transmission data for one packet is completed. In S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is not "0" (when the determination in S973 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S970 and repeats the processing after S970.

On the other hand, in S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is "0" (YES in S973), the main CPU 101 performs a communication data pointer update process (see, for example, FIG. 51) (S974). ). Then, after the processing of S974, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S905 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[WDT setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the WDT setting process performed in S961 during the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) will be described. Note that FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the WDT setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the WDT clear register (not shown) in the WDT in the reset controller 106 (S981). Next, the main CPU 101 sets clear data (for example, "55H") at the set address (S982). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the restart data (for example, “AAH”) at the set address (S983).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the command transmission start timer with its lower limit value "0", and if the command transmission start timer is larger than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is subtracted by 1 (-1 update). If the command transmission start timer is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is held at "0" (S984). Then, after the processing of S984, the main CPU 101 ends the WDT setting processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S962 of the communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 80).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the WDT reset setting and management information (WDT permission / prohibition, reference clock, timeout time (for example, 419.4 ms), etc.) are stored in the program management area, and S982 and By performing the process of S983, the set timeout time is remeasured. When a reset signal is output due to a timeout and the main CPU 101 is restarted, the checksum generation process (FIG. 52) is performed because the system is restarted without executing the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52). The sum value calculated by 53) is not stored in the main RAM 103 (sum value storage area). Therefore, in this case, the thumb check determination result in the power-on processing (see S11 in FIG. 46) is not normal (that is, as “RAM abnormality”), and an error occurs in the information display 6 (7-segment LED display). The character string "88" indicating the occurrence is displayed.

[7-segment LED drive processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the 7-segment LED drive process performed in S906 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment LED drive process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) “1” to the value of the interrupt counter (S921). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (S922).

In S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is not an odd number (when the determination in S922 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). ) Move to the processing of S907. That is, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment LED drive process is performed every two interruption cycles. In the present embodiment, an example of executing the 7-segment LED drive process when the value of the interrupt counter is an even number has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED drive process is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED drive process is performed when the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number. The LED drive process may be executed, or the execution timing of the 7-segment LED drive process may be determined by using the quotient or the remainder when the value of the interrupt counter is divided by an arbitrary integer.

On the other hand, in S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (when the determination in S922 is YES), the main CPU 101 acquires navigation data from the navigation data storage area (S923). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the push order display data storage area for storing the push order display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S924).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S925). In this process, the main CPU 101 creates push order display data (7-segment display data) based on the navigation data, and stores the generated push order display data in the push order display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the credit counter (S926). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the credit display data storage area for storing the credit display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S927).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S928). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates credit display data (7-segment display data) based on the value of the credit counter, and stores the generated credit display data in the credit display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the 7-segment common counter storage area for storing the value of the 7-segment common counter described later (S929). Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the 7-segment common counter (S930). In this process, when the value of the updated 7-segment common counter becomes "8", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the 7-segment common counter to "0". In this embodiment, in order to dynamically control the 7-segment LED, the value of the 7-segment common counter is updated every 8 times.

Next, the main CPU 101 creates common selection data based on the value of the 7-segment common counter, and addresses the target cathode data storage area (the target storage area in the push order display data storage area or the credit display data storage area). Is set (S931). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs clear data to the cathode of the 7-segment LED (S932). This process is performed in order to eliminate the influence of the afterimage by temporarily turning off the 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires and sets 7-segment cathode output data from the target cathode data storage area (S933). Next, the main CPU 101 generates 7-segment common output data from the 7-segment common backup data and the common selection data (S934).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the 7-segment common output data and the 7-segment cathode output data in the 7-segment common backup data and the 7-segment cathode backup data, respectively (S935). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment cathode output data and 7-segment common output data (S936). Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S907 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[7-segment display data generation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 and S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) will be described. Note that FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment display data generation process.

The "display data" described later, which is generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 during the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), corresponds to the push order display data and corresponds to the 7-segment LED drive process (FIG. 82). The later-described "display data" generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S928 in (see 82) corresponds to the credit display data.

First, the main CPU 101 divides the display data set in the cathode data storage area by "10", acquires the quotient value of the division result as the display data of the upper digit of the 2-digit 7-segment LED, and divides the data. The remaining value of the result is acquired as the display data of the lower digit (S941). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the upper digit based on the acquired display data of the upper digit (S942).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S942 that the high-order digit display is to be performed (when the determination in S942 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S944 described later. On the other hand, in S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that the high-order digit is not displayed (NO determination in S942), the main CPU 101 sets no display of the high-order digit (S943).

After the processing of S943 or when the determination in S942 is YES, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the upper digit (S944). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired high-order digit display data in the high-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S945).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the lower digits (S946). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired low-order digit display data in the low-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S947).

Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment display data generation processing. At this time, when the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S925 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 changes the process to the process of S926 during the 7-segment LED drive process. Move. On the other hand, when the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S929 in the 7-segment LED drive process. ..

[Timer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the timer update process performed in S907 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area (not shown) in the HL register, and sets the number of 2-byte timers in the B register (S951). The 2-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time of 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) or more (that is, a timer value exceeding 1 byte).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 2-byte timers with the lower limit value "0", and if the number of 2-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the number of 2-byte timers (updates -1). When the number of 2-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 2-byte timers is held at "0" (S952). Further, in the process of S952, the main CPU 101 subtracts 2 (-2 updates) the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area set in the HL register. Note that, for example, since the command transmission start timer also has a 2-byte timer, the update may be performed in this process (see FIG. 81).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S953). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S954).

In S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S954 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S952, and after S952. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S954 is YES), the main CPU 101 has a 1-byte timer storage area in the HL register. The update start address of is set, and the number of 1-byte timers is set in the B register (S955). The 1-byte timer storage area is used to manage the time less than 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) (that is, the timer value not exceeding 1 byte). For example, the medal monitoring timer is updated as a 1-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 1-byte timers with the lower limit value “0”, and if the number of 1-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value “0”, the number of 1-byte timers is subtracted by 1 (-1 update). When the number of 1-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 1-byte timers is held at "0" (S956). Further, in the process of S956, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) the update start address of the 1-byte timer storage area set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S957). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S958).

In S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S958 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S956, and after S956. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S958 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs an electromagnetic counter control process (S959). ). In this process, an output control process is performed when a signal indicating IN / OUT of the medal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47. Then, after the processing of S959, the main CPU 101 ends the timer update processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S908 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

<Explanation of operation when the power is turned on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the operation of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power is turned on.

In FIG. 85, "Main CPU" indicates the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90), and "SubCPU" indicates the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "security mode" of the "Main CPU" indicates the state of being in the above-mentioned security mode, and the operating state "startup delay period" of the "Main CPU" is described above after the end of the security mode. Indicates the period until the command transmission start timer is set and the set command transmission start timer becomes "0" (that is, the period during which the setting can be changed but the transmission of communication data is delayed). The operation state "normal operation period" of the "Main CPU" indicates a state in which the delay in the transmission of the communication data has ended and the communication data can be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "initialization" of the "SubCPU" is the initialization (boot) process (hard boot time, BIOS (driver) initialization, kernel) when the power of the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200) is turned on. (OS) booting, etc.) indicates a state (that is, a state in which communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) cannot be received), and the operating state "normal operating period" of the "SubCPU" is It shows a state in which the initialization (startup) process at the time of turning on the power is completed and the communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) can be received.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the "setting operation A", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then "normally". The operation when the setting change is completed in the "operation period" is shown, and the "transmission mode A" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change in the case of the "setting operation A". Indicates the transmission timing of the command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode A", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode A". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation / storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the "setting operation B", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then the "setting operation B" is performed. The operation when the setting change is completed in the "startup delay period" is shown, and the "transmission mode B" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting in the case of the "setting operation B". Indicates the transmission timing of the change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode B", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode B". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation / storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input, the operating state of the security mode is controlled by the security unit (not shown) of the microprocessor 91. In the security mode, the main CPU 101 is delayed in starting for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area. When the security mode ends, the main CPU 101 delays the transmission of communication data for a predetermined period. The main CPU 101 can change the setting even when the transmission of communication data is delayed.

Here, as shown in "Setting operation A", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed after the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, the main CPU 101 communicates. When the delay in data transmission is completed, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and when the setting change is completed, the setting change command (setting) is sent. Change / setting confirmation completed) (COM2) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

On the other hand, as shown in "Setting operation B", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed during the delay in the transmission of the communication data, the main CPU 101 uses the communication data. When the transmission delay ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. .. That is, when the delay in transmitting the communication data ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sent to the communication data storage area. If registered, these communication data are transmitted in the registered order.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by delaying the start-up of the main CPU 101 when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main control circuit 90 can be started stably and the main CPU 101 is started. By delaying the transmission of the communication data after the delay is completed, the time required for starting the sub-control circuit 200 can be secured and the sub-control circuit 200 can be started stably.

Then, after the delay in starting the main CPU 101 is completed, the setting can be changed even before the delay in transmitting the communication data is completed. Therefore, for example, when opening a store in a game store, a pachislot machine is used. When the power of 1 is turned on (that is, when a reset signal is input accordingly), the setting can be changed in advance without waiting for the start completion of the sub-control circuit 200, so that the setting can be changed at the time of turning on the power. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in.

Furthermore, if the setting change is made before the delay of communication data transmission ends, the communication data indicating these is registered at the start of the setting change or the end of the setting change, and the delay of communication data transmission is delayed. Since these communication data are transmitted in the order in which they are registered when the operation is completed, even if the setting is changed in advance without waiting for the start completion of the sub-control circuit 200. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the information held between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, for example, even when the sub control circuit 200 is configured so that a determination of fraudulent activity, an error, or the like is performed according to the order of communication data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the result of such determination is obtained. It is possible to make an accurate judgment without affecting.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least no operation command data is transmitted even when the communication data is not registered when the communication data transmission process is performed. For example, it is possible to prevent communication data from being transmitted from the outside by an unauthorized means such as illegally accessing the connection line between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, since the registration / transmission of the non-operation command data is not performed before the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, it is possible to reduce the control load when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on. From the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activity, the non-operation command data may not include information related to the player's game operation.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the delay period for starting the main CPU 101 is composed of a fixed period and a variable period, and these periods (or a range thereof) can be appropriately selected and set. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate delay time according to the specifications of the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. From the viewpoint of shortening the period until the setting can be changed, it is possible to set a predetermined period range (for example, "no setting" in the random extension period) in which 0 is always determined as the variable period. In that case, the range of the predetermined period may be set.

In this embodiment, an example in which the setting value setting operation (setting change operation) is possible during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) after the end of the security mode will be described. However, the operations that can be executed during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) are not limited to this. For example, the setting key type switch 54 is turned on during the period (“startup delay period”) in which the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is off and the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”). In that case, the setting value confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) may be enabled during the period. As a result, for example, even when the setting is not changed but the current setting value is to be confirmed when opening the store in the amusement store, the setting confirmation is performed in advance without waiting for the start completion of the sub-control circuit 200. Since this can be done, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the power is turned on.

<Explanation of operation when inserting medals>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the operation of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention when the medal is inserted will be described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the medal is inserted.

In FIG. 86, the “start switch” indicates the start switch 79, and the “medal sensor” is the detection state of the upstream medal sensor (first medal sensor) 806 and the downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807. (Medal sensor input state), the "medal acceptance signal" indicates that the on state ("ON") indicates that the medal acceptance is permitted (medal acceptance permission), and the off state ("OFF") indicates the medal. Indicates a state in which reception of medals is prohibited (see FIGS. 57 and 58).

Further, in FIG. 86, the “solenoid” indicates the solenoid of the selector 66 (the drive source that shifts the select plate 804 to the guide position or the discharge position), and the “monitoring timer” indicates the medal monitoring timer (FIGS. 57 and FIG. (Refer to 58), the "operating state" is a state in which the game can be advanced after the start operation in the pachi-slot machine 1 ("during the game") and a state in which the game cannot be advanced after the start operation ("game wait"). "), And.

When the number of medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) is inserted, the main CPU 101 can accept the start operation for the start lever 16. As shown in FIG. 86, in this state, if medals can be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is less than 50), until the start operation for the start lever 16 is performed (started by the start switch 79). Until the operation is detected), the state in which the medal acceptance is permitted (the state in which the medal acceptance signal is "ON") continues. Although not shown, in this state, if medals cannot be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is 50), the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the medal acceptance signal is "OFF". It has changed to the state).

In the main CPU 101, a start operation (first start on the left side in FIG. 86) is performed by the start switch 79 in a state where medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) are inserted and medals can be stored as the number of credits. When an operation (transition from "OFF" to "ON" of the start switch 79) is detected as "start operation A"), the medal acceptance is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). It shifts from a certain state) to a state in which medal acceptance is prohibited (a state in which the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"), starts shifting the solenoid of the selector 66 to a degaussing state, and monitors with a medal monitoring timer (a state). Measurement) is started. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is set to the ON state.

When a medal is inserted (that is, before the transition of the solenoid of the selector 66 from the excited state to the degaussed state is completed) during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the main CPU 101 inputs the medal sensor of each medal sensor. When it is determined that medals have been inserted based on the state), the inserted medals are counted by changing the solenoid of the selector 66, which was in the process of changing from the excited state to the degaussed state, to the excited state again. It is guided into the hopper device 51. Further, in this case, the "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79, but based on the detection, the operation state is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation ("during the game"). Do not change. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned off. That is, in this case, "start operation A" is invalidated.

In the main CPU 101, when a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state of the solenoid of the selector 66 is completed), the medal of each medal sensor is inserted. When it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the sensor input status), the acceptance of medals is further permitted from the state in which the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the state in which the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"). It may be changed to a state (a state in which the medal reception signal is "ON").

After that, the main CPU 101 again presses the start operation 79 (in FIG. 86, the second start operation on the right side (the transition from "OFF" to "ON" of the start switch 79) is referred to as "start operation B"). Is detected, the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed from the excited state to the degaussed state again, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started again. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is set to the ON state again.

Then, when the main CPU 101 does not insert a medal during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the degaussed state) (that is, the medal sensor of each medal sensor). When it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the medal sensor input state), the operating state is after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, after the solenoid of the selector 66 has been transferred from the excited state to the degaussed state). Is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, after the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)). Processing can be executed).

Although not shown, the main CPU 101 has a medal from a state in which "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79 and medal acceptance is permitted (a state in which the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). The reception of medals is prohibited (the medal reception signal is "OFF"), the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed to the demagnetization state, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started. Later, during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state of the solenoid of the selector 66 is completed), if no medal is inserted (medal sensor input state of each medal sensor). Even when it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the above), as in the case where "start operation B" is detected by the start switch 79, after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, the solenoid of the selector 66 is excited). After the transition from the state to the demagnetized state is completed), the operating state is changed to a state that allows the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, the medal is accepted). -The processing after the start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) can be executed).

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is started with the start operation of the player, for example, a medal monitoring timer for preventing the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is provided. It is set. By this medal monitoring timer, the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine from the state where the inserted medals are stored inside the gaming machine (the state where the select plate 804 is in the guide position due to the solenoid being excited) in the selector 66. The time until the physical transition to the state (the state in which the select plate 804 is in the discharge position due to the degaussing state of the solenoid) is secured.

If a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the start operation that is the basis of the medal is invalidated, and in the selector 66, the inserted medal is inside the gaming machine. Return to the stored state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals and to appropriately process the inserted medals.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the medal is counted, so that the inserted medal can be counted. It is possible to prevent counting omissions and to process the inserted medals more appropriately.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timer value of the medal monitoring timer (for example, “72”) is changed from the state in which the inserted medals are stored inside the gaming machine to the state in which the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Since the period until the physical transition (for example, 80 ms) or more (for example, "72" x 1.1172 ms) is set, the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is surely prevented. Therefore, it becomes possible to process the inserted medals more appropriately. When the driving unit is a solenoid as in the present embodiment, such an effect becomes more remarkable.

<Other effects that can be performed in this embodiment>
Next, in addition to the above-mentioned effects, an example of other effects that can be performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. In the following, as an example of other effects, it is explained that the bonus combination winning notification effect for notifying whether or not the bonus combination is won can be executed, but its use is for the bonus role. It is not limited to the one that notifies whether or not the prize is won.

For example, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, or in the line battle state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section. May be performed to signal whether it has been decided to continue. Further, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state of the advantageous section, or in the right acquisition state of the advantageous section. It may be performed to inform whether it has been decided to grant the right. That is, it can be used as an effect executed to notify the player whether or not the privilege is given.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (1))
First, with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88, an effect example (No. 1) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described. 87 and 88 show, for example, a bonus winning combination that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of the bonus winning combination is determined. An production example (No. 1) of the notification effect is shown. In addition, FIG. 87 shows a display example when the bonus combination is not won (when the bonus combination is not won), and FIG. 88 shows a display example when the bonus combination is won (when the bonus combination is won). Is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the production example (No. 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Spot the difference effect" is performed. This "spot the difference effect" is based on an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work, for example, when there is an original work such as a cartoon, an animation, or a game used as a motif of Pachislot 1. It is an image that allows the player to search for any differences (that is, mistakes) with respect to the base image. In this case, the predetermined image may be an image as it is (that is, the same) as the original work, or A / D conversion is performed, the approximation ratio is changed, and the resolution is changed with respect to the image of the original work. Or it may be a remastered (ie, approximate) image. Further, although the image is based on the original work to the last, it may be an image newly created for use in the production of pachislot 1.

The base image is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be appropriately set. For example, even if there is no original work (for example, if it is an original motif), an image that is the same as or similar to an image that can be displayed in other productions in pachislot 1 may be set. Further, for example, in order to explain the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1, an image that is the same as or similar to the image printed in the booklet distributed at the game store may be set. Further, for example, the base image does not have to be a still image, may be a moving image, or the still images may be sequentially displayed in a slide format.

In the upper part of FIG. 87, an image in which five characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is the same as the base image. Also, at the bottom of the image, a message and a cursor that urge you to point out the differences from the base image, such as "If there is a part that is different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!" Is displayed.

At this time, the player moves the cursor to a desired position (performs a selection operation) by tracing a predetermined area on the display surface of the sub display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19 with a finger, and the sub display is also performed. Touch the decision button (not shown) displayed on the display surface of the device 18 (perform the decision operation), and specify the part that you think is wrong.

The means for detecting various operations related to the effect such as the player's selection operation and determination operation is not limited to the sub-display device 18. For example, when the display device 11 is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a touch sensor is provided in at least a part of the display device 11 (for example, a place where the display in the upper part of FIG. 87 is performed). When the touch sensor detects the movement of the player's finger (when the selection operation is performed), the cursor is moved accordingly, and the enter button displayed at the place where the touch sensor is provided. When (not shown) is pressed (when a determination operation is performed), an effect of notifying the result may be performed accordingly. Further, for example, when a physical operation means (for example, a cross key and an effect button, a jog dial, etc.) capable of detecting various operations related to the effect such as a selection operation and a decision operation is provided, such a physical operation means. The selection operation and the decision operation may be detected by. That is, any means that can detect various operations related to the player's production can be applied.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87, it is assumed that the player designates the portion where the rightmost character is displayed. Then, since the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87 does not differ from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 87, it is notified that the result of the error search in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure. The message "Out of place-sorry" is displayed.

On the other hand, in the upper part of FIG. 88, an image in which four characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is different from the base image in the portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. Also, at the bottom of the image, as in FIG. 87, it should be pointed out that there is a difference from the base image, such as "If there is a part different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!". A message and a cursor are displayed to prompt you to do so.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player designates a portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. In this case, since the designated part is different from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 88, the "spot the difference effect" for notifying that the result of the mistake search was successful is ". Along with the message "Hit ~", the message "Bonus confirmed!" Is displayed to notify that the bonus role has been won.

On the other hand, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player designates the portion where the leftmost character is displayed. In this case, since the designated part is not a part different from the base image, as in the lower part of FIG. 87, the “missing” for notifying that the result of the error search in the “spot the difference effect” was a failure. The message "-Sorry" is displayed, and even if the bonus role is won, it is not notified that the bonus role is won.

Note that the effect modes shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 show an example of the effect mode in the "spot the difference effect", and for example, the following effect mode can be adopted.

For example, the base image is based on a predetermined theme in the original work (eg, the first episode in the original work), and a plurality of (eg, 5) images (eg, digest images) are displayed in slide format. Suppose it is a thing. If the bonus combination is not won, the slide images are displayed in sequence as they are, and then each image of the slide is displayed as a thumbnail. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won, slide images in which some of the slide images are different are sequentially displayed, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape.

The player searches for whether each image displayed in the thumbnail form is based on a theme different from the predetermined theme (for example, the number of stories different from the first episode in the original work), and determines. Perform a selection operation and a decision operation on an image that is thought to be an image with a theme different from that of. Then, when an image of a theme different from the predetermined theme is included and the player specifies the image, the result of the error search in the "spot the difference effect" should be successful. Just do it. Specifically, for example, in the first episode in the original work, although only character A and character B appear, in the slide image displayed when the bonus role is won, the third and subsequent episodes in the original work are displayed. It suffices to include an image in which the character C that appears only in is displayed. By doing so, for example, a player who is attached to the original work can perform a "spot the difference production" with particular feelings, so that it is possible to further improve the interest in the production.

Further, as described above, when displaying an image that is at least partially different from the base image in the "spot the difference effect", the part different from the base image does not have to be only one place, and a plurality of places may be different. .. In this case, for example, the number of different parts may differ depending on the type of winning bonus combination. For example, if there is one part different from the base image, there is a high possibility that it has won BB3 or BB4, and if there are multiple parts different from the base image, there is a possibility that it has won BB1 or BB2. It may be made higher. By doing this, it is possible to suggest the type of bonus role that has been won.

In addition, when notifying that the result of the error search in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure, for example, a message such as "???" is displayed to clearly indicate that the result of the error search was a failure. You may not do it.

In addition, multiple types of base images are provided, and for example, when a "chance eye" is won, one of these multiple types of base images is determined, and then whether or not the bonus role is won. Depending on the situation, it may be determined whether the base image is displayed as it is, or at least a part of the image is displayed as an image having different parts. Further, in this case, the difficulty level of finding a mistake may be different depending on the type of the base image to be determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to a bonus state advantageous to the player is satisfied, the predetermined advantageous condition If is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed, and if the predetermined advantageous conditions are not satisfied, the second specific image (for example, the base image) is displayed. (Same image as) can be displayed, and when the first specific image is displayed and the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image, a predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is involved, so that the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (Part 2))
Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, an effect example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described. FIG. 89 shows, for example, a bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined. The timing chart of the effect example (No. 2) is shown, and FIG. 90 shows a display example of the effect example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect. In addition, in the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other production devices (for example, the speaker group 84 and the like) The effect can also be executed by the LED group 85).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "long press effect" is performed. This "long-press effect" is, for example, when the stop operation in the third stop operation is long-pressed in the manner shown below, an effect different from the case where the long-press is not performed is performed. be.

In the present embodiment, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is the stop button (either the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, or the right stop button 17R) in the third stop operation. It is not limited to. For example, it may be a stop button (either the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C or the right stop button 17R) in the first stop operation, or the stop button (left stop button 17L, middle stop button 17C) in the second stop operation. And either of the right stop button 17R). Further, the stop button may be operated at a timing not directly related to the stop operation. That is, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the "long press effect" can be performed.

Further, for example, the operating means to be "long-pressed" may be a bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) or a start lever 16. In this case, the bet button can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the medal insertion operation, or when it is operated at a timing different from the medal insertion operation timing. It can also be the target of "push". Further, in this case, the start lever 16 can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the start operation, or "long press" when it is operated at a timing different from the timing of the start operation. It can also be the target of.

Further, for example, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is not limited to the above-mentioned operation means for performing the operation related to the game, and may be the operation means for performing the operation related to the effect. For example, it may be a sub-display device 18 provided with a touch sensor 19, a display device 11 provided with a touch sensor at least partially described above, or the above-mentioned physical operating means.

As shown in FIG. 89, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation, and the stop switch is turned on (on-edge). When 3 seconds have passed (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" is executed, and then when the stop button in the third stop operation is finished and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge). "Direction 2" is executed. That is, when the stop button in the third stop operation is pressed and held for a predetermined period (3 seconds), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. When the stop switch is turned off (off-edge) during the execution of the "effect 1", the execution of the "effect 1" is terminated and the execution of the "effect 2" is started even in the middle of the execution.

On the other hand, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge). When the stop button in the third stop operation is finished and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge) (short press) before 3 seconds have elapsed, "effect 1" is not executed and "effect 1" is not executed. Only "Direction 2" is executed.

The effect pattern of the "long press effect" is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" and subsequent "effect 2" are performed. It may have an effect pattern to be executed. That is, when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge). Regardless of whether or not it is, it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. Further, for example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), only "effect 2" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

Further, for example, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge). However, when the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge) (when pressed for a short time), it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and subsequent "effect 2" are executed. That is, even before 3 seconds have elapsed with the stop switch in the on state (on-edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are displayed. It may have an effect pattern to be executed. Further, for example, even before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), only "effect 1" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

When having a plurality of effect patterns in this way, for example, one of the plurality of effect patterns is selected with a different selection probability depending on whether or not the bonus combination is won. It should be. Further, in such a case, even when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds, the "effect 2" is already executed. If so, the "effect 1" may not be executed.

An example of the mode in which the "effect 1" and the "effect 2" shown in FIG. 89 are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In addition, in FIG. 90, the display example at the time of long press and the time of short press when the bonus combination is won will be described.

First, when it is decided that the "long press effect" is executed, first, at least at a predetermined timing before the stop operation of the third stop operation is performed, for example, "hold down". A message is displayed, and an effect urging that the stop button should be pressed and held at the time of the stop operation of the third stop operation is executed.

After that, when the player keeps pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or more during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, "STEP 1" to "STEP 3" are sequentially displayed in "Production 1". Is executed. Then, when the player finishes pressing the stock button, for example, a display such as "WIN!" Is executed to notify that the bonus combination has been won. If the bonus combination has not been won, it may be notified in "Direction 2" that the bonus combination has not been won, for example, "LOSE" may be displayed. Further, in "Direction 1", for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination may be notified. In this case, for example, if the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP 1", the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP 2", and the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP 3", and the bonus combination is won. The effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3" may be easily selected, and if the bonus combination is not won, the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3" may be difficult to select. By doing so, by pressing and holding it for a long time, the degree of expectation that the bonus role is won will be notified, so it is possible to further improve the interest in the production where the content changes according to the operation of the player. Can be done.

On the other hand, if the player does not keep pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or more during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, the expectation degree of winning the bonus combination as described above is notified. The "effect 1" is not executed, and only the "effect 2" that informs whether or not the bonus combination is won is executed.

It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the method for recognizing the pressing time of the stop button on the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). For example, in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72), if the main CPU 101 transmits a reel stop command each time the stop switch detects that a valid stop button has been pressed, the sub CPU 201 will be the first. 3 When the reel stop command based on the press of the stop button of the stop operation is received, the time measurement is started, and when the time measurement time reaches 3 seconds, "effect 1" is executed and the third stop operation is performed. When the pressing of the stop button of the above is completed and the winning operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received, the "effect 2" may be executed. Further, whether or not the sub CPU 201 executes the "effect 1" and the "effect 2" based on the parameters indicating the on / off state of the stop switch included in the non-operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The execution timing may be controlled. By doing so, in the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side), it is not necessary to time the pressing time of the stop button, so that the control load related to the effect that the content changes according to the operation of the player is reduced. be able to.

When the "long press effect" is controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side), for example, by the operation time for the touch panel or the physical operation means described above, the sub CPU 201 is independent. It is possible to measure the time during which the operating means is operated and control the content of the effect according to the timed result. Here, in a gaming machine as described in the present embodiment, there is a capacity limitation on the main control circuit 90 side, but there is generally no particular limitation on the sub control circuit 200 side, so at least If such an effect is controlled by the sub CPU 201, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

Further, the predetermined condition for the control to execute the "effect 2" is not limited to the end of the operation on the operating means, and can be appropriately set. For example, it is possible to set a predetermined condition that an operation for an operation means different from the target operation means has been performed, and when the number of operations for the target operation means is less than the predetermined number of times, "effect". When the effect is generated in the order of "1" and "effect 2" and the number of operations to the target operating means reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the "effect 1" is not generated and the "effect" is not generated. 2 ”may be generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time measurement, " Control to execute "effect 1", control to execute "effect 2" when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected), and before a predetermined time elapses from the start of timekeeping. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible not to control the execution of the "effect 1".

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (Part 3))
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, an effect example (No. 3) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described. FIG. 90 shows, for example, a case where an internal winning combination (for example, “watermelon 2”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined, and when the bonus combination is also won, a display device with a predetermined probability. The display example of the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed in 11 is shown. In addition, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effect devices (for example, the information display 6) are described. , LED82, or an instruction monitor (instruction display)) can be used to execute the effect.

For example, the game value display unit (VL) shown in FIG. 91 may be displayed on the display device 11 in a predetermined area (payout number display unit) in which the payout number can be displayed when a small winning combination is established. , If it is an advantageous section, it may be displayed in a predetermined area (acquired number display unit) where the cumulative number of payouts in the advantageous section can be displayed, or an area different from the payout number display unit and the acquired number display unit. It may be displayed in a predetermined area of. Further, as described above, the 7-segment display such as the information display 6 controlled on the main control circuit 90 side should function as the game value display unit (VL) when the effect is executed. Just do it.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Number ahead display effect" is performed. In this "number ahead display effect", for example, the number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (planned number of medals to be acquired) is notified before the operation of the bonus state starts, so that the player wins the bonus role. It is a production that informs you that you have done it.

In the following, an example in which the value of the winning combination end number counter is displayed as the planned acquisition number to be notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect" is described, but it is notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect". The mode of the number of sheets to be acquired is not limited to this. For example, in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, the value of the winning combination end number counter is "165", but if all "15" medals are paid out in each game in the bonus state, the BB3 state. Alternatively, in the BB4 state, "12 times" of games can be played, and the actual number of payouts is "180". Therefore, the actual number of payouts, "180", may be displayed as the number of scheduled acquisitions. Also, even in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, it is necessary to insert three medals to play the game. Therefore, if the value of the number counter for the number of consecutive medals is "165", it is assumed that all the games are in the bonus state. If "15" medals are paid out, the net increase in the number of medals for each game is "15-3 = 12". Therefore, the cumulative total number of net additions is set to "12" x "11 times" = "132" according to the value of the counter for the number of end-of-roles, and this "132" is displayed as the number of planned acquisitions. You may do so. In addition, as described above, since the game can actually be played "12 times", the cumulative planned number of net increases can be "12" x "12 times" = "12 times" according to the number of times the game can actually be played. 144 "sheets may be set, and this" 144 "sheets may be displayed as the number of planned acquisitions.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the push order small winning combination is won in the BB1 to BB4 states, the medal paid out for each game depending on whether or not the pushing order is correct at the time of winning the pushing order small winning combination. The number of medals also varies (“15” or “6”; see FIG. 23). In addition, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the bonus combination is given. In the bonus state based on, push order notification is performed.

Therefore, for example, when a bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in an advantageous section, the above-mentioned "144" cards ("180" cards when the number of inserted cards is not taken into consideration) are displayed as the planned number of acquisitions. However, the probability that "15" medals will be paid out when the bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state. If it is set to 50%, ("12 sheets" x "8 times" = 96 sheets) + ("3 sheets" x "8 times" = 24 sheets) = "120" sheets (when the number of inserted sheets is not taken into consideration) ("15" x "8 times" = 120) + ("6" x "8 times" = 48) = "168") may be displayed as the number of planned acquisitions. .. That is, the planned acquisition number notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect" may be the expected value of the payout number (or net increase number) in the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 91, for example, when a predetermined internal winning combination including a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2”) is determined, it is determined that the “number of reels display effect” is executed. If so, when the rotation of all reels is stopped (that is, after the third stop), the game value display unit (VL) displays the number of planned acquisitions "165". As a result, the player is notified that he / she has won the bonus combination (“F_BB3” or “F_BB4” in the example shown in FIG. 91). In the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination is preferentially stopped and controlled over the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination. Therefore, basically, the game (bonus combination) that wins this bonus combination. In the winning game), the combination of symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination (“C_watermelon” in the example shown in FIG. 91) is displayed, and the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination (in the example shown in FIG. 91, “C_red”). Different color BB ") is not displayed. Of course, in the bonus combination winning game, it is possible to display the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, but in this case, the "number of sheets ahead display effect" may not be executed, and will be described later. As described above, the game value display unit (VL) displays the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out), and the "number ahead display effect" is used. It can also be executed.

After that, until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed (until the bonus combination is established), the display of the number of planned acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) is continued. Then, even if the operation of the bonus state is started, the display of the number of planned acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) continues, for example, a combination of symbols related to the small winning combination in the bonus state (example shown in FIG. 91). Then, when "Bell + JACA: 15 sheets") is displayed (a prize is generated during the bonus state), the number of sheets displayed in the game value display unit (VL) is appropriately subtracted and updated and displayed. That is, the game value display unit (VL) displays the planned number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state before the bonus state starts, and in the bonus state, the number of medals actually paid out. The remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out) is displayed according to the above.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the bonus combination is won, it may be decided to shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when winning a bonus combination, the number of cards to be acquired in this advantageous section (generally expected value may be used. For example, the line battle state is average). For 40 games will continue, and if the average number of medals per game increases by 1 in the line battle state, "40") will be added (added) to the number of planned acquisitions in the bonus state, and the game will be played. It may be displayed on the value display unit (VL).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, a bonus combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted is determined. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of specifically notifying the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that the interest in the effect can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the acquired value is obtained. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the game value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

<Modification examples, etc.>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine of the invention according to the present embodiment have been described above, including their actions and effects. However, the invention according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made as long as the gist of the invention according to the present embodiment is not deviated.

[Modification example]
In the present embodiment, at least in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between the set values, are won, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. It was not decided (ART lottery is not performed), but even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between each set value, are won, between each set value. As with other internal winning combinations including bonus winning combinations that have the same winning probability in, it may be decided whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (ART lottery is performed). In this case, in the ART lottery, the probability of being determined to shift to the advantageous section may be the same winning probability between the set values. That is, by defining a bonus combination that has a different winning probability between each set value, the probability that it is determined to shift to the advantageous section may be changed between each set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified even in the normally advantageous section, but the probability that the normal advantageous section is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Is given preferential treatment over the non-advantageous section, but it can also be configured as a section in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. In this case, if the lighting of the status indicator is not started when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the normal advantageous section, the lighting of the status indicator is started only when the transition is made to the advantageous section. good.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, the normal advantageous section is the period during which the player's medals decrease as a whole (that is, the ball output rate is less than "1"). It may be a period), and the advantageous section may be a period in which the player's medals increase as a whole (that is, a period in which the payout rate exceeds "1"). Further, even if there is a period in which the medals of some players decrease (for example, each of the above-mentioned preparation states) in the advantageous section, the period may be included in the advantageous section.

That is, when the game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, the advantageous section raises the expectation of the player, but the increase in the number of balls is not expected to increase (for example, the "normal" of the present embodiment. It may be configured to include an "advantageous section") and an increasing section in which an actual increase in the number of balls is expected (for example, the "advantageous section" of the present embodiment).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT2 state during the advantageous section, even though the push order notification is performed, the player shifts to the RT1 state (falls) due to a push order error of the player. , The game period of the advantageous section is supposed to progress (update), but in this case, the game period of the advantageous section should not progress (update) until it shifts (returns) to the RT2 state. You can also. Further, in this case, for example, a part of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state (for example, a game required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state). If the number is 10 games, only 5 games of 1/2, or 2 games uniformly regardless of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state) are the games in the advantageous section. The period may be advanced (renewed).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined whether or not to directly shift to the advantageous section (ART lottery is not performed). However, the internal winning combination and conditions in which the ART lottery is performed can be appropriately modified and set. For example, if the "chance role" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the "chance role" is established, the ART lottery is not performed, and if the "chance role" is missed and the "RT3 transition" is established (this). In that case, an ART lottery may be performed (regardless of whether or not the state shifts to the RT3 state). That is, when a specific internal winning combination is won, the ART lottery may not be performed if a prize is generated, and the ART lottery may be performed if a prize is not generated due to a missed prize.

In addition, for example, a small winning combination that pays out medals less than the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability, and in principle, the bonus combination is not established in the state between flags, and the game is played. It is also possible to adopt a specification that allows the game to be performed with the basic game state as the state between flags. Further, in this case, the bonus state may be configured as a state in which the acquired medals are reduced or maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is set to "1500 times", but the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period may be less or more than that. May be good. Further, the regulation monitoring period may be changed according to the situation of the game. For example, the regulation monitoring period is determined by the net increase (or payout number) of medals, and the net decrease (that is, the player inserts medals) in a predetermined pachislot machine 1 during a predetermined business day of a game store. However, if the number of medals that are not returned to the player by the payout and are beneficial to the game store (or simply the number of medals inserted) is "500", the medals correspond to the predetermined regulatory monitoring period. It is also possible to add the "500" to the "1500" number of medals and prevent the advantageous section from being forcibly terminated until the "2000" medals are obtained in a series of advantageous sections.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in this embodiment]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 99, another example of the playability (that is, the game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as a gaming state, a bonus state (special gaming state) in which the bonus is activated to provide a game period advantageous to the player, and a gaming period in which the player is not in the bonus state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. It is explained that there is a non-bonus state (normal game state), and even in the non-bonus state, there are multiple RT states in which the winning probability of the replay role is different, so that the degree of advantage of the player is changed. (See FIG. 13). Further, in the present embodiment, as the game section, an advantageous section (advantageous state) that becomes a game section advantageous to the player by notifying the player of stop operation information, and a relative advantageous section that is not the advantageous section. It has been explained that there is a non-advantageous section (normal state) that is a disadvantageous game section for the player (see FIG. 14). Then, it is possible to make various modifications to various conditions such as the game state and the start / continuation / end of the game section and their contents. Unless otherwise specified, in the other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) of the game playability (game specifications) shown below, the game state, the game section, the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols, etc. in the present embodiment are used. Game elements can be used as appropriate.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) (1)]
First, another example (No. 1) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. 92 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification), and FIG. 93 is a diagram for conceptually explaining another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the expected value of granting a game value in.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the player usually starts the game from the (A) non-advantageous section. (A) In the non-advantageous section, the amount of game value decreases because the player is not notified of the stop operation information. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a negative value, and the incline becomes a downward slope.

In the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section shifts to (B) the advantageous section. (B) In the advantageous section, the amount of game value increases (at least does not decrease) due to the information of the stop operation being notified to the player. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a positive value (at least not a negative value) and becomes an upslope (at least does not become a downslope). For convenience of explanation, in this example, the expected value of grant in the prepared state and the expected value of grant in the bonus state are not considered.

The expected value to be given can be calculated (designed) as follows. For example, if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is correct, 15 medals will be paid out, and if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is incorrect, no medals will be paid out. In the case of (32768/65536), if it is necessary to bet 3 medals in one game in principle, 30 medals are required in 10 games. And, in the case of (A) non-advantageous section, when the push order small role is won during 10 games, the push order is correct and 15 medals can be paid out. Since it is (1/2 x 1/5), if the probability is correct, the amount of medals will be -15 (15-30) during 10 games, so the expected value of grant is 1 time. It will be "-1.5 sheets" per game. On the other hand, in the case of (B) advantageous section, if the information of the stop operation is notified for all the push order small wins and the player performs the stop operation according to the information, the push order small win is won during 10 games. Sometimes the correct answer is to get 15 medals paid out in 1/2, so if the probability is correct, the amount of medals will be +45 (75) during 10 games. Since it is -30), the expected value of grant is "+4.5 cards" per game. However, these are just examples for convenience of explanation, and it is also possible to calculate (design) the expected value of grant by taking into account the winning probability of the replay role and the winning probability of the bonus role (and the expected value of grant during the bonus state). Is.

In this example, in (B) advantageous section, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value (expected value α) (B-1) advantageous section 1. And, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the second expected value (expected value β) different from the first expected value (expected value α) (B-2). ) Advantageous section 2 is provided, and when (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-1) advantageous section 1 shifts to (B-2) advantageous section 2. In this example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section is first shifted to (B-1) the advantageous section 1, and (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is (2). When the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-2) shifts to the advantageous section 2, but the transition is not limited to this. For example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) non-advantageous first. It is possible to shift from the section to (B-2) advantageous section 2 and shift to (B-1) advantageous section 2 when (2) expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied in (B-2) advantageous section 2. ..

Further, for example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it may be determined whether to shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2. , (1) Regarding the start condition of the advantageous section, (B-1) the start condition (1-1) of the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the start condition (1-2) of the advantageous section 2 are determined respectively. (A) In the non-advantageous section, shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2 depending on which start condition (1-1 or 1-2) is satisfied. You may do it.

Then, when the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied in (B) advantageous section ((B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2), (B) advantageous section to (A) non-advantage Move to the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section ends). In this example, it is assumed that the transition control of (A) non-advantageous section and (B) advantageous section is performed in this way.

Here, in this example, the expected value α in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is configured to be larger than the expected value β in the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, (B-). 2) The expected value β in the advantageous section 2 is configured to be smaller than the expected value α in (B-1) advantageous section 1). Specifically, for example, when the above example is used, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the probability (notification probability) that the stop operation information is notified at the time of winning the push order small winning combination is 100% (that is, that is). By setting (notification 5 times out of 5 wins), the expected value α is set to "+4.5 sheets", while in (B-2) advantageous section 2, information on the stop operation is provided when the push order small winning combination is won. By setting the probability of being notified (notification probability) to 40% (that is, notifying twice during five winnings), the expected value β is set to "+ -0 sheets".

The expected value α and the expected value β can be arbitrarily set. For example, if (B-1) advantageous section 1 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, the notification probability in advantageous section 1 is set to 1 to 100%. It can be set to any notification probability. Further, for example, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, and the notification probability is lower than that of (B-1) advantageous section 1. If so, the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 can be set to any notification probability from 1 to 100%.

Further, each of the notification probability in the advantageous section 1 and the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 may be a predetermined probability or may vary depending on the granting status of the game value. For example, when the expected value α and the expected value β are set to “+3.0 sheets” and “+1.0 sheets”, respectively, (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 In each of the above, the expected value of grant is calculated for each predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times), and the calculated expected value of grant is a predetermined threshold (for example, plus or minus) rather than the expected value α and the expected value β, respectively. If the deviation exceeds 1 sheet), the notification probability is appropriately changed in the subsequent game, and in each period of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. The final expected value to be given may be (approximate to) the expected value α and the expected value β.

Further, the method of setting the expected value α and the expected value β is not limited to the above-mentioned method of varying the notification probability. For example, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is high (high RT state), and (B-2) advantageous section 2 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is low (low RT state). By making the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay role different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the winning probability of the replay role is added to the given expected value. In addition, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 to different RT states.

Further, for example, (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is set to a state in which the bonus (bonus state) is not difficult to operate, and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is set to the state in which it is difficult to operate the bonus. By making the bonus operation probability (winning probability) different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the expected value given is the operation probability of the bonus and the grant during the bonus state. The expected value is added. Further, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, with respect to the operation of the bonus, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 to different control states. .. The state in which it is not difficult or difficult for the bonus to operate is the type of internal winning combination (including the carry-over combination), the type of gaming state, the control content of stop control according to them, or the stop operation. It is possible to appropriately create the information by adding the notification contents of the above information in a complex manner (for an example, see the description of FIGS. 94 to 99 described later).

Further, for example, with respect to the push order small winning combination in the above-mentioned example, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, 15 medals are paid out, and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the above-mentioned predetermined mode. If this is done, 6 medals shall be paid out, and (B-1) information on the stop operation indicating the above-mentioned predetermined mode shall be notified when the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 1. (B-2) When the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation indicating the above specific mode is notified, and by making the number of payouts different, the expected value β is higher than the expected value α. May be set to be small (in this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

Further, for example, a plurality of types of push order small winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination A and pushing order small winning combination B) are provided in the above example, and the winning probability of the pushing order small winning combination B is the winning of the pushing order small winning combination A. It is set lower than the probability, and (B-1) When the push order small winning combination A wins in the advantageous section 1, the stop operation information is notified, while when the pushing order small winning combination B wins, the stop operation is performed. The information is not notified (although the information of the stop operation may be notified), and (B-2) the information of the stop operation is notified when the push order small winning combination B is won in the advantageous section 2. , The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by not notifying the information of the stop operation when the push order small winning combination A is won. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be varied by differentiating the notification target combination between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination A and the pushing order small winning combination B are the same (or substantially the same), but the number of payouts at the time of the correct push order answer is different as described above, such as 15 and 6. Then, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed.

Further, for example, the internal winning combination has a push order small combination (for example, 6 choices) and the push order replay (for example, 6 choices), and the game state has a high RT state and a low RT state. When the push order replay is won, if the push order is correct, the combination of symbols that shifts to the high RT state if it is in the low RT state and maintains the high RT state if it is in the high RT state is displayed. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the low RT state is maintained if it is in the low RT state, and the state shifts to the low RT state if it is in the high RT state (see, for example, FIG. 23), (B). -1) In the advantageous section 1, the correct push order is notified regardless of whether the push order small combination or the push order replay is won, so that the medals increase when the push order small combination is won. When the push order replay is won, the expected value α is set so as to shift to the high RT state or maintain the high RT state, and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, one of these is the correct answer. The expected value β may be set by not notifying the pressing order.

In this case, if (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state where the correct push order is notified for the push order small winning combination and the correct push order is not notified for the push order replay, the high RT is set. It is difficult to move to the state or maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the low RT state is high), but it is easy to increase the medals when winning the push order small role. Can be created. Further, when (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state where the correct push order is notified for the push order replay and the correct push order is not notified for the push order small winning combination, the high RT state is set. Although it will be easy to shift to or maintain a high RT state (the stay rate in the high RT state will increase), it will be difficult to increase the number of medals when winning a small winning combination. can do. That is, even if the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by different types of internal winning combinations to be notified between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. Good (in this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed). In (B-2) advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set by preventing the correct push order from being notified when either the push order small winning combination or the push order replay is won. You can also do it.

Further, for example, for the push order small combination (for example, 6 choices), in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, at least the push order (that is, the correct push) is the correct answer for the first stop operation and the second stop operation. The expected value α is set by notifying (all of the order), and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, the push order that is the correct answer only for the first stop operation (that is, a part of the correct push order). ) May be notified to set the expected value β. Specifically, for example, when the first stop operation is "left", the second stop operation is "middle", and the third stop operation is "right", the push order is the correct answer. (B-1) In the case of advantageous section 1, the push order of "left → middle → right" is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the number of medals can be increased with a 100% probability. (B-2) In the case of advantageous section 2, the push order of "left →? →?" Is notified, so even if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the remaining two choices must be answered correctly by the player himself. Therefore, there is only a 50% chance that the number of medals can be increased. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the notification content (selection number) of the stop operation information different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

Further, for example, (B) the information of the stop operation is always notified in the advantageous section, and the expected value is "+10.0 sheets", which is a high net increase, but the duration of one time is relatively short (for example, between 8 games). ) It is configured as an increase section (special advantageous section), and (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 are not notified of stop operation information (or are notified with a predetermined probability less than that of the special advantageous section). However, it is configured as an effect section (normal advantageous section) with different expected values for the transition to the special advantageous section, and can be mutually transferred between the special advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. do. Then, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, a lottery to shift to the special advantageous section (AT lottery) is performed, and in the lottery, it is determined that, for example, the lottery shifts to the special advantageous section with a probability of about 1/5. (That is, the expected value α is set by the increase rate of the game medium in the increase section and the transfer probability to the increase section), while (B-). 2) The AT lottery is also performed in the advantageous section 2, and in the lottery, for example, the transition probability is set so as to win the AT lottery with a probability of about 1/20 (that is, the increase of the game medium in the increase section). An expected value β smaller than the expected value α is set depending on the rate and the probability of transition to the increase interval).

That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are made to fluctuate by making the transition probability to the increasing section (special advantageous section) different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. May be. The transition probability described above can be set as appropriate. Further, the AT lottery may not be performed in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, and in this case, in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, there is a probability of (B-) of about 1/20. 1) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section 1 is drawn, and if the lottery is won, the shift from (B-2) advantageous section 2 to (B-1) advantageous section 1 may be performed. Further, the conditions for shifting from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2 can be appropriately set. In this case, for example, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, during 5 games) without winning the AT lottery, and the fall is performed when the AT lottery is not won. The lottery was won, the number of consecutive transitions to the increased section (special advantageous section) became a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and the number of acquired sheets in the increased section (special advantageous section) was a predetermined number (for example, 400). It is possible to adopt the fact that it has become (more than one sheet). As described above, it is possible to further diversify the playability by the transition specification between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2.

In this example, the advantageous section 1 in which the expected value α is set and the advantageous section 2 in which the expected value β is set (B-2) are set as different expected values. Although it has been described by taking as an example that it has two states, there may be three or more states in which different expected values are set, and these states can be appropriately set. For example, it may further have an advantageous section 3 in which the expected value γ is set (B-3). In this case, the expected value to be given can be set so that α ≧ γ ≧ β or α ≧ β ≧ γ. That is, (B-3) advantageous section 3 which is an intermediate expected value is set between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2, or (B-2) advantageous section. By setting an advantageous section 3 whose expected value of grant is smaller than that of 2 (B-3) and gradually changing the expected value of grant each time the fluctuation condition is satisfied, the expected value of grant can be further subdivided. It may be possible to make adjustments.

(The first aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, the first aspect of the game specification premised on the other example (No. 1) of the game property (game specification) described above will be described. In this first aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+3.0 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+2.0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In this first aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) the advantageous section 1. As for (1) the conditions for starting the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+3”) for at least a predetermined period (which can be an arbitrary gaming period predetermined. For example, between 50 games). (.0 sheets) ”) (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. Further, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. As the conditions for determining the continuation of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the conditions for determining the continuation of ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of.

(B-1) When the game for the above predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) ) Move to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, the expected value of grant is the expected value β (for example, “+2”) for at least a specific period (which can be an arbitrary game period predetermined. For example, between 100 games). (.0 sheets) ”) (B-2) Advantageous section 2 continues. In (B-2) advantageous section 2, it is not determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. (B-2) When the game of the above-mentioned specific period is performed in the advantageous section 2, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and (A) the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs.

On the other hand, when (B-1) the game for the predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied even if it is not decided to continue the advantageous section, and (3) A) Move to a non-advantageous section.

In addition, (B-1) when the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is once shifted to the (A) non-advantageous section, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, an arbitrary precursor state between 4 to 32 games) has elapsed in the (A) non-advantageous section. After that, (A) the non-advantageous section may be shifted to (B-2) the advantageous section 2 to continue the advantageous section.

Further, in this first aspect, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is assumed to continue for the above-mentioned specific period, but this specific period is not set as a predetermined arbitrary gaming period, for example, (B-1). The period until the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+2.0 sheets”) in the entire (B) advantageous section including the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 may be set. That is, in the early stage (B-1) of the advantageous section, the expected value given is increased by the expected value α, and in the subsequent advantageous section (B-2), the expected value given is adjusted (smaller) by the expected value β. May be. In this case, the predetermined waiting period may be included in the entire (B) advantageous section or included in the entire advantageous section (B) when the expected value to be granted is adjusted by the expected value β. It may not be possible.

Specifically, for example, when the game value according to the expected value α is given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, the amount of the game value given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is 3 cards × 50 games. It becomes "150 sheets". After that, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, a certain standard (for example, 50 games as in the above predetermined period, longer games, shorter games, or actual game time may be used. In addition, other criteria can be adopted as appropriate), and (B) the notification probability is appropriately adjusted so that the expected value of the entire advantageous section becomes the expected value β. For example, when (B) the entire advantageous section is set to 100 games, the game value of "150 cards" is given in (B-1) advantageous section 1, so that the remaining advantageous section is (B-2) advantageous. In the section 2, the notification probability is adjusted so that the game value of "50 cards" is given between 50 games, and (B) the game value of "200 cards" may be given in the entire advantageous section. ..

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively high (expected value α is set) for a predetermined period after the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is started. (B-1) It becomes possible to play a game in the advantageous section 1), and a state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set) for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued (expected value β). B-2) It is possible to play a game in the advantageous section 2). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

In the gaming machine of the first aspect, it may not be determined to continue the advantageous state for a specific period ((B-2) advantageous section 2) after the advantageous state is continued. By doing so, it is possible to manage the ball output rate more appropriately.

Further, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated and after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the advantageous state is reached. May be continued (restarted). By doing so, not only can the payout rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

(Second aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, a second aspect of the game specification on the premise of another example (No. 1) of the game property (game specification) described above will be described. In this second aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+7.5 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+ −0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In this second aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) the advantageous section 1. As for (1) the conditions for starting the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+7”) for at least a predetermined period (which can be an arbitrary gaming period predetermined. For example, between 100 games). .5 sheets ”) (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. In addition, this predetermined period may be, for example, a period from the start of (B-1) advantageous section 1 until the given game value reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 sheets). (B-1) The period from the start of the advantageous section 1 until the game time reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined time (for example, 0.25 hours) may be set.

(B-1) When the game for the predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) the game shifts to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, (3) the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+ -0 sheets”) until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (B-2) advantageous. Section 2 continues. In this second aspect, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is set to, for example, (B) the game is played for a specific period (for example, during 1500 games) after the advantageous section is started, or ( B) It can be determined that the game value given after the advantageous section is started has reached a specific amount (for example, a net increase of 3000 sheets) (such end processing of the advantageous section is the limit described above or described later). See processing). Further, even before the end condition determined in this way is satisfied (for example, before the limit processing is executed), the bonus combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and the bonus state is activated. ), Regardless of whether it is (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2, (B) advantageous section ends, and (B) advantageous section to (A). Move to a non-advantageous section. That is, it is one of the end conditions of (3) the advantageous section that the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination that enables the transition to the bonus state is displayed in (B) the advantageous section.

As for (3) the end condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition determined to end in ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type. Further, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, until the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ((B-2)) is set for each predetermined unit (for example, 50 games in one set). ) When it is decided whether or not to continue the advantageous section 2) and it is decided to continue the advantageous section, when it is not decided to continue the advantageous section by a predetermined unit and to continue the advantageous section. (3) may end the advantageous section even before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining to continue ART) can be adopted as the conditions for determining to continue the advantageous section. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of internal winning combination.

Further, in this second aspect, it is possible to execute the specific notification by using, for example, the display device 11 in the (B) advantageous section. This specific notification is a notification effect for suggesting to the player that the bonus role has been won (carried over). However, in this second aspect, since the advantageous section ends when the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed, this specific notification causes (the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination to be displayed. Suggests information that allows the player to choose between ending the advantageous section or continuing the advantageous section (by avoiding displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination). It can also be said that it is a notification effect for doing so. Further, it may be a notification effect to suggest that it is possible to shift to the bonus state by simply displaying the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination, or the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. It may be a notification effect to suggest that the advantageous section can be continued if the above is avoided.

For example, in this second aspect, in the (B) advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed. In the case of a game, the specific notification can be configured to be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, when the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are won in duplicate (or the bonus combination is won). In the case where the replay combination or the small combination is duplicated when it is carried over, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is not displayed in principle. That is, "a game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed" is not such a situation, and if the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be used. It means that it is a game that can be displayed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play a game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit process of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding the transition to the bonus state. From this point of view, it is not always necessary to divide the (B) advantageous section into the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, the expected value given is the expected value α). It is not necessary to make the difference between the expected value β and the expected value β), and (B) the expected value given in the advantageous section may be a constant expected value given (for example, “+1.5 sheets”).

Further, for example, in this second aspect, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. Can be configured so that (2) the specific notification is executed when the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification can be executed, the specific notification is performed when the game is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed". It may be configured to be executed. In addition, if (2) the bonus combination is won in (B-2) advantageous section 2 after the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied and (3) before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, at this time. It can be configured to execute the specific notification. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification can be executed, the specific notification is performed when the game is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed". It may be configured to be executed. Further, in the case of winning (or carrying over) the bonus combination in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 after the configuration in this way, the "combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. If it is a "game that can be played", the specific notification may be configured to be executed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play a game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit process of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, for example, in the game period of (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game value is dramatically increased by setting the expected value α, so that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. This is avoided and the advantageous section is continued. (B-2) In the game period of the advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set and the game value does not increase dramatically. It is also possible to select to display the combination of symbols to end the advantageous section, and in the subsequent game, (1) establish the start condition of the advantageous section again and (B-1) try to shift to the advantageous section 1. You can do it, or you can choose to end the game as it is if you do not have time to spare. On the other hand, in the game period of (B-2) advantageous section 2, the game value does not increase dramatically by setting the expected value β, but it is more advantageous to the player than (A) the non-advantageous section. Since there is no change, in order to enjoy the game, it is possible to avoid displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination and to continue the advantageous section.

Further, in this second aspect, when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and (B) the advantageous section is terminated, it is possible to give a special privilege by using, for example, a display device 11. ing. Among the various benefits given to the player, this special benefit is a benefit that is not related to the granting of the game value (that is, does not affect the payout rate). In addition, the special privilege is a privilege related to the granting of the game value (that is, it affects the payout rate) (for example, the right to establish the transition condition of the advantageous section, or the information of the stop operation during the bonus state. It does not prevent the right to be notified), but from the viewpoint of optimizing gambling, it should be a privilege that is not related to the granting of game value (that is, does not affect the payout rate). Is desirable.

Specific examples of the special privilege include, for example, the execution of a special effect (for example, the various ending effects described above and other premier effects) that are usually unlikely to be executed, and the special notification that informs the player of useful information (for example). For example, execution of suggestion notification of set values, expectation notification for each production content, history notification such as winning probability of bonus role and transition probability of advantageous section), information provided via the Internet using the player's mobile terminal. It is possible to give points on the provided service and release specific conditions.

When configured to have the above special benefits as described above, the player does not enjoy the direct benefits such as the addition of the game value, but the indirect benefits that are of great interest in enjoying the game. Since it can be enjoyed, especially in the state where the expected value β is set and the game value does not increase dramatically as in (B-2) advantageous section 2, the advantageous section is set early. You can also give an incentive to terminate it.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is when a predetermined end condition ((3) end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It ends when it shifts to the special game state (bonus state) before. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, the specific notification indicating to that effect is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state as long as it is within the specified predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the predetermined termination condition is when a certain privilege is given (or is assumed to be given) to the player (for example, the limit processing described above or described later). May be terminated (by). By doing so, it is possible to manage the payout rate more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until the game is played, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (the expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and try to obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until the game is played, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (the expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special gaming state, it is possible to grant a special privilege not related to the granting of the gaming value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and try to obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not given when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

In the gaming machine of the second aspect, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the gaming value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, it indicates that fact. The specific notification may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the expected value of the gaming value in the advantageous state is adjusted by the probability (notification probability) that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. May be. By doing so, it is possible to manage the payout rate more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) (Part 2)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 2) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 2) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 94, in this example, there are a general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state. The general game state (CZ state) is a game state in which the winning probability of the replay role is low and the transition to the advantageous section does not occur, and this game state itself is not a game state advantageous to the player. It is positioned as a gaming state (chance zone, special prize consecutive villa state) that is more advantageous than the (A) BB1 state in that it can shift to the (B) BB2 state or the (C) BB3 state. Further, the general gaming state (CZ state), (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state are positioned as a series of increasing sections described later. In addition, even in the general gaming state (CZ), as in the case of (A) BB1, if a specific notification condition is satisfied, an advantageous section can be configured to occur for a specific period.

In the general game state (CZ state), when BB1 (for example, BB1 and BB2 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (A) BB1 state. As will be described later, this is positioned as a transition of a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the general gaming state (CZ state), when BB2 (for example, BB3 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied. Then, the state shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (B) BB2 state. Further, in the general gaming state (CZ state), when BB3 (for example, BB4 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (5) BB3 start condition is satisfied. Then, the state shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (C) BB2 state. As will be described later, these are positioned as transitions of gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player.

Here, once the BB1 is won in the general gaming state (CZ state), the BB1 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (display of the combination of symbols related to BB1 is permitted). Since the BB1 permission state is continued), BB2 and BB3 are not won in the general game state (CZ state). Further, once the BB2 or BB3 is won in the general gaming state (CZ state), the BB2 or BB3 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB2 or BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (related to the BB2 or BB3). Since the BB2 permission state or the BB3 permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols is permitted continues), the BB1 is not won in the general game state (CZ state). That is, in the general gaming state (CZ state), if any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won, the bonus state corresponding to the winning bonus combination ends and does not shift to the general gaming state (CZ state) again. As long as it is configured not to win other bonus roles.

In this example, the combination of symbols related to BB2 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7", and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is, for example, "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue". It is configured as a combination of symbols such as "7". Further, the combination of symbols according to BB1 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "Red 7-Red 7-Cherry 1" and "Blue 7-Blue 7-Cherry 1" (see FIG. 15). In this example, in the case of winning any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) in the general gaming state (CZ state) after the configuration in this way, the winning notification suggesting that the bonus combination has been won is performed. You may be asked. Specifically, a display such as "Aim for 7!" May be displayed to indicate to the player that the "red 7" symbol or the "blue 7" symbol should be aimed. In this case, for example, when the player aims at the "Red 7" symbol and hits the BB2, the "Red 7" is aligned and the state shifts to the BB2 state, and the BB3 is won. In the case, "Red 7" is not aligned, and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is not displayed, it is recognized that the winner is BB3, and if the winner is BB1, the combination of symbols related to BB1. Is displayed and the state shifts to the BB1 state. In this way, in the playability of this example, it is possible to further improve the interest in notification. Further, the above-mentioned winning notification may be performed unconditionally when any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general gaming state (CZ state), for example, the general gaming. When it is possible to generate an advantageous section in the state (CZ state), it may be performed only during the advantageous section.

The (A) BB1 state is composed of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) between the BB1RB flags, and (A-3) BB1RB. In the (A) BB1 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (A) BB1 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (B) BB2 state, and (C) There is no transition to the BB3 state.

(A-1) In BB1 in general, the winning probability of the replay role is low (or the winning probability of the replay role is "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. To)) Set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out with the correct push order of 6 choices, 1 medal is paid out if the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also with the push order incorrect answer. (If it is inappropriate, no medal is paid out, etc.), RB for operating the RB state where the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (A) Whether or not the BB1 state is an advantageous section. The advantageous section lottery for which the determination is made is set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability.

(A-2) During the BB1RB flag, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. As)) set. Further, the push order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the push order incorrect answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues. Further, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same or different between (A-1) BB1 general and (A-2) BB1RB flag.

(A-3) In BB1RB, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is set to "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. )) Set. Further, the push order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the push order incorrect answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. Further, in (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are the same. It may or may not be different. Alternatively, in (A-3) BB1RB, the push order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination, which play similar roles, are won as internal winning combinations different from the push order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination. You may do so. Further, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same between (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, respectively. It may be different.

In the general game state (CZ state), when (1) the BB1 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. (A-1) In BB1 general, when the above RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts to (A-2) between the BB1RB flags, and (A-2) during the BB1RB flags, the symbol related to the RB. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the symbol combination related to RB is permitted continues). (A-2) When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the valid line between the BB1RB flags, the process shifts to (A-3) BB1RB. (A-3) In BB1RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games) is satisfied. If it is established, it shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. It should be noted that, during the (A-2) BB1RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of the symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult (or not) to be stopped and displayed, and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to be transferred to (A-3) BB1RB.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (A) BB1 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 285), (2) the end condition of BB1 is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the BB1 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if the above-mentioned advantageous section lottery combination is won, it is a non-advantageous section. Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined, and if it is an advantageous section, whether or not to extend the advantageous section is determined. In this case, for example, an advantageous section of 30 games is granted or extended by one winning. It should be noted that the opportunity and period for which the grant or extension of the advantageous section is decided are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, or the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination. It may be possible to decide whether to grant or extend an advantageous section. Further, when the grant or extension of the advantageous section is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately determined by lottery or the like. Further, (A) at an arbitrary timing before the BB1 state is started (for example, when the BB1 is won, or when the general game state (CZ state) after the BB1 is won, the advantageous section lottery is won). It may be possible to determine whether or not the entire period (or a part of the period) of the BB1 state is regarded as an advantageous section.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if it is an advantageous section, for example, in the above-mentioned push order small combination. Information on the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is notified in the winning game, and as a result of the stop operation being performed according to the notification, the advantageous section becomes an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). .. On the other hand, in the case of a non-advantageous section, for example, as a result of not being notified of the stop operation information (which is the correct answer in the push order) in the game winning the push order small combination, the game value of the non-advantageous section decreases. It will be a period.

As described above, in this example, the (A) BB1 state does not end until the number of medals paid out in the BB1 state exceeds "285". Therefore, for example, the case of winning a replay combination or other small combination is not considered, and the case where one piece is paid out in the above push order small combination is not considered, and the total winning probability of the above push order small combination is not taken into consideration. When is set to about 1/2 (32768/65536), the number of payouts of 9 sheets required to end the (A) BB1 state is "32 times" (32 times x 9 sheets = 288 sheets), and the above push. If the forward and small winnings are won according to the probability, the shortest number of games that can end the (A) BB1 state is "64 times" (32 times ÷ 1/2). Therefore, if all of the (A) BB1 states are advantageous sections, if the game is played "64 times", the game value increases during the game period, and the (A) BB1 state is generally terminated at an early stage. It is possible to shift to the gaming state (CZ state). On the other hand, (A) when all of the BB1 states are non-advantageous sections, the probability that 9 cards will be paid out in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won is basically reduced to 1/6, so (A). The standard number of games that can end the BB1 state is "384 times" (64 times ÷ 1/6), and the game value also decreases during the game period.

The (B) BB2 state is composed of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) between the BB2RB flags, and (B-3) BB2RB. In the (B) BB2 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (B) BB2 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, and (C) There is no transition to the BB3 state.

(B-1) In BB2 in general, the winning probability of the replay role is low (or the winning probability of the replay role is relatively high, but (B-2) BB2RB flag (Lower than) set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out with the correct push order of 6 choices, 1 medal is paid out if the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also with the push order incorrect answer. (No medal payout if inappropriate, etc.), RB for activating the RB state where the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (B) General gaming state (CZ state) after the end of the BB2 state. ), When the state is changed to the (A) BB1 state, the advantageous section lottery, etc., which determines whether or not the (A) BB1 state is set as the advantageous section, wins each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. Is set to.

(B-2) Among the BB2RB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is set high. Further, the push order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, an incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues.

(B-3) In BB2RB, the replay is set so as not to be drawn. Further, the push order small winning combination is set to win with a high probability, and the advantageous section lottery winning combination or the like is set to win with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, an incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). Alternatively, in (B-3) BB2RB, the RB small and medium-sized lottery and the advantageous section lottery, which play the same roles, win the internal winning combination different from the pushing order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery. You may do it.

However, in the (B) BB2 state, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is set in (B-3) BB2RB so that the space between the (B-2) BB2RB flags is most advantageous, and (B-1) BB2. The same configuration as in general (1/6 is the correct answer in the push order) and 5/6 may be the incorrect answer in the push order). That is, in the (B) BB2 state, on the premise that the information of the stop operation is not notified, (B-1) BB2 in general and (B-3) BB2RB are set as relatively disadvantageous periods (decrease period). (B-2) The period between the BB2RB flags may be configured as an advantageous period (increasing period). By doing so, in (B-1) BB2 in general, the RB is won at an early stage and transferred to the (B-2) BB2RB flag, and then stopped so as not to be transferred to the (B-3) BB2RB. If the operation is performed (or by performing such stop control), the player can play the game in the most advantageous state, so that the playability in the state advantageous to the player can be further diversified. The game can be improved without becoming monotonous. In addition, by not increasing the gaming state, which is an increase period more than necessary, it is possible to simplify the ball ejection design and make the gambling appropriate.

Further, as described above, when the (B-2) BB2RB flag is configured to be most advantageous in the (B) BB2 state, the combination of the game won by the RB and the symbol related to the RB thereafter. In a game in which RB can be displayed, it may be notified that the RB has won or that the combination of symbols related to the RB can be displayed. By the notification, the player can perform a stop operation so as not to display the combination of symbols related to the RB. It should be noted that the notification may simply indicate or suggest that the combination of symbols related to RB should not be displayed.

In this way, it is specified in a special gaming state in which a special role (for example, BB, which is a continuous operation device for a special character of the first kind) is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is displayed. Corresponds to the first gaming state, which is a non-winning state of a combination (for example, RB, which is a first-class special bonus), the second gaming state, which is the winning state (carry-over state) of the specific combination, and the specific combination. It has a third gaming state (specific gaming state) that is activated by displaying a combination of symbols, and in the second gaming state, the stop control of a predetermined combination (for example, a push order small combination) is advantageous for the player. The specifications that have been changed in control and made it possible to maintain the second gaming state by the player's stop operation or internal control are, of course, other game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example. It can also be applied to the bonus state described in the example (or other increase period (increase section)). In the following, for convenience of explanation, the specifications of such a bonus state will be referred to as a "special bonus state".

In the general game state (CZ state), when the (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (B-1) BB2 general. (B-1) In BB2 in general, when the above RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts between (B-2) BB2RB flags, and during (B-2) BB2RB flags, a symbol related to RB is used. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the symbol combination related to RB is permitted continues). (B-2) When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the valid line between the BB2RB flags, the process shifts to (B-3) BB2RB. (B-3) In BB2RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games) is satisfied. If it is established, it shifts to (B-1) BB2 general. It should be noted that, during the (B-2) BB2RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of the symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult (or not) to be stopped and displayed, and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to be transferred to (B-3) BB2RB.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) between the BB2RB flags, and (B-3) BB2RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (B) BB2 state has become the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 150), (4) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied, and (B) the state shifts from the BB2 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In this example, the winning RB in (A-1) BB1 general and the winning RB in (B-1) BB2 general are not described separately, but for example, (A-1). ) In BB1 general, the winning RB is "RB1" (the corresponding combination of symbols is "combination of symbols related to RB1", the corresponding RB state (A-3) is "RB1 state"), and (B-1). In BB2 in general, the winning RB is set to "RB2" (the corresponding symbol combination is "combination of symbols related to RB2", the corresponding RB state (B-3) is "RB2 state"), and different RB combinations can be won. By configuring the above, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is the same as that of (A-1) BB1 general in the middle of the (A-2) BB1RB flag (“RB1 permission state”). (B-2) In the middle of the BB2RB flag (“RB2 permission state”), the basic configuration of the push order small combination may be configured to be different from that of (B-1) BB2 general.

During (B-2) BB2RB flags and (B-3) BB2RB, 9 cards are paid out regardless of which push order is used in the game that wins the push order small winning combination. As a result of the above, the period is an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). On the other hand, in (B-1) BB2 in general, if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct answer in the game that wins the push order small combination, 9 cards are paid out, but the push that is not the correct answer is made. If the stop operations are performed in order, nine cards will not be paid out, and as a result, the period will be a reduction period in which the game value will decrease. However, since the transition is made from (B-1) BB2 in general to (B-2) between the BB2RB flags with the winning of RB, (B) the entire BB2 state is an increase period in which the game value increases. Positioned as.

It should be noted that (B) the method of setting the entire BB2 state as a period (increasing period) advantageous to the player is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, it is assumed that the control is always in the RB state from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied, and in the RB state, the stop operation is performed in any pressing order. However, it may be configured so that the RB small and medium-sized winning combination in which 9 (or more than 15) payouts occur has an extremely high probability of winning. Alternatively, without changing the control of the basic configuration of the push order small combination, the push order is always controlled in an advantageous section from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied. When the small winning combination is won, the increase period may be set by notifying the push order of the correct answer at least with a predetermined probability that the expected value of grant is positive.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, if the above-mentioned advantageous section lottery combination is won, (4) BB2 end condition. The right to win BB1 in the general gaming state (CZ state) that has been established and transferred, and (1) the right to make the BB1 state that has been transferred by the establishment of the BB1 start condition (A) the advantageous section (for example, the number of sets, stock, etc.) ) Is given or not. In this case, with one win, for example, the right to make an advantageous section between 30 games is granted. The opportunity and period for which the grant of the right is decided are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, or the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination. It may be possible to decide the grant of the right. Further, when the grant of the right is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately decided by lottery or the like. Further, at an arbitrary timing between (3) when the BB2 start condition is satisfied and (4) when the BB2 end condition is satisfied (for example, when BB2 wins or when BB2 ends), the BB1 state It may be possible to decide whether or not to grant the right to make the entire period (or a part of the period) advantageous.

The (C) BB3 state is composed of (C-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) between the BB3RB flags, and (C-3) BB3RB. If (B-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) BB3RB flag, (C-3) BB3RB, and (5) BB3 start conditions are replaced with BB3, (B-) Since 1) BB2 in general, (B-2) between BB2RB flags, (B-3) in BB2RB, and (3) BB2 start conditions are the same, the description thereof is omitted here. Further, (6) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied when (C) the number of medals to be paid out in the BB3 state reaches a specified number (for example, when the number exceeds 60).

Based on this premise, the flow of the game in this example will be described. In this example, since the (A) BB1 state, which is a non-advantageous section, is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the (A) BB1 state, which is a non-advantageous section. ..

In the (A) BB1 state, there is no transition to another gaming state until the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied. Here, (A) if the BB1 state is an advantageous section, the section functions as an increase period, so that not only the game value can be increased, but also the chances of receiving a payout increase, so that the section can be used at an early stage (A). 2) It is possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) can be shortened). On the other hand, (A) if the BB1 state is a non-advantageous section, the section functions as a decrease period, so that the game value decreases and the opportunity to receive the payout does not increase, so that (2) It is not possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) cannot be shortened).

In the (A) BB1 state, when the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied, the state shifts to the general gaming state (CZ state). In the general gaming state (CZ state), if BB2 or BB3 can be won before winning BB1, the general gaming state (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) → general gaming state It is configured as a state (a series of increasing sections) in which a bonus state advantageous to the player can be repeatedly operated, such as (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) .... However, if the BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, it becomes impossible to repeatedly operate the bonus state advantageous to the player, and the series of increase sections ends. In order to shift to a series of increasing sections again, it is necessary to end the (A) BB1 state, which is a decreasing period unless it becomes an advantageous section.

That is, in the (A) BB1 state, the player desires to shift to the advantageous section or continue the advantageous section, and if the player actually shifts to the advantageous section or continues the advantageous section, the game value is increased. While making it possible, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) can be shortened. Further, in the general gaming state (CZ state), it is desired to win BB2 or BB3 before winning BB1, and if it is possible to actually win BB2 or BB3, (B) BB2 state or (C) ) The game value can be increased in the BB3 state. The same applies when these gaming states are terminated and the game returns to the general gaming state (CZ state). In addition, in the case of (B) BB2 state or (C) BB3 state, it is desired that the right to make (A) BB1 state an advantageous section is granted. In this example, for example, in the total probability of winning a bonus combination (BB1 to BB3), the winning probability of BB1 is about 50%, the winning probability of BB2 is about 25%, and the winning probability of BB3 is about 25%. Therefore, BB2 or BB3 does not always continue to win in the general gaming state (CZ state). However, if (A) the right to make the BB1 state an advantageous section is granted in advance, even if the BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, if the (A) BB1 state is in the increase period, The game value is increased, and the general game state (CZ state) can be returned to the general game state (CZ state) at an early stage. In this example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by such playability.

According to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state (general gaming state (CZ state)), when the second special role (BB2 or BB3) is won before the first special role (BB1) is won, the first 2 The special gaming state ((B) BB2 state or (C) BB3 state) is entered, and the second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the state shifts to the first special game state ((A) BB1 state), and the stop operation is performed in the first special game state. When the operation information regarding the above is not notified (when it is a non-advantageous section), the first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the normal game state is changed.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a specific notification condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, or when it is determined that the right to make an advantageous section is granted. In the first special game state, the operation information regarding the stop operation in which a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given when a predetermined combination (pushing order small combination) is won is notified. Become. Since the first special gaming state ends when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 285 cards) are given, such information is notified to end the first special gaming state. You can advance the time. That is, depending on whether or not the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state, the period until the normal gaming state in which the second special gaming state can be transitioned can be changed. Therefore, by making the period until the transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in change.

In the gaming machine of this example, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increase period. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state (during the (A-2) BB1RB flag), and in the second special gaming state, the second specific permission is further permitted. It is possible to shift to the state (between (B-2) BB2RB flags or (C-2) between the BB3RB flags), and in the first special game state, the stop operation is performed regardless of whether or not it is the first specific permission state. In the second special gaming state, the period in which the operation information is not notified may be made to function as the decreasing period, and the period in which the second specific permission state is not notified may be made to function as the increasing period. By doing so, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) (Part 3)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 3) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of a game in another example (No. 3) of game playability (game specifications).

As shown in FIG. 95, in this example, there are a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state. The (A) RT0 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is lower than that of the (C) RT1 state, and it is possible to shift to either the (B) BB state or the (C) RT1 state. (A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the BB is controlled between the BB flags (BB permission state) in which the BB is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Between the BB flags, even if the bell spilled eye, which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the state does not shift to the (C) RT1 state. In this example, the BB is duplicated with one of the small winning combinations (for example, a so-called rare winning combination with a relatively low winning probability, which may be a replay winning combination) so as not to win alone. In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop control for establishing the replay combination or the small combination with priority over the bonus combination is performed, so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed in the game winning the BB. BB will be carried over to the next game or later. Then, the combination of symbols related to BB is a stop operation in a game in which the internal lottery result is "missing" between the BB flags (that is, a game in which no other replay role or small role is won). It is possible to display (win a prize) when the timing is appropriate. In this example, (A) the probability of "loss" in the RT0 state is defined as about "1/12". However, as long as "loss" can occur, this "loss" probability can be any value. In addition, there may be cases where the BB wins alone, and in this case, it is assumed that the combination of symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the BB wins.

(A) In the game where the BB flags are between in the RT0 state and the internal lottery result is "missing", when the combination of the symbols related to BB is displayed, (1) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (A) It shifts from the RT0 state to the (B) BB state. The (B) BB state is a gaming state that does not shift to the (C) RT1 state, and is a gaming state that is an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. It should be noted that (B) the method of setting the BB state as the increasing period is various methods described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example, such as the above-mentioned "special bonus state". Can be adopted. (B) In the BB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 140 cards) are given, the upper limit of the game value is given, (2) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, before the BB flag is reached (that is, when the BB non-flag is not set), (3) when the bell spill is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (C) the RT1 state is set. Transition. The bell spill is, for example, a combination of the same symbols as the "R_RT1 transition" in the present embodiment, and in the game in which the push order small combination is won, the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. It is a combination of symbols displayed in the case. Therefore, if the (A) RT0 state is the (A-2) advantageous section, the correct push order is notified, so that it is not displayed as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification. A-1) In the normal case (non-advantageous section), the correct push order is not notified, so that the possibility of being displayed is high. In this example, for example, if the winning probability of BB is about 1/20 (3276/65536), the total winning probability of the push order small winning combination is about 1/3 (21845/65536). It should be designed to. As for the push order small combination, various specifications described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted. For example, in the push order (for example, 6 choices). If the answer is correct, 9 cards will be paid out and the bell spills will not be displayed. If the correct answer is not given in the pressing order, 1 sheet will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing is not appropriate, 0 cards will be paid out, and a specification in which bell spills are displayed can be adopted.

The (C) RT1 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that of the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state does not occur. Even in the (C) RT1 state, as in the (A) RT0 state, if it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases. If it is controlled to an advantageous section, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Even in the (C) RT1 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the control is performed between the BB flags (BB permission state) as in the (A) RT0 state. However, in the (C) RT1 state, the winning probability of the replay role is increased by the amount of the "loss" probability "1/12" in the (A) RT0 state, and the "loss" probability is "0". (That is, so that "loss" does not occur). Therefore, even if it is between the BB flags, there is no case where the combination of the symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state. However, even if the "loss" is made to occur with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/8192), and the combination of the symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs between the BB flags. It is good (that is, the (C) RT1 state may be configured as a state in which it is more difficult to display the combination of symbols related to the BB than in the (A) RT0 state).

If "loss" can be generated even in (C) RT1 state, and if the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which "loss" occurs, (B) BB state is displayed. Since the transition cannot be made and the (C) RT1 state continues even after the next game, if the stop operation is performed in a manner in which the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the game is played. The loss of the person becomes extremely large. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a loss, in the unit game in which "loss" occurs in (C) RT1 state, the combination of symbols related to BB is used between the start operation and the stop operation. An effect that suggests that the display is allowed, an effect that informs that the combination of symbols related to BB should be aimed, a freeze effect that delays the start of rotation of each reel after the start operation, and the time required for the stop operation to be effective. It is desirable to make it possible to execute one or more effects such as a stop operation invalidation effect that takes a longer time than usual, so that the player can easily display the combination of symbols related to the BB.

When (4) a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are consumed in the (C) RT1 state, the state shifts from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state. That is, when (C) the RT1 state ends and the BB flags are between, the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed when "loss" occurs. Even when the state is changed from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state, there is a possibility that the state may fall to the (C) RT1 state again when the BB non-flag is not set. Therefore, in such a case, (A-2) the advantageous section is continued until the BB flag is reached in the RT0 state (that is, until the BB is won), and the player is rescued. You may do so.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set, and when the normal game state ((A) RT0 state), the combination of special symbols (BB) is set. (Combination of symbols related to) can be displayed to shift to the special gaming state ((B) BB state), while the specific gaming state ends in the specific gaming state ((C) RT1 state). Until then, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. In addition, in the specific game state, when a specific combination (push order small combination) is won in a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a specific symbol is not performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the push order is correct). Transition based on the combination of (bell spilled eyes) displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period (advantageous section) in the specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. If this is done, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without the transition to the specific gaming state. Not only is it possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when the specific role is won is increased. In addition, when the operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific role is won. The game value given to is increased. Further, even when the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the above-mentioned aspect is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state that does not shift to the special game state.

(Modified example of this example)
In this example, it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, and in (A) RT0 state, BB as a special role is a push order small role as a specific role. If it wins earlier than that, it shifts to the (B) BB state without shifting to the (C) RT1 state, and by making it possible to repeat such a transition, a series of increase sections is created. It was possible to do. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, if the push order small combination as a specific combination is won before the BB as a special combination, if the player's stop operation is appropriate, the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state. However, if the player's stop operation is not appropriate, (C) the state shifts to the RT1 state, and a series of increase sections is terminated. Then, in the (C) RT1 state, if a certain transition condition (in this example, digestion of a specified number of games) is not satisfied, the transition to the (A) RT0 state is not performed. However, the method of starting, continuing, and ending such a series of increasing sections is considered to have room for further deformation, and will be described below.

In the modified example, it is the same as this example in that it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, but it relates to MB (type 2 special character) as a specific combination. When the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the effective line by using the accessory continuous operation device), it is assumed that the state shifts to (D) MB state. The winning probability of BB is set to about 1/10 (6553/65536), and the winning probability of MB is also set to the same level. MB is a bonus role, and once it is won, it shall be carried over until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed (between MB flags, MB permission state). The MB always wins in duplicate with any special small role group among a plurality of special small role groups (for example, special small role groups 1 to 3), and does not win alone.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 1 is duplicated, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the second range below and the third third below. If it is performed in a mode that is a first range different from the range, or a mode in which a stop operation is performed at the left first stop, the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( D) Move to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the form of a predefined correct answer, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 2 is duplicated, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the above first range and the following third range. If it is performed in a mode that is a second range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop, the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( D) Move to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the form of a predefined correct answer, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 3 is duplicated, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the first range and the second. If it is performed in a mode that is a third range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed at the first right stop, the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( D) Move to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the form of a predefined correct answer, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

In this modification, when a plurality of MBs (for example, MB1, MB2, and MB3) are used as specific combinations and the combination of symbols related to any of the MBs is stopped and displayed on the valid line (D). It may be the one that shifts to the MB state. In this case, the total winning probability of MB may be set to be about the same as the winning probability of BB. Further, MB1, MB2, and MB3 may always win the prize in duplicate with the special small role group, and may not win by themselves. Then, when the MB1 + special small winning combination wins in duplicate, the same control as in the MB + special small winning combination group 1 is performed, and when the MB2 + special small winning combination group wins in duplicate, the same as in the MB + special small winning combination group 2. If the MB3 + special small winning combination group is duplicated, the same control as the MB + special small winning combination group 3 may be performed.

That is, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is appropriate in the game winning the MB (for example, when the above three choices are answered correctly), the (D) MB state. Move to. (D) The MB state is, for example, a bonus state in which two medals are always paid out in a two-card bet, and when a specified number (more than two) of game value is given, the upper limit of the game value is given. Then, the MB end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (D) MB state to the (A) RT0 state. Here, the (D) MB state itself is not an increase period in which the game value increases (however, it is not a decrease period but a non-increase / decrease period), but after the end, it shifts to the (A) RT0 state, and therefore (D) MB. The transition to the state is positioned as a transition to the above-mentioned series of increase sections or a continuation of the series of increase sections.

On the other hand, (A) in the RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is not appropriate in the game won by the MB (for example, if the above three choices are not answered correctly), (C). It shifts to the RT1 state. In this modification, the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags does not end until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Then, (C) the probability of "loss" in the RT1 state is set to about "1/300". That is, in order to end the (C) RT1 state and shift to the (A) RT0 state, the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs in the (C) RT1 state (D). ) It is necessary to shift to the MB state and (D) digest the game in the MB state. It should be noted that (C) it may be possible to display the combination of symbols related to MB even when the above-mentioned three choices are correctly answered when the above-mentioned special small combination group is won in the RT1 state.

(Flow of the game of the modified example of this example)
In this modification, since the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags. do.

In the (C) RT1 state, the transition to the (A) RT0 state is not performed unless the transition to the (D) MB state is performed. The player waits for the "loss" to occur before playing the game. If the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game in which "loss" occurs, the state shifts to (D) MB state, and after the end of (D) MB state, the state shifts to (A) RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, when a bonus combination is won, the probability that the bonus combination is BB is 1/2 (50%), and the probability that the bonus combination is MB is also 1/2 (50%). When the (C) RT1 state is changed to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is BB, a series of increase sections is started. After winning the BB, there is no winning in the MB (that is, without shifting to the (C) RT1 state), and when the combination of symbols related to the BB is displayed, (B) shifts to the BB state and (B) ) The game value can be increased in the BB state. The (B) BB state is configured as, for example, the above-mentioned "special bonus state". (B) When the BB state ends, it returns to the (A) RT0 state again, and if the BB can be won before the MB is won again with a probability of 50%, a series of increasing sections will continue. That is, the series of increase sections is a game section that can be looped (with a loop rate of 50%) with a probability of 50%. Note that this loop rate is an example, and can be set to an arbitrary value by appropriately changing the lottery value (winning probability) of the bonus combination.

In the (A) RT0 state, which is a series of increase sections, if the MB is won before the BB is won, and if the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the game that is won by the MB, ( D) It is possible to return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the MB state. In this case as well, a series of increasing intervals continues. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game won by the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, a series of increasing intervals ends.

Further, when the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is MB, a series of increase sections is not started. However, as described above, if the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game won by MB, it may return to (A) RT0 state again through the transition to (D) MB state. can. In this case, it may be possible to start a series of increasing sections in the returned (A) RT0 state. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game won by the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, it may not be possible to start a series of increasing intervals. In the above explanation, the start of a series of increase sections is when the bonus combination that is first won after shifting from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state is BB, but the (C) RT1 state. The transition from (A) RT0 state to (A) RT0 state may be the start of a series of increase sections, or the first winning bonus combination from (C) RT1 state to (A) RT0 state is BB. (B) The time when the combination of the symbols according to the above is displayed and the state shifts to the BB state may be the start of a series of increase sections.

(The first aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the first aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. This first aspect is a specification in which an advantageous section is not provided.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state → (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state ... Since the A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state are repeated mutually, a series of increasing sections can be created, so that even if the player is not notified of the stop operation information, the playability is highly interesting. It is possible to do. Therefore, as in this first aspect, it is possible not to provide an advantageous section.

Also in this first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be given, and (B) the RB is won in the BB state. When this happens, a notice or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when (A) winning the MB in the RT0 state and (C) when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the RT1 state, it is presumed that at least the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. It is desirable not to make such announcements or suggestions. Here, "notification or suggestion that a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" means, for example, directly announcing or suggesting that a combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed. The above-mentioned special small role group has won, or the combination of symbols related to the winning special small role group has been announced or suggested. This is because if the probability that the (C) RT1 state is substantially terminated by such notification or suggestion is increased, the gambling of the game may become excessively high. However, since the (C) RT1 state is not included in the series of increase sections at least, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, "the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. A notice or suggestion that the game method may be inferred may be made.

(Second aspect of advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a second aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The second aspect is the specification that the transition to the advantageous section is possible only in the (B) BB state.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the game value given according to the mode of the player's stop operation, such as the push order small combination in the (B) BB state, can be changed. Since the internal winning combination can be determined, if (B) the player is notified of the stop operation information with the BB state as an advantageous section, (B) the expected value of the game value given during the BB state can be determined. It can be maximized, which not only improves the player's interest, but also contributes to ensuring the fairness of the game and making it easier to manage the payout rate. Therefore, as in this second aspect, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only during the (B) BB state. In this case, the advantageous section may be started when the (B) BB state is started, and the advantageous section may be ended when the (B) BB state is ended.

In this second aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be given. On the other hand, when (A) winning the MB in the RT0 state and (C) when the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the RT1 state, at least the combination of the symbols related to the MB is the same as in the first aspect. It is desirable not to make any announcement or suggestion that the game method in which is displayed is presumed.

(Third aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a third aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. This third aspect is a specification that enables transition to an advantageous section in (A) RT0 state and (C) RT1 state.

This third aspect is basically the same as that described in this example. In the (A) RT0 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (A-1) normal (non-) is normal. Shift from (advantageous section) to (A-2) advantageous section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, shift from (A-2) advantageous section to (A-1) normal (non-advantageous section). Further, in the (C) RT1 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is shifted to (C-2) advantageous section, and the advantageous section is changed. When the end condition is satisfied, the transition from (C-2) advantageous section to (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is performed.

However, in this example, when the (A-2) advantageous section is reached in the (A) RT0 state, the push order that is the correct answer for the push order small combination is notified, so that the (C) RT1 is substantially. Information that can avoid the transition to the state is also notified, but in this third aspect, the information that can avoid the transition to the (C) RT1 state is not notified. That is, in the (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than the normal (non-advantageous section). Although the game value is given, if the MB is won, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is guessed" is not made, and the player makes the MB by himself / herself. If the combination of symbols can be displayed, (A) the RT0 state is maintained, but if the player cannot display the combination of symbols related to MB by himself / herself, (C). It is designed to shift to the RT1 state.

However, for example, when (A) RT0 state becomes (A-2) advantageous section and 50 games are given as the duration of the advantageous section, after 10 games (that is, the duration of the advantageous section remains 40 games). If the MB is won and the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and the state shifts to (C) RT1 state, the duration may be 40 games (C-2) to shift to the advantageous section. .. That is, the duration of the given advantageous section may be inherited from the (A) RT0 state to the (C) RT1 state, or from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state (note that the latter case). (D) The gaming period in the MB state may or may not be included in the advantageous section).

Further, since the (A) RT0 state is a game period included in the series of increase sections, the (A) RT0 state does not provide the (A-2) advantageous section, and the game is not included in the series of increase sections. It is a period, and the (C-2) advantageous section may be provided only in the (C) RT1 state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. That is, in this third aspect, it is advantageous for the purpose of relieving the player who plays the game during the game period ((C) RT1 state) which is relatively disadvantageous to the player and preventing the deterioration of the interest of the game. A section ((C-2) advantageous section) may be provided.

In this third aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be given. However, as in this third aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates winning for the internal winning combination (for example, small winning combination) related to the winning, (A) BB in the RT0 state. When there is a mode of stop operation (push order or timing of stop operation) that makes it easy to display the combination of symbols related to BB when winning, the stop operation is based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable that the mode is directly notified, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the second aspect and the third aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the second aspect and the third aspect are combined is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, if the (A) RT0 state that hits the BB is the (A-2) advantageous section, the stop operation information is notified even in the (B) BB state, and (A-1) the normal (non-advantageous section). ), The stop operation information may not be notified even in the (B) BB state. Further, in this case, in the (A-2) BB state shifted from the advantageous section, the continuation period of the advantageous section is sequentially updated as the game progresses (that is, the continuation period of the given advantageous section is changed. It may be set to decrease), or the duration of the advantageous section may not be updated (that is, the duration of the granted advantageous section may not decrease).

(Fourth aspect of advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a fourth aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. This fourth aspect is a specification that enables transition to an advantageous section in the (A) RT0 state.

In this fourth aspect, contrary to the third aspect described above, in the case of (A) RT0 state and (A-2) advantageous section, when the MB is won, "the combination of symbols related to MB is By making a notification or suggestion that the displayed game method is guessed, (C) information that can avoid the transition to the RT1 state is notified, but when the push order small role is won, the answer is correct. The push order is not notified. Further, in the case of (C) RT1 state and (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. By making such a notification or suggestion, (A) information that enables the transition to the RT0 state is notified, but if the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is not notified. It is a thing.

In this fourth aspect, for example, the advantageous section may be provided only with the (A-2) advantageous section and not with the (C-2) advantageous section. That is, the advantageous section is configured to have a function for continuing a series of increasing sections ((A) continuing the RT0 state) and (C) not having a function for ending the RT1 state. You may.

Further, in the fourth aspect, the advantageous section is managed by the number of times (the number of navigations) in which "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed. It is preferable to do so. For example, (C) the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed in the RT1 state, (D) shifts to the MB state, (D) the MB state ends, and (A) shifts to the RT0 state. At an arbitrary timing, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. Then, in the transitioned (A) RT0 state ((A-2) advantageous section), "notification or suggestion that a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" for the determined number of navigations. Should be done. However, in the (A) RT0 state, for example, the BB is won, the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed, the state shifts to the (B) BB state, the (B) BB state ends, and the (A) RT0 state is reached. At any timing of the transition, it is decided whether or not to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. You may. Although the management based on the number of navigations has been described as preferable, it does not prevent the adoption of other management methods (for example, management based on the number of games).

In this fourth aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be given. However, as in this fourth aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates the continuation of a series of increasing sections, (A) when the BB is won in the RT0 state, it relates to the BB. When there is a mode of stop operation (pushing order or timing of stop operation) that facilitates the display of a combination of symbols, the mode of the stop operation is directly notified based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the third aspect and the fourth aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the third aspect and the fourth aspect are combined is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, in the case of (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than normal (non-advantageous section). When the game value is given and the MB is won, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is presumed" is performed, so that the transition to the (C) RT1 state is avoided. It suffices to inform the possible information. In addition, in the case of (C-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (C-1) more games than normal (non-advantageous section). When the value is given and the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed, so that (A) RT0 Information that enables the transition to the state may be notified. As described above, even in the (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. No notice or suggestion may be made.

(Advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted, and the advantageous section specification includes at least the third aspect or the fourth aspect as the advantageous section specification. The limit processing of the advantageous section in the case of adopting is described.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned or later-described limit processing. For example, if the advantageous section continues for "1500 games" in the case of "game number limiter", or if "2400" medals are won in the advantageous section in the case of "number limiter", the advantageous section is still in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games, the number of sets, the number of stocks, the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc. remain, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

However, according to the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, a series of increasing sections may continue even after the advantageous section is completed by executing such a limit process. That is, there is a problem that the significance of setting a certain restriction on the continuation of the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player may be lost due to the series of increasing sections. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of limiting the advantageous section in consideration of the provision of a series of increasing sections, it is desirable to take the following measures.

For example, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the series of increase sections is started, or before the series of increase sections are started. As a specific example, if it is determined that a series of increasing intervals starts when (A) the BB is hit in the RT0 state, (A) at the same time as the BB is hit in the RT0 state, or (A). The advantageous section is started when the RT0 state is entered. Further, as another specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing intervals starts when the transition to the (A) RT0 state is performed, the same time as the transition to the (A) RT0 state, or the (D) MB state. Start an advantageous section when shifting to. The start of the advantageous section here means the start of the advantageous section in terms of limit processing (control), and the substantial duration of the advantageous section (number of games, number of sets, stock, etc.) at the start time is not necessarily the same. It does not mean that the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc.) is given. Therefore, regarding the duration of the advantageous section, for example, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example are adopted, and the duration is given (or extended) in each game state. It may be decided whether or not the item is correct or not, and it may be granted (or extended) according to the result of the decision. However, it may be assumed that whether or not the continuation period of the advantageous section is granted (or extended) is determined even at the start time.

Here, in the case of the "game number limiter", the upper limit of the number of games is, for example, "1500 games", but from this "1500", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state of, the expected number of games (average number of games) of which may continue for the longest number of games) and the threshold value according to the loop rate (loop rate is converted to the number of games) The value multiplied by (a variable determined as a multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as the number of designated stop games (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected number of games in the bonus state is "20 games" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of designated stop games is "1500 games-20 games". × 6 = 1380 games ”.

Here, in the case of the "number limiter", the upper limit of the number of acquired cards is, for example, "2400", but from this "2400", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state, the expected number of medals (the one that may be awarded the most medals) is converted to the threshold value according to the loop rate (the loop rate is converted to the number of medals won). The value multiplied by the value (variable determined as the multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as the number of indicated stop acquisitions (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected acquisition number of bonus states is "120" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the instruction stop acquisition number is "2400-120". × 6 = 1680 sheets ”.

Then, when the limit processing is configured to be performed by the "game number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the number of games reaches "1380 games" (number of games stopped instructed). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ).

In addition, when the limit processing is configured to be performed by the "number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the acquired number reaches "1680" (instruction stop acquired number). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ..

In addition, it is a process after the instruction function is stopped based on the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions, but if a series of increase sections is completed before the limit process is executed, At the same time, or after the end, the advantageous section is terminated. As a specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing sections wins the MB in the (A) RT0 state and ends when the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and (C) shifts to the RT1 state. , (C) Simultaneously with the transition to the RT1 state, or when the next game of the game transitioned to the (C) RT1 state is started, the advantageous section is terminated. In the (A) RT0 state and (B) BB state, a series of increasing sections may still continue. Therefore, it is at least (C) RT1 that the process of ending the (controllably) advantageous section is performed. It is desirable to be in the state. However, this does not apply when the advantageous section is terminated by executing the limit processing. That is, in the (A) RT0 state and (B) BB state, when "1500 games" is reached in the case of "game number limiter", and when "2400 cards" is reached in the case of "number limiter". It may be possible to end the advantageous section by executing the limit process.

It should be noted that when the advantageous section continuously reaches the number of designated stop games or the number of designated stop acquisitions, the instruction function is stopped, which is substantially synonymous with the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, the above-mentioned "1500 games" of the "game number limiter" and "2400 cards" of the "number limiter" are set as the regulation values of the gaming machines that can be installed in the amusement shop, and are modified examples of this example. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a series of increasing sections such as the game playability (game specifications) of, the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions is calculated from the regulation value as described above, and the calculated instruction stop is calculated. The value of the number of games and the number of designated stop acquisitions may be predetermined as the value of the "game number limiter" or the "number limiter" so that the limit process is executed. That is, when there is a possibility that the increase period in which the game value increases due to the installation of a series of increase sections greatly exceeds the planned payout design or the range of the predetermined regulation value, this protrusion Any method can be adopted as long as it is possible to regulate the advantageous section (advanced), taking into account the part that will be lost.

Further, the technical concept regarding the game playability (game specification) described in the modified example of this example, the first to fourth aspects of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example, and the advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example is described in the present invention. The game machine according to the modified example of the example is described as an example, and is not applied only to the game machine according to the modified example of this example. That is, it can be appropriately modified and applied to the gaming machines described in the present embodiment, this example, and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) (4)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 4) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 4) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 96, in this example, (A) RT0 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag, (C) RT1 state MB flag, (D) RT2 state BB flag, (E) BB state, And (F) there is a gaming state of MB state. The (A) RT0 state and the (E) BB state are positioned as the above-mentioned series of increase sections.

In the (A) RT0 state, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, (B) between the RT1 state non-flags, (D) between the RT2 state BB flags, and ( F) It is a gaming state that can be transferred to the MB state. It should be noted that the BB, MB, push order small role, bell spilled eye, etc. are the same as those described in other examples (3) (including modified examples) of game playability (game specifications), so here. The explanation in is omitted. However, in this example, the MB is duplicated with one of the small or replay roles (for example, the above-mentioned rare role) so as not to win alone, and in the game in which the MB is won, the combination of the symbols related to the MB is used. In a game that is not displayed and the internal lottery result is "missing" between the MB flags, the symbol related to the MB is always displayed regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (that is, the mode of the stop operation). The combination is configured to be displayed, but as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification), the MB depends on the mode of the player's stop operation and the like. It is also possible to configure the game so that the combination of symbols related to MB may be displayed in the winning game.

(A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

In the (A) RT0 state, when (1) BB is won, the transition is made between the (D) RT2 state BB flags as the BB permitted state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, the state shifts between the MB flags as the MB permitted state, but the RT state does not change. Further, between the MB flags in the RT0 state (A), even if the bell spilled eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the movement does not occur between the MB flags in the (C) RT1 state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, the "missing" probability is set to be at least higher than that in the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/6"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, it is easy to satisfy (4) MB start condition. Further, in (A) RT0 state, (5) bell spills are effective before shifting between (D) RT2 state BB flags or before MB flags (that is, between non-flags). When the stop is displayed on the line, (C) the transition is made between the RT1 state non-flags.

During (B) RT1 state non-flag, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least higher than (A) RT0 state, (A) RT0 state, (C) RT1 state MB flag, and (D) RT2. State It is a gaming state that can be transferred between the BB flags. (B) If the RT1 state non-flag is not controlled in the advantageous section, (B-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and the game value is controlled in the advantageous section. If there is, (B-2) it becomes an advantageous section and it becomes an increase period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (D) RT2 state BB flags as BB permitted state. Further, when (6) MB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, the transition is made between (C) RT1 state MB flags as MB permitted states (RT state does not change). In this example, since the game in which the MB is won is configured so that the combination of the symbols related to the MB is not displayed, the transition from the (B) RT1 state non-flag to the (F) MB state is not performed. However, as described above, it can be configured so that (B) RT1 state non-flags may shift to (F) MB state. It should be noted that (B) between the RT1 state non-flags and (C) between the RT1 state MB flags are basically the same RT state (RT1 state), regardless of which of (B) and (C) the RT1 state. (9) When the number of games in the RT1 state reaches the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) (that is, when 1500 games are exhausted), (A) the RT0 state is entered. At this time, if it is between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state non-flags, and if it is (C) between RT1 state MB flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state MB flags. ..

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least higher than that of the (A) RT0 state, and the game state can be changed to the (A) RT0 state and the (F) MB state. .. (C) If the RT1 state MB flag is not controlled in the advantageous section, (C-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and the game value is controlled in the advantageous section. If so, it becomes (C-2) an advantageous section and an increase period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the "missing" probability is set to be at least extremely lower than that of (A) RT0 state (for example, "1/8192"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult to satisfy (7) MB start condition. Since (C) the RT1 state MB flag is in the MB permitted state, there is no case where the MB is newly won or the BB is won.

(D) Between the RT2 state BB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, and the game state can be shifted to the (E) BB state. (D) When the combination of symbols related to BB is displayed between the RT2 state BB flags, (2) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (E) the state shifts to the BB state. Further, since the "missing" probability is set to be at least higher than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/12") between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the symbol related to BB is set. The combination is displayed, and (2) it is easy to satisfy the BB start condition. Since (C) the BB permission state is between the RT2 state BB flags, there is no case where the BB is newly won or the MB is won.

(E) The BB state is, for example, a gaming state that is composed of the above-mentioned "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. (E) In the BB state, when a specified number (for example, more than 140) of game values are given, the upper limit of the game value is given, (3) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(F) The MB state is configured as a normal bonus state, and is a game state in which the game value increases for an increasing period. It should be noted that it can also be configured as a non-increasing / decreasing period as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification). (F) In the MB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 13 cards) are given, the upper limit of the game value is given, (8) the MB end condition is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the RT0 state. If so, it shifts from (F) MB state to (A) RT0 state, and if it shifts from (C) RT1 state MB flag, it shifts from (F) MB state to (B) RT1 state non-flag. Move to.

That is, the (F) MB state does not change the RT state depending on its operation or termination (more specifically, the (B) (C) RT1 state operates through the (F) MB state). ing. Here, the (B) and (C) RT1 states do not end during the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) after the start. Therefore, the operation or termination of the (F) MB state does not affect the specified number of games. However, the period during the (F) MB state may be included in the counting target of the specified number of games, or the counting of the specified number of games may be interrupted (not included).

The transition control between the (F) MB state and the (B) (C) RT1 state is not limited to that described above. For example, when the (F) MB state is terminated, even if it has been transferred from between the (C) RT1 state MB flags, it may be changed to the (A) RT0 state. That is, the RT1 state may be terminated when the MB state is activated or terminated. In this example, when the game shifts between the (C) RT1 state MB flags, the specified number of games is exhausted and the game shifts between the (A) RT0 state MB flags, and (F) the MB state is activated (A) RT0. Unless it shifts between the non-flags of the state, or (F) activates the MB state and (B) shifts between the RT1 state non-flags, and wins the BB there, it will not shift to a series of increasing sections. Therefore, if (F) the transition is made between the non-flags of the RT0 state when the MB state is completed, the frequency of transition to the series of increase sections can be increased. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended payout rate and its contents.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set and the game shifts to the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state), and the special symbol is displayed. While it is not difficult to display the combination (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), if the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state (MB permission) is not difficult. However, the gaming state does not shift, and if it is the first specific gaming state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a combination of special symbols (symbols related to MB) is used until the first specific gaming state ends. (Combination) is displayed to make it difficult to shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state), and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state ((A) RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination in push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that the combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period (advantageous section) in the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and the game value of a specific number (for example, 9 cards) is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and before the transition to the first specific gaming state, the special role or the special role is won. Then, when the special permission state (second specific gaming state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state or the special gaming state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if the special role is won and the special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set and the game shifts to the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state), which is special. It is not difficult to display the combination of symbols (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), but when the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state ( MB permission state), but the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played and the first It is difficult to display the special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to MB) and shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state) until the specific gaming state ends, and as a result, the normal gaming state ((A) ) It is difficult to shift to the RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination in push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that the combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period (advantageous section) in the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and the game value of a specific number (for example, 9 cards) is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and before the transition to the first specific gaming state, the special role or the special role is won. Then, when the special permission state (second specific gaming state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state or the special gaming state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when the specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state, for example, if it is a special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state via the special gaming state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. Further, even if the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special role, the special role or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. Regarding the order in which the special role or the special role wins in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified in a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified at least in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state where it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) (No. 5)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 5) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 5) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 97, in this example, (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state), (B) BB1 state, (C) between BB1 flags, (D) between BB2 states, (E) between BB2 flags, ( There are F) BB3 state and (G) game state between BB3 flags. This example attempts to make the game playability different depending on whether or not the type of the bonus combination won in the general gaming state (normal gaming state) and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning game in the bonus combination are displayed. be.

The combination of symbols according to BB1 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB2 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_blue same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB3 is configured as, for example, "BAR-BAR-BAR" (see FIG. 15). At this time, the "red 7" symbol, the "blue 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are arranged at equal intervals (or substantially equal intervals) on at least one reel (which may be all reels). When the stop operation is performed on the reel, the timing when the "red 7" symbol is displayed, the timing when the "blue 7" symbol is displayed, and the timing when the "BAR" symbol is displayed overlap. Configure not to. That is, when the "Red 7" symbol is aimed at and pressed, the "Blue 7" and "BAR" symbols may not be displayed, and when the "Blue 7" symbol is aimed and pressed, the "Blue 7" symbol is pressed. The "Red 7" and "BAR" symbols are not displayed, and when the "BAR" symbol is aimed at and pressed, the "Red 7" and "Blue 7" symbols are not displayed. do. The combination of symbols according to BB3 may be configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), for example, when a bonus combination (any of BB1 to BB3) can be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/45 in total), the winning bonus combination is BB1. A certain probability is "45%" (the winning probability is "1/100"), and the probability that the winning bonus combination is BB2 is "45%" (the winning probability is "1/100"). The probability that the bonus combination is BB3 is "10%" (the winning probability is "1/450"). It should be noted that this bonus winning ratio shows an example, and BB1 to BB3 may be won with the same winning probability (winning ratio), or may be won at a ratio different from the above. Further, in (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state), BB1, BB2, and BB3 are configured not to win as overlap with other replay combinations or small combinations, but to win independently. In addition, as long as the combination of the corresponding symbols can be displayed in the winning game, the winning may be configured to overlap with other small winning combinations.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), in any case, (1-1) BB1 is won, (2-1) BB2 is won, or (3-1) BB3 is won. A bonus winning notification will be given for the winning game. This bonus winning notification is configured as a predetermined notification that it is possible to notify that any one of BB1 to BB3 has been determined as the internal winning combination, but the type cannot be notified. In this predetermined notification, for example, it is notified that a character such as "Big hit!" Is displayed or a WIN lamp is turned on to win a bonus role, but whether the BB1 is won or the BB2 is won. Or, it is not felt whether the player won the BB3.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (1-1) BB1 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB1 If the combination of symbols according to the above can be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1-2) BB1 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (B) BB1 state. In the (B) BB1 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140) of the game value is given in the (B) BB1 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (1-4) BB1 ends, and (B) BB1 state shifts to (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB1 cannot be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1- 3) BB1 is not established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) shifts to (C) the BB1 flag.

In this example, as in the present embodiment and other examples, there is a push order small combination, which will be described as 6-choice push order small combinations 1 to 6. In normal stop control, if the push order small winning combination 1 is the correct answer in the left middle right and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push orders are incorrect answers in the push order and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. One piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and in the push order small role 2, the right and left middle is the correct answer in the push order and 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push order is the wrong answer in the push order. If the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 3, the middle and left are the correct push order, and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing, and the other push orders. Is the wrong answer in the push order, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout). If the sheet payout and other push orders are incorrect in the push order and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one card is paid out, if it is not appropriate, the card is dropped (no payout). 9 cards are paid out regardless of the operation timing, 1 card is paid out if the other push order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is appropriate, if not, it is missed (no payout), and the push order small winning combination 6 is on the right. The middle left is the correct answer in the push order and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Become.

(C) Between the BB1 flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is higher than that of (A) the general game state (non-bonus state), and the "loss" probability is set to, for example, about "1/4000". Similar to the other examples, in this example as well, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 can be displayed only in the game in which (C) BB1 flags are "lost". If the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing", (1-2) BB1 is established, and the state shifts from between the (C) BB1 flags to the (B) BB1 state. Further, (C) between the BB1 flags, a bonus type notification is performed in which the winning bonus combination is BB1 (that is, the type of the bonus combination) is notified. This bonus type notification is configured as a specific notification for notifying that the BB1 has been won (the display of the combination of symbols related to the BB1 is permitted) between the BB1 flags. In this specific notification, for example, a character such as "Red 7 inside hit" is displayed, or a lamp corresponding to "Red 7" is turned on, so that it can be perceived that the BB1 is won. ing. It should be noted that this specific notification can be performed at all times while (C) between the BB1 flags, or can be performed in a game in which the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed between (C) BB1 flags. You can also make it happen.

Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, the stop control is changed for the push order small winning combination 1 to 6. Specifically, if the push order small winning combination 1, the pushing order small winning combination 3, and the pushing order small winning combination 5 are won, 9 cards will be paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). If you win the push order small winning combination 2, the pushing order small winning combination 4, and the pushing order small winning combination 6, you will be paid out one card regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). The stop control is changed to. Here, since the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 have the same winning probability, normal stop control is performed on the premise that the push order is not notified (A) General game. The return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flags than between the states (non-bonus state) and the (G) BB3 flags described later. It should be noted that (C) between the BB1 flags may be configured as a reduction period (however, the reduction rate is low when viewed from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) and (G-1) non-advantageous section described later). Alternatively, it may be configured as an increase period (however, the increase rate is low when viewed from the (G-2) advantageous section described later). Further, the expected value of grant may be configured as a non-increase / decrease period. Further, although it has almost no effect on the expected value of grant, even between the (C) BB1 flags, for example, between the (C-1) non-advantageous section and the (C-2) advantageous section according to specific notification conditions. The transition control may be performed with.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), if (2-1) BB2 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB2. If the combination of symbols according to the above can be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (2-2) BB2 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (D) BB2 state. In the (D) BB2 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140) of the game value is given in the (D) BB2 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (2-4) BB2 ends, and it shifts from (D) BB2 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB2 cannot be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (2- 3) BB2 is not established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is shifted to (E) between the BB2 flags. If BB1 is replaced with BB2 and "red 7" is replaced with "blue 7" between (E) BB2 flags, it is basically the same as between (C) BB1 flags, so the description here is omitted. do. The same applies to bonus type notification and the like.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), if (3-1) BB3 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and the BB3 is reached. If the combination of the symbols can be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (3-2) BB3 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (F) BB3 state. In the (F) BB3 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140) of the game value is given in the (F) BB3 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (3-4) BB3 ends, and it shifts from (F) BB3 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state). The (F) BB3 state can also be configured as a decrease period or a non-increase / decrease period.

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB3 cannot be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (3-3). ) BB3 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (G) BB3 flag.

Between (G) BB3 flags, the winning probability of the replay role is higher than between (C) BB1 flags and (E) BB2 flags, and the probability of "missing" is, for example, about "1/65536" or " It is set to "0". That is, between the (G) BB3 flags, the probability that the combination of symbols related to BB3 is displayed is extremely low, or the combination of symbols related to BB3 is not displayed. The setting of the "loss" probability is not limited to this, and may be set to the same degree as between (C) BB1 flags and (E) BB2 flags, or may be set to a higher probability than these. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended payout rate and its contents. (G) Similarly, even between the BB3 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB3 can be displayed only in the game that has become "missing". If the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing", (3-2) BB3 is established, and the state shifts from between the (G) BB3 flags to the (F) BB3 state. Note that the bonus type notification is basically the same as between the (C) BB1 flags if "red 7" is replaced with "BAR", and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, between the (G) BB3 flags, the stop control is not changed for the push order small combinations 1 to 6, and the normal stop control is used. Therefore, assuming that the push order is not notified, the return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flag and the (E) BB2 flag, but between the (G) BB3 flags. If it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-1) a non-advantageous section and the game value decreases, but if it is controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-2) advantageous. It becomes an increasing period in which the game value increases as a section, and in the (G-2) advantageous section, at least the push order that is the correct answer at the time of winning the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 is notified, and as a result, (C) between the BB1 flags. And (E) the return rate to the player is higher (the expected value of grant is higher) than between the BB2 flags. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

That is, (1-1) BB1 is won, (1-2) BB1 is established, (B) BB1 state is reached and the game value is increased, and (1-3) BB1 is not established. (C) Between the BB1 flags, the game value gradually increases or decreases gradually. (C) Between the BB1 flags is configured to continue until (1-2) BB1 is established. In addition, if (2-1) BB2 is won and (2-2) BB2 is established, the game value is increased in the (D) BB2 state, and if (2-3) BB2 is not established, the game value is increased. (E) Between the BB2 flags, the game value gradually increases or decreases gradually. (E) Between the BB2 flags is configured to continue until (2-2) BB2 is established.

In addition, if (3-1) BB3 is won and (3-2) BB3 is established, the game value is increased in the (F) BB3 state, and if (3-3) BB3 is not established, the game value is increased. Between the (G) BB3 flags, the game value sharply decreases in the (G-1) non-advantageous section, while the game value sharply increases in the (G-2) advantageous section. The (G) BB3 flags are configured to continue until (3-2) BB3 is established with an extremely low probability, or basically do not end once the transition is made. Since BB1 and BB2 have a higher winning probability than BB3, a sufficient period during which gambling can be suppressed can be sufficiently secured. Further, usually, the former game property is provided at the beginning when it is installed in the game store, and it is highly possible that the latter game property is provided after a while. However, it is also possible to ensure that the playability can be changed by the initialization operation as shown below.

For example, when the setting change operation (initialization operation for initializing the game state) is performed while (C) between the BB1 flags, (E) between the BB2 flags, or (G) between the BB3 flags, the carry-over combination When BB1, BB2, or BB3 is cleared, (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is entered. That is, when (G) is configured not to end between the BB3 flags, BB3 as a carry-over combination is cleared based on the setting change operation, and (A) a general gaming state (non-bonus state). ) May be migrated. However, when the setting change operation is performed, if (C) between the BB1 flags or (E) between the BB2 flags, BB1 or BB2 as the carry-over combination is cleared, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state). ), But if it is between (G) BB3 flags, BB3 as a carry-over combination may not be cleared and (A) it may not shift to the general gaming state (non-bonus state). Further, even if the setting change operation is performed, it can be configured so that none of BB1, BB2, or BB3 as the carry-over combination is cleared.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the first special combination (BB1) or the second special combination (BB3) is won, the game is the game, or the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags) or the second after the winning. If it is not a game in which another internal winning combination has not been determined (so-called lost) in the special permission state (between the BB3 flags), the first special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to BB1) or the second special symbol (Combination of symbols related to BB3) cannot be displayed. Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination (pushing order small combination 1, 3, 5) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given regardless of the pushing order, and the second If the predetermined combination (small combination 2, 4, 6 in the push order) is won, the predetermined number of game values are not given regardless of the push order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to be controlled to the advantageous state ((G-2) advantageous section) in which the information of the player's stop operation is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, then the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit becomes advantageous, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in change.

In the gaming machine of this example, the winning probability of the first special role is made higher than the winning probability of the second special role, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. The probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed may be higher than the probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed in the special permission state. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and finish than the first special permission state. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. By doing so, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this example, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified (bonus winning notification), and the first In the 1 special permission state and the 2nd special permission state, the type may be notified (bonus type notification). By doing so, it is possible to notify the player's desired information while making the game playability more varied.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) (6)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 6) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 6) of the game property (game specification), and FIG. 99 is a diagram showing another example (No. 6) of the game property (game specification). It is a figure which showed an example of the internal lottery table used in.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, in this example, there are roughly two types, a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and a BB state, and in the general gaming state (normal gaming state), either BB1 or BB2. The state in which the bonus role of BB1 is not won is defined as (A) general game state (between non-flags), and the state in which BB1 is won (BB1 permission state in which BB1 is carried over) is defined as 3 cards. The state in which the medals are bet (hanged) and the game is played is defined as (B) a three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, and the state in which BB2 is won (BB2 permitted state in which BB2 is carried over) is defined. Therefore, the state in which three medals are bet and the game is played is defined as (C) the state in which three BB2 flags are bet, and the BB1 is permitted, and two medals are bet and the game is played. The state is defined as (D) a two-card bet state between BB1 flags, and a state in which two medals are bet and a game is played in a BB2 permitted state is defined as (E) a two-card bet state between BB2 flags. .. Further, the bonus state in which the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line and started is defined as (F) BB1 state, and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line and started. The bonus state is defined as the (G) BB2 state. That is, it is intended to make the game playability different according to the type of the bonus combination that is won (winned) in the general game state (normal game state) and the number of bets (the number of times the game value is multiplied).

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 99, for convenience of explanation, each lottery value used in (A) the three-card bet state of the general game state (non-flag bet) (see the column of "non-flag three-bet"). , (A) Each lottery value used in the two-card bet state of the general game state (non-flag) (see the column of "2-flag bet between non-flags"), (B) 3-bet state between BB1 flags and (C). ) In each lottery value used in the BB2 flag 3-bet state (see the column of "3 flag bet"), and (D) in the BB1 flag 2-bet state and (E) in the BB2 flag 2-bet state. Each lottery value used (see the column of "two bets between flags") is shown in each column, but this does not mean that the gaming state (RT state) is different. That is, the RT state can be controlled as a common RT state. However, it can also be controlled as another RT state. In addition, it is assumed that at least the internal winning combination, which is the target of the advantageous section grant determination described later, is a common lottery value among the set values.

(A) In the general gaming state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is made, the winning of BB1 is possible and the winning of BB2 is not possible (see the column of "3 bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the case of two bets, it is configured so that the winning of BB2 is possible and the winning of BB1 is not possible (see the column of "two bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). In this example, the player can start the game (perform a start operation) in either case of betting two medals or betting three medals. There is. Further, "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 14 in order to use the bet, and the player operates the bet button to obtain two or three medals from the credit. This includes both the hanging of medals and the automatic hanging of two or three medals by winning the replay role.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is won, the BB1 is won (the winning game may be carried over without displaying the combination of symbols related to the BB1). Will shift between the BB1 flags. (1-1) When a game is played with three bets between BB1 flags, (B) a three-card bet state between BB1 flags is set (see the column of "three bets between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, (2) when the game is played with two bets between the BB1 flags, (D) the two bets between the BB1 flags are set (see the column of "two bets between the flags" in FIG. 99).

(B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing" as described in the other examples (BB1 can be established). .. The "missing" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed to be set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, the state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or BB2 wins (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). Further, when the push order bell A (see the internal winning combination of No. "20" to "31" in FIG. 99) is won, if the push order is correct (the push order displayed by "abbreviation" respectively), 9 If the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (“○”), then one sheet is paid out, and if the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (“×”). ) 0 cards will be paid out. Further, when the push order bell B (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "21" to "43" in FIG. 99) is won, 9 cards are paid out regardless of the push order and the timing of the stop operation. That is, in the (B) 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order of the push order bell B does not matter, and if the advantageous section is not taken into consideration, the 3-card bet in the (A) general gaming state (between the non-flags). The return rate is higher than that of the state and the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, (B) in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when the chance is won (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "7" to "16" in FIG. 99) (or the combination of the symbols related to the chance is). When a strong bell (see No. "17" and "18" in FIG. 99) is won (which may be displayed), a definite combination (No. "19" in FIG. 99). When winning the internal winning combination), when winning the cherry (see the internal winning combination of No. "44" in FIG. 99), and when winning the watermelon (see the internal winning combination of No. "45" in FIG. 99). ), The advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is made with the probability corresponding to the internal winning combination (100% probability for the fixed combination). If it is determined to be granted as a result of the advantageous section grant determination, for example, an advantageous section of 50 games per set is granted (if it is already in the advantageous section, it is extended by 50 games per set). It should be noted that the mode of imparting an advantageous section is an example, and various modes described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Further, in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1-2) BB1 is established and the state shifts to (F) BB1 state. (F) The BB1 state is a gaming state configured as, for example, a "special bonus state", which is an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as already described in other examples). , 140 cards), (1-3) BB1 ends, and (F) BB1 state shifts to (A) general game state (between non-flags).

(D) In the two-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which the BB1 wins, although it is between the BB1 flags. Cannot be displayed (BB1 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or BB2 wins (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which the bonus combination is neither won nor won. However, in view of the fact that the flags are between the BB1 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (D) in the two-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, if the push order is correct, two cards are paid out, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. However, for either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B, it is possible to configure the payout so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (B) 3 bets between the BB1 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so that it becomes the same as the state, and then (B) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. It should be noted that (D) in the two-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a two-card bet is won, the BB2 is won (the winning game may be carried over without displaying the combination of symbols related to the BB2). Will shift between the BB2 flags. (2) When a game is played with three bets between BB2 flags, (C) a three-card bet state between BB2 flags is set (see the column of "three bets between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when the game is played with two bets between (4-1) BB2 flags, (E) a two-card bet state between BB2 flags is set (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which BB2 wins, although it is between the BB2 flags. Therefore, even if the game is "lost", the combination of symbols related to BB2 Cannot be displayed (BB2 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or win a prize at BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which the bonus combination is neither won nor won. However, in view of the fact that the flags are between the BB2 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (C) in the state of betting 3 cards between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, 9 cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. That is, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is higher than in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, unless the advantageous section is taken into consideration because the push order of the push order bell B does not matter. It is low and is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is performed as in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. Here, No. Focusing on "F_Rip B" of "4", (B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the "normal rip" wins regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section grant decision is not made. (C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the "chance eye" is won and the advantageous section grant decision is made regardless of the mode of the stop operation. That is, (C) in the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the internal winning combination of "F_lip B" is promoted (converted) to the internal winning combination of "chance eye", so there are many opportunities to decide to grant an advantageous section. Therefore, if the advantageous section is taken into consideration, the probability of granting the advantageous section is higher than that of the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

(E) In the two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing" as described in the other examples (BB2 can be established). .. The "missing" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed to be set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or win a prize at BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win).

In addition, (E) in the two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, if the push order is correct, two cards are paid out, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. However, for either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B, it is possible to configure the payout so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (C) 3 bets between the BB2 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so that it becomes the same as the state, and then (C) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags. In the (E) two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

Further, in the (E) two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, when the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (4-2) BB2 is established and the state shifts to (G) BB2 state. (F) The BB2 state is, for example, a gaming state configured as a "special bonus state", which is an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as already described in other examples). , 60 cards), (4-3) BB1 ends, and (G) BB2 state shifts to (A) general game state (between non-flags). The (F) BB2 state can also be configured as a non-increase / decrease period.

In this example, when (B) the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags and (C) the 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags are compared, in the (B) 3-bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order for the bell B is pushed. Is unquestioned, and (F) it is possible to shift to the BB1 state, so basically (B) the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags is the return rate (in other words, the base value and the payout rate). It is configured so that (may be good) is high. On the other hand, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, there are many opportunities to determine the advantageous section grant, and the expected value of grant when the advantageous section is reached is also high. If the winning probability of the internal winning combination, the probability of determining the advantageous section grant at the time of winning the chance, and the duration of the advantageous section granted when the advantageous section grant decision is made are appropriately adjusted, (C) BB2 flag It is also possible to configure the return rate in the three-card bet state between (B) to be equal to or higher than the return rate in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags.

Further, in this example, when (E) the two-card bet state between the BB2 flags and (D) the two-card bet state between the BB1 flags are compared, the two-card bet state between the (E) BB2 flags changes to the (G) BB2 state. Basically, the return rate is higher in the two-card bet state between the (E) BB2 flags because the transition is possible. As in the case of (B) a three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the reduction rate is high because the control is performed so that the push order of the push order bell B does not matter even in the (E) two-card bet state between the BB2 flags. It may be configured to be.

For example, when the player starts the game from (A) the general game state (between the non-flags), the player can first select whether to make a 3-card bet or a 2-card bet. If you win BB1 as a 3-card bet and do not move to the (F) BB1 state in the winning game, there is no merit in the (D) BB1 state 2-card bet state, so (B) with the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags as it is. Advance the game. (B) Since the return rate is relatively high in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, does the player shift to the (F) BB1 state and increase the game value without reducing the game value so rapidly? Or, it is possible to select whether to increase the game value by shifting to the advantageous section (as a result of being notified of the correct push order for the push order bell A) by taking the opportunity of determining the advantageous section grant. In the state of (B) three-card bet between BB1 flags, the game value does not increase so rapidly even if the section shifts to the advantageous section, as compared with the state of (C) three-card bet between BB2 flags.

On the other hand, if the winning game is won on BB2 as a two-card bet and the winning game does not shift to the (G) BB2 state, the player either advances the game in the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, or (E) BB2. It is possible to select whether to proceed with the game in the state of betting two cards between the flags. (C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is relatively low and the game value does not shift to the bonus state. If the probability of obtaining is increasing and the player shifts to an advantageous section (as a result of being notified of the correct push order for push order bell A and push order bell B), the game value can be rapidly increased. there is a possibility. In addition, in the (E) two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, although the game value in a small role cannot be expected to increase, the return rate is relatively high, and the game value is increased by shifting to the (G) BB2 state. Can be increased. In this example, such playability (game specifications) can be provided.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first amount (3 cards), the first special role (BB1) can be won, while the second special role (BB2) can be won. Not possible. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (two cards), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination ("F_Rip B") is won, the combination of specific symbols (chance eye) cannot be displayed in the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags), and the second special permission state (BB2) is not displayed. If it is between flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, an advantageous state (advantageous section) is given when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. It is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous section (determination of granting an advantageous section), and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first quantity, the first special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to BB1) can be displayed, while the second special symbol is displayed. (Combination of symbols related to BB2) cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, as a state in which the game is played, for example, in the first special permission state, the game is played with the first amount of the game value bet ((B) BB1 flag). (3 bets between 3 cards), 2nd special permission state, where the game is played with the first amount of game value bet ((C) 3 bets between BB2 flags), 1st special permission state There is a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played ((D) a two-card bet state between BB1 flags), and a second special permission state in which a second amount of game value is bet. It is possible to create a plurality of states, that is, a state in which the game is played ((E) a two-card bet state between the BB2 flags).

Then, according to the gaming machine of this example, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of the game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in change.

In the gaming machine of this example, when the first predetermined combination (pushing order bell A) is won, for example, a predetermined number (for example, 9) if the pushing order is correct, regardless of which state it is in. The game value of (sheets) is given, and if the push order is incorrect, a predetermined number of game values are not given, and if the second predetermined combination (push order bell B) is won, the first special permission state is set. In a state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, for example, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the first predetermined amount is given. The same control as the combination may be performed. In this way, the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first amount can be set to the state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

Although other examples of game playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment have been described above with reference to FIGS. 92 to 99, the main points of game playability (game specifications) are described in these. The points described mainly are omitted or briefly explained in these, and the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples can be appropriately supplemented and applied. .. It is also possible to combine some or all of the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples into the present invention.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (number limiter)]
Subsequently, another example of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. So far, as the limiter of the advantageous section, the limiter using the number of games digested during the advantageous section (hereinafter, "game number limiter") has been described, but the type of the limiter of the advantageous section is not limited to the game number limiter. not. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. A limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a "number limiter".

FIG. 100A is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), which is also referred to as a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number is the value seen from the player, and if the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of medals inserted (plus on the player side), plus or vice versa. In the case of, it becomes negative. The horizontal axis is the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been digested from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter starts from the time when the number of medals is the lowest so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time, and forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 medals is obtained. It is something to make.

In the figure, about 100 medals have decreased after the start of the advantageous section. This means that, for example, if the start of the advantageous section is the start of the above-mentioned normal advantageous section, the number of medals is reduced due to the game period or the preparation state during the above-mentioned advantageous section. The number of medals has continued to increase from the start of the advantageous section to -100, and finally the number of medals has increased to about +2300. At this point, from the player's point of view, at least 2400 medals are at hand. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly terminate the advantageous section. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress gambling.

The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number limiter, and may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter and the number of games. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed by using both the limiter and the limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when one of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In this explanation, the number of games limiter is 1500 games and the number limiter is 2400, but this is just an example, and a smaller value or a larger value is adopted according to the game specifications to make the gambling appropriate. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, it is the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase per game, expected net increase including increase due to bonus operation) and the activation condition of the number of games limiter. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C, which is a condition for activating the number limiter, will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the inclination value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is the condition for activating the number of games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) × B (100 games) = C (300 sheets)) in which the inclination value A × the number of games of the number of games limiter B = the difference number of sheets C of the number of sheets limiter is Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and it is possible to stably control an advantageous section and appropriately suppress gambling.

In the second specification, the specification in which the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B <the difference in the number of sheets limiter C (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games) <C (400 sheets)) is Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. If the number limiter is activated when the bonus is subtracted more than the expected value, or when the push order role with a large net increase is drawn extremely more than the expected value, and the game progresses at a value close to the expected value, the number of games The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number of games limiter by reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number limiter, and the player's consciousness is the game rather than the difference number. It will lean toward the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals will be paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number of games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter> number number limiter. If you do not want to worry too much about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in the number of sheets, it is better to use such specifications. For example, in the case of a type in which the end condition (not the limiter) such as ending with a net increase of 100 sheets per set is managed by the difference number, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player can use it. The limiter can reduce the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off, and can suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the third specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games)> C (200 sheets)) in which the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B> the difference number C in the number limiter is set. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is "3", 200 medals will be paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is such that the number of games limiter <the number of game limiters. If you don't want to worry about the activation of the number of games limiter due to the number of games, you can use this specification. For example, for a specification in which the net increase in the number of games per game is relatively low, such as 0.1 to 1, but the number of games continues for a long time, such a specification can suppress the frequency of activation of the limiter, and the player can use the limiter. As a result, the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off can be reduced, and the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In any specification, the end condition of the advantageous section other than the limiter is more than the ratio of the end when the limiter is reached (for example, the duration of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets and the stock become zero). Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to digest the advantageous section is eliminated by activating the limiter as a ball ejection design in which the rate at which the advantageous section ends is high.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end-time effects by using a display device 11 or the like when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. If each is a dedicated production, it will lead to a game motivation to see each production once. Further, the sub-control board 72 may be different in the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of the limiter. For example, if the number limiter is used, the accuracy of setting suggestion may be higher than when the game number limiter is activated (the difference in coefficients for each setting is large, or it is easy to produce an effect in which a specific setting is confirmed). By obtaining specific information such as setting suggestions or seeing a dedicated effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-mentioned limiter specifications. For example, the sub-control board 72 is preferable for the player (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is high) when the limiter which is difficult to activate is activated rather than the limiter which is easy to activate due to the specifications. May be good.

(Ending production according to the type of limiter)
Further, in the sub-control board 72, when the activation of the number limiter becomes rich, the ending effect A is performed, and when the activation of the game number limiter becomes rich, the ending effect B is performed. There is no big difference in the rate of occurrence, but if at least one of them occurs, the ending effect C (may be an effect having a branch to the ending effect A or B) is performed. In order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to sudden termination at the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to provide an end suggestion period (ending) for the end of the advantageous section before the limiter is activated. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number limiter becomes rich" is, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the difference number, the difference calculated from the difference number so far and the remaining ART period. The sum with the number of sheets (for example, "the number of remaining games x the inclination value" in the case of ART for managing the number of games) is set to the threshold value (for example, the difference number of sheets for which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number of sheets). It is when the number is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the difference number, the sum of the difference number and the remaining number reaches the threshold value. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated" is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the number of games. The sum with the number of games to be played (for example, "remaining difference number / slope value" in the case of ART for managing the difference number) is slightly larger than the threshold number (for example, the number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated or the number of games concerned). (Small value) is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games elapsed so far and the number of remaining games reaches the threshold value.

(Notify or suggest the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen about the type of the activated limiter or the effect generated corresponding to the type of the limiter (the type of the ending effect, etc.). Is also good. In this case, since a large number of balls have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to motivate the game to expect a high setting.

(Outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of the type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall side can grasp which of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated by a hall computer or the like. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, in the case of a model in which the number of games limiter is mainly activated and the number limiter is not activated so much in the case of the original payout specifications, if the number limiter is activated frequently, some kind of goto action is being performed or the game is played. The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

If the conditions for activating the number limiter and the conditions for activating the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, the main control board 71 may output one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals. May be output in a predetermined order. When outputting in order, it is advisable to wait a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signal can be reliably received. Further, when the conditions for activating the number limiter and the conditions for activating the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, it is assumed that only one of the limit processing is performed and the other processing is not performed, and the main (main control board 71). In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the limiter of the type performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the type of limiter)
Further, if there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal is used regardless of the type of limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter, and may be able to detect the end of the advantageous section by a hall computer or the like. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal immediately after the game or the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots obtained exceeds the number of limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was inadequate, and the bonus was activated near the limiter by chance to win the ball. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when the limiter is activated while the bonus is operating (at the end of the bonus))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such a specification may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of balls is substantially increased.

(Production when the player misses a small role in a game that may activate the number limiter)
For example, in a three-card game with six remaining cards until the number limiter is activated, nine medals are paid out at the time of the correct answer, and the push order small role is won, and the correct answer push order is notified. Regardless, if the player makes a mistake in the push order, the number limiter may be activated from the start of the game, assuming that the number limiter will be activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game. .. In such a case, as a result of making a mistake in the pushing order, the number limiter is not activated, but the sub-control board 72 is scheduled to activate the number limiter (for example, the number limiter) that was started from the start of the game. The effect of the effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number limiter will not be activated.

(Production when the activated limiter is changed by the operation of the player)
In addition, the type of limiter to be activated may differ due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining cards until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the number of remaining games until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out at the time of correct answer in a 3-card game. This corresponds to the case where the order of pushing the correct answer is notified by winning the small role. In such a case, if the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but if the push order is missed without following the notification, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (In addition, there is a possibility that the number limiter will be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that the game number limiter is activated with priority when multiple limiter activation conditions are satisfied).

In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the push order small combination is won, and any timing of the transition (first stop operation-) in which the non-activation of the number limiter is confirmed. When all reels are stopped, switch to the effect when the number of games limiter is activated at any timing after the display of the missing or small number of symbol combinations is confirmed), or the effect does not correspond to the suggestion of any limiter activation. It is preferable to perform a process of returning once and control so as to avoid a contradiction between the activated limiter and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, the delay of the end effect and the extension of the ending effect due to the activation of the limiter inside)
Regarding the effects and controls related to the limit processing described so far, if the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus end of the production timing according to the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing. By using a method of delaying until the time or immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

[How to control the number limiter]
Subsequently, a method of controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (B). In the number limiter, the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is set as the lowest point (starting point), and the plus amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number that triggers the activation of the number limiter. .. The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, the increase / decrease of medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then the number of medals increases to reach the limiter (in addition, the batting order). The small role is written as "batting order bell").

In the figure, the point where the absolute value of the medals decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is "-9", so the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference is "+2391" in the N game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of correctly answering in the order of pushing in the N + 2 game and aligning the bells, the difference number from the starting point exceeds "+2400 sheets", but the number limiter has already been activated and the advantageous section (ART) has ended. , It's only temporary and there is no problem.

In the figure, the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of the payout of the game is shown, but it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to be mounted on the gaming machine. Of course, the corresponding counter may be mounted and used to show the player the number of acquired cards.

Further, the starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. It may be recognized as the lowest point simply because the value of the counter (number counter) used for the limiter is 0 without having the starting point flag, but whether or not the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has started. Is produced on the sub (sub control board 72) side, etc., by referring to the starting point flag that can be performed only by ON / OFF determination, and producing the value of the number counter without transmitting it to the sub side (main control board). The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub side receives the information on the number of input and the number of payouts transmitted from the main and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub side, and produces the status of the number counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number limiter is activated). Etc.) may be done.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated either at the same value as the latest lowest point or at a smaller value. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference becomes "-3" again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. In reality, since the number of medals has decreased since then, the starting point in the number limiter is "-9", which is the absolute difference in the number of medals at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the digestion of one game at the start of the advantageous section (the time when the absolute difference number is 0) is set. It is set as the first lowest point, the end of one game is the second lowest point, the time when it becomes minus 9 is the third lowest point, and when 2400 sheets are increased from the third lowest point, the number limiter is activated. May be. Further, in the figure, at the time of winning the replay, the number of sheets to be input is 0 and the number of sheets to be paid out is 0, and the number counter is updated. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number at the time of replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, it is also possible to pay out the number of inserted sheets at the time of winning the replay and update the number counter with the number of inserted sheets being three in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay wins and the operation to start the next game is performed can be matched with the actual difference number behavior, and the value of the number counter can be actually increased or decreased. It becomes easy to divert it to the number display for directing.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display device 11 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can grasp or suggest the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number of sheets limiter is activated, and if the remaining number of sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first production stage, if the remaining 1000 to 1999 sheets, the second production stage, and the remaining 999 sheets. If the number of sheets is less than the number of sheets, the production stage such as the background may be different depending on the number range until the number limiter is activated, as in the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal and can display it on a data display for viewing game data installed on a hall computer, an upper part of a pachislot machine, or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintains the values of the starting point flag and the number counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may erase the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when the setting is changed.

[Adjustment method of number limiter]
Subsequently, the adjustment striking method of the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (C). In the specification of forcibly ending the advantageous section using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the activation of the number limiter is also conceivable. For example, if the push order small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "9" medals are paid out and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect push order. In the specification that the payout of medals is "0", 3 medals are required in one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order at the time of winning the push order, the number counter will be set. If the number of medals is "+6" and the stop operation is performed in the wrong push order when the push order is won, the number counter is set to "-3". Therefore, for example, when the push order is won three times, if the wrong answer is given twice in the push order and the correct answer is made once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the winning of the bonus while keeping the ART (advantageous section) immediately before the number limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment striking method starts from the M game, and the adjustment striking method is performed up to the X game, which is a BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 in which the number limiter is activated, have been obtained (note that the small role (15) in BB is described as "BB medium bell". ).

In Pachislot 1, it is possible to obtain the maximum profit for the player by suggesting or notifying that it is advantageous to intentionally go against the batting order notification (stop different from the batting order navigation). Operation) may be prompted. It should be noted that such an effect may be performed by the sub-control board 72 via the display device 11 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

In addition, if there are multiple types of bonus roles such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 cards and a relatively high probability of winning (15 cards with a bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult) and a bonus with a net increase of 120 cards, the number limiter The effect of recommending the above adjustment striking method may be performed on a line in which the remaining difference number until reaching is larger than the net increase number in the mini bonus. Further, for the small winning combination other than the pushing order combination, the number of payouts may be easily adjusted (for example, the number of payouts is 3) without increasing the number of payouts exceeding 3. In this way, the fun of the game is enhanced by making the game playable so that the ball ejection rate can be improved by devising the way of hitting.

If you place importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of the game being avoided by beginners, the number counter is not added by the actual net increase, but by the net increase when playing as instructed. You may do it. For example, in a three-card game, if a player wins a push order small winning combination in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer, the main control board 71 may operate the player on the condition that the correct answer push order is notified. Regardless of the winning result, the number counter is set to +6. As such a specification, a specification that seals such an adjustment striking method may be used.

[Playability with specifications that block the adjustment method]
Next, the playability that can be realized by the specification that seals such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(No bonus installed)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is composed only of a small role and a replay without installing a bonus role, the player does not have to ask the player for the above-mentioned complicated striking method, and the playability becomes easy to understand.

(Equipped with a bonus that does not increase or decrease or decreases)
In addition, as another specification example that suppresses the above-mentioned striking method, the bonus may be a non-increasing / decreasing bonus in which only a small winning combination in which the same number of coins is paid out during operation is won, and the bonus is thrown during operation. It may be a reduced bonus that only a small winning combination is paid out, which is less than the number of cards. In this case, the bonus may be performed in the lottery of the advantageous section at the time of the bonus operation or during the bonus operation instead of increasing the medals, and the player does not perform the advantageous processing but the player at the game store. As long as you play a normal game, the reel control will hinder the winning of the bonus, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The net increase in the number of cards during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Assuming a three-card game, there is no payout at the time of bonus winning, so the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of winnings that can be generated during the bonus operation is 6 cards or less. By doing so, the difference number from the time of bonus operation to the end of bonus does not become a positive value, so the value of the number counter does not increase due to bonus operation, and the complicated hit as described above The player does not have to do the law.

[Playability with specifications that allow adjustment hitting]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(Removing small roles during bonus operation or reducing the number of acquired cards)
In addition to the specifications that can perform the above-mentioned striking method, if the number limiter is activated during the bonus operation, intentionally reduce the number of bonuses obtained, end the bonus, and after the bonus, use the above-mentioned striking method. It may be most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantageous section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to drop a small winning combination in the pressing timing or pressing order, or to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts. In this case, it is desirable that the number of winnings with a small number of payouts is smaller than the number of coins inserted during the bonus operation. A certain effect can be achieved even if a role that allows fine adjustment such as being received is provided.

(Normal roles other than push order roles are only replays or roles with less than the number of inputs)
For example, it is assumed that the bonus is not activated and three cards are hung. The number of small push order roles is 9, but other roles such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push order are configured as a replay role or a role with 3 or less payouts. By doing this, even if another small role is drawn in a situation where the number limiter operates with the net increase of the remaining few sheets, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty of the capture method is reduced, making it easier to play.

(The player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number of cards (1 or 2 cards) when the stop operation is different from that of the push order navigation system.)
There is a specification that one sheet will be paid out or dropped if the stop operation is different from the push order navigation. In this case, since the increase / decrease of the game occurs in two ways, minus 2 and minus 3, it is difficult to calculate and may be confusing when playing. Compared to such specifications, when the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 or 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring navigation, the negative value when ignoring navigation with the number of sheets at the last minute is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player makes a mistake in the calculation and hits the part that should be ignored once more according to the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

In addition, it is not always necessary to pay out one sheet at a high frequency or it is missed, and it is possible to exert a certain effect even if it is generally stabilized. In addition, the number of payouts may be stable due to the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when the batting order navigation of "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" (left, middle, right is the correct batting order) occurs, the 1-card winning rate is "middle 1st"> "right 1st", and 3 cards. If you want to reduce it, you may choose the right first stop, and if you want to reduce the number of cards, you may choose the middle first stop. Also, if you miss the second stop after the first stop is correct in the game, if you stop in the order of "1 ・ 3 ・ 2", there is a higher probability than other navigation-ignored batting orders, or one card will always win. , It is good that the player can select the reduction method by batting order.

(Navigation mode changes when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub control board 72 displays the push order in the first mode (blue numbers, etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub control board 72. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).

(Changes depending on the situation or production that should be ignored for navigation)
The main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 may be different depending on the situation in which the BGM, the image, the lamp, and the like are followed by the navigation and the situation in which the navigation is against the navigation. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether or not the situation should be against the navigation when the navigation occurs in the next game before the navigation occurs.

(Lock or reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may be provided with a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) immediately after the lever is turned on, after the reel rotation starts, or a period for disabling the temporary operation acceptance of the stop button. As a result, it is possible to alert the player and prevent a case where the advantageous section is accidentally ended. In addition, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 also call attention to audio and video.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)]
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), that is, based on the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. , Limit processing is to be performed, but it is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number of medals (for example, 2400 medals) are paid out during the advantageous section.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the input number from the payout number, but in the payout number limiter, the payout number is referred to as it is without subtracting the input number from the payout number. When the number of payouts reaches the specified value, limit processing is performed. In such a payout limiter, the main control board 71 is an advantageous section (in this case, including, for example, the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section") or an increasing section (that is, a gaming section in which medals are actually increased, in this case, for example. The payout number counter is initialized at the start of the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section"), and the payout number counter is updated every time a payout occurs due to a small winning combination. Then, when the value of the payout number counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value regarding the advantageous section.

Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when the winning combination related to the replay wins is arbitrary, and it may be counted as 3 payouts, or it is counted as 0 payout. However, it is desirable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payouts when the winning combination related to the replay wins. By doing so, for example, in a 3BET game, there are cases where a three-card combination (a combination in which three medals are paid out when a prize is won) is won, and a case where a combination related to replay is won, and a payout number counter. Changes in the value of can be made different. That is, the number of payout counters does not advance when the combination related to the replay wins, compared to the case where the three-card combination wins, so that the player can feel a sense of profit, which is substantially the same. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination, which is the value, and the combination related to the replay.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (navigation number limiter)]
Further, as the type of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section, the navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation count limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers the player to be notified (navigated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) during the advantageous section (that is, the navigation count is a specified value). When the result is reached), the limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, in the navigation performed to the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, the medal is maintained or the medal is decreased during the advantageous section in the normal section. There is a navigation to suppress compared to the inside. The former navigation is, for example, in the case of a mode of stopping operation of the correct answer in the 3BET game (for example, when the correct answer is pushed), the correct answer is given at the time of winning the role in which more than 3 medals (for example, 9 medals) are paid out. It refers to notifying the mode of the stop operation, and the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, three cards in the case of a correct stop operation mode in a 3BET game, or In the case of the correct answer stop operation mode, there are less than three medals, but in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation mode (for example, when the push order is incorrect), more medals are paid out. It means to notify the aspect of. The former role that is the target of navigation can be called an increasing role that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) because of its role. In pachislot, which of the plurality of roles should be used as an increasing role can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 counts the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the increasing combination, which is a condition for generating the limit processing by the navigation number limiter, while the non-increasing combination. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning may be excluded from the counting target of the number of navigations, and the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role may be included in the counting target of the number of navigations. May be good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role from the count target, the number of medals has increased too much, as in the case where many non-increasing roles were established after the start of the advantageous section (ART) by chance. If this is not the case, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter, which is to suppress excessive ball ejection, and the player is not dissatisfied.

In such a navigation count limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation count counter (navigation count counter), which is a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, and a navigation to be counted is generated. The value of the navigation count counter is updated each time. Then, when the value of the navigation count counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value regarding the advantageous section. In the various limiters described so far, the method of updating the counter may be an addition type or a subtraction type.

[Another example of the limiter period]
Further, in the above description, an example of using a limiter such as a game number limiter, a number number limiter, a payout number limiter, and a navigation number limiter only in an advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section. It can be adopted at any time. For example, if you accidentally continue to hit the advantageous section, the medals will be paid out only for the maximum number of medals in each advantageous section, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous section, the total Then, many medals may be paid out, which may excessively incite gambling. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, the payout rate and the difference number) indicating the increase status of the period for the latest predetermined number of games (for example, the latest 6000 games) is a predetermined predetermined value. A special limiter may be provided to terminate the advantageous section when the number exceeds (for example, 170% or +10000 sheets from the viewpoint of the player). According to such a special limiter, when the activation condition of the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 has just started the advantageous section, and the game number limiter and the number limiter are completely activated. Even if the situation is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

In addition, in the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section currently acquired (for example, the sustainable period of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets and stock, the number of possible differences, etc.) is issued. When there is a possibility that the special limiter will be activated with reference to the ball rate, the main control board 71 may activate the special limiter by lowering the rate of occurrence of addition before reaching the specified value. It may be controlled so that the right of the increase section (ART) to be lowered or erased when the special limiter is activated is reduced.

Further, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10). Determine the predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as time) and a predetermined number of inserted sheets (for example, 18,000 inserted sheets) that can determine that the player has played the game over a predetermined period. May be.

The configuration of the pachislot machine using such a special limiter is shown below.
It is a gaming machine that can be played using the gaming value,
The right to make the gaming state an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous section in pachislot, an increasing section (AT, ART), a probabilistic state in pachinko, or a shortened time state) (pachislot). It may be the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc. in the pachinko machine, or it may be the right to shift to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, etc. in pachinko). When,
A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right.
Advantageous gaming state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state when the right is granted (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is an AT stock number in the pachislot machine, etc., or pachinko). It may be a continuation of the probable change state or the time saving state in)),
An increase status storage means (for example, a difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter) for storing a value indicating an increase status of the game value from a predetermined unit game to the elapse of a predetermined period. Counter for monitoring the payout rate) and
A gaming machine provided with a special termination means (special limiter) for terminating the advantageous state even if the right is granted when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined predetermined value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, and may be, for example, a daily limiter, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 is cut off for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours such as 2 hours and 4 hours and can be presumed to be a power failure during closing due to the closing of business). Or, the time when the power is turned on after a power failure for a predetermined time or longer is set as the start of the day (starting point), and a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, by resetting the information for the previous day) from the starting point. The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the payout rate and the difference number. Further, the main control board 71 resets the information for the previous day from the starting point (that is, the information for the previous day) with the time when a predetermined time (1 hour or the like) or more has elapsed in the power-on state as the starting point (starting point) of the day. ), The special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number). In any case, the timekeeping method can be realized by mounting a timekeeping means such as an RTC on the main control board 71.

[Penalty for navigation mistakes]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 may be given a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of a specification in which an additional lottery of ART is performed in a state of waiting for a transition to a high RT such as during ART preparation (each preparation state described above), the transition to a high RT is avoided and the ART is being prepared. By stretching it, you can receive a lot of extra lottery while preparing for ART. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery of ART when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether the error is an accidental error or an intentional error, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of the penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. May be.

[Other variants]
As described above, the method of managing the duration of ART (advantageous section) is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference number. Alternatively, the duration may be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during the ART, and the continuation may be managed by the continuation judgment performed at any timing during the ART. The period may be managed, or the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of ART such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, and the number of differences.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine 1, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub control board 72) is not limited to this. The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the) side.

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) of an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability and the specified value is one wave of balls. If the value is specified to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of game machines provided. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600sec, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the number of set values is not changed, the wave of balls can be made more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only those that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

[Application to other pachinko machines]
Further, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment is applicable is not limited to this. For example, features other than the features peculiar to pachislot, such as the features related to reel stop control based on the stop operation, can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effect can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied as long as it is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (performing a game control) according to a game operation (operation) of the player.

[Other expandability of gaming machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 14 or the credited medal is inserted into the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b. If the game is started by (operation of inserting) and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven and the medal is paid out from the medal payout exit 24, or the credit is paid. The form to be used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is played based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is input (hanged) by the physical movement of the player and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. It may be possible to play a game without a medal by electromagnetically managing the above. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the gaming medium management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the gaming machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external gaming medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is possible to connect and win a prize (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium lending operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium loading operation) or a role related to a game medium payout operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium). When the winning combination is established), the operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of acquiring the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium to the player) or the game medium used for the game is used. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. Has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming medium handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the data may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the gaming medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game store, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without a medal, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed. You can also.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 is described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball, the game medium management device is similarly provided and the player It is also possible to manage the game medium of.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the cost and manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced. It also reduces the power consumption of. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

[Pulling back in the advantageous section is set to the winning combination + point management] Modification example The gaming machine of the above embodiment starts the variable display of the symbol based on the starting operation of the player, and stops the internal winning combination and the player. The fluctuation display of the symbol is stopped based on. In addition, an advantageous state control means is provided that can generate an advantageous state corresponding to an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART that enables the operation of the instruction function that notifies the player's stop operation information (see FIG. 14). ..

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 103, the advantageous state control means 101a that can generate an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART and the advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART are displayed on the program of the main CPU 101. A game point awarding means for awarding a first game point on the condition that the game continues for a predetermined number of reached games or more, and a second game point under a predetermined condition based on a predetermined win of an internal winning combination. 101b is provided. The advantageous state control means 101a of the present modification enables the pullback process to the ART based on the game points given by the game point giving means 101b, and is similar to the advantageous state control means of the above embodiment. The various processes shown in 33 to 44 can also be executed.

The advantageous state in this modification is the advantage corresponding to the advantageous section by AT in the AT machine positioned as a model different from the ART machine, which enables the assist time AT to be operated during the bonus internal winning (during the state between flags). Including state. In addition, the game points referred to in this modification differ in the payout of medals given as a result of one game, the operation of re-games or bonuses, the transition to or addition to advantageous sections, or the lottery mode of re-games. It is a game privilege that is given separately from the transition of the RT state and can be accumulated across the games that bring benefits to the player.

One advantageous section, that is, the maximum number of continuous games from the normal section to the advantageous section until the end of the advantageous section is a predetermined number of games, for example, 1500 games, but the number of reached games to which the first game point is given is one. It is set within the range of the maximum number of continuous games in the advantageous section, and for example, it is set to 500 games in which players can expect to obtain several hundred to 1,000 medals gathered to some extent.

In this modification, the net increase in medals per game (payout number-insertion number) is, for example, about 2.0 medals / game including the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the bonus, and the ART is about 500 games. If it continues, a net increase of several hundred to 1,000 medals can be expected. These hundreds to 1,000 medals are considered to be one of the borderlines of whether or not the investment of a general player can be recovered, and it is considered that it is a phase where it is uncertain whether to stop or continue the game. ing.

Therefore, the first game point is given by the arrival of 500 games of ART game, and the subsequent development can be expected unprecedentedly. It should be noted that the achievement of 500 games can be achieved by having ARTs with dozens of games in one set stay in a row for multiple sets, or by accumulating additional games in the middle, or from the beginning of 500 games. It may be any case where the ART is capable of completing the race and is achieved by completing the race while avoiding various obstacles that end halfway.

The first game point is during ART at the 500th game counting from the start of ART (when the first game of ART is played at a predetermined high-accuracy replay time (RT2, etc. in FIG. 13) with a high probability of replay). It is given on condition that it is. The points to be given are, for example, high points by lottery processing using, for example, 1-byte random numbers (possible numerical values 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) that are extracted separately from the internal lottery random numbers by operating the start lever 16. 99 points and 50 points of low points are distributed at a ratio of 1: 1 to make 99 points or 50 points.

The first game point may be awarded based on the fact that the number of games elapsed from the start of the ART is 500 or more, which is the specific number of reached games, at the end of the ART. In this case, for example, if ART ends in the 600th game, the first game point will be given in the 600th game.

The number of reached games to which the first game point is given may be 500 games or 300 games, which is less than this. Further, it is preferable that the number of reached games for which the first game point is given is originally set to 750 games or less, which is the number of games that can be obtained at least a plurality of times in one advantageous section (the maximum number of continuous games of 1500 games). , 800 games, etc., which are more than this may be used. In addition to the two types of points to be given, high points and low points, three or more types with different values may be given, or 0 points may be given with a low probability, for example, 1/256, or a low probability. For example, 100 points or more, which exceeds 99 points at 1/256, may be given. Further, when ART continues after the 501st game exceeding a specific number of reached games, after the first game point is given to the 500th game, the ART is continued on condition that the ART is continued for each predetermined number of games, for example, every 300 games. You may add up 1 game point.

Release your finger from the stop button operated at the end of the game to which the first game point was given. After the third release, the display device 11 on the sub side does not clearly indicate whether it is a high point or a low point, but a treasure chest or the like. The predetermined item is displayed, the point is notified that the point has been given, and the player is made to have expectations. In this case, the color of the item is selected from blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc. according to the points given, and in the case of high points, the selection rate of red or rainbow is higher than in the case of low points. It is also preferable to raise the price and to arouse the expectations of the player.

In addition, when the ART ends, the notification of the instruction information about the internal winning combination that depends on the push order is stopped, but the internally advantageous section is continued for a predetermined number of latent games, for example, 100 games, and 100 games have passed since the end of the ART. If it is not possible to return to ART by the time the game is completed, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is returned after 100 games have passed. The reason why the advantageous section is hidden is that, as a common process during the advantageous section, the ART can be pulled back by the game points, and the fairness of the game is strictly maintained.

The game point awarding means 101b is intended to award a second game point under predetermined conditions based on a predetermined winning combination of internal winning combinations. For example, any of the bonus combination BB1s shown in FIG. 20 Based on the winnings of BB2, BB3, and BB4, for example, 1 point or more is given as the second game point under the predetermined condition that the winning is within 100 games in which the advantageous section is hidden from the end of ART. I try to do it.

More specifically, depending on the winning probability of the bonus combination (see setting 1 in FIG. 16),
Winning probability 70/65536 ≒ 1/936 BB1 (same color as red) at the time of winning 30 points,
Winning probability 70/65536 ≒ 1/936 BB2 (same color as blue) at the time of winning 30 points,
Winning probability 94/65536 ≒ 1/697 BB3 (red different color) at the time of winning 20 points,
Winning probability 94/65536 ≒ 1/697 BB4 (blue different color) at the time of winning 20 points,
Is given. The total probability of BB1 to BB4 is about 1/200 in setting 1, and there is a half possibility that any bonus combination will be won within 100 games.

When the game points reach, for example, 100 points, which is a predetermined high point evaluation, a special pull-back lottery with a high probability of re-entry entry (pull-back probability) of 50% or more, for example 50%, may be received. It is possible, and the winning allows it to be pulled back to the ART that activates the instruction function again. On the other hand, if 100 points, which is a low point evaluation, have not been reached, a special withdrawal lottery cannot be received. Therefore, when the high point evaluation is made, it is easier to return to the ART game in which the instruction function is activated than when the low point evaluation is made. For the special pull-back lottery, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible numerical value 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) may be used and also used as a random number when a first game point is given.

If 99 points are given as the first game point by reaching 500 games of ART game, and if there is one or more winnings of any bonus role that one or more points are given as the second game point, the first time. When you win the bonus role, the total points will be 100 points or more, and you can receive a special withdrawal lottery.

If 50 points are given as the first game point by reaching 500 games of ART game, 50 points or more will be given as the second game point. At least one of them will be the same color BB. If there is, the total points will be 100 points or more at the time of winning the second bonus role, and a special withdrawal lottery can be received.

In this way, the first game point is given by the arrival of 500 games of ART game, the second game point is given based on the winning of the bonus combination, and if the high point evaluation is obtained based on these, the instruction function is used. Since it is easy to return to the game to be activated, it is effectively considered that it is worth continuing the game for the player who has obtained a net increase of several hundred to 1000 medals by continuing the ART game to some extent. Can be made.

If there is no winning of any bonus role within 100 games in which the advantageous section is hidden from the end of the ART game, the second game point is not given and 99 points are given as the first game point. However, you cannot receive a special withdrawal lottery. Also, even if you can receive a special withdrawal lottery, if you do not, you will not be able to withdraw to ART by this special withdrawal lottery.

However, even during the game between 100 games in which the advantageous section is hidden, the winning of the watermelon 1 which is originally the normal section shown in FIG. 33 is used as the winning of the ART at 8/256, and , It is also possible to win the ART at 64/256 with the winning of the bonus roles BB1 to BB4, that is, to return to the ART with the same difficulty as the first hit. When the bonus roles BB1 to BB4 are won, even if they are not in the special pull-back lottery, they can be pulled back to ART if they win in the 64/256 lottery. The advantageous state control means 101a of this modification makes it possible to execute a special pull-back lottery using the game points given by the game point giving means 101b, and is originally a normal section during a game in which the advantageous section is hidden. The processing shown in FIG. 33 and the like can also be executed.

However, if it is not possible to pull back to ART due to a special pull-back lottery or the same difficulty as at the time of the first hit during 100 games where the advantageous section is hidden, the advantageous section ends after 100 games have passed. Let's return to the normal section, and after that, we will expect ART depending on the difficulty level at the time of the first hit. The advantageous state control means 101a of the present modification makes it possible to execute the processing of FIG. 33 and the like in the normal section during the normal section.

When the advantageous section is terminated and returned to the normal section after 100 games in which the advantageous section is hidden, all variables that affect the performance related to the instruction function are initialized, and the accumulated game points are cleared to 0. .. The number of latent games in the advantageous section may be set to 100 games or less, or may be set to 100 games or more.

On the other hand, if it is possible to return to ART within 100 games where the advantageous section is hidden, the advantageous section will be continued, so the accumulated game points will be carried over and will be given when the second ART reaches 500 games. 1 game point is added to the carry-over amount. However, if the player is pulled back through a special withdrawal lottery, the carry-over amount already has 100 points or more, so the condition for performing the special withdrawal lottery by granting the second game point has been changed to 200 points or more. After all, the special withdrawal lottery is performed every 100 points, such as 100 points or more for the first time and 200 points or more for the second time at the time of granting the second game points.

However, if the game points have reached a specific value, for example, 256 points specified in the predetermined full points at the stage when the second game points have been awarded, a special withdrawal lottery will be held as compared with the case where the game points have not been reached. In the case of winning, the number of games in which ART games can be continued is set to be longer than the first time within the range not exceeding the maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous section (1500 games). Specifically, the number of initial continuous games is increased, the additional performance is increased, the rate of entry into the additional specialized zone is increased, the loop stock rate is set with a high probability, and ART that causes advantages and disadvantages in the continuous rate of ART games. One or more predetermined incentives such as an increase in the game level are attached to the ART game. In this way, the cumulative value of the game points given by the game point giving means 101b under predetermined conditions such as the first game point and the second game point reaches the full point 256 which is the predetermined high point evaluation. If there is, the number of games that can be continued for ART games that enable the operation of the instruction function, and the maximum number of games that can be continued for the advantageous section (1500 games), compared to the case where the full points 256, which is a low point evaluation, have not been reached. The expected value to be increased is increased within the range that does not exceed.

As a result, if the cumulative value of the game points is a high point evaluation, the number of sustainable games of the ART game that enables the operation of the instruction function is within the range that does not exceed the maximum number of continuous games in the advantageous state. Since the expected value to be increased is increased, the player can be more effectively encouraged to increase the accumulated value of the game points, and the game can be continued for a longer time. Since the number of sustainable games of ART games is increased within a range not exceeding the maximum number of sustainable games in an advantageous state, the gambling is not excessive. In addition, 256 points of full points are given 99 points of the first game point and 30 points or more of the second game point in the first time, and 99 points of the first game point and 30 points of the second game point in the second time. The height of the hurdle that can be reached when the above is given. However, the full points may be set to 238 points by lowering the hurdle, or may be set to exceed 256 points by raising the hurdle.

After the first ART game reaches 500 games or more, the second ART game is played by pulling back within 100 games, and after the second ART game reaches 500 games or more, the pullback within 100 games is performed. However, since the maximum number of continuous games in one advantageous section is 1500 games, it is advantageous in the middle of each ART game, especially in the middle of the third ART game in which the times progress. The section may be forcibly terminated. In this case, since the sudden forced termination confuses the player, a premium ending effect that cannot normally be seen is developed on the display device 11 on the sub side during 50 games before the arrival of 1500 games.

In this modification, the ART game is referred to as a high-accuracy replay time of a finite number of times with a high probability of re-gaming (referred to as a "c-trigger e-medium" high-accuracy replay time among those skilled in the art). It is assumed that 500 games can be completed in the RT state), and a combination of fall trigger symbols to a low probability replay time with a low probability of replay (referred to as a "d trigger" symbol among those skilled in the art). It is also possible to avoid obstacles such as displaying a symbol combination) that ends in the middle, and to give a first game point by completing 500 games. In this case, it is preferable to enable the high setting to achieve the completion of 500 games with a higher probability than the low setting, and in this way, it is possible to widen the difference between advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference. ..

In this modification, after the end of ART, the advantageous section is internally continued for 100 games, which is a predetermined number of latent games. However, instead of this, the number of latent games is not provided, and immediately after the end of ART, the advantageous section is continued. Alternatively, when the player falls to a low probability replay time with a low replay probability, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be restored. In this modification, the advantageous state control means 101a and the game point giving means 101b are provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[Additional lottery system using BB with setting difference and MB without setting difference] Modification example This modification also starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. The change display of the symbol is stopped based on. Further, the program of the main CPU 101 is provided with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state corresponding to an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing. Further, a setting changing means for changing the setting for setting the ball ejection rate, which is the ratio of the total number of acquired game media to the total number of input game media, in a plurality of high and low stages is provided (in FIG. 6, the setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 104, instead of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in FIG. 20, the first bonus combination that performs a predetermined lottery to increase the game that activates the instruction function, and the low setting is compared with the high setting. The second bonus combination, which increases the number of games being activated, is included in the internal winning combination, and each can be won independently, that is, without overlapping with other small winning combination or re-gaming combination.

The first bonus combination is composed of, for example, the object continuous operation device MB0 related to the second type special accessory, and the winning probability thereof does not change depending on the setting, and there is no setting difference, which is one tenth to one hundredth. A predetermined probability within the range of, for example, 1311/65536≈1 / 50.

The combination of the operation symbols of the first bonus combination MB0 ("left symbol"-"middle symbol"-"right symbol") is, for example, "replay"-"bell"-"bell", and the display probability is 1 (maximum 4). The symbol can always be drawn into the effective line by slipping frames). Therefore, when the MB0 is won, the combination of the operation symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and the next game is the operation of the MB0. While the MB0 is operating, the second-class special accessory CB is always activated, and while the CB is operating, all the small winning combinations with the payout of medals are put into the winning state.

While the CB is operating while the 1st bonus combination MB0 is operating, the specified number of input sheets is changed to 1 (1 sheet), the number of payouts of all small combinations is changed to 15, and the maximum number of slip frames is 1 frame. The reel to be stopped within 75 ms, which is limited to, is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain a maximum of four-frame slip, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left reel 3L is stopped first, the small winning combination of any of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game, are paid out.

The specified number of inserted cards may be maintained at 3 (3 cards), and the number of payouts may be the same as during the general game. In this case, in order to display the small winning combination of 8 cards on 2 of the 3 lines of the upper, middle, and lower rows and obtain the maximum number of 15 cards to be paid out, it is necessary to additionally define a dedicated small winning combination during CB operation. preferable.

The operation of the first bonus combination MB0 is assumed to end when the number of medals acquired from the start of the operation exceeds, for example, 30 or 31 or more, and the operation of the CB also ends when the operation of the MB0 ends. Therefore, the operation of MB0 is completed in almost 3 games, and 45-3 = 42 medals can be net increased.

The first bonus combination MB0 does not trigger the display or the end of the operation of the winning or the combination of the operation symbols to change the lottery mode of the re-game. Therefore, when the operation of the first bonus MB0 is completed, the original replay time state in which the winning of MB0 is obtained is restored.

Assist replay time If you win the first bonus role MB0 while the advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART is occurring, that is, during ART game or during the promotion to high probability replay time to play ART game, it will be inside. First probability, for example, 64/256 = 1 by lottery processing using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible numerical values 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) that is extracted separately from the lottery random number by operating the start lever 16. ART continuation game for, for example, 10 games with a probability of / 4, 20 games with a probability of 2nd probability of 128/256 = 1/2, and 60 games with a probability of 3rd probability of 32/256 = 1/8. Add a number. Fourth probability For example, with a probability of 32/256 = 1/8, the number of additional games is set to 0. The average number of games expected to be added at the time of winning MB0 is 20 games.

During the subsequent operation of the CB during the operation of MB0, the first probability, for example, 64/256 = 1/4, for example, is obtained by the lottery process using the 1-byte random number, provided that the left first stop is performed. For 5 games, for example, 10 games with a probability of 128/256 = 1/2 for a second probability, and 30 games with a probability of 32/256 = 1/8 for a third probability, the number of continuous games of ART is added. Fourth probability For example, with a probability of 32/256 = 1/8, the number of additional games is set to 0. The average number of additional games expected for each game during CB operation is 10.

Therefore, if MB0 is won during an ART game or during ART preparation, the average number of expected games to be added is 50 in total for the first game of CB, the second game of CB, and the third game of CB at the time of winning. , The game that activates the instruction function can be effectively increased.

It should be noted that the condition that the left first stop is made during the operation of the CB is that it is not good to set the operation of MB0 to 4 games or more and increase the chances of addition. The display device 11 on the sub side displays an arrow or the like pointing from left to right to urge the first stop on the left. However, the addition may be made by lottery for each game not conditioned on the first stop on the left, and even in this case, the addition can be appropriately performed by a common process that does not refer to the set value. Further, the addition during the CB operation may be performed by other common processing such as assigning the number of addition games according to the winning of the replaying combination whose attraction priority is lower than that of the small combination.

When the first bonus combination MB0 is won during the normal section, a predetermined probability, for example, 16/256, is obtained by a lottery process using the 1-byte random number, which is extracted by operating the start lever 16 independently of the internal lottery random number. = 1/16 chance of winning ART, enabling ART games for a predetermined number of initial games.

In addition, during the CB operation during the MB operation based on the MB0 winning during the normal section, if the ART winning is determined at the time of the MB0 winning, each of the CB operating processes is performed as a process related to the instruction function in the advantageous section. The average number of games added The initial number of games is added by the same addition as described above with the expected number of games being 10 games. On the other hand, if the winning of ART is not determined at the time of winning of MB0, all the small wins are set to the winning state during the CB operation, but the small win is specified as a result of the same internal lottery as during the general game. Based on the winning of, for example, when it is equivalent to the winning of watermelon 1, by the lottery processing using the 1-byte random number, the winning of ART is set to a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256 = 1/32, and CB. If there is a remaining number of games, the initial number of games will be added.

The second bonus combination is composed of, for example, the object continuous operation device BB0 related to the first-class special accessory, and the winning probability is such that the lower the setting, the higher the winning probability, and the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability. A predetermined probability within the range of one tenth to one hundredth, for example.
Setting 1 is 3277/65536≈1 / 20,
Setting 2 is 2979/65536≈1/22,
Setting 3 is 2731/65536≈1 / 24,
Setting 4 is 2521/65536≈1/26,
Setting 5 is 2341/65536≈1/28,
Setting 6 is 2185/65536≈1 / 30,
The low setting is set so that the number of games during operation of BB0 is larger than that of the high setting.

The combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus combination BB0 ("left symbol"-"middle symbol"-"right symbol") is, for example, "red 7"-"BAR"-"red 7", and the display probability is ≠ 1. (It may not be possible to draw the corresponding symbol to the effective line due to slipping up to 4 frames). Therefore, if BB0 is won and the combination of operating symbols cannot be displayed in the winning game, the winning flag of BB0 is carried over, and after the next game, BB0 internal winning (state between BB0 flags) until the combination of operating symbols is displayed. Middle).

While the BB0 is operating, the first-class special accessory RB is always operated, and during the operation of the RB, from the entire range of possible numerical values of the random number for internal lottery (65536 of 0 to 65535), FIG. In addition, in the internal lottery table during the general game shown in FIG. 17, the range larger than the total value of the winning range in which any small winning combination is to be won and the value is increased as the setting is higher is shown in FIG. 22. All the small roles NML01 to NML35 shown in The lottery is performed by the internal lottery table during the RB operation during the BB0 operation, in which the range to be played is increased as the setting is lower, contrary to the winning range of the small winning combination oar.

While the 2nd bonus combination BB0 is operating, the specified number of cards is changed to 2 (2 cards), the number of all small roles to be paid out is changed to 2, and the effective line is only 1 line in the middle row. It has been changed to. When the small winning combination is won, any of the small winning combination of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed regardless of the pressing order and pressing position of the stop button, and two medals are paid out for each game.

The operation of the second bonus combination BB0 is set to end when the number of medals acquired from the start of the operation exceeds a predetermined upper limit, for example, 5 or more, and the operation of the RB also ends when the operation of the BB0 ends. Therefore, the operation of BB0 ends in 3 games at the shortest when the small role all is pulled 3 times in a row, and the lower setting that makes it easier to pull off is easier to finish after 4 games, and the low setting is BB0 compared to the high setting. There is a high possibility that the number of games until the end of operation will be long.

Even if you win a small role all, the number of medals paid out is the same as the number of inserted medals, the net increase is 0, and the number of medals you have is the same as the status quo at the end of the shortest 3 games, and the number of games until the end of BB0 operation. Will decrease as the period increases. However, instead of this, a slight increase in medals may be expected during the operation of BB0.

When the operation of the second bonus combination BB0 is completed, the process shifts to RT4 as shown in FIG. If the second bonus combination BB0 is won during the ART game or during the preparation for ART, the subtraction of the number of continuous games of ART is suspended after the winning game, and after the operation of BB0 is completed, the preparation for ART until the return from RT4 to RT2 is performed. After that, the ART game is restarted for the remaining number of continuous games.

It should be noted that the specified number of inserted cards during the operation of the RB during the operation of the second bonus combination BB0 may be maintained at 3 (3 cards), and the number of payouts may be the same as during the general game. In this case, it is preferable to increase the upper limit of the number of medals acquired when BB0 ends the operation so that three or more games can be continued.

Even if the second bonus combination BB0 is won during the ART game, the preparation for the ART, or the normal section, neither the additional winning nor the winning of the ART is determined. However, instead of this, if the second bonus combination BB0 is won, a small number of games can be added by common processing, or by the lottery processing using the 1-byte random number, there is a predetermined low probability, for example, 1/256 probability. The winning of ART may be made, and ART games may be enabled for a predetermined number of initial games.

In addition, 1311 which is the lottery value (winning range) of the first bonus combination MB0 and 3277 (setting 1) which is the lottery value (winning range) of the second bona role BB0 are the internal lottery table during the general game of FIG. In (set value: 1), in RT0 and RT2, No. 1 which is not drawn in this modification. A lottery value of 1 to 38 and, for example, No. The lottery value 5000 of 56 "F_middle rip 1" is secured within the total numerical range, and RT1, RT3, and RT4 are not drawn in this modification. A lottery value of 1 to 38 and, for example, No. It is secured within the numerical range including the lottery value of 0 "out of place".

Further, in FIG. 17, RT5 corresponds to the internal winning of the second bonus combination BB0 (during the state between the BB0 flags), and the RT5 No. 61-No. Each lottery value of 73 is No. 1 of RT0 to RT4. 61-No. It is the same as each lottery value of 73.

As described above, in this modification, the lower the setting is that the winning probability of the second bonus combination BB0 is high and the number of games during which BB0 is operating is large, the first bonus that performs a predetermined process of increasing the game that activates the instruction function. The number of games in which the chance of winning the role MB0 is increased, and the performance of increasing the games for activating the instruction function is lowered. On the other hand, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of the second bonus combination BB0 and the smaller the number of games during which the BB0 is operating, the more the first bonus combination MB0 that performs a predetermined process to increase the game that activates the instruction function wins. The number of games that are deprived of opportunities is reduced, and the ability to increase the number of games that activate the instruction function is improved. Incidentally, in this modification, the additional expected value can be increased for about 0.05 games or more per game each time the setting is raised by one step.

Further, since the first bonus combination MB0 is configured by the accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory, the operation can be started early because the display probability of the combination of the operation symbols can be increased, and the game that activates the instruction function. Can function properly as an opportunity to increase.

Furthermore, the second bonus role BB0 makes it easier for the number of games until the end of operation to end after 4 games, rather than ending in 3 games, in the low setting as compared with the high setting, so that it is possible to make it longer. For each operation of the second bonus combination BB0, the low setting takes more chances of winning the first bonus combination MB0 than the high setting, so that the superiority or inferiority due to the setting difference can be effectively set out.

In this modification, the first bonus combination MB0 is terminated when the number of acquired medals during operation exceeds 30, but the number of acquired medals is less than this, or the number of acquired medals is larger than this. The operation may be terminated when the excess is exceeded. Further, the first bonus combination may have a setting difference in which the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability. Further, the first bonus combination may be composed of a first-class special bonus or a bonus continuous operation device related to the first-class special bonus.

Further, in the second bonus combination, the winning probability itself may be set to no difference, and the number of games in one operation may be set to be low compared to the high setting. Further, the second bonus combination may be composed of a first-class special bonus or a bonus continuous operation device related to the second-class special bonus. Further, in this modification, the first bonus combination MB0 is not provided, and the low setting is provided only with the bonus combination BB0 similar to the second bonus combination in which the number of games being operated is larger than that of the high setting. , When comparing the operation of the bonus combination BB0 and the non-operation of the bonus combination BB0 (during the general game in which the bonus combination BB0 is drawn and / or during the state between flags), the one in which the bonus combination BB0 is not operating is , The performance to increase the game that activates the instruction function may be enhanced. As a result, in a low setting where the number of games in which the bonus role BB0 is active is large, more games in the non-operating bonus role BB0, which has a high performance of increasing the games in which the instruction function is activated, will be deprived. , The ability to increase the game that activates the instruction function is low, and conversely, at a high setting where the number of games during which the bonus combination BB0 is operating is small, the performance that increases the game that activates the instruction function is high.

The concept of "increasing the number of games that activate the instruction function" in this modification includes adding the number of games and stocking the number of ART sets in which one set is several tens of games. In addition to the direct addition of the number of games and set stock, it also includes the indirect addition of accumulating specific items and points to increase the number of times the continuous lottery of ART is received. In addition, the addition is not limited to the first hit of ART, the pullback of ART, the first hit of ART, or the transition to a chance zone where pullback is easy. In this modification, the advantageous state control means is provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but it may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[Switching the winning rate and benefits of the advantageous section depending on the RT state at normal time] Modification example This modification also starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. The change display of the symbol is stopped based on. Further, the program of the main CPU 101 is provided with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state corresponding to an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing.

In this modification, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 105, the lottery mode (breakdown and / or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game is different on the program of the main CPU 101. A replay time transition means for transitioning a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including RT0, RT1 to RT6, and a bonus state is provided. Of the plurality of replay times, at least one replay time such as RT2 and the other one replay time such as RT3 or RT4 are not advantageous states (advantageous sections) but non-advantageous states (normal sections of non-advantageous sections) to advantageous states. The lottery mode of the advantageous state transition trigger to shift to (advantageous section) is the same, but the processing related to the instruction function during the advantageous state (during the advantageous section) that is not executed in the non-advantageous state (normal section of the non-advantageous section) is performed. The lottery mode for execution is different, and there is a difference between advantages and disadvantages in the expected value that increases the chance of the game that activates the instruction function.

A) RT0
In this RT0, the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, and the replay probability is set to a low probability (low lip) of, for example, 8978/65536≈1 / 7.3.

B) RT1
This RT1 shifts from RT0 or RT5 by displaying a combination of predetermined transition trigger symbols, and the replay probability is set to a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0. The combination of the predetermined transition trigger symbols is No. 17 in FIG. 77-No. At the time of winning any of the push order small wins of 98, the bells of "Replay"-"Watermelon"-"Bell" in FIG. 19 that can be displayed due to an incorrect push order answer are used.

C) RT2
This RT2 shifts from RT1 by displaying the combination of the first transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. There is. In this modification, if there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in the middle, the finite replay time is set to return to RT0 after 10 games from the rush when the result of the predetermined number of games, for example, 10 times is obtained. There is. However, instead of this, RT2 may be set to an infinite replay time, and may be shifted to RT1 by the display of the bell spilled eye or the like.

The combination of the first transition trigger symbols is, for example, "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank"-"replay"-"replay", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the symbols of REP08 in FIG. When this combination of symbols is displayed on the middle effective line, the "replay" symbols are lined up on the polygonal line connecting the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage of the right reel 3R.

D) RT3
This RT3 shifts from RT1 by displaying the combination of the second transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. There is. In this modification, if there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in the middle, the finite replay time is set to return to RT0 after 10 games from the rush when the result of the predetermined number of games, for example, 10 times is obtained. There is. However, instead of this, RT3 may have an infinite replay time as in RT2, and may be shifted to RT1 by the display of the bell spilled eye or the like.

The combination of the second transition trigger symbols is, for example, "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the symbols of REP09 in FIG. When this combination of symbols is displayed on the middle effective line, the symbol related to the cherry is displayed on the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR" is displayed on the lower of the right reel 3R. A symbol including a bonus-compatible symbol of "/ blank" is displayed, and it is treated as a strong cherry in the image that a general player has, suggesting a hot situation where the game is expected to develop in an advantageous manner.

E) RT4
This RT4 shifts from RT1 by displaying the combination of the third transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is set to a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. There is. In this modification, if there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in the middle, the finite replay time is set to return to RT0 after 10 games from the rush when the result of the predetermined number of games, for example, 10 times is obtained. There is. However, instead of this, the RT4 may have an infinite replay time as in the case of the RT2 and the RT3, and may be shifted to the RT1 by the display of the bell spilled eye or the like.

The combination of the third transition trigger symbols is, for example, "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the symbols of REP07 in FIG. When this combination of symbols is displayed on the middle effective line, "watermelon" symbols are lined up in a small V shape on the upper row of the left reel 3L, the middle row of the middle reel 3C, and the upper row of the right reel 3R, and are held by general players. It is treated as a strong watermelon in the image, and suggests a hot situation where the game is expected to develop in an advantageous manner.

F) RT5
This RT5 shifts from RT1 by displaying a combination of predetermined promotion trigger symbols, and the replay probability is set to a high probability (high lip) of, for example, about 1 / 1.35, and any push order small combination (FIG. 17). At the time of winning No. 77 to 98), the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, and when the bell spilled eye is displayed, the player falls to RT1. The RT 5 of this modification is a highly accurate replay time for playing the assist replay time ART game.

The predetermined combination of promotion trigger symbols is, for example, "bell"-"replay"-"bell", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. Although it is not defined in FIG. 21, it is newly defined as REP10. When this combination of symbols is displayed on the middle effective line, the "replay" symbols are lined up in the lower row of the left reel 3L, the middle row of the middle reel 3C, and the upper row of the right reel 3R.

G) RT6
This RT6 is based on the winning of any of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 that are drawn during the general game of RT0, RT1 to RT5, and in the winning game, the operation symbol is operated to preferentially display the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination that is the target of the overlapping winning. Since the combination of is not displayed, the bonus internal winning (in the inter-flag state) in which the winning flag of the bonus role related to the winning that shifts to the next game or later of the winning game is carried over is carried over. The re-game probability is, for example, a medium probability (medium lip) of about 1 / 2.49.

H) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are composed of the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special accessory, and the first-class special accessory RB is always in the operating state while the BB is operating, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes a game state in the middle. The probability of replay is 0, the probability of losing is 0, and any of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 wins. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the maximum number of medals won is exceeded (the RB which is always operated also ends), and returns to RT0.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT0 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-10) is 6
3) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-10) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT1 are as follows.
1) F_batting order 1, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP08 + 09) is 300
2) F_batting order 2, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP01 + 08 + 09) is 300
3) F_batting order 3, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP02 + 08 + 09) is 300
4) F_batting order 4, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP01 + 02 + 08 + 09) is 300
5) F_batting order 5, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP07-09) is 300
6) F_batting order 6, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP01 + 07-09) is 300
7) F_batting order 1, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 05 + 07) is 85.
8) F_batting order 2, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 03 + 05 + 07) is 85.
9) F_batting order 3, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 04 + 05 + 07) is 85.
10) F_batting order 4, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 02 + 07) is 85.
11) F_Batting order 5 with RT4 and others maintained Lip (REP01-04 + 07) is 85
12) F_Batting order 6 with RT4 and others maintained Lip (REP01 + 02 + 04 + 07) is 85
13) F_Batting order 1, RT5 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 05 + 10) is 950.
14) F_Batting order 2, RT5 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 03 + 05 + 10) is 950.
15) F_Batting order 3, RT5 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 04 + 05 + 10) is 950.
16) F_batting order 4, RT5 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 02 + 10) is 950.
17) F_Batting order 5 and RT5 and others are maintained. Lips (REP01-04 + 10) are 950.
18) F_batting order 6, RT5 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 02 + 04 + 10) is 950.
19) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 956
20) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-10) is 6
21) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-10) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT1 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

For example, in 1), "F_batting order 1 and RT3 and others are RT2 rips" means that when the correct answer is pressed in the batting order 1, that is, in the order of left, middle, and right, the second transition is triggered. If you display "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Watermelon" (REP09), which is a combination of symbols, and shift to RT3, and perform a stop operation other than on the left, middle, or right, the first transition trigger symbol combination It means the role of displaying "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank"-"replay"-"replay" (REP08) and shifting to RT2. The same applies to batting order 2 (middle left and right), batting order 3 (middle left and right), batting order 4 (middle right and left), batting order 5 (middle right and left), and batting order 6 (middle right and left).

In addition, for example, 7) "F_Batting order 1 and RT4 and others are maintained rips" means that when the correct answer is pushed in the batting order 1, that is, the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, the third transition is triggered. Display "Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" (REP07), which is a combination of symbols, and shift to RT4. It means a role of displaying "replay"-"replay" (REP01) to maintain RT1. The same applies to batting order 2 (middle left and right), batting order 3 (middle left and right), batting order 4 (middle right and left), batting order 5 (middle right and left), and batting order 6 (middle right and left).

Further, for example, 13) "F_batting order 1 and RT5 and others are maintained rips" means that when the batting order 1 which is the correct batting order, that is, the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, the promotion trigger symbol is displayed. If you display the combination "Bell"-"Replay"-"Bell" (REP10) and move to RT5, and stop the operation other than left, middle and right, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP01) Is displayed to maintain RT1. The same applies to batting order 2 (middle left and right), batting order 3 (middle left and right), batting order 4 (middle right and left), batting order 5 (middle right and left), and batting order 6 (middle right and left).

The probability of shifting from RT1 to either RT2 or RT3 is equal to the total probability of 1) to 6) above, and is 300 × 6/65536 ≈ 1 / 36.4. The probability of transition from RT1 to RT4 is equal to the probability of any one of 7) to 13) above, and 85/65536≈1/771. The number of games that can be played with 50 medals for rent, which is roughly equivalent to 1000 yen, is expected to shift to any of RT2 to 4 once out of 36 games, for example. In this case, there is a high probability of shifting to RT2, but if the correct answer can be obtained in the order of pressing, it may shift to RT3, and in rare cases, it may shift to RT4.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT2 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 8958
2) F_Chance Lip 1 (REP04) is 4
3) F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06) is 4
4) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-10) is 6
5) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-10) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT2 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference. F_Chance Lip 1 and F_Chance Lip 2 are newly defined specific roles.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT3 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 4870
2) F_Chance Lip 1 (REP04) is 2048
3) F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06) is 2048
4) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-10) is 6
5) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-10) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT3 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT4 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 774
2) F_Chance Lip 1 (REP04) is 4096
3) F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06) is 4096
4) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-10) is 6
5) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-10) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT4 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 20273
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 2450
3) F_middle rip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 5000
4) F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + 05) is 4750
5) F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + 06) is 4750
6) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 2450
7) F_shot lip (REP03) is 8970
8) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-10) is 6
9) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-10) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT5 is 48655, and the probability is about 1 / 1.35. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT6 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 5053
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 60
3) F_middle lip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 306
4) F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + 05) is 8992
5) F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + 06) is 11775
6) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 180
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT6 is 21313, and the probability is about 1 / 2.49. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The breakdown and lottery value of the winning combination for the bonus combination and the small combination of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, RT5, RT6 are shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1 to No. No. 38 and No. 17 in FIG. 61-No. It is the same as 98. During a general game including RT2 to RT4, a transition from a non-advantageous state (normal section of a non-advantageous section) that is not an advantageous state (advantageous section) to an advantageous state (advantageous section) The lottery mode of the combination is the same.

The transition from the normal section, which is a non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section is performed according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 33. That is, due to the winning of the weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A”, “F_weak rare role B”), which is one of the triggers for shifting to the advantageous state, the normal advantage of one state with high accuracy for at least 9 games from the next game. Move to the section. By winning the chances ("F_chance A1"-"F_chance A4" and "F_chance B1"-"F_chance B4") that do not overlap with the bonus role, which is one of the triggers for the transition to the advantageous state. From the next game, shift to the normal advantageous section of high accuracy 2 state for at least 9 games.

Furthermore, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), which is one of the triggers for the transition to the advantageous state, for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, the precursor period is 9 to 16 games. After a lottery for the precursory period selected between, it is decided to make it an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantageous section called the main precursor state, and in the case of non-winning, after the precursory period lottery, the normal advantageous section of the high probability 3 state To migrate to.

Furthermore, by winning the bonus roles (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3” and “F_BB4”) that do not overlap with the watermelon 2, which is one of the triggers for shifting to the advantageous state, the winning probability is set to 64/256, for example. ART lottery will be performed, and at the time of winning, it will be decided to make it an advantageous section by ART, which is the line battle state following the line battle preparation state after the end of the bonus state, and at the time of non-winning, at least from the next game after the end of the bonus state. For 32 games, shift to the normal advantageous section of high probability 4 state.

In short, it is based on the winning role of a predetermined advantageous state transition opportunity that the lottery value does not change in RT0 to RT5 during general games, which is a weak rare role, a single chance eye, and a bonus role excluding overlap with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. Therefore, the section is shifted to the normal advantageous section included in the advantageous section that is not the normal section.

In this modification, after the transition of the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section by ART can be determined from the normal advantageous section according to the processing in the game in the normal advantageous section shown in FIG. , RT2, RT3, RT4, each RT state starts independently from the random number for internal lottery based on the winning of F_chance rip 1 (REP04) or F_chance rip 2 (REP06) which is a predetermined specific combination. By lottery processing using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible numerical value 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) extracted by the operation of the lever 16, ART has a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256 = 1 (100%). It is possible to determine the advantageous section by. Further, when the ART has already been decided, the number of sets of ART, which is one set in dozens of games, can be stocked based on the winning of a specific role.

In RT2, the lottery values of F_chance rip 1 (REP04) and F_chance rip 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, are set to 4 respectively, which is the lowest value among RT2 to 4, which is usually advantageous before the transition to RT2. In the case of shifting to a section or shifting to a normal advantageous section after the transition of RT2, there is a possibility that the advantageous section by ART is determined based on the winning of a specific combination, but the probability is relatively low. If ART has already been decided, it is relatively unlikely that the number of sets of ART will be stocked based on the winning of a specific combination.

On the other hand, in RT3, the lottery values of F_chance rip 1 (REP04) and F_chance rip 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, are set to 2048, respectively, which is a relatively high intermediate value among RT2 to 4, and the transition to RT3. If it shifts to the normal advantageous section before, or shifts to the normal advantageous section after the transition of RT3, it is relatively likely that the advantageous section by ART is determined based on the winning of the specific combination. If ART has already been decided, it is relatively likely that the number of sets of ART will be stocked based on the winning of a specific combination.

Further, in RT4, the lottery values of F_chance rip 1 (REP04) and F_chance rip 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, are set to 4096, respectively, which is the highest value among RT2 to 4, and before the transition to RT4. When shifting to the normal advantageous section or shifting to the normal advantageous section after the transition of RT4, it is most likely that the advantageous section by ART is determined based on the winning of the specific combination. If ART has already been decided, it is most likely that the number of sets of ART will be stocked based on the winning of a specific combination.

As described above, one replay time RT2 and the other one replay time RT3 or RT4 have different lottery values for F_chance rip 1 (REP04) and F_chance rip 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, which is not advantageous. The lottery mode for executing the process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state (during the advantageous section), which is not executed in the state (normal section of the non-advantageous section), is different, and there is a possibility that the advantageous section by ART is determined. There is a difference between high and low, and there is a difference in the expected value that increases the chances of the game that activates the instruction function. More specifically, in the order of RT2 <RT3 <RT4, the performance of the operation of the instruction function increases, RT2 functions as ART low expectation RT, RT3 functions as ART chance RT, and RT4 functions as ART large chance RT. do. Even RT2 with a low expectation degree RT is more advantageous than RT0 and RT1 because ART can be determined based on the winning of a specific combination. Therefore, the game at any of the replay times of RT0, RT1, RT2 to RT4 becomes a concern of the player, and the game interest can be enhanced even before the occurrence of the advantageous state by ART.

If you move to RT3, which is a chance RT, or RT4, which is a big chance RT, even if you have not moved to the normal advantageous section at the time of the transition, you will have a weak rare role and a single chance during 10 games in which RT3 or RT4 can continue. , ART is possible if you can win the specific role F_Chance Lip 1 (REP04) or F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06) after shifting to the normal advantageous section while maintaining RT3 or RT4 based on the winning of Watermelon 1. become.

In addition, when the transition to the normal advantageous section is performed at the time of transition of RT3 or RT4, F_chance Lip 1 (REP04), which is a specific role, is used before the normal advantageous section is completed during 10 games in which RT3 or RT4 can be continued. ) Or F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06), ART will be possible.

Therefore, after the transition to RT3 or RT4, the player can hit the start lever with passion, and can create a hit point even in the game state before the decision of ART. Even in RT1 before the transition to RT3 or RT4, you can hit the start lever while hoping for the winning role that you can expect to shift to RT3 or RT4 and wishing "Go to chance RT or big chance RT!" It is possible to create a hit point even before the transition to RT3 or RT4.

In addition, since the transition to RT3 and the transition to RT4 can be performed when the correct answer is given in the batting order 1 to 6 with 6 choices, each stop button 17L, on the display device 11 on the sub side, Corresponding to the upper position of 17C and 17R, it is designed to perform a fanning effect such as "Choose!? ...?". In this case, if RT0 or RT1 has already shifted to the normal advantageous section, the correct batting order to shift to RT3 or the correct batting order to shift to RT4 is notified as, for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3". You may.

RT3 or RT4 has a higher probability of occurrence of an advantageous state by ART than RT2, and conversely, RT2 has a lower probability of occurrence of an advantageous state by ART than RT3 or RT4, but is based on the winning of a specific role in RT2. When the ART is determined, it is possible to generate a long-term ART with a large number of continuous games or set stocks, as compared with the case where the ART is determined based on the winning of a specific combination in RT3 or RT4.

In this case, even if the player shifts to RT2, the player will not be disappointed, and if the ART is decided with a low probability, there is a possibility that the benefits of the long-term ART can be enjoyed, so that a thrilling game situation can be created. ..

The RT states in which ART is possible based on the winning of a specific combination are set to three types of RT2, RT3, and RT4, but instead of this, two types may be used, or four or more types may be used. As the combination of the transition trigger symbols from RT2 to RT4, the combination related to the replay game or the one related to the small winning combination may be used. Further, when RT2 to RT4 are configured with a finite replay time, the number of continuous games is common to 10 games (10 game cycle), but the number of continuous games may be 10 games or less or more than 10 games. The cycle may be changed depending on the RT state, for example, RT2 has 15 games, RT3 has 20 games, and RT4 has 25 games. Further, the specific role may be a replay role (F_chance rip 1 (REP04), F_chance rip 2 (REP06)), or may use a small role or a bonus role. Furthermore, the opportunity to determine ART during an advantageous state (during an advantageous section) is not limited to the winning of a specific winning combination, but may be the display of a specific winning combination, the continuous winning or continuous display of a predetermined combination, and the game history in a predetermined range. The ART may be determined based on the game history such as the number of winnings and the number of impressions in the game.

Further, when RT2 to RT4 are configured with an infinite replay time, a combination of a fall trigger symbol defined separately may be added to the combination of the transition trigger symbol to RT1 in addition to the bell spilled stitch, or RT2 to RT4. Added a combination of separately defined transition trigger symbols that enable mutual transition between, promotion and / or fall between RT2 of low expectation RT, RT3 of chance RT, and RT4 of large chance RT. May be possible. Further, of RT2 to RT4, a part may be set as a finite replay time and the rest may be set as an infinite replay time. Furthermore, whether all or part of RT2 to RT4 is configured with a finite replay time or all or part of RT2 to RT4 is configured with an infinite replay time, there is a positive difference in the probability of each replay. For example, RT2 has a higher replay probability than RT3 and RT4, but it is possible to lower the winning probability of ART.

In this modification, after the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is completed, the game is returned to RT0. At that time, the player may shift to a finite RT state such as RT7 that returns to RT0, and win a specific combination (F_chance rip 1 (REP04), F_chance rip 2 (REP06), etc.) in this RT7. In this case, during ART or when ART is determined, there is a high possibility that one or more sets of ART will be determined during the 32 games after winning the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 and the operation is completed. It is also possible to create a situation of intense heat that can significantly enhance the game interest when winning a specific role in RT7. In this modification, the transition from RT1 to RT2 to 5 is performed, but the transition from RT0 to RT2 to 5 may be performed. In this modification, the advantageous state control means is provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but it may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

In this modification, the state indicator (section indicator) that clearly indicates the advantageous section is normally turned on by shifting to the advantageous section, but the state indicator may be turned on from the start of the ART game. In any case, according to this modification, the player's expectation can be raised throughout the game without making the lighting status of the status display feel like a hindrance.

[Reduction of data by design combination management method] Modification example Similar to the above embodiment, this modification also starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and performs the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Based on this, the variation display of the symbol is stopped and the result of one game is derived. Here, as the result of one game, the payout of medals, the operation of the re-game, the operation of the bonus, the shift to the replay time in which the lottery mode (breakdown of the re-game combination and / or the lottery value) of the re-game is different, It includes the operation of the instruction function for notifying information on the transition between the normal section and the advantageous section and the stop operation of the player.

In this modification, in the symbol arrangement table of FIG. 15, the left reel 3L is not changed, but the “cherry 1” of the symbol number 5 of the middle reel 3C is changed to “cherry 2” and the symbol number 13 of the right reel 3R is “cherry 2”. "Cherry 1" has been changed to "Cherry 2" respectively. "Cherry 1" and "Cherry 2" correspond to different symbols A and B having similar appearances.

Further, in the symbol combination table of FIG. 19, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition (S_RT3 transition) "left symbol"-"middle symbol"-"right symbol" is displayed.
"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2",
"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2",
It has been changed to "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1".
"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2" means Cherry 1 or Cherry 2, in short, either Cherry 1 or Cherry 2.

Further, in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 21 and 22, "cherry 1" is changed to "cherry 1 / cherry 2" in the columns of the middle reel and the right reel, and a new replay game is shown in FIG. As a role, S_RT6 rush lip (REP11) corresponding to the combination of "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" and S_RT2 return lip corresponding to "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon" ( REP12) is defined.

As shown in FIG. 106, from the high-accuracy replay time RT2 in which the assist replay time ART is performed, the lottery mode of the re-game is determined by displaying the combination of the symbols of "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" of REP11. It is different from RT2, but it is shifted to RT6 which has the same high accuracy replay time, and in this RT6, BAR is aligned until it returns to RT2 by displaying the combination of "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon" of REP12. By displaying the rip (REP06), the number of continuous games of ART can be added multiple times, and RT6 is added to function as a special zone.

In this modification, in the column of RT2 in FIG. 16, for example, No. The lottery value of 56 F_middle rip 1 is changed to 3000, and the newly defined F_RT6 rush rip (REP01 + REP04 + REP11) is drawn with a lottery value of 2000.

Further, a lottery table for RT6 is additionally defined, and in this lottery table for RT6, No. 16 in FIG. 0 to 51, 55, 59, 60 are the same as RT2, and No. 52 to 54 and 56 to 58 are changed as follows. In the lottery table of RT6, No. 17 in FIG. The lottery values corresponding to 61 to 98 are the same as RT2.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 16 in FIG. Instead of 52 F_RT2 medium replay 1, F_RT6 medium replay 1 (REP02 + REP12) is drawn at a lottery value of 2500. At the time of winning the replay 1 during F_RT6, if the left reel 3L is stopped first on the left first stop, REP02 is displayed and RT6 is maintained, and if it is other than the left first stop, REP12 is displayed and the player returns to RT2.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 16 in FIG. Instead of 53 F_RT2 medium replay 2, F_RT6 medium replay 2 (REP02 + REP03 + REP12) is drawn at a lottery value of 2500. At the time of winning the middle replay 2 of F_RT6, if the middle reel 3C is stopped first, REP02 is displayed and RT6 is maintained, and if it is other than the middle first stop, REP12 is displayed and the game returns to RT2.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 16 in FIG. Instead of 54 F_RT2 medium replay 3, F_RT6 medium replay 3 (REP02 + REP03 + REP04 + REP12) is drawn at a lottery value of 2500. At the time of winning the replay 3 during F_RT6, if the right reel 3R is stopped first on the right first stop, REP02 is displayed and RT6 is maintained, and if it is other than the right first stop, REP12 is displayed and the player returns to RT2.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 16 in FIG. The lottery value of 56 F_middle rip 1 (REP01 + REP07 + REP08) is changed from 5000 to 0, and F_middle rip 1 is not drawn. This is to avoid the risk of falling to RT1 by displaying REP08.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 16 in FIG. The lottery value of F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + REP05) of 57 is changed from 0 to 2000. When the F_middle rip 2 is won, the fake rip REP05 is displayed if the right reel 3R is stopped first on the right first stop, and REP01 is displayed if the right reel 3R is not the first stop. On the display device 11 on the sub side, an arrow pointing from right to left and a navigation of "Aim for BAR!" Are displayed to give expectations to the bar alignment. However, it is not added on the display of fake lip.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 16 in FIG. The lottery value of F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + REP06) of 58 is changed from 0 to 9000. When the F_middle rip 3 is won, the bar-aligned rip REP06 is displayed in the case of the right first stop or the middle first stop in which the right reel 3R or the middle reel 3C is stopped first, and REP01 is displayed in the case of the left first stop. On the display device 11 on the sub side, an arrow pointing from right to left and a navigation of "Aim for BAR!" Are displayed to give expectations to the bar alignment. Even if the BAR symbols are not always aligned, at the time of winning the F_middle rip 3, it is decided to add the number of continuous ART games for a predetermined number of games, for example, 10 games, and the third release from the last operated stop button. After that, "+ 10G" or the like is displayed on the display device 11 on the sub side. The number of additional games may be selected by lottery from 5G, 10G, 20G, 50G, 100G and the like.

From the high-accuracy replay time RT2, at the time of winning any of F_chance eyes A1 to F_chance eyes A4 and F_chance eyes B1 to F_chance eyes B4, a predetermined display probability, for example, a probability of 3/4 or the like at the time of the third stop operation. Therefore, "Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2" at the RT3 transition without displaying any chance role (1 piece role) of NML14-30. -Displays any of "Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1". In this case, as a result of one game, no medal is paid out and the process shifts to RT3.

From the high-accuracy replay time RT2, when the F_RT6 rushing lip is won, stop at the timing when "Cherry 2" can be pulled in by sliding up to 4 frames, using the relatively easy-to-see "BAR" pattern of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R as a guide. If the operation is performed, "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2" (REP11), which is a combination of the symbols that trigger the transition to RT6, is displayed, and as a result of one game, the re-game is activated. The next game will move to RT6. During ART, when the F_RT6 rush lip is won, a navigation such as "Aim for BAR!" Is displayed on the display device 11 on the sub side.

By the way, conventionally, in the winning search process, RT check process, etc. after the result of one game in which the reel stop control process is completed in RT2 is derived, "cherry 1"-"cherry 1 / cherry" of the RT3 transition. When any one of "2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1" is determined, The medal is not paid out, and it is transferred to RT3, and when the combination of "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2" of the combination of the symbols that triggers the transition to RT6 is determined, the replay is activated and the game is transferred to RT6. Processing will be performed.

However, this conventional judgment requires a total of four types of judgment constants or judgment factors, three types summarized in three categories to be transferred to RT3 and one type to be transferred to RT6, and one judgment constant is one. Data of a predetermined capacity used to distinguish the combination of symbols from others, for example, the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel constituting the combination of symbols as shown in the "data" column of the display combination of FIGS. 21 and 22. Each of the constituent symbols of is combined with "/" (or) to distinguish it from the combination of other symbols defined in one storage area. If it is to be identified by the 1-byte data, it is necessary to allocate 4 types from 8 types of 00000001 to 10000000, 4 bytes are required as the data of the judgment constant, and the judgment process becomes complicated and the processing step. The number will also increase.

Therefore, in this modification, the symbols of the first group having a combination of a plurality of symbols that give the player a predetermined benefit, for example, "there is no payout of medals and the transition to RT3", based on the result of one game. Combination of "Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2" -When "Cherry 1" has a combination of symbols that is different from the combination of symbols included in the first group and less than the combination of symbols included in the first group, and the combination of symbols of the first group is displayed. A profit different from the profit to be given, for example, a combination of the symbols of the second group "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" that gives the profit that "replay is activated and the next game shifts to RT6". The combination of the symbols of the virtual group, which is a combination of the combination of the symbols of the first group and the combination of the symbols of the second group, is "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 /". It is defined by combining the constituent symbols of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel with "/" (or), such as "Cherry 2", and corresponds to the combination of the symbols of this defined virtual group. A specific 1-byte data is assigned from 8 types of 1-byte data of 00000001 to 10000000 that distinguish the combination of symbols in the storage area, and the combination of symbols of the virtual group is identified by the assigned 1-byte data. It is supposed to be. If there is space for 1-byte data in one storage area, 1-byte data that specifies the combination of symbols of the virtual group is allocated to that space, and if there is no space in one storage area, it is virtual in a new storage area. 1-byte data that specifies the combination of groove symbols will be assigned.

Then, in the process of determining the combination of the symbols of the first group and the second group, after determining whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group is "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2", it is virtual. It is possible to determine whether or not the combination of group symbols is "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2".

If it is determined in the first determination that the combination of the symbols of the second group is "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2", it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the second group.

After it is determined in the first judgment that it is not a combination of the symbols of the second group, it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the virtual group is "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2". When judged, "Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-" It is confirmed that it is a combination of the symbols of the first group of "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1".

If it is determined in the first determination that it is not a combination of symbols in the second group and then it is determined that it is not a combination of symbols in the virtual group, it is determined that it is not a combination of symbols in the first group.

As a result, the judgment constants are the combination of the symbols of the second group "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" and the combination of the symbols of the virtual group "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2". "-" Cherry 1 / Cherry 2 "is sufficient and can be reduced to 2 bytes. Moreover, the number of steps in the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, while reducing the program capacity and / or the data capacity required for the determination process, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group and whether or not the combination of the symbols of the first group.

In RT2, when the combination of the symbols of the second group "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" is determined, the profit that "replay is activated and the next game shifts to RT6" is determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine the combination of the symbols of the first group. Therefore, when it is determined by the first determination that it is a combination of symbols of the second group, it is not determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols of the virtual group. Therefore, the program capacity and / or the data capacity required for the determination process can be further reduced.

In this modification, the special zone for adding RT6 is not provided, and the combination of symbols in the second group "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" is a combination of symbols to be excluded from the combination of symbols in the virtual group. It can also be positioned as.

Then, the combination of the symbols of the first group "cherry 1"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2", "cherry 2" that gives the profit of "there is no medal payout and shifts to RT3". In the process of determining "cherry 1"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2", "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 1", the second group is determined by determining whether or not the symbols are combined. After it is determined that the combination of symbols of the group is not used, it may be determined whether or not the combination of symbols of the virtual group is used.

In this case, after it is determined in the first judgment that it is not a combination of the symbols of the second group, the combination of the symbols of the virtual group "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2" If it is determined to be, "Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1 / Cherry 2", "Cherry 2" "-" Cherry 2 "-" Cherry 1 "is determined to be a combination of the symbols of the first group, and after it is determined in the first judgment that it is not a combination of the symbols of the second group, the combination of the symbols of the virtual group If it is determined that it is not, it is determined that it is not a combination of the symbols of the first group.

In this case as well, the judgment constants are the combination of the symbols of the second group "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" to be excluded and the combination of the symbols of the virtual group "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry". Two types of "1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1 / cherry 2" are sufficient and can be reduced to 2 bytes. Moreover, the number of steps in the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the symbol is a combination of the first group while reducing the program capacity and / or the data capacity required for the determination process.

This modification is applied to the combination of symbols related to the transition of the replay time, but it may also be applied to the ones in which the number of medals to be paid out is different. For example, the first symbol A (bell 1) and the second symbol B (bell 2), which are different from each other such as bell 1 and bell 2, are arranged on the left, middle, and right reels, and "left symbol-middle symbol-right" is arranged. As a combination of "designs", "AA", "AA", "ABA", "ABB", "BA", "BA-" A 9-card combination that pays out 9 medals corresponding to the combination of the symbols of the 1st group of 7 ways of "B" and "BB", and the 2nd group of 1 way of "BB". If there is an 8-card combination that pays out 8 medals corresponding to the combination of symbols, first determine whether or not it is "BB", and then the virtual group "A / B-A / B-". It is determined whether or not it is "A / B". Also in this case, it is possible to satisfactorily determine whether or not the combination is 9 or 8 while reducing the program capacity and / or the data capacity required for the determination process.

[Prioritying incorporating a new concept regarding symbol pull-in] Modification example In this modification as well, as in the above embodiment, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols are rotated, and the winning is won by an internal lottery. A reel stop control means for stopping the rotating reel based on the operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R corresponding to the combination is provided (see FIGS. 67 and 70 to 72).

As shown in FIG. 67, 1 byte of pull-in priority data is assigned to all the symbols of the unstopped reels before the stop operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is performed (S624 to S631). That is, before the first stop operation, the attraction priority data is initially stored for all 20 frames of all reels according to the internal winning combination. Before the second stop operation, the pull-in priority data is rewritten for all 20 frames of the two rotating reels according to the outcome of the first stop. Before the third stop operation, the pull-in priority data is rewritten according to the outcome of the second stop for the 20 frames of one reel that is rotating.

As for the draw-in priority data, among the combinations of symbols included in the internal winning combination, priority is given to the number of symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols with the largest number of medals to be paid out, or the same game result (payout, re-game). Priority is given to the number of symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols with the largest number of winning flags (operation, operation of accessories), or the winning range that can be won by internal lottery (total lottery value on the internal lottery table). The symbols corresponding to the combination of the symbols with the largest value are assigned according to the priority of the range to be drawn in. For example, 03H is assigned to the symbol with the highest priority, 01H etc. is assigned to the symbol with the lowest priority, and 00H is assigned to the symbol (kicking symbol) that is prohibited from stopping because the non-winning roles are aligned when stopped. ..

At the time of pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, for example, the symbol one above the symbol passing through the stop reference position defined in the middle line is set as the 0th symbol that can be stopped by sliding less than 1 frame, and this 0 The starting point is the number of temporary slip frames that are provisionally set in advance according to the internal winning combination and the stop button number that was pressed first for the data for 5 frames to be searched, including the symbol of the frame, which is 0 to 4 frames slip. For example, if the number of temporary slip frames is 2, the maximum value search process is performed according to a predetermined order of the second frame, the third frame, the fourth frame, the 0th frame, and the first frame. The symbol with the maximum value detected first from the starting point is determined as the stop symbol, one of 0 to 4 frame slips is selected based on the determined stop symbol, and the rotation of the reel is stopped at the selected number of slide frames ( S719 etc. in FIG. 72). As a result, the determined stop symbol is stopped in the middle stage.

In this modification, stop control according to the number priority, stop control according to the number priority, and stop control according to the range priority are selected and executed according to the game state and the internal winning combination. Specifically, during the general game of RT0 to RT4 in FIG. 13, the stop control according to the number priority and the stop control according to the number priority are used properly, and during the state between the flags of RT5, the stop control according to the number priority and the number priority The stop control according to the number priority is used properly and the stop control according to the range priority is used properly, and the stop control according to the number priority is used during the bonus state of BB1 to BB4.

In this modified example, NML30 is used as a duplicate winning combination of "F_chance eye B1", "F_chance eye B2", "F_chance eye B3", and "F_chance eye B4" in FIGS. 16 and 17. It is decided to add one role of (S_chance control role). That is, for example, FIG. 16 No. 6 "F_BB1 + F_chance eye B1" is BB01 + NML14 + 18 + 26 + 30.

During the general game of RT0 to RT4, or during the state between the flags of RT5, No. 17 in FIG. If you win a small winning combination in any of the "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" of 77-98, when the push order is correct, 8 medals will be awarded by stop control according to the number of medals. "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" of NML01 to be paid out is displayed, and if the push order is incorrect, one of NML02 to 13 that pays out one medal with duplicate winning symmetry by stop control according to the number priority. Is displayed with a predetermined display probability or is omitted.

During the general game of RT0 to RT4, No. 16 in FIG. Winning a duplicate role of one bonus role and multiple replay roles, or a duplicate role of one bonus role and multiple small roles of 1 to 38 "F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip" to "F_BB4 + F_chance eye B4". Then, by the stop control according to the number priority, the re-game combination or the small combination that becomes a plurality of winning flags is displayed.

For example, at the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance A1" (BB01 + NML14 + 22 + 26 + 30), when the second stop is completed in the order of left, middle or middle, left, the left on any one of the upper, middle and lower rows. "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2" can be displayed for reels, and "Cherry 1" can be displayed for middle reels. For the right reel, if you make a third stop within the pull-in range of the specific symbol "Red 7" based on the Tempai line where "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-are lined up, the specific symbol "Red 7" will be tempted. Can be displayed on the line. Therefore, it is possible to display an easy-to-understand chance eye of NML14 of "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-specific symbol "red 7" on a specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of middle, right or right, middle, "Cherry 1" can be displayed on any one of the upper, middle, and lower effective lines for the middle reel and "cherry 1" for the right reel. "Cherry 1" can be displayed. For the left reel, when the third stop is performed within the pull-in range of the specific symbol "Red 7" based on the Tempai line where-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1" is lined up, the specific symbol "Red 7" is displayed on the Tempai line. can. Therefore, it is possible to display an easy-to-understand chance eye of NML26 of the specific symbol "red 7"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1" on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of right and left, "Cherry 1" and "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" on the right reel can be displayed on the valid line, and the left reel can be displayed. Can display a "bell" on the same line as the "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" on the right. For the middle reel, if the third stop is performed within the pull-in range of the specific symbol "Red 7" based on the Tempai line where "Bell" --- "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" are lined up, the specific symbol "Red 7" Can be displayed on the tempai line. Therefore, it is possible to display the incomprehensible chance eye of NML22 of "bell"-specific symbol "red 7"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of left and right, the effective line is "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2" for the left reel and "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" and one of them. The lower "watermelon" can be displayed, and for the right reel, "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" can be displayed on the same line as the "watermelon" on the left design. When the third stop is performed on the middle reel, "cherry 1" can be displayed on the lower line, which is the tempai line where "watermelon"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" is lined up. Therefore, it is possible to display the incomprehensible chance eye of NML30 of "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" on the lower line which is one specific effective line.

At the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance A2" (BB01 + NML15 + 23 + 27 + 30), the specific symbol "red 7" is replaced with the specific symbol "blue 7", NML14 is replaced with NML15, NML22 is replaced with NML23, and NML26 is replaced with NML27.

At the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance eye A3" (BB01 + NML16 + 24 + 28 + 30), the specific symbol "red 7" is replaced with the specific symbol "BAR", NML14 is replaced with NML16, NML22 is replaced with NML28, and NML26 is replaced with NML28.

At the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance A4" (BB01 + NML17 + 25 + 29 + 30), the specific symbol "red 7" is replaced with the specific symbol "blank", NML14 is replaced with NML17, NML22 is replaced with NML25, and NML26 is replaced with NML29.

Also, at the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance B1" (BB01 + NML14 + 18 + 26 + 30), when the second stop is completed in the order of left, middle or middle, left, the left on any one of the upper, middle and lower rows. "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2" can be displayed for reels, and "Cherry 1" can be displayed for middle reels. For the right reel, if you make a third stop within the pull-in range of the specific symbol "Red 7" based on the Tempai line where "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-are lined up, the specific symbol "Red 7" will be tempted. Can be displayed on the line. Therefore, it is possible to display an easy-to-understand chance eye of NML14 of "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-specific symbol "red 7" on a specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of middle and right, "Cherry 1" can be displayed for the middle reel and "Cherry 1" for the right reel on any one of the upper, middle and lower effective lines. can. For the left reel, when the third stop is performed within the pull-in range of the specific symbol "Red 7" based on the Tempai line where-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1" is lined up, the specific symbol "Red 7" is displayed on the Tempai line. can. Therefore, it is possible to display an easy-to-understand chance eye of NML26 of the specific symbol "red 7"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1" on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of right and middle, "Cherry 1" for the right reel, "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" one above it and "Blank" two above it are on the valid line. "Watermelon" can be displayed, and for the middle reel, "Cherry 1" can be displayed on the same line as "Cherry 1" on the right pattern. For the left reel, when the third stop is performed within the pull-in range of the specific symbol "Red 7" based on the Tempai line where-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1" is lined up, the specific symbol "Red 7" is displayed on the Tempai line. can. Therefore, it is possible to display an easy-to-understand chance eye of NML26 of the specific symbol "red 7"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1" on the lower line which is one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of right and left, "Cherry 1" for the right reel, "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" one above it and "Blank" two above it are on the valid line. "Watermelon" can be displayed, and for the left reel, "Replay" can be displayed on the same line as "Watermelon" on the right. For the middle reel, if the third stop is performed within the pull-in range of the specific symbol "Red 7" based on the Tempai line where "Replay" --- "Watermelon" is lined up, the specific symbol "Red 7" can be displayed on the Tempai line. Therefore, it is possible to display the incomprehensible chance eye of NML18 of "replay"-specific symbol "red 7"-"watermelon" on the upper line which is one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of left and right, the effective line is "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2" for the left reel and "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" and one of them. The lower "watermelon" can be displayed, and for the right reel, "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" can be displayed on the same line as the "watermelon" on the left design. When the third stop is performed on the middle reel, "cherry 1" can be displayed on the lower line, which is the tempai line where "watermelon"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" is lined up. Therefore, it is possible to display the incomprehensible chance eye of NML30 of "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" on the lower line which is one specific effective line.

At the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance B2" (BB01 + NML15 + 19 + 27 + 30), the specific symbol "red 7" is replaced with the specific symbol "blue 7", NML14 is replaced with NML15, NML18 is replaced with NML27, and NML26 is replaced with NML27.

At the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance B3" (BB01 + NML16 + 20 + 28 + 30), the specific symbol "red 7" is replaced with the specific symbol "BAR", NML14 is replaced with NML16, NML18 is replaced with NML28, and NML26 is replaced with NML28.

At the time of winning "F_BB1 + F_chance B4" (BB01 + NML17 + 21 + 29 + 30), the specific symbol "red 7" is replaced with the specific symbol "blank", NML14 is replaced with NML17, NML18 is replaced with NML21, and NML26 is replaced with NML29.

As mentioned above, during the general game of RT0 to RT4, for example, if "F_BB1 + F_chance eye A1" to "F_BB1 + F_chance eye B4" are won, easy-to-understand chance eyes such as NML14 and NML26 can be displayed, and the bonus role BB1 can be displayed at the chance eye. It is possible to impress the player appropriately and effectively as if he had won the prize.

Also, during the general game of RT0 to RT4, even if a single "F_chance eye A1"-"F_chance eye B4" that does not overlap with the bonus role is won, "F_BB1 + F_chance eye A1" that overlaps with the bonus role- The display result is the same as when winning "F_BB1 + F_chance B4". However, when a single "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won, as shown in FIG. 33, it shifts to a normal advantageous section of high accuracy 2 state, and a specific symbol is specified at the time of the third stop. When "Red 7" or the like cannot be pulled in and is missed, the S_RT3 transition item in FIG. 19 is displayed, and the display of the RT3 transition item is used as an opportunity to shift to RT3 which is advantageous to the player. For this reason, during the general game of RT0 to RT4, even if a single chance is won, it is possible to display the chance eye in an easy-to-understand manner, and the RT3 transition is made to make the game easier to understand. Is extremely appropriate.

On the other hand, during the state between the flags of RT5, even if an easy-to-understand chance eye is displayed, the bonus combination related to the carry-over is duplicated, so there is no transition to the high-accuracy 2 state in FIG. 33, and moreover, During the internal winning of the bonus role, the RT state cannot be changed by the display of a specific combination of symbols (d trigger symbol), so there is no transition to RT3. Therefore, displaying the easy-to-understand chance eyes or displaying the easy-to-understand chance eyes may be confusing to the player.

Therefore, during the state between the flags of RT5, as a predetermined specific role, any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" At the time of winning, the display result is changed from that during the general game of RT0 to RT4 by the stop control according to the range priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the combination of the corresponding symbols of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is represented by the NML number. When the winning range that can be won by the internal lottery including other winning combinations including the same number as the arranged NML number, that is, the total lottery value on the internal lottery table is obtained, NML14 to 17 are 1341 and NML18. ~ 21 is 814, NML22 ~ 25 is 527, NML26 ~ 29 is 1341, and NML30 is 2122. Therefore, the NML30 is the largest at 2122.

Therefore, in the pull-in priority data, since the combination of the symbols of NML30 is "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank", the left reel 3L is changed to the "watermelon" symbol. Correspondingly, the "watermelon" symbol corresponds to the middle symbol when the effective line of any of the upper, middle, and lower rows is displayed, and the middle reel 3C corresponds to the "cherry 1" symbol, "cherry". 1 ”The symbol is displayed on the effective line of any of the upper, middle, and lower rows. For the right reel 3R,“ Red 7 ”,“ Blue 7 ”,“ BAR ”, and“ Blank ”. In correspondence with each symbol, 03H having the highest priority is initially assigned to the middle symbol to be displayed on the effective line of any of the upper, middle, and lower rows. For other symbols, 01H, which has the lowest uniform priority, is initially assigned.

The "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 3L, the "cherry 1" symbol on the middle reel 3C, and the "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", and "blank" symbols on the right reel 3R can be slipped up to 4 frames. Since the display probability that can be retracted is 1, 03H always exists in the 5 search target frames that slip 0 to 4 frames regardless of the push order and stop operation at any timing, and the first stop Even after the second stop, at least one 03H initially assigned corresponding to these symbols will survive. Since there are multiple effective lines, the upper, middle, and lower lines, some of the initially assigned 03H may be rewritten to 01H after the first stop or the second stop, but at least one. 03H remains without being rewritten.

In this way, in the state between the flags of RT5, when any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won, the range priority is followed. By the stop control, "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank" related to NML30 can be displayed on any one of the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line.

As a result, during the state between the flags of RT5, the easy-to-understand chance eyes such as NML14 and NML26 are not displayed, so that the player is not misunderstood that the state shifts to the high-accuracy 2 state, and the easy-to-understand chance eyes are not given. Since the missing eye is not displayed, the player is not misunderstood that he / she will move to RT3.

In this modification, if there is another NML number that has the same winning range as the winning range 2122 of NML30, 03H is set as the same winning range for the NML30 compatible symbol when the pull-in priority data is initially assigned. If there are multiple combinations of symbols included in the internal winning combination that have the maximum winning range that can be won by internal lottery, for example, 01H, which has a low priority, is assigned to the other symbols corresponding to the NML number. The symbols corresponding to one predetermined combination of symbols are preferentially stopped. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of winning combinations won by the internal lottery having the same and large winning range that can be won by the internal lottery, the stop control according to the range priority becomes possible.

In this modification, "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are selected as specific roles that perform stop control according to range priority, but other The internal winning combination may be selected as a specific combination to perform stop control according to the range priority. In addition, the stop control according to the range priority is performed during the state between the flags of RT5, but the stop control according to the range priority is performed during the general game of RT0 to RT4 and the bonus state of BB1 to BB4. May be good.

[RT Fall Navi] Modification Example This modification also starts the variation display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and stops the variation display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Further, on the program of the main CPU 101, an advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state including an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART that enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player is provided. There is.

In this modification, the number of payouts of NML02 to 13 in FIG. 22 is changed to eight, which is the same as that of NML01. In addition, No. 17 in FIG. The push order small roles of 77 to 98 are changed as follows. One from NML02-05 related to the first group where the display probability of the right reel symbol is 1/4 in order to lower the expected value of the number of medals won when the push order is incorrect at the time of winning each push order small winning combination. , One from NML06 to 09 related to the second group in which the display probability of the middle reel symbol is 1/4, and one from NML10 to 13 related to the third group in which the display probability of the left reel symbol is 1/4. It is selected as the duplicate winning target of NML01 to be displayed when the push order is correct.

No. The F_upper left bell 1 of 77 is set to NML01 + 02 + 06 + 10.
No. The F_upper left bell 2 of 78 is set to NML01 + 04 + 08 + 12.
No. The middle bell 1 in the F_upper row of 79 is set to NML01 + 02 + 06 + 11.
No. The F_upper middle bell 2 of 80 is set to NML01 + 03 + 08 + 12.
No. The F_upper right and left bell 1 of 81 is set to NML01 + 02 + 07 + 10.
No. The F_upper right and left bell 2 of 82 is set to NML01 + 03 + 08 + 13.
No. The F_upper right middle bell 1 of 83 is set to NML01 + 02 + 08 + 10.
No. The F_upper right middle bell 2 of 84 is set to NML01 + 04 + 07 + 12.
No. The F_middle left bell 1 of 85 is set to NML01 + 02 + 06 + 12.
No. The F_middle left bell 2 of 86 is set to NML01 + 04 + 08 + 11.
No. The middle bell 1 in the F_middle stage of 87 is set to NML01 + 02 + 06 + 13.
No. The middle bell 2 in the F_middle stage of 88 is set to NML01 + 04 + 09 + 11.
No. The F_middle right and left bell 1 of 89 is set to NML01 + 02 + 08 + 12.
No. The F_middle right and left bell 2 of 90 is set to NML01 + 04 + 07 + 11.
No. The F_middle right middle bell 1 of 91 is set to NML01 + 02 + 08 + 11.
No. The F_middle right middle bell 2 of 92 is NML01 + 03 + 07 + 12.
No. The middle bell 1 in the F_lower row of 93 is set to NML01 + 05 + 06 + 10.
No. The bell 2 in the lower middle of F_ of 94 is set to NML01 + 03 + 07 + 11.
No. The F_lower right and left bell 1 of 95 is set to NML01 + 05 + 06 + 13.
No. The F_lower right and left bell 2 of 96 is set to NML01 + 04 + 09 + 12.
No. The lower right middle bell 1 of F_97 is set to NML01 + 05 + 06 + 12.
No. The lower right middle bell 2 of F_98 is set to NML01 + 04 + 08 + 13.

Therefore, when one of the push order small wins is won or when the push order is correct, NML01 is awarded and eight medals are paid out, and when the push order is incorrect, one of NML02 to 13 to be duplicated is selected. Win a prize with a display probability of 1/4 and pay out 8 medals.

During the advantageous section including the advantageous state by the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function, eight medals can be easily obtained by displaying the correct answer pressing order navigation on the display device 11 on the sub side. On the other hand, during the normal section, which is not an advantageous section, as a general rule, the correct answer push order navigation is not issued, so 8 medals can be obtained with a display probability of 1/4, or a deviation (payout) with a display probability of 3/4. It becomes 0). At the time of disconnection, the bell spill of "Replay"-"Watermelon"-"Bell" is displayed, but in this modified example, it is not the RT1 transition.

In this modification, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 108, the lottery mode (breakdown and / or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game is different on the program of the main CPU 101. A replay time transition means for transitioning a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including RT0 to RT5 and bonus states is provided.

A) RT0
In this RT0, the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, and the replay probability is set to a low probability (low lip) of, for example, 8978/65536≈1 / 7.3.

B) RT1
This RT1 shifts from another RT state by displaying the combination of the first transition trigger symbols, and the replay probability is set to a high probability (high lip) of, for example, about 1 / 1.35. The combination of the first transition trigger symbols is, for example, the combination of any of the symbols NML02 to 13.

C) RT2
This RT2 shifts from another RT state by displaying the combination of the second transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from that of RT1, but the replay probability is a high probability (high lip) that is not different from RT1. .. The combination of the second transition trigger symbols is, for example, the combination of the symbols of NML01.

D) RT3
This RT3 shifts from RT1 by displaying the combination of the third transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT1 and RT2, but the replay probability is set to a high probability (high lip) that is not different from RT1 or RT2. There is. The combination of the third transition trigger symbols is, for example, "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the REP09 symbols in FIG. 21, but in this modification, it is used as the combination of the symbols that trigger the transition from RT1 to RT3.

From RT3, it is assumed that the transition to RT0 is performed by displaying the combination of the 4th transition trigger symbols. The combination of the fourth transition trigger symbols is, for example, "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank"-"replay"-"replay", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the REP08 symbols in FIG. 21, but in this modification, it is used as the combination of the symbols that trigger the transition from RT3 to RT0.

E) RT4.
This RT4 shifts from RT2 by displaying the combination of the fifth transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT1 to RT3, but the replay probability is set to a high probability (high lip) that is not different from RT1 to RT3. There is. The combination of the fifth transition trigger symbols is, for example, "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the REP07 symbols in FIG. 21, but in this modification, it is used as the combination of the symbols that trigger the transition from RT2 to RT4.

In this modification, RT4 is mainly positioned as a highly accurate replay time in which the assist replay time ART is performed.

F) RT5
This RT5 is based on the winning of any of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 drawn during the general game of RT0 to RT4, and in the winning game, a combination of operation symbols is used to preferentially display the small winning combination or the replaying combination of the duplicate winning targets. Is not displayed, so the bonus internal winning (in the inter-flag state) in which the winning flag of the bonus role related to the winning that shifts to the next game or later of the winning game is carried over is carried over. The re-game probability is, for example, a medium probability (medium lip) of about 1 / 2.49.

G) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are composed of the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special accessory, and the first-class special accessory RB is always in the operating state while the BB is operating, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes a game state in the middle. The probability of replay is 0, the probability of losing is 0, and any of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 wins. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the maximum number of medals won is exceeded (the RB which is always operated also ends), and returns to RT0.

The lottery values for each breakdown of the replaying combination of RT0 are, for example, as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-09) is 6
3) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-09) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values for each breakdown of the replaying combination of RT1 are as follows, for example.
1) F_RT3 transition lip (REP09) is 48643
2) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-09) is 6
3) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT1 is 48655, and the probability is about 1 / 1.35. The F_RT3 transition lip (REP09) serves as a specific fall trigger for displaying the combination of the third transition trigger symbols for transition to RT3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values for each breakdown of the replaying combination of RT2 are, for example, as follows.
1) F_RT4 transition lip (REP07) is 48643
2) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-09) is 6
3) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-09) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT2 is 48655, and the probability is about 1 / 1.35. The F_RT4 transition rip (REP07) serves as a predetermined transition trigger for displaying the combination of the fifth transition trigger symbols for transition to RT4, and has the same winning probability as the specific fall trigger. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values for each breakdown of the replaying combination of RT3 are as follows, for example.
1) F_RT0 transition lip (REP08) is 48643
2) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-09) is 6
3) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-09) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT2 is 48655, and the probability is about 1 / 1.35. The winning probability of the F_RT0 transition lip (REP08) is the same as the above-mentioned specific fall trigger and predetermined transition trigger, but it does not have to be the same. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values for each breakdown of the replaying combination of RT4 are as follows, for example.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 16273
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 2450
3) F_middle rip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 5000
4) F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + 05) is 9000
5) F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + 06) is 4500
6) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 2450
7) F_shot lip (REP03) is 8970
8) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-09) is 6
9) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-09) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT4 is 48655, and the probability is about 1 / 1.35. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 5053
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 60
3) F_middle lip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 306
4) F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + 05) is 8992
5) F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + 06) is 11775
6) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 180
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT5 is 21313, and the probability is about 1 / 2.49. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The breakdown and lottery value of the winning combination for the bonus combination and the small combination of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, RT5 are shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1 to No. No. 38 and No. 17 in FIG. 61-No. It is the same as 98. However, in this modification, No. 17 in FIG. The combinations of the corresponding symbols for the push order small combinations of 77 to 98 are changed as described above.

In this modification, during a normal section that is not an advantageous section, one of the push order small winning combinations is won, and by winning the NML01 based on this winning, the player shifts to an advantageous state of a provisional advantageous section. During the normal section, if you win any of the push order small wins, it will be uniformly shifted to the provisional advantageous section, and if the NML01 corresponding to the correct answer push order wins, the provisional advantageous section will be maintained and the incorrect push order will be maintained. If any of the corresponding duplicate winning winning combinations NML 02 to 13 wins or is missed, the provisional advantageous section may be terminated immediately.

Further, the transition from the non-advantageous section including the provisional advantageous section, that is, the normal section to the advantageous section is performed according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 33. That is, by winning the weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A”, “F_weak rare role B”), the player shifts to the normal advantageous section of high accuracy 1 state for at least 9 games from the next game. By winning the chances ("F_chance A1"-"F_chance A4" and "F_chance B1"-"F_chance B4") that do not overlap with the bonus role, the accuracy is high for at least 9 games from the next game. Shift to the normal advantageous section of 2 states.

Further, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, a precursory period lottery is performed in which the precursory period is selected from 9 to 16 games. It is decided to make an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART via the normal advantageous section called the present precursor state, and in the non-winning time, the game is shifted to the normal advantageous section of the high probability 3 state through the lottery during the precursor period.

Furthermore, by winning a bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 64/256 is performed, and a bonus is given at the time of winning. After the end of the state, it is decided to make it an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART, which is the line battle state following the line battle preparation state, and in the non-winning time, after the end of the bonus state, it is high for at least 32 games from the next game. It shifts to the normal advantageous section of the probability 4 state.

In short, it is usually advantageous from the normal section based on the winning of the predetermined role that the lottery value does not change in RT0 to RT4, which is a weak rare role, a single chance eye, a bonus role excluding overlap with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. Shift to an advantageous section called a section. However, since the provisional advantageous section is included in the advantageous section and is not a normal section, the transition to the normal advantageous section based on the winning such as this weak rare role is not performed.

Further, after the transition to the normal advantageous section, it is possible to determine the advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART from the normal advantageous section according to the processing in the game in the normal advantageous section shown in FIG. 34, but it is provisional. When it is in a favorable section, the advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART is not determined from the normal advantageous section.

During the normal section, if you win any of the push order small roles, even if there is no push order navigation, if you happen to answer correctly in the push order, you can win NML01, and if you win NML01, you will move to a provisional advantageous section. , "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" related to NML01 shifts to RT2 in the high accuracy RT state.

This transition to RT2 is an unintended transition to a high-accuracy RT state in a situation where ART has not been determined. However, in RT2 or in RT4 that shifts by winning the F_RT4 transition lip that is drawn with high probability in RT2, when one of the push order small wins is won again, it is in the advantageous section called the provisional advantageous section. Therefore, we will not issue a navigation system (correct answer navigation system) that will win NML01, but will issue a navigation system (recommended navigation system) that will win any of NML02 to 13 that are subject to duplicate winnings.

The combination of the symbols of NML01 and the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 to be duplicated can be displayed in such a relationship that when one is displayed according to the player's stop operation, the other is not displayed. Functions as a specific transition distribution role that distributes the transition destination of the RT state. Here, the combination of the symbols of NML01 and the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 to be duplicated can only be displayed in a relationship that when one is displayed, the other is not displayed, and either one is always displayed. It is not something that is done. That is, three embodiments are included in which only the combination of the symbols of NML01 is displayed, only the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 is displayed, and the combination of neither symbol is displayed.

Both the correct navigation that wins NML01 and the recommended navigation that wins any of NML02 to 13 pay out 8 medals and both shift to RT1 or RT2 in the high probability RT state with the same replay probability, so the player The benefits given to are the same.

As shown in the example below, the correct navigation and recommended navigation for each push order small role are "1- ×-×" and "3" Red 7 "-on the display device 11 on the sub side, corresponding to the position of the stop button. 2-1 "is displayed. "1-×-×" means that it does not matter after the first stop on the left and the second stop, and "3" Red 7 "-2-1" means that the stop button is pressed in the order of right, middle, and left. For the left reel, it means that you should aim for the "Red 7" pattern.

F_Upper left bell 1; Correct navigation "1- ×-×", recommended navigation "3" Red 7 "2-1"
F_Upper left bell 2; Correct navigation "1- ×-×", recommended navigation "3" BAR "-2-1"
F_Upper middle bell 1; Correct navigation "× -1- ×", recommended navigation "1-2-3" Red 7 ""
F_Upper middle bell 2; Correct navigation "× -1- ×", recommended navigation "1-3" BAR "-2"
F_Upper right and left bell 1; Correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" Red 7 ""
F_Upper right and left bell 2; Correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-3" BAR "-2"
F_Upper right middle bell 1; Correct navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" Red 7 ""
F_Upper right middle bell 2; Correct navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" BAR ""
F_Middle left bell 1; Correct navigation "1- ×-×", recommended navigation "3" BAR "-2-1"
F_Middle left bell 2; Correct navigation "1- ×-×", recommended navigation "2-3" BAR "-1"
F_Middle bell 1; Correct navigation "× -1- ×", Recommended navigation "1-2-3" Red 7 ""
F_Middle bell 2; Correct navigation "× -1- ×", recommended navigation "1-2-3" BAR ""
F_Middle right and left bell 1; Correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" Red 7 ""
F_Middle right and left bell 2; Correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-3" BAR "-2"
F_Middle right middle bell 1; Correct navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" Red 7 ""
F_Middle right middle bell 2; Correct navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" Blue 7 ""
F_Lower middle bell 1; Correct navigation "× -1- ×", Recommended navigation "3" Red 7 "2-1"
F_Lower middle bell 2; Correct navigation "× -1- ×", recommended navigation "1-2-3" Blue 7 ""
F_Lower right and left bell 1; Correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-3" Red 7 "-2"
F_Lower right and left bell 2; Correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" BAR ""
F_Lower right middle bell 1; Correct navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-3" Red 7 "-2"
F_Lower right middle bell 2; Correct navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3" BAR ""

Even if you unintentionally shift to RT2 in the high-probability RT state by displaying the combination of symbols of NML01 during the normal section, or even if you shift to RT4 via RT2, it is provisional to shift by winning NML01. In a favorable section, when you win any of the push order small wins, the recommended navigation is issued, and among the duplicate winning targets included in the push order small wins related to the win, "Red 7" which is relatively easy to see at the time of the third stop By aiming at "BAR" or "Blue 7", a specific one of the duplicate winning winning combination NML02 to 13 with a display probability of 1/4 can be won, and by displaying the combination of the symbols, RT2 or RT4 Can be migrated to RT1 at an early stage.

The provisional advantageous section shall be terminated on condition that it has shifted to RT1 and returned to the normal section. Therefore, contrary to the recommended navigation, if neither of the duplicate winning winning combinations NML02 to 13 is won, the provisional advantageous section will continue, and the transition from the normal section to the normal advantageous section will also be from the normal advantageous section to ART. It will not be possible to expect a shift to an advantageous section due to. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to follow the recommended navigation. The provisional advantageous section also ends with the winning of the bonus roles BB1 to BB4. This is because it returns to RT0 after the end of the bonus state.

In RT1, since the F_RT3 transition lip (REP09) is drawn with a high probability, it can be transferred to RT3 at an early stage, and in RT3, the F_RT0 transition lip (REP08) is drawn with a high probability, so that it is set to RT0. It can be migrated early. Therefore, even if the RT state is unintentionally changed to the high accuracy RT state, it can be restored to the low accuracy RT state RT0 within a relatively short period of time.

On the other hand, when ART is in progress or ART is determined, if the player shifts to RT2 by displaying the combination of symbols related to NML01, the correct answer navigation for winning NML01 is issued in RT2 or RT4, so shift to RT1. Instead, RT2 or RT4 in a highly accurate RT state can be maintained.

In addition, during ART or when ART is determined, in RT2 or RT4, due to an operation error or the like, the stop operation is performed in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order by the correct answer navigation, and any of NML02 to 13 is performed. Even if a prize is won and the transition to RT1 is made, it is possible to immediately return to RT2 by winning NML01 according to the correct answer navigation at the time of winning any of the push order small combinations in RT1 or RT3 or RT0. During ART or when ART is decided, since it is already in the advantageous section, it does not mean that the transition to the provisional advantageous section will be made by winning the NML01.

As described above, in this modification, RT0 in the low probability RT state where the replay probability is relatively low and RT1 and RT2 in the high probability RT state where the replay probability is relatively high are in the RT state where the lottery mode of the replay is different. , RT3, RT4 and so on.

Then, in RT0 in the low probability RT state, the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 that shifts the F_RT3 transition lip (REP09) that causes the fall to RT0 via RT3 to RT1 that is drawn with high probability, and RT2. The push order small winning combination of the specific transition distribution combination that can be displayed in the relationship that when one is displayed and the other is not displayed according to the stop operation of the player, the combination of the symbols of NML01 to be transferred to is drawn.

Furthermore, RT2 is assumed to be included in the high-accuracy RT state, and even in the high-accuracy RT state including RT2, the push order small combination of the specific transition distribution combination is drawn, and the RT2 is set to RT2 during the normal section before the occurrence of the advantageous state. In the event of a transition, the winning of NML01 based on the winning of the push order small winning combination that displays the combination of NML01 symbols creates an advantageous state of a provisional advantageous section, and RT2 or RT2 in the high accuracy RT state including RT2. When the push order small combination is won in RT4, the recommended navigation to display the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 is issued, and then the provisional advantageous section is terminated at the time of transition to RT1.

In addition, if the player shifts to RT2 during the occurrence of an advantageous state including a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section by ART, a correct navigation for displaying the combination of NML01 symbols is issued when the push order small combination is won.

As a result, even if the RT2 is unintentionally shifted to the high-accuracy RT state during the normal section before the occurrence of the advantageous state, the advantageous state of the provisional advantageous section is generated, and the high-accuracy RT state including RT2 is generated. When the push order small role is won, the recommended navigation to shift to RT1 is issued, so that it is possible to prompt the early fall from RT1 to RT3 and then to RT0 in the low probability RT state. After issuing the recommended navigation, the provisional advantageous section will be terminated at the time of transition to RT1, so the advantageous section will not be longer than necessary, and the player will not be unnecessarily benefited, or the player will be unnecessarily. It does not give any disadvantage to.

Moreover, it shifts to RT2 during the occurrence of the advantageous state corresponding to the normal advantageous section or the advantageous section by ART, and when it is appropriate to maintain the high accuracy RT state, it is pushed in the high accuracy RT state including RT2. When the correct answer is given when the winning combination is won, it is possible to avoid falling into the low-accuracy RT state, and by operating the instruction function in the high-accuracy RT state, the player can be appropriately benefited.

In particular, in the modified example, there is no difference in the profit obtained as a result of one game regardless of whether the combination of the symbols of NML01 is displayed or the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 is displayed, and there is no difference in the profit obtained as a result of one game. Based on the winning of the specific fall trigger F_RT3 transition lip, it is transferred to RT3 which falls to RT0 with high probability, and the same winning probability as the RT2 to F_RT3 transition lip. Based on the winning of the predetermined transition trigger F_RT4 transition lip to be drawn in, the transition is made to RT4, and both RT3 and RT4 are in the high-probability RT state.

Therefore, there is no difference in the profits obtained as a result of one game, whether the correct navigation or the recommended navigation is issued, based on the winning of the push order small role that functions as the specific transition distribution role, and the transition. There is no difference in the replay probability between RT1 and RT2, and both RT3, which is the transfer destination from RT1, and RT4, which is the transfer destination from RT2, are in a highly accurate RT state, so it is advantageous to issue any instruction. The difference in disadvantage can be minimized, and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

Moreover, in the modified example, the specific transition distribution combination is related to the acquisition of a game medium in which the number of acquired medals is the same regardless of whether the combination of the symbols of NML01 is displayed or the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 is displayed. It is composed of small roles, such as push order small roles.

Therefore, the specific transition distribution combination can be drawn in each RT state with a predetermined probability that the probability does not change depending on the RT state, and the lottery value of the specific transition distribution combination is set to the predetermined value regardless of the RT state, that is, the replay probability. It is easy to secure, and it is easy to construct an internal lottery table or the like.

In the modified example, it is assumed that the fall is made from RT1 to RT0 via RT3, but it may be made to fall directly from RT1 to RT0. Further, in the modified example, RT2 and RT4 are separated, but by making the lottery mode of the replay of RT2 the same as that of RT4, one high-accuracy RT state may be set and ART may be performed at RT2.

Further, the provisional advantageous section was terminated on condition that the transition to RT1 was issued after issuing the recommended navigation, but it may be terminated immediately after issuing the recommended navigation. In this case, in RT0, RT3, and RT1, it is preferable to take measures that are not useful even if the recommended navigation is disobeyed, such as drawing a chance replay that wins ART with a high probability. Further, as the specific transition distribution combination, a small combination other than the push order small combination may be used, and not only the small combination but also the replay combination may be used. The advantageous state control means may be provided on the program of the main CPU 101 or on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[System for eliminating ART preparation] Modification example This modification also starts the variation display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the variation display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. To stop. Further, the program of the main CPU 101 is provided with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state corresponding to an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing.

In this modification, the effective line is only one line in the middle row, and the specific special role "F_special small role" (NML41 + 42 + 43 + 44) that duplicately wins the newly established combination with the combination of the following symbols and the number of payouts is additionally defined, and is general. During the game, the player wins a game with a predetermined probability in the range of a fraction to a few tenths, for example, 10000/65536≈1 / 6.6.
NML41; "Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Replay" 8 cards paid out NML42; "Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Replay" 8 cards paid out NML43; "Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Replay" 8 cards paid out NML44; "Blank"-"Blank"-"Blank" 9 sheets paid out

Each of the first combinations of NML41, NML42, and NML43 has a relatively high display probability of the combination of the corresponding symbols, and the display probability of being able to always pull in the corresponding symbol with a maximum of four-frame slip is set to 1. On the other hand, in the second role of NML44, the display probability of the combination of the corresponding symbols is relatively low, there is only one "blank" of the corresponding symbol on each reel, and the display probability = 1/4 × 1/4 × 1. It is assumed that / 4 = 1/64, and there is a possibility of being missed.

In the reel stop control process performed by the main CPU 101 whose program is constructed assuming a game by a player, when the specific special role "F_special small role" is won, the same combination of symbols included in this winning combination is used. It is decided to execute the stop control according to the number priority for preferentially pulling in the symbols corresponding to the combinations NML41, NML42, and NML43 of the symbols having the largest number of winning flags of 3 as the game result (8 cards paid out).

Therefore, in the game played by the player, at the time of winning the specific special role "F_special small role", the first role of any of NML41, NML42, and NML43 wins a prize, and eight medals are paid out. In this modification, the NML41 is uniformly awarded, and "watermelon"-"bell"-"replay" is always displayed. In this case, the "bells" are lined up in a small mountain shape connecting the lower part of the left reel, the middle part of the middle reel, and the lower part of the right reel.

On the other hand, in a predetermined simulation test under a specific condition that the maximum number of medals can be obtained without dropping, there is a possibility that the combination of symbols related to the second role, which has a low display probability, is not displayed, unlike the game played by the player. Will be eliminated, and NML44, which has a maximum of 9 medals to be paid out, will definitely win a prize. That is, the combination "blank"-"blank"-"blank" of the symbol relating to the second role NML41 is always displayed.

In this modification, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 109, the lottery mode (breakdown and / or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game is different on the program of the main CPU 101. A replay time transition means for transitioning a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including RT0, RT1, RT2, RT5, and a bonus state is provided.

A) RT0
In this RT0, the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, that is, the non-replay time is set, and the replay probability is set to a low probability (low lip) of, for example, 8978/65536≈1 / 7.3.

B) RT1
This RT1 shifts from RT0 by displaying a combination of special transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0.

The combination of the special transition trigger symbols is "blank"-"blank"-"blank" corresponding to NML44, which is one of the duplicate winning combinations of the above-mentioned specific special combination "F_special small combination". Therefore, RT1 is migrated only in a predetermined simulation test performed under specific conditions that the maximum number of sheets to be obtained can be obtained without any omission.

C) RT2
This RT2 shifts from RT0 by displaying the combination of promotion trigger symbols, and the re-game probability is set to a high probability (high lip) of, for example, about 1 / 1.7. RT2 of this modification is a highly accurate replay time for playing the assist replay time ART game.

The combination of the promotion trigger symbols is "watermelon"-"bell"-"replay" corresponding to NML41, which is one of the duplicate winning roles of the above-mentioned specific special role "F_special small role". Therefore, RT2 is transferred only by the game by the player.

D) RT5
This RT5 is based on the winning of any of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 drawn during the general game of RT0 to RT2, and in the winning game, a combination of operation symbols is used to preferentially display the small winning combination or the replaying combination of the duplicate winning targets. Is not displayed, so the bonus internal winning (in the inter-flag state) in which the winning flag of the bonus role related to the winning that shifts to the next game or later of the winning game is carried over is carried over. The re-game probability is, for example, a medium probability (medium lip) of about 1/4.

E) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are composed of the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special accessory, and the first-class special accessory RB is always in the operating state while the BB is operating, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes a game state in the middle. The probability of replay is 0, the probability of losing is 0, and any one of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 wins. However, in this modification, "~ 40" in FIG. 18 is "~ 44". During the operation of BB, even if NML44 is displayed, it does not shift to RT1. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the maximum number of medals won is exceeded (the RB which is always operated also ends), and returns to RT0.

The lottery values for each breakdown of the replaying combination of RT0 are, for example, as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-09) is 6
3) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-09) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values for each breakdown of the replaying combination of RT1 are as follows, for example.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 8967
2) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-09) is 6
3) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-09) is 6
As mentioned above, RT1 has F_maintenance lip (REP02) of 8967, which is larger than RT0 by 1, but there is no significant difference, and it is a special replay that shifts only in the simulation test with the lottery mode of replay different from RT0 and RT2. Positioned in time. The total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT1 is 8979, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3, which is almost the same as RT0. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT2 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 10273
2) F_middle rip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 7450
3) F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + 05) is 5975
4) F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + 06) is 5975
5) F_shot lip (REP03) is 8970
6) F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (BB01 + REP01-10) is 6
7) F_BB2 + F_confirmed lip (BB02 + REP01-10) is 6
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT4 is 38655, and the probability is about 1 / 1.7. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference. In this modification, the F_shot lip (REP03) is used as a trigger for the fall to RT0, and the fall transition to RT0 is made by displaying "replay"-"replay"-"bell".

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 5053
2) F_middle rip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 366
3) F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + 05) is 8992
4) F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + 06) is 1955
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT5 is 16366, and the probability is about 1/4. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The breakdown and lottery value of the winning combination for the bonus combination and the small combination of RT0, RT1, RT2, and RT5 are shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1 to No. No. 38 and No. 17 in FIG. 61-No. It is determined according to 98. However, in this modification, since the effective line is the middle one line, No. 75 and 76 were combined to form an F_common bell (NML01) with a lottery value of 1120, and No. 77 and 85 are combined to make F_left bell 1 (NML01-03 + 06 + 07 + 10 + 11) with a lottery value of 1480. .. In addition, a new No. As 99, the above-mentioned specific special combination “F_special small combination” is added, and a lottery value of 1000 is assigned.

The transition from the normal section, which is a non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section is performed according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 33. That is, by winning the weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A”, “F_weak rare role B”), the player shifts to the normal advantageous section of high accuracy 1 state for at least 9 games from the next game. By winning the chances ("F_chance A1"-"F_chance A4" and "F_chance B1"-"F_chance B4") that do not overlap with the bonus role, the accuracy is high for at least 9 games from the next game. Shift to the normal advantageous section of 2 states.

Further, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, a precursory period lottery is performed in which the precursory period is selected from 9 to 16 games. It is decided to make it an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantageous section called this precursor state, and when it is not winning, it shifts to the normal advantageous section of high probability 3 state through lottery during the precursor period.

Furthermore, by winning a bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 64/256 is performed, and a bonus is given at the time of winning. After the end of the state, it is decided to make it an advantageous section by ART, which is the line battle state following the line battle preparation state, and in the case of non-winning, after the end of the bonus state, at least 32 games from the next game, high probability 4 state is normal Move to an advantageous section.

In short, an advantageous section that is not a normal section, based on the winning of a predetermined role that the lottery value does not change in RT0 to RT4, which is a weak rare role, a single chance eye, and a bonus role that excludes overlap with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. It is shifting to the normal advantageous section included in. Further, after the transition of the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section by ART can be determined from the normal advantageous section according to the processing in the game in the normal advantageous section shown in FIG. 34.

In the game by the player, when the specific special role "F_special small role" is won at RT0, the NML41 is awarded and the display of "watermelon"-"bell"-"replay" shifts to RT2. Further, when "Replay"-"Replay"-"Bell" is displayed on RT2 based on the winning of the F_shot rip (REP03), the player falls to RT0. Further, in RT0 and RT2, when the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are won, the process shifts to RT5, and after the end of the bonus state, the process returns to RT0.

Therefore, in the game by the player, if the specific special role "F_special small role" with a predetermined probability of 1 / 6.6 is won from RT0, it is possible to shift to RT2 with high accuracy replay time by winning the NML41, and the assist replay time ART The game can be played immediately and does not go through RT1 of the special replay time. Therefore, the period during the preparation for ART, which has been conventionally required, can be substantially eliminated, and the period from the determination of the winning of the ART to the start of the ART game can be greatly shortened.

On the other hand, in a predetermined simulation test under specific conditions that the maximum number of sheets can be obtained without dropping, when the specific special role "F_special small role" is won at RT0, NML44 is awarded and "blank"-. By displaying "blank"-"blank", the special replay time is shifted to RT1, and the high-accuracy replay time cannot be shifted to RT2. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform a predetermined simulation test under specific conditions without considering the high accuracy replay time.

Further, RT0, which is a low probability replay time, is a non-replay time in which the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, and is set as a return destination after the operation of the bonus roles BB1 to BB4 is completed. Even if the bonus roles BB1 to BB4 are won, the period during ART preparation until the return destination RT0 at the end of the operation is returned to RT2 can be greatly shortened.

In this modification, the specific special combination "F_special small combination" is composed of a combination related to a small combination with a payout of medals, but may be composed of a combination related to a replay game. The advantageous state control means may be provided on the program of the main CPU 101 or on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[ART winning probability fluctuation in non-advantageous section] Modification example This modification also starts the variation display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the variation of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the display. Further, the program of the main CPU 101 is provided with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state corresponding to an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing.

In this modification, instead of the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 of FIG. 20, for example, a predetermined bonus combination MB1 configured by the accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special bonus is mounted. This bonus combination MB1 does not overlap with other small combinations or replay combinations, for example, with a probability of 328/65536≈1/200, which is predetermined within the range of one tenth to one hundredth. It is possible to win by itself. The winning probability of MB1 has no setting difference that does not fluctuate depending on the setting, but the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability may be.

The combination of the operation symbols of this bonus combination MB1 ("left symbol"-"middle symbol"-"right symbol") is, for example, "replay"-"bell"-"bell", and the display probability is 1 (maximum 4 frames). The symbol can always be drawn into the effective line by slipping). Therefore, when the MB1 is won, the combination of the operating symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and the next game is in the gaming state during the MB1 operation. While the MB1 is operating, the second-class special accessory CB is always activated, and while the CB is operating, all the small winning combinations with the payout of medals are put into the winning state.

During CB operation while MB1 is operating, the specified number of input sheets is changed to 1 sheet (1 sheet), the number of payouts of all small winning reels is changed to 15, and the maximum number of slip frames is limited to 1 frame within 75 ms. The reel to be stopped is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain a maximum of four-frame slip, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left reel 3L is stopped first, the small winning combination of any of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game, are paid out.

The specified number of inserted cards may be maintained at 3 (3 cards), and the number of payouts may be the same as during the general game. In this case, in order to display the small winning combination of 8 cards on 2 of the 3 lines of the upper, middle, and lower rows and obtain the maximum number of 15 cards to be paid out, it is necessary to additionally define a dedicated small winning combination during CB operation. preferable.

The operation of the bonus combination MB1 is assumed to end when the number of medals acquired from the start of the operation exceeds, for example, 210, that is, 211 or more, and the operation of the CB also ends when the operation of the MB1 ends. Therefore, the operation of MB1 is completed in almost 15 games, and 225-15 = 210 medals can be net increased.

The bonus combination MB1 does not use the display of the combination of the winning and the operating symbols as an opportunity to change the lottery mode of the re-game. Therefore, while the bonus MB1 is in operation, the lottery mode of the re-game in the original gaming state in which the winning of the MB1 is obtained is inherited internally. However, while the MB1 is operating and the CB is operating, the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination accompanied by the payout of medals is preferentially displayed, and the combination of symbols related to the replay is not displayed.

In this modification, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 110, the lottery mode (breakdown and / or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game is different on the program of the main CPU 101. A replay time transition means for transitioning a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including RT0 and RT1 to RT5 shown in the above is provided. During the bonus state of (g), the lottery mode of the original RT state replay game in which the winning of MB1 was obtained is taken over, and there is no transition to the RT state except when the operation of MB1 is completed.

A) RT0
In this RT0, the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, and the replay probability is set to a low probability (low lip) of, for example, 8978/65536≈1 / 7.3.

B) RT1
This RT1 shifts from RT0 or RT5 by displaying a combination of predetermined transition trigger symbols, and the replay probability is set to a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0. The combination of the predetermined transition trigger symbols is No. 17 in FIG. 77-No. At the time of winning any of the push order small wins of 98, the bells of "Replay"-"Watermelon"-"Bell" in FIG. 19 that can be displayed due to an incorrect push order answer are used.

C) RT2
This RT2 shifts from RT1 by displaying the combination of the first transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. If there is no winning of the bonus combination MB1 on the way, the game returns to RT0 when the result of the predetermined first number of games, for example, four games is obtained, that is, four games after the rush.

The combination of the first transition trigger symbols is, for example, "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank"-"replay"-"replay", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the symbols of REP08 in FIG. When this combination of symbols is displayed on the middle effective line, the "replay" symbols are lined up on the polygonal line connecting the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage of the right reel 3R.

D) RT3
This RT3 shifts from RT1 by displaying the combination of the second transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. If there is no winning of the bonus combination MB1 on the way, the game returns to RT0 when the result of the predetermined second number of games, for example, 50 times is obtained, that is, 50 games after the rush.

The combination of the second transition trigger symbols is, for example, "cherry 1 / cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the symbols of REP09 in FIG. When this combination of symbols is displayed on the middle effective line, the symbol related to the cherry is displayed on the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR" is displayed on the lower of the right reel 3R. A symbol including a bonus-compatible symbol of "/ blank" is displayed, and it is treated as a strong cherry in the image that a general player has, suggesting a hot situation where the game is expected to develop advantageously.

E) RT4
This RT4 shifts from RT1 by displaying the combination of the third transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the re-game is different from RT0 and RT1, but the re-game probability is set to a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. If there is no winning of the bonus combination MB1 on the way, the game returns to RT0 when the result of the predetermined third number of games, for example, 20 games is obtained, that is, 20 games after the rush.

The combination of the third transition trigger symbols is, for example, "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank", which is one of the combinations of symbols related to the operation of the replay. It is the same as the combination of the symbols of REP07 in FIG. When this combination of symbols is displayed on the middle effective line, "watermelon" symbols are lined up in a small V shape on the upper row of the left reel 3L, the middle row of the middle reel 3C, and the upper row of the right reel 3R, and are held by general players. It is treated as a strong watermelon in the image, and suggests a hot situation where the game is expected to develop in an advantageous manner.

F) RT5
This RT5 shifts after the operation of the bonus combination MB1 is completed, and the replay probability is set to a high probability (high lip) of, for example, about 1 / 1.35, and any push order bell combination (Nos. 77 to 98 in FIG. 17). At the time of winning the push order small role), the answer is incorrect in the push order, and when a bell spill (the transition to S_RT1 in FIG. 19) is displayed, the player falls to RT1. The RT5 of this modification is a highly accurate replay time for playing the assist replay time ART game.

G) Bonus state This bonus state starts with the display of the combination of the operating symbols of the bonus combination MB1, ends when the maximum number of medals earned is exceeded (the CB that is always activated also ends), and shifts to RT5 after the operation ends. ..

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT0 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 8978
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. There is no setting difference, but there may be a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT1 are as follows.
1) F_batting order 1, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP08 + 09) is 900
2) F_batting order 2, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP01 + 08 + 09) is 900
3) F_batting order 3, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP02 + 08 + 09) is 900
4) F_batting order 4, RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP01 + 02 + 08 + 09) is 900
5) F_Batting order 5 with RT3 and others RT2 rip (REP07-09) 900
6) In F_batting order 6, RT3 and others are RT2 rips (REP01 + 07-09) 900
7) F_Batting order 1, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 05 + 07) is 435.
8) F_batting order 2, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 03 + 05 + 07) is 435.
9) F_batting order 3, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 04 + 05 + 07) is 435.
10) F_batting order 4, RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 02 + 07) is 435.
11) F_Batting order 5 with RT4 and others maintained Lip (REP01-04 + 07) is 435
12) F_batting order 6 and RT4 and others are maintained. Lip (REP01 + 02 + 04 + 07) is 435.
13) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 968
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT1 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

For example, in 1), "F_batting order 1 and RT3 and others are RT2 rips" means that when the correct answer is pressed in the batting order 1, that is, in the order of left, middle, and right, the second transition is triggered. If you display "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Watermelon" (REP09), which is a combination of symbols, and shift to RT3, and perform a stop operation other than on the left, middle, or right, the first transition trigger symbol combination It means the role of displaying "red 7 / blue 7 / BAR / blank"-"replay"-"replay" (REP08) and shifting to RT2. The same applies to batting order 2 (middle left and right), batting order 3 (middle left and right), batting order 4 (middle right and left), batting order 5 (middle right and left), and batting order 6 (middle right and left).

In addition, for example, 7) "F_Batting order 1 and RT4 and others are maintained rips" means that when the correct answer is pushed in the batting order 1, that is, the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, the third transition is triggered. Display "Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Red 7 / Blue 7 / BAR / Blank" (REP07), which is a combination of symbols, and shift to RT4. It means a role of displaying "replay"-"replay" (REP01) to maintain RT1. The same applies to batting order 2 (middle left and right), batting order 3 (middle left and right), batting order 4 (middle right and left), batting order 5 (middle right and left), and batting order 6 (middle right and left).

The probability of transition from RT1 to RT2 is equal to the probability of multiplying the total probability of 1) to 6) above by the push order incorrect answer rate of 5/6, and 4500/65536≈1 / 14.6. The probability of transition from RT1 to RT3 is equal to the probability of multiplying the total probability of 1) to 6) above by the push order correct answer rate 1/6, and 900/65536≈1 / 72.8. The probability of transition from RT1 to RT4 is equal to the probability of multiplying the total probability of 7) to 13) by the push order correct answer rate 1/6, and 435/65536≈1 / 150.7.

In addition, since the transition to RT3 and the transition to RT4 can be performed when the correct answer is given in the batting order 1 to 6 with 6 choices, each stop button 17L, on the display device 11 on the sub side, Corresponding to the upper position of 17C and 17R, it is designed to perform a fanning effect such as "Choose!? ...?".

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT2 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 5000
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 978
3) F_middle lip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 1000
4) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 2000
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT2 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT3 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 5000
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 1000
3) F_middle rip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 2000
4) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 978
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT3 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying role of RT4 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 5000
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 2000
3) F_middle lip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 1000
4) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 978
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT4 is 8978, and the probability is about 1 / 7.3. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The lottery values by breakdown of the replaying combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_maintenance lip (REP02) is 20285
2) F_upper lip (REP01 + 04) is 2450
3) F_middle rip 1 (REP01 + 07 + 08) is 5000
4) F_middle rip 2 (REP01 + 05) is 4750
5) F_middle rip 3 (REP01 + 06) is 4750
6) F_lower lip (REP01 + 03 + 04) is 2450
7) F_shot lip (REP03) is 8970
As mentioned above, the total lottery value of the replaying combination of RT5 is 48655, and the probability is about 1 / 1.35. All are set to no setting difference, but all or part may be set to have a setting difference.

The breakdown and lottery values of the winning combinations for the small winning combinations of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, and RT5 are No. 1 of RT0 to 4 excluding RT5 in FIG. 61-No. It is the same as 98.

In this modification, from the normal section, which is a non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section, instead of the mode shown in FIG. 33, when the bonus combination MB1 is won, the operation of the start lever 16 is triggered separately from the random number for internal lottery. By lottery processing using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible numerical value 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) to be extracted into, the transition is made with a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256 = 1 (100%).

Further, in this modification, when the bonus combination MB1 is won, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state by the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function at the high accuracy replay time RT4 changes according to the type of the replay time obtained. I try to let you.

Specifically, when MB1 is won in RT0, RT1 to RT5, this winning shifts to an advantageous section when it is in a normal section, maintains an advantageous section when it is in an advantageous section, and operates CB during MB1 operation. In the first game of the game, the original lottery mode of replaying the game during CB operation, that is, the winning of MB1, is obtained by the lottery process using the 1-byte random number extracted independently from the random number for internal lottery. With reference to the RT state, according to the winning probability determined in advance for each RT state, before the occurrence of ART, the first hit of ART that enables ART games for a predetermined number of initial continuous games, for example, 40 games per set, is determined and during ART. Then, the addition of the number of continuous games of ART is determined for the predetermined number of additional games, for example, 40 games for one set.

More specifically, the first hit or addition of ART is determined according to the next winning probability according to the original RT state in which the winning of MB1 is obtained.
a] When the original RT state is RT0, the predetermined first low probability, for example, 13/256 ≈ 5%
b] When the original RT state is RT1, the first low probability, for example, 13/256 ≈ 5%
c] When the original RT state is RT2, a predetermined second low probability, for example, 51/256 ≈ 20%
d] When the original RT state is RT3, the predetermined first high probability, for example, 128/256 ≈ 50%
e] When the original RT state is RT4, a predetermined second high probability, for example, 256/256 ≈ 100%
f] When the original RT state is RT5, a predetermined third high probability, for example, 256/256 ≈ 100%

When the first hit or addition of ART is decided with the winning of the bonus role MB1, after the operation of MB1 is completed, the assist replay time ART which is the assist time AT in RT5 which is the highly accurate replay time is started or restarted and continues. Subtraction of the number of games begins. When the number of remaining continuous games becomes 0, the assist time AT is terminated, and the correct push order is not notified at the time of winning any push order bell role (push order small role of Nos. 77 to 98 in FIG. 17). , The answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, and when the bell spilled eye (S_RT1 transition item in FIG. 19) is displayed, the player falls to RT1. On condition that the number of continuous games remaining in ART is 0 and RT1 falls, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is restored.

In this modification, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state by ART, that is, the expectation of ART including the initial hit and addition of ART, changes according to the RT state in which the winning combination MB1 is won. It is possible to create a high-probability game mode that is advantageous to the player and a low-probability game mode that is disadvantageous to the player.

More specifically, in the order of RT0 = RT1 <RT2 <RT3 <RT4 = RT5, the performance of the operation of the instruction function is improved.
A] RT0 has the lowest expectation of ART, for example, in a game mode called "low accuracy A".
B] RT1 is in the game mode of "Low accuracy A", which has the lowest expectation of ART.
C] RT2 has a low expectation of ART, for example, in a game mode called "low probability B".
D] RT3 has high expectations for ART, for example, in a game mode called "high accuracy".
E] RT4 has the highest expectation of ART, for example, in the game mode of "ultra-high accuracy 1".
F] RT5 has the highest expectation of ART, for example, in a game mode called "ultra-high accuracy 2".
Each can be made to correspond. For this reason, the transition of the RT state also fulfills the transition function of the game mode, and the player is concerned about which RT state the player is in, and the game interest can be enhanced even before the occurrence of the advantageous state by ART.

The display device 11 on the sub side changes the background scene (stage), the background color, etc. according to the game mode in which the player is currently staying, and the game mode in which the player is staying with a predetermined reliability. We are doing a production that suggests.

At least one replay time, such as RT2, and another replay time, such as RT3 or RT4, that can stay before the occurrence of an advantageous state by ART, stays up to a finite number of 4 games, 50 games, or 20 games, which are predetermined for each. Since it is possible, the game mode of "low probability B" corresponding to one replay time RT2 can be maintained up to a finite number of 4 games defined for one replay time, and the other one replay time RT3 or The game mode corresponding to RT4 can be maintained up to a finite number of 50 games or 20 games specified for one other replay time, and each game is expected to win the bonus role MB1 during the maintainable period. You can expect ART depending on the mode.

In addition, the bonus combination MB1 can be transferred to an advantageous state of an advantageous section that is not a normal section if the winning is in the normal section before the occurrence of the advantageous state by ART, and the lottery of the replay game is made depending on the winning and operation of the bonus combination MB1. The lottery mode of the re-game in the RT state in which the winning bonus MB1 is won is inherited without changing the mode. Therefore, the common process of shifting to the advantageous section by winning the bonus combination MB1 and referring to the lottery mode of the replay in the RT state in which the winning of the bonus combination MB1 is obtained as the process related to the instruction function in the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately promote to an advantageous state by ART.

In this modification, the RT state of a finite number of transitions from RT1 is set to three types of RT2, RT3, and RT4, but instead of this, two types may be used, or four or more types may be used. Further, the number of continuous games of RT2 to RT4 can be changed as appropriate. Further, as the combination of the transition trigger symbols, those related to the replay game and those related to the small winning combination may be used.

In this modification, the transition from RT1 to RT2 to 4 is performed, but the transition from RT0 to RT2 to 4 may be performed. In this modification, the advantageous state control means is provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but it may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

Further, in this modification, the predetermined bonus combination MB1 is configured by the accessory continuous operation device related to the type 2 special accessory, but the combination related to the first-class special accessory or the first-class special accessory. It may be composed of a continuous object actuating device.

Further, in this modification, although the transition to the high-accuracy replay time RT5 is performed after the end of the bonus state, the transition to the high-accuracy replay time RT5 may be performed during the bonus state. For example, the bonus combination is composed of a bonus continuous operating device BB related to a shift type first-class special bonus that draws a first-class special bonus in a general game during operation of the bonus continuous operating device. Then, with the winning of the first-class special accessory RB during the general game during the BB operation, the RT5 is changed to the equivalent of the high-accuracy replay time, and finally, the shift to avoid the display of the combination of the RB operation symbols. The operation of the BB may be terminated by the removal, and the RT5 may be continued even after the bonus state.

In addition, in this modification, the transition to RT5, which performs ART, is made only after the end of the bonus state, but instead of this, or in combination with this, it is displayed when the correct answer is given from RT1 in a specific pressing order. It may be possible to shift from RT1 to RT5 based on a combination of specific promotion trigger symbols. From RT5, if it is decided to fall to RT1 by the display of the bell spill and return to RT0 after the end of the bonus state, if the winning or addition of ART is decided, it will be promoted from RT0 to RT1. It is promoted to RT5 by notifying the correct pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols. In this way, even if the player falls to RT1 due to a mistake in the push order during ART, there is an advantage that a route to return to RT5 can be secured without waiting for the winning of the bonus role.

[Machine with advantageous section mounting difference in RT transition] Modification example This modification also starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the symbol is based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the fluctuation display of. Further, the program of the main CPU 101 is provided with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state corresponding to an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing. Further, a setting changing means for changing the setting for setting the ball ejection rate, which is the ratio of the total number of acquired game media to the total number of input game media, in a plurality of high and low stages is provided (in FIG. 6, the setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

In the gaming state of this modification, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 111, the lottery mode of the re-game (breakdown of the re-game combination and / or the lottery value) is different, and the instruction function is activated. Expected value that increases the chances of a game that activates the instruction function by displaying a combination of a high expected replay time RTH with a relatively high expected value and a predetermined transition trigger symbol from this high expected replay time RTH. Includes a low expected replay time RTL with a relatively low.

The high-expected replay time RTH does not necessarily have to be a high-accuracy replay time with a high replay probability as long as the expected value that increases the chance of the game that activates the instruction function is relatively high. Since the high expected replay time RTH is set to the gaming state in which the ART game is performed, the high accuracy replay time RT2 is set so that the replay probability is, for example, 48655/65536≈1 / 1.35.

On the other hand, the low expectation replay time RTL is, for example, 8979/65536≈1 / 7.3 (lottery), which has almost no significant difference from the replay probability 8978/65536 of RT0 in which the lottery mode of the replay does not change. The low-probability replay time RT1 is set to the one whose value is larger by 1).

The combination of the predetermined transition trigger symbols from RTH (RT2) to RTL (RT1) is No. 17 in FIG. At the time of winning any of the push order small winning combinations corresponding to 77 to 98, the bell spills corresponding to the transition to S_RT1 in FIG. 19 which can be displayed when the push order is incorrect. It also shifts from RT0 to RTL (RT1) due to bell spillage.

In RT1, a predetermined promotion trigger for a replaying combination or the like that displays a combination of RT2 transition trigger symbols when the push order is correct may be selected so that the RTL (RT1) can be transferred to the RTH (RT2).

In RT0, RT1 and RT2, the transition from the normal section, which is a non-advantageous section in which the instruction function is not activated, to the advantageous section in which the instruction function can be activated is performed according to the embodiment excluding the portion related to the bonus combination in FIG. That is, by winning the weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A” and “F_weak rare role B” in FIG. 17), the game shifts to the normal advantageous section of high accuracy 1 state for at least 9 games from the next game. By winning a single chance (“F_Chance A1” to “F_Chance A4” and “F_Chance B1” to “F_Chance B4” in FIG. 17), high accuracy for at least 9 games from the next game. Shift to the normal advantageous section of 2 states.

Further, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1” in FIG. 17), for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, a precursor period lottery in which the precursor period is selected from 9 to 16 games is selected. After that, it is decided to make it an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantageous section called the present precursor state, and at the time of non-winning, it shifts to the normal advantageous section of the high probability 3 state through the lottery during the precursor period.

In short, the advantage of a normal advantageous section included in an advantageous section other than the normal section, based on the winning of a predetermined role that the lottery value does not fluctuate in RT0, RT1, RT2, such as a weak rare role, a single chance eye, and watermelon 1. Move to the section. Further, after the transition of the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section by ART can be determined from the normal advantageous section by winning the watermelon 1 or the like according to the embodiment excluding the portion related to the bonus combination in FIG. 34.

The ART of this modification can be continued at least for a predetermined initial number of games, for example, 40 games for one set, and the subtraction of the number of continuous games is started after the transition of the high accuracy replay time RT2 (RTH). During the ART game, when the push order small winning combination of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" in FIG. 17 is won, the corresponding correct push order is set to "1" on the display device 11 on the sub side.・ A bell navigation system that notifies you of "× ・ ×" or "3.2.1" is issued, making it possible to easily obtain eight medals.

The high expected replay time RTH (RT2) is a predetermined specific role that is not drawn in the low expected replay time RTL (RT1), for example, "F_chance rip 1" by REP04 and "F_chance rip 2" by REP06 in FIG. , A lottery value larger than 0 of the low expected replay time RTL (RT1), for example, 500 for each lottery. The winning probability of the sum of the specific combinations is 1000/65536≈1 / 6.6. In addition, RTL (RT1) may also draw a specific combination with a small lottery value.

When any of the specific roles "F_Chance Lip 1" and "F_Chance Lip 2" to be drawn by RTH (RT2) is won, the random numbers for internal lottery are extracted separately from the random numbers for internal lottery, for example, 1 By two-step lottery processing using byte random numbers (possible numerical values 0 to 255, random number denominator 256), with a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256 = 100%, for a predetermined initial number of games, for example, 40 games for one set. Determine the initial hit of the ART that can be continued, the stock of the number of sets of ART, etc., and increase the chances of the game to activate the instruction function. Therefore, the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) has a relatively higher expected value of increasing the chance of the game to activate the instruction function than the low expected replay time RTL (RT1).

The high-expected replay time RTH is a low-probability replay time with a low replay probability, a replay time between high-probability and low-probability, etc. Based on the winning, the high-probability replay time defined separately may be shifted to, for example, RT3, and the ART game may be performed at RT3.

In addition, the high expected replay time RTH is a finite replay time that shifts to RT0 when the result of a finite number of games, for example, up to 32 times, is obtained, and the first hit or the number of sets of ART determined based on the winning of a specific combination or the like. High-accuracy replay defined separately based on the winning of a specific promotion trigger that hides stock etc., shifts from RT0 after transition to RTL (RT1) by displaying bell spills, and draws with this RTL. The time may be shifted to, for example, RT4, and the ART game may be performed at RT4.

In this modification, instead of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in FIG. 20, a specific transition trigger determined by the end of the operation, for example, the end of the operation is set as the specific transition trigger from the winning combination through the display of the combination of the operation symbols. Based on the transition opportunity, a predetermined bonus combination that enables the transition to the highly expected replay time RTH (RT2) will be drawn.

The predetermined bonus combination is, for example, composed of the object continuous operation device MBa related to the type 2 special accessory, and is won independently without duplication with the replay combination or the small combination, and the winning probability is high. Has a setting difference that is higher than the lower one. Specifically, a predetermined probability within the range of one tenth to one hundredth, for example,
Setting 1 is 328/65536≈1/200,
Setting 2 is 336/65536≈1/195,
Setting 3 is 345/65536≈1/190,
Setting 4 is 354/65536≈1/185,
Setting 5 is 364/65536≈1/180,
Setting 6 is 374/65536≈1/175,
Then, win the bonus role MBa.

The combination of the operation symbols of the predetermined bonus combination MBa ("left symbol"-"middle symbol"-"right symbol") is, for example, "replay"-"bell"-"bell", and the display probability is 1 (maximum 4). The symbol can always be drawn into the effective line by slipping frames). Therefore, when the MBa is won, the combination of the operation symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and the next game is the operation of the MBa. During the operation of the MBa, the Type 2 special accessory CB is always activated, and during the operation of the CB, all the small roles accompanied by the payout of medals are put into the winning state.

While the CB is operating while the predetermined bonus combination MBa is operating, the specified number of input sheets is changed to 1 (1 sheet), the number of payouts for all small combinations is changed to 15, and the maximum number of sliding frames is 1. The reel to be stopped within 75 ms, which is limited to, is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain a maximum of four-frame slip, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left reel 3L is stopped first, the small winning combination of any of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game, are paid out.

The specified number of inserted cards may be maintained at 3 (3 cards), and the number of payouts may be the same as during the general game before the MBa is activated. In this case, in order to display the small winning combination of 8 cards on 2 of the 3 lines of the upper, middle, and lower rows and obtain the maximum number of 15 cards to be paid out, it is necessary to additionally define a dedicated small winning combination during CB operation. preferable.

The operation of the predetermined bonus combination MBa is assumed to end when the number of medals acquired from the start of the operation exceeds, for example, 210, that is, 211 or more, and the operation of the CB also ends when the operation of the MBa ends. Therefore, the operation of MBa can be completed in almost 15 games, and 225-15 = 210 medals can be net increased.

When the bonus combination MBa is won during the normal section of RT0, RT1, RT2, it is set by a two-step lottery using the 1-byte random number that is extracted by the operation of the start lever 16 independently of the internal lottery random number. The first probability common to all settings, for example 16/256 = 1/16, which does not depend on the value of, shifts to an advantageous section that enables one set of ART after the MBa operation ends, and the second probability common to all settings, for example 128. After the operation of MBa was completed at / 256 = 1/2, No. 17 in FIG. The correct push order (bell navigation) of the push order of 77 to 98 is shifted to an advantageous section that functions as a chance zone for issuing a predetermined number of times, for example, 5 times. If there is a probability of 112/256 that the lottery is out of the two-stage lottery, the normal section is maintained.

At the time of winning the MBa in the normal section, if the lottery is out of the two-stage lottery, the normal section is maintained, but while the CB is operating while the MBa is operating, all the small wins are in the winning state, but RT0, RT1 when the MBa is not operating. , It is possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the specific small winning combination in which the winning is specified as a result of the same internal lottery as during each general game of RT2.

That is, for example, according to the processing performed in the normal section of FIG. 33, if it is equivalent to the winning of F_watermelon 1 of FIG. 17, which is one of the specific small winning combinations, the two-step lottery processing using the 1-byte random number is performed. If the winning of ART is determined with a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256 = 1/32, and it is equivalent to the winning of F_weak rare combination A or F_weak rare combination B in FIG. 17, which is one of the specific small combinations, the MBa After the operation is completed, the No. 17 in FIG. 17 is shown. Correct answer of the push order of 77 to 98. The shift to the normal advantageous section of 9 game guarantee high accuracy 1 state of navigating the push order for a predetermined number of times, for example, once is decided, and it is regarded as one of the specific small wins. If it is equivalent to the winning of F_chance A1 to F_chance B4, it is said that the correct answer of the push order small role is navigated for a predetermined number of times, for example, once after the MBa operation is completed. Decide to move to a normal advantageous section.

On the other hand, if the winning of ART is determined with the first probability at the time of winning of MBa, it is regarded as an advantageous section during CB operation during MBa operation, and the winning is specified as a result of the same internal lottery as during general games. Based on the winning of the winning combination, it is possible to determine the addition of the ART set number stock and the initial game number by common processing that does not refer to the setting value, and even if it is not applicable to the winning of the specific small winning combination, the setting It is possible to determine the addition of the initial number of games by common processing that does not refer to the value.

For example, in the case of being equivalent to the winning of F_watermelon 1 in FIG. 17, one set stock of ART is determined with a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256 = 1/32 by a two-step lottery process using the 1-byte random number. If it is equivalent to the winning of the F_weak rare combination A or the F_weak rare combination B in FIG. 17, it is decided to add the initial number of games to a predetermined value, for example, 10 games, and the F_chance eyes A1 to F_chance in FIG. If it is equivalent to the winning of the B4, it is decided to add the initial number of games to a predetermined value, for example, 20 games, and if it is not applicable to the winning of the specific small winning combination, two steps using the 1-byte random number. By the lottery process, it is determined that the initial number of games is added to a predetermined value, for example, 5 games with a predetermined probability, for example, 1/256, which is common to all settings.

Then, at the end of the MBa operation, it is deployed on the display device 11 on the sub side. "Set" and "ART 40 games + 20 games added" are clearly stated.

In addition, if the transition of the chance zone is determined with a second probability at the time of winning the MBa, it will be an advantageous section during the CB operation during the MBa operation, and the winning will be specified as a result of the same internal lottery as during the general game. It is possible to rewrite the chance zone to the winning of ART based on the winning of the small role, and to add the number of continuous games (number of bell navigations) of the chance zone, and it may not be applicable to the winning of the specific small role. , By common processing that does not refer to the set value, it is possible to determine the addition of the number of continuous games (number of bell navigations) in the chance zone.

For example, when it is equivalent to the winning of F_watermelon 1 in FIG. 17, it is rewritten to the winning of ART with a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256 = 1/32 by the two-step lottery process using the 1-byte random number, and is shown in FIG. If it is equivalent to the winning of F_weak rare role A or F_weak rare role B, it is decided to add the number of bell navigations in the chance zone for a predetermined value, for example, 2 times, and the F_chance eyes A1 to F_chance in FIG. If it is equivalent to the winning of the B4, it is decided to add the number of bell navigations in the chance zone for a predetermined value, for example, 3 times, and if it is not applicable to the winning of the specific small winning combination, the above 1-byte random number is used. By the two-step lottery process, it is determined that the number of bell navigations in the chance zone is added for a predetermined value, for example, once, with a predetermined probability common to all settings, for example, 1/256.

Then, at the end of the MBa operation, when the battle effect of confronting the enemy and the ally, which is deployed on the display device 11 on the sub side, is completed by a draw or continuation, and the entry into the chance zone is notified, the "chance zone; "Bernavi 5 times + 4 times" etc. are clearly stated. If there is a rewrite of the ART to the winning, the winning of the ART will be decided based on the winning of the specific roles "F_Chance Lip 1", "F_Chance Lip 2", etc. in the chance zone. At the end of the chance zone, the continuous battle will be completed with the victory of the ally, and the winning of ART will be announced.

The ART game and the chance zone game will be performed at the high expected replay time RTH (RT2), which shifts after the MBa operation is completed. Until the bell spill is displayed due to the end of the bell navigation, in order to stay in the highly expected replay time RTH (RT2), the winning of ART is based on the winning of the specific roles "F_Chance Lip 1" and "F_Chance Lip 2". May be determined. If the winning of ART is determined within a predetermined number of games, for example, within 32 games after the end of the ART game or the chance zone game, the display device 11 on the sub side is notified that "ART pullback is successful" or the like. When the winning of ART is determined after 32 games, the display device 11 on the sub side is notified as "ART winning" or the like.

If the bonus combination MBa is won when RT0, RT1 and RT2 are shifted to an advantageous section equal to or higher than the normal advantageous section, the first probability common to all settings, for example, 16 is obtained by the two-step lottery process using the 1-byte random number. At / 256 = 1/16, it was decided to add one set of ART after the MBa operation was completed, and the second probability common to all settings, for example, 128/256 = 1/2, was set to No. 17 in FIG. 17 after the MBa operation was completed. It is decided to add a chance zone for navigating the correct answer push order of the push order of 77 to 98 for a predetermined number of times, for example, 5 times. If the ART has already been decided before the MBa win, the two sets of ART and the chance zone after the ART will be decided. Even if the advantage section lottery is missed with a probability of 112/256, the advantage section is maintained.

When the MBa in the advantageous section is won, even if it is out of the two-stage lottery, the advantageous section is maintained, and if the ART is not decided before the MBa is won, the winning is the result of the same internal lottery as during the general game. Based on the winning of the specified small winning combination, for example, when it is equivalent to the winning of F_watermelon 1 in FIG. 17, a predetermined probability common to all settings is obtained by the two-step lottery process using the 1-byte random number, for example. When the ART is determined by 8/256 = 1/32 and it is equivalent to the winning of F_weak rare role A or F_weak rare role B in FIG. 17, No. 17 in FIG. If it is decided that the correct answer of the small winning combination of 77 to 98 is the chance zone for navigating for a predetermined number of times, for example, twice, and it is equivalent to the winning of F_chance A1 to F_chance B4 in FIG. , Correct answer of the small winning combination If it is decided that the pressing order is a chance zone for navigating for a predetermined number of times, for example, 3 times, and the winning of the specific small winning combination is not applicable, the two steps using the 1-byte random number are used. By the lottery process, it is determined that the correct answer push order of the push order small winning combination is set as a chance zone for navigating for a predetermined number of times, for example, once with a predetermined probability common to all settings, for example, 1/256.

On the other hand, if RT0, RT1 and RT2 are shifting to an advantageous section that is more than the normal advantageous section, the bonus combination MBa is won, and if it is decided to add one set of ART with the first probability, or two stages. If the ART was decided before the MBa was won even if the lottery was missed, the same internal lottery as during the general game was performed, as in the case where the MBa was won and the first probability was hit during the normal section. As a result, it is possible to determine the number of ART set stocks and the number of initial games to be added based on the winning of the specific small winning combination, and even if it is not applicable to the winning of the specific small winning combination, the setting value. It is possible to determine the addition of the initial number of games by common processing that does not refer to.

In addition, if RT0, RT1 and RT2 have shifted to an advantageous section higher than the normal advantageous section, and the bonus combination MBa is won and the decision to add the chance zone is decided with the second probability, during the normal section. Rewriting from the chance zone to the winning of ART based on the winning of the specific small role for which the winning is specified as a result of the same internal lottery as during the general game, as in the case of winning the MBa and hitting with the second probability. In addition, it is possible to determine the number of continuous games in the chance zone (number of bell navigations), and even if it does not correspond to the winning of a specific small role, the number of continuous games in the chance zone by common processing that does not refer to the set value. It is possible to determine the addition of (number of bell navigations).

In addition, the common processing that does not refer to the set value during the CB operation while the MBa is operating replaces the two-step lottery with the winning probability common to all settings, and the winning of the replaying role with the winning probability common to all settings. It may be performed by other common processing such as distributing the number of additional games based on.

As described above, in this modification, the high-expected replay time RTH (RT2) and the high-expected replay time, in which the expected value for increasing the chance of the game for activating the instruction function is relatively high in a state where the lottery mode of the re-game is different, and this high-expected replay time. Includes a low expected replay time RTL (RT1) with a relatively low expected value that increases the chances of a game that activates the instruction function by making it possible to shift from the bell spilled eye display, and the operation ends from the winning role as an internal winning role. Including a predetermined bonus combination MBa that enables transition to the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) based on the specific transition opportunity specified above, the winning probability of this bonus combination MBa is higher for those with a high setting than for those with a low setting. ing.

Therefore, the high setting with a high winning probability of the bonus role MBa has a higher frequency of transition to the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) based on the specific transition opportunity, and the instruction function is activated. Expected value to increase the chance of the game to make is high. Therefore, the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus combination MBa can be exceeded, the range of advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference can be increased, and the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference can be sharpened.

In addition, as a common process that does not refer to the set value between the winning of the bonus combination MBa and the end of operation, a two-step lottery process that follows the winning probability common to all settings when the specific small combination is won or not won is used. Since it is possible to increase the chances of the game to activate the instruction function, the higher the setting that makes it easier to win the bonus role MBa, the more chances of the game to activate the instruction function from the winning to the end of the operation. The range of advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference can be further increased, and the superiority and inferiority of the game due to the setting difference can be further sharpened.

Further, the bonus combination MBa is composed of a bonus continuous operation device related to the second-class special bonus, and while the second-class special bonus CB is operating, all the small roles related to the acquisition of the game medium are in the winning state. However, the specific small roles "F_watermelon 1", "F_weak rare role A", and "F_weak rare role" for which the winning is specified as a result of the same internal lottery as in the non-operating game of the second type special role. Since it is possible to increase the chances of the game in which the instruction function is activated based on the winnings of "B", "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4", the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

By the way, in the gaming machine of this modification, the process related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and / or the instruction function in the advantageous section is a common process that does not refer to the set value (for example, the winning common to all the settings). It is a 7U type that is called by those who are involved in the game by performing a two-step lottery process based on probability), and in the role ratio monitor (see paragraph 0110) using a 4-digit 7-segment LED etc. installed inside the game machine, the upper two digits are "7U" is displayed, and in the lower two digits, the advantageous section ratio (also referred to as the advantageous section stay ratio) that changes from moment to moment is, for example, "69" with the total number of games as the denominator and the total number of games in the advantageous section as the numerator. Etc., and it is possible to clarify that the advantageous section ratio is less than a predetermined value, for example, less than 70%.

Instead of this, the process related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and / or the instruction function in the advantageous section, such as setting a difference in the winning probability of the two-stage lottery, is performed by the process referring to the set value. It may be a 7P type referred to by those skilled in the art. In this case, "7P" is displayed in the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor, and the total number of medals won in the lower two digits is the denominator, the total number of medals won by navigation such as Bell Navi, and the bonus role MBa. The ratio of the instructed medal that changes from moment to moment is displayed as, for example, "69", and the ratio of the instructed medal is less than the specified value, for example, less than 70%. It suffices to make it possible to clarify what will happen.

The 7U type gaming machine does not need to display the instruction-included accessory ratio required for the 7P-type gaming machine, nor does it need to satisfy the instruction-included accessory ratio of less than 70%. On the other hand, the 7P type gaming machine does not need to display the advantageous section ratio required for the 7U type gaming machine, nor does it need to satisfy the advantageous section ratio of less than 70%.

Further, in both the 7U type gaming machine and the 7P type gaming machine, the trigger for shifting to the advantageous section may be no setting difference common to all settings, or may have a setting difference in which the lottery value changes depending on the setting value. .. It is permissible for any type of 7P or 7U gaming machine to have a setting difference as a trigger for the transition to the advantageous section and to cause a setting difference as a result of the transition rate to the advantageous section.

In general, in a gaming machine that uses both bonus and ART, the advantage required for a 7U type gaming machine is better than clearing the condition that the designated accessory ratio required for a 7P type gaming machine is less than a predetermined value (less than 70%). It may be easier to clear the condition that the section ratio is less than a predetermined value (less than 70%), which increases the flexibility in the design of the gaming machine.

This modification is a 7U type gaming machine that does not refer to the set value at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and at the time of processing related to the instruction function in the advantageous section, that is, the gaming machine. Although the design flexibility is high, it is possible to exceed the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus combination MBa and effectively expand the range of advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference.

[Additional lottery in shift type bonus during advantageous section] Modification example In this modification as well, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols and a rotating reel 3L, 3C, 3R are individually separated. It has a plurality of stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R to be stopped.

In this modification, instead of all or part of BB1 to BB4 in FIG. 20, a combination of predetermined operating symbols, for example, "Red 7"-"BAR"-"Red 7", is used for the winning combination determined by the internal lottery. Includes the first bonus combination BB composed of the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory that is operated by the display. Further, the winning combination determined by the internal lottery during the operation of the first bonus combination BB is composed of three types of RB1, RB2, RB3 composed of a first-class special accessory that is operated by displaying a combination of predetermined operating symbols. Including the second bonus role.

The first bonus role BB is a kind of shift type big bonus role, and is the second in a general game during BB operation (a game in which the type and lottery value of the internal winning combination for a small role are the same as the bonus non-winning state). The winning combination of any of the bonus combinations RB1, RB2, and RB3 is enabled, and the combination of the operating symbols of the second bonus combination related to the winning is displayed, so that the second bonus combination related to the winning combination can be activated.

During the general game during the BB operation, the specified number of input 3 (3 sheets) is maintained, and the effective lines are also maintained at the upper, middle, and lower 3 lines. At the time of winning the small winning combination of 77 to 98, the correct answer push order is not navigated, and either 8 cards are paid out, 1 card is paid out, or 0 is paid out. However, even if the bell spilled eye is displayed, it does not shift to RT1 because the BB is operating.

During the second bonus role, for example
The combination of the operation symbols of RB1 is "Red 7"-"Bell"-"Bell".
The combination of the operation symbols of RB2 is "Blue 7"-"Bell"-"Bell".
The combination of the operation symbols of RB3 is "BAR"-"bell"-"bell".
For the left reel 3L, it is a 3-choice game in which either "Red 7", "Blue 7", or "BAR" is selected and aimed.

As for the winning probability of the first bonus combination BB, the one with a high setting has a setting difference higher than the one with a low setting. Specifically, a predetermined probability within the range of one tenth to one hundredth, for example,
Setting 1 is 328/65536≈1/200,
Setting 2 is 336/65536≈1/195,
Setting 3 is 345/65536≈1/190,
Setting 4 is 354/65536≈1/185,
Setting 5 is 364/65536≈1/180,
Setting 6 is 374/65536≈1/175, and the first bonus combination BB is won. Instead of this, the first bonus combination BB may have no setting difference to win with the same probability of about 1/200 regardless of the setting.

Each lottery value of the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 in the general game during the operation of the first bonus combination BB is the remaining total range obtained by subtracting the lottery value of the small role and the re-game combination from the random number denominator 65536 for the internal lottery. Is evenly or almost evenly divided into three parts. In the general game during the BB operation, the lottery value of the re-game combination is, for example, 8978 (probability ≈ 1 / 7.3), and the lottery value of the outlier is 0.

In the general game during BB operation, if the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination is not won, one of RB1 to RB3 is won, and in this winning game, one type of operation symbol combination of RB1 to RB3 related to the winning is used. Can be displayed. However, even if any of RB1 to RB3 is won, the display device 11 on the sub side will display "left; red 7? Blue 7? BAR?", Etc., and the left reel 3L will have "red 7" or "blue 7". "" Or "BAR" is notified to the player, but which one should be aimed is not notified, and whether the combination of operating symbols can be displayed can accurately aim at the desired symbol. Even advanced players who are good at pushing will have a one-third chance.

As described above, in the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3, the operation mode of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, specifically, the operation mode of the left stop button 17L aims at "Red 7". Whether to aim at "Blue 7" or "BAR", it is possible to display when it matches a part of the three types of candidates. For the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R, the "bell" symbol can always be pulled in.

If the combination of one type of operation symbol related to the winning cannot be displayed in the winning game of the second bonus role, one type of winning flag related to the winning will be carried over to the internal winning state called between the JAC flags from the next game onward. , The lottery values for the three areas of RB1 to RB3 are equivalent to the outliers, and if the small winning combination or the replaying combination is not won, only one type of operation symbol combination of RB1 to RB3 related to the carried-over winning can be displayed. ..

The operation of the first bonus combination BB ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of acquired medals exceeds a predetermined upper limit number, for example, 300 medals. Also, while the second bonus combination RB1, RB2, RB3 is in operation, the specified number of cards to be input is changed to 2 (2 sheets), the effective line is changed to only 1 line in the middle row, and the number of cards to be paid out for all small combinations is changed. It has been changed to 9 cards, and all the small winning combinations are in the small winning combination all state in the entire range of random numbers for internal lottery. Therefore, 9 medals are paid out in each game, 72 medals are paid out by winning 8 times, and then one operation of the second bonus role is terminated. Therefore, by the end of the operation of the first bonus combination BB, the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 can be operated a plurality of times (2 to 4 times).

In this modification, the transition from the normal section, which is a non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section is a transition mode triggered by the weak rare role shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the chance eye, and the winning of the watermelon 1. (Excluding the part triggered by the winning of the bonus role).

At the same time, when the first bonus combination BB is won during the normal section, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible numerical value 0 to 255, random number denominator) is extracted by operating the start lever 16 independently of the random number for internal lottery. By a two-step lottery using 256), the player shifts to an advantageous section with a predetermined probability, for example, 128/256 = 1 (50%), and after the operation of the first bonus combination BB is completed, the highly accurate replay time RT2 (RT4, RT1 in FIG. 13) , RT state that shifts through RT0) enables assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function for a predetermined initial number of games, for example, 40 games for one set. Further, when the first bonus combination BB is won during the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, one set of ART is added with a predetermined probability, for example, 128/256 = 1 (50%) by the same two-stage lottery.

In addition, when the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 is activated during the advantageous section that enables ART including the case where the winning of the first bonus combination BB is determined, each game, two stages using the above-mentioned 1-byte random number. By lottery, with a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256 = 100%, the number of continuous games of ART is added to a predetermined value, for example, 5 games for each game, and an instruction function for notifying information on a player's stop operation is activated. Increase the chances of playing. The number of additional games may be changed within a predetermined range, for example, 0 to 30 games at the time of two-stage lottery.

In this way, the larger the number of games in which the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 is operating by the end of the operation of the first bonus combination BB, the more the number of additional games can be increased, and the number of continuous games of ART becomes longer. As a result, there are more opportunities for the game to activate the instruction function for notifying the player's stop operation during ART, and one of the push order small combinations (“F_upper left bell 1” to “F_lower” in FIG. 17). The number of games that issue the correct answer push order navigation (bell navigation) at the time of winning the right middle bell 2 ") increases. Therefore, by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 in a small number of games while the first bonus combination BB is operating, the more games the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 are operating, the more. , It is advantageous for the player.

While the second bonus roles RB1 to RB3 are operating, instead of adding a fixed number of games to each game, the flag of the second bonus role from the winning of the second bonus roles RB1 to RB3 until the combination of the operating symbols can be displayed. When the number of interim games is small, the expected value of increasing the chances of a game in which the instruction function is activated may be higher than when the number of games is large, even if the number of games in which the second bonus combination is operating is the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, the smaller the number of games between the second bonus combination JAC flags, the larger the average number of games to be added at the time of two-stage lottery in each game during operation of RB1 to RB3. The number of additional games will be determined by referring to the lottery table.

For example, in a game in which the number of games between JAC flags is 0, that is, in a winning game in which any one of the second bonuses RB1 to RB3 is won, the symbol to be aimed at the left reel 3L matches the player's prediction, and the winning is related to the winning. If the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus can be displayed, the addition is performed with reference to the most advantageous table A. In Table A, a two-step lottery is used to add 0 with a probability of 64/256 = 1/4, add 20 games with a probability of 128/256 = 1/2, and have a probability of 64/256 = 1/4. Add 40 games. The average number of additional games is 20.

Further, in the winning game in which the number of games between JAC flags is one, that is, the winning game in which one of the second bonuses RB1 to RB3 is won, the player's prediction does not match, or the maximum number of frames is slipped. Even if the predicted symbol could not be pulled in, in the first game of the JAC flag inter-game, the small role or the replay role was not won, and the "left; red 7?" On the display device 11? If the player's prediction matches this time and the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus related to the winning can be displayed with reference to the notification of "Blue 7? BAR?", Add it by referring to the next advantageous table B. I do. In Table B, by two-step lottery, the probability of adding 0 is 64/256 = 1/4, the probability of adding 10 games is 128/256 = 1/2, and the probability of 64/256 = 1/4. Add 20 games. The average number of additional games is 10.

Further, when the number of games between JAC flags is two or more, that is, in the second and subsequent games of the games between JAC flags, the small winning combination or the replaying combination is not won, and the "left; red 7? Blue 7" on the display device 11 If the player's prediction matches and the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus related to the winning can be displayed with reference to the notification of "? BAR?", The addition is performed with reference to the most disadvantageous table C. In Table C, by two-step lottery, the probability of adding 0 is 64/256 = 1/4, the probability of adding 5 games is 128/256 = 1/2, and the probability of 64/256 = 1/4. Add 10 games. The average number of additional games is 5 games.

Therefore, for example, if the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 are activated three times while the first bonus combination BB is operating, and the number of games in which the second bonus combination is operating is 24 times, each second bonus combination related to the prize is awarded. As the number of games between flags of RB1 to RB3 is smaller, the number of additional games can be expected to increase. Therefore, the more the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus combination can be displayed at an early stage, the more advantageous it is to the player, so that the player's sense of accomplishment can be effectively brought out.

Tables A, B, and C can be selected according to the number of games between the JAC flags of the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 related to the winning each time the second bonus combination is won, which is advantageous for the first time and the second and subsequent times. It is possible to refer to the table A, and even if the disadvantageous table C is referred to the first time, the table A can be referred to from the second time onward. However, it is possible to refer to the disadvantageous table C from the first time to the second time onward, or to refer to the disadvantageous table C from the second time onward even if the table A which is advantageous at the first time is referred to. Not limited to this, the same table as the one referred to the first time may be referred to from the second time onward.

Further, in this modification, the smaller the number of medals obtained in the game during the general game in which the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 are drawn during the operation of the first bonus combination BB, the more the operation of the first bonus combination BB is completed. , The number of games in operation of the second bonus combination RB1 to RB3 increases. In other words, when the push order small winning combination is won, it is originally expected to pay out 8 cards, but by intentionally stopping the payout of 1 card or 0 card, the 2nd bonus role RB1 is reached by the end of the operation of the 1st bonus role BB. -The number of games that activate RB3 can be increased.

As a result, during the general game during the operation of the first bonus role BB that draws the second bonus RB1 to RB3, the player himself dared to stop the acquisition of a small number of medals, and the player himself operates the second bonus role RB1 to RB3. It is possible to give the impression that the number of games in the game has been increased, and the player's sense of accomplishment can be increased. In this case, since the bell navigation does not appear, the answer is incorrect in the push order, but the player can be illusioned that the wrong answer in the push order has been won. It should be noted that the expected value of medals during the general game during the BB operation may be lowered by positively changing the stop control during the general game during the BB operation.

In the above modification, the first bonus combination is composed of a shift type big bonus BB (a continuous operation device for a special bonus of the first class), but a shift type two big bonus MB (second). It may be composed of a bonus continuous actuating device related to a species special bonus).

In this case, the combination of the operation symbols of the first bonus combination MB is, for example, "blue 7"-"BAR"-"blue 7", and the second bonus combination to be drawn in the general game while the MB is operating has three types. Type 2 special characters CB1, CB2, CB3, for example,
The combination of the operation symbols of CB1 is "Red 7"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon".
The combination of the operation symbols of CB2 is "Blue 7"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon".
The combination of the operation symbols of CB3 is "BAR"-"watermelon"-"watermelon".

The winning probability of the first bonus winning combination MB, the winning probability of the second bonus winning combination CB1 to CB3, and the operation termination condition of the first bonus winning combination MB are the same as those of the above BB and RB1 to RB3.

In addition, the transition from the normal section, which is a non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section is a transition mode (bonus role) triggered by the weak rare role shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the chance eye, and the winning of the watermelon 1. When the first bonus combination MB is won during the normal section, it is transferred to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability by a two-step lottery, and the first bonus combination MB After the operation is completed, ART is enabled for the predetermined number of initial games with the high accuracy replay time RT2, and when the first bonus combination MB is won during the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, one set of ART is added with a predetermined probability by a two-step lottery. Doing is the same as when using a kind of big bonus.

However, if you win CB1 to CB3 during a general game while MB is operating, if you succeed in 3 choices by relying on "Left; Red 7? Blue 7? BAR?" Displayed on the display device 11 on the sub side in the winning game. The combination of the corresponding operation symbols can be displayed, but if 3 selections fail, the combination of the corresponding operation symbols cannot be displayed, and the winning flags of CB1 to CB3 related to the winning are cleared (they are not carried over to the next game). .. Therefore, unlike the case of RB1 to RB3, there is no state between the JAC flags. Further, the operation of CB1 to CB3 ends only in the next one game in which the combination of the operation symbols is displayed, and returns to the general game during the MB operation.

While CB1 to CB3 are in operation, change the specified number of input sheets to 1 sheet (1 sheet), change the number of payouts of all small winning reels to 15, and stop within 75 ms, which limits the maximum number of slip frames to 1 frame. The reel to be made is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain a maximum of four-frame slip, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left reel 3L is stopped first, the small winning combination of any of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game, are paid out.

In one game in which the second bonus combination CB1 to CB3 is operated during the advantageous section that enables ART including the case where the winning of the first bonus combination MB is determined, the two-step lottery using the 1-byte random number is performed. , With a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256 = 100%, the number of continuous games of ART is added to each game for a predetermined value, for example, 5 games, and an instruction function for notifying information regarding a player's stop operation is activated. Increase opportunities. The number of additional games may be changed within a predetermined range, for example, 0 to 30 games at the time of two-stage lottery.

Even when using a shift type two-type big bonus that uses MB for the first bonus role and CB1 to CB3 for the second bonus role, the larger the number of games in which CB1 to CB3 are operating during MB operation, the more the instruction function is used. It can increase the chances of the game to be activated, and has the same effect except for the part about the game between JAC flags when a kind of big bonus is used.

In this modification, the left reel 3L is a 3-choice game that aims at either "Red 7", "Blue 7", or "BAR", but the 3 choices that aim at the design of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. It may be a game or the like. Further, instead of the 3-choice game, a 2-choice game may be used, or a 4-choice or more, for example, a 6-choice game may be used. Further, instead of the symbol selection game aiming at a specific symbol, a push order selection game may be used.

In this modification, "Left; Red 7? Blue 7? BAR?" Is displayed on the display device 11 on the sub side so as not to notify which symbol should be specifically aimed at, but the first bonus role BB. Or, when the number of medals won during the MB operation is more than the predetermined value, or conversely, when the number is less than the predetermined value, etc. Based on the winning role, a section is set up to execute navigation such as "Left; Aim for Red 7", "Left; Aim for Blue 7", "Left; Aim for BAR", and specialize in addition. It may function as a zone.

<Supplementary note (summary of the present invention)>
[Game machines with the first to fourth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, if it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and if it is in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is determined. It is known that it is possible to perform a lottery as to whether or not to continue (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

However, in the gaming machines shown above, there are few variations in determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and it is required to devise ways to further enhance the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player regarding the continuation of an advantageous state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a check / medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of an advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, a determination line determining means (for example, a main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is used as a determination line regarding a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a check / medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of an advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) can determine whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of an advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, a determination line determining means (for example, a main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is used as a determination line regarding a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the specific right granted.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a check / medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of an advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) can determine whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the specific right granted.

The specific state is a state in which the specific right can be granted in a number exceeding the upper limit number (for example, 2) that can be determined as the determination line by the determination line determining means.
When the specific right of the upper limit number or more that can be determined as the determination line is granted, the determination line determining means determines the determination line for the upper limit number by using the specific right for the upper limit number.
The continuation degree determination means is the continuation degree determination means if the specific right does not remain when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means in the advantageous state. The above-mentioned gaming machine, characterized in that it is possible to change the degree of continuation to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and not to change the degree of continuation to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player if the specific right remains. ..

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
A stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of an advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, a determination line determining means (for example, a main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is used as a determination line regarding a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent rights acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means is
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, any one of the plurality of valid lines is always determined as the determination line among the plurality of valid lines.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to do so.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a check / medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of an advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) can determine whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent rights acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means is
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, any one of the plurality of the special lines is always determined as the determination line among the plurality of the special lines.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or more of the special lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to do so.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined advantageous condition, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and the combination of special symbols in the advantageous state (for example, the combination of symbols in the advantageous state (for example, RT2 state). For example, when the RT3 transition (RT3 transition) is displayed, the gaming state transition control means (for example, RT check by the main CPU 101) capable of shifting the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, the RT3 state) is displayed. Processing), and equipped with,
The means for determining the continuation of an advantageous state is
When a specific combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state, the continuity degree determining means (for example, determination of the enemy status by the main CPU 101) capable of changing the continuation degree of the advantageous state to a degree advantageous to the player. ) Including
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the internal winning combination determining means determines a specific internal winning combination in which a combination of the specific symbols can be displayed is higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. ..

The continuation degree determining means can change the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state.
The internal winning combination determining means can determine a predetermined internal winning combination in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be displayed in the first gaming state, and can determine the predetermined internal winning combination in the second gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), one or a plurality of lines (whether or not they are effective lines) are related to a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. It is possible to decide whether to use the judgment line, and in the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols (for example, "replay" or "bell" symbol alignment) is displayed on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Can be varied to a degree that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the determined continuation degree.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of "hit rip") is displayed on the determined determination line in the advantageous state, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, the tension in the advantageous state can be increased, the game in the advantageous state does not become monotonous, and the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the determination result regarding the determination line regarding the change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state changes depending on whether or not the right is granted in the specific state (for example, the right acquisition state). ing. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in a specific state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the determination line is granted in the specific state, first, the determination line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of "hit rip") is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous state is achieved. It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the above to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player, and if the granted rights remain, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special right (for example, a permanent right) is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the special right is not granted, the determination line is determined. When determining, one or more lines are determined as the determination line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state during the advantageous state can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be varied in various ways. be able to.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state in the advantageous section) to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and also to have a special symbol. When the combination of (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state is possible. Certain internal winning combinations (eg, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip") in which a particular combination of symbols (eg, a combination of "middle rip" symbols) can be displayed. The probability of determining any of 2) is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first gaming state, a combination of predetermined symbols that changes the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols of "hit rip"). It is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_hit lip") on which can be displayed, and it is not possible to determine this predetermined internal winning combination in the second gaming state.

As a result, in the advantageous state, the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which game state the player is in, so that the game in the advantageous state can be made more diverse and more advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the state.

[Game machine with the fifth configuration]
In a conventional game machine, when a player wins a predetermined internal winning combination in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the game control circuit is advantageous in notifying the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In the state, the noticeable information that enables the notification of the stop operation procedure is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and in the normal state where the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is not notified, the stop operation is performed. It is known that information that makes it impossible to notify the procedure according to the above procedure can be transmitted to the effect control circuit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144568).

However, in the gaming machine shown above, for example, a predetermined internal winning combination may have a plurality of internal winning combinations such that the combination of displayed symbols is different even if the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is the same. When it is included, there is a problem that it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the procedure of the stop operation, but it is not possible to perform an effect related to the combination of displayed symbols.

Here, it is conceivable that the game control circuit transmits the type of the internal winning combination to the effect control circuit in detail, but if this is done, there arises a problem that the control load of the game control circuit increases. Become.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Winning check / medal payout processing) and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a display device 11 controlled by a sub CPU 201) for executing an effect.
With an information transmission means (for example, communication data transmission processing by the main CPU 101) capable of transmitting predetermined information (for example, a winning combination number) regarding the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means to the effect executing means. ,
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantageous state that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 1"), a specific symbol combination is displayed on the first line (for example, the top line) in the symbol display means. The first internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper left bell 1") and
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the first stop operation, the second internal winning is that the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line (for example, the center line) in the symbol display means. The role (for example, "F_middle left bell 1") and
A third, when the stop operation is performed in the second stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 3"), the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the first line in the symbol display means. With the internal batting order (for example, "F_upper middle bell 1"),
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the second stop operation, a fourth internal winning combination (for example, "for example,") in which the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line in the symbol display means. F_middle bell 1 ") and can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The information transmission means is
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination or the third internal winning combination, the first information (for example, the winning combination number "23" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the second internal winning combination or the fourth internal winning combination, the second information (for example, the winning combination number "24" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different effects can be executed when the first information is transmitted and when the second information is transmitted.

In the advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether one or more of the plurality of lines including the first line and the second line is used as a determination line for a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Judgment line determination means (for example, determination of ally type by the main CPU 101),
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Determining means (for example, determining the enemy status by the main CPU 101),
Advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) that determines whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determining means when the predetermined period elapses. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is equipped with.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the stop operation is performed in the "batting order 1", the "F_upper left bell 1" in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line and the "batting order". When the stop operation is performed in "1", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line, "F_middle left bell 1", and when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 3", the top The combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the line. When the stop operation is performed in "F_upper middle bell 1" and "batting order 3", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line. "F_middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and in an advantageous state, for example, when "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined, the winning combination. "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), the displayed symbol has a playability such that the degree of the player's advantage varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed. Since it is possible to perform an effect related to the combination, it is possible to perform a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

[Game machine with the sixth configuration]
In the conventional gaming machine, the story of the story production executed according to the number of transitions to the special gaming state advantageous to the player during the specific gaming state advantageous to the player is advanced, that is, advantageous to the player. It is known that the effect content can be changed according to the duration of the state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187467).

Here, in the gaming machine as shown above, for example, when a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period, it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, an ending effect) that cannot be normally seen. ..

By the way, such a special production is executed, for example, as an additional privilege to be given to the player, but a device for further increasing the player's motivation to play and improving the interest of the production is devised. It is considered that there is room for this.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing a player's motivation to play and improving the interest of production.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) that plays a game by variablely displaying a symbol based on a player's start operation and stopping and displaying a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) advantageous to the player,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the effect.
The effect executing means is
When the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes a special period (for example, the game period of the advantageous section is "1200" times or more), a special effect (for example, an ending effect in the ending 2 state) ) Is feasible,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, an ending effect in the ending 1 state).

In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
When the advantageous state continuation determination means does not determine to continue the advantageous state, the normal termination means for terminating the advantageous state and the normal termination means.
Even when it is determined by the advantageous state continuation determining means to continue the advantageous state, a specific period during which the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means exceeds the special period (for example, for example). Further provided with a specific termination means for terminating the advantageous state when the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times).
The effect executing means is characterized in that the special effect can be executed from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes the special period to the specific period. The gaming machine described above.

Each time the effect executing means is determined by the advantageous state continuation determining means to continue the advantageous state until the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes the specific period. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein a suggestion effect suggesting a guideline for a period controlled in the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means can be executed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period (for example, when the ending 2 state is reached), the special effect can be executed and the special effect can be executed. When it is decided to be controlled in an advantageous state, and when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. It is possible to perform special effects.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a predetermined execution condition is satisfied for a special effect that is a part of a special effect that can be normally executed at the end of a game in a state advantageous to the player. If so, it can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state advantageous to the player. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a special period to the period when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a specific period and the advantageous state ends. , It is possible to perform a special production. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, until the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period, every time it is decided to continue the advantageous state, a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to carry out a suggestion effect that suggests. As a result, the player can generally grasp when the execution of the special effect is started and when the advantageous state ends, so that it is possible to provide appropriate information to the player while enhancing the interest of the game. can.

[Game machines with the 7th to 12th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, a continuous effect for notifying whether or not a special role (for example, a bonus role) that enables a transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus state) is determined as an internal winning combination. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79997).

However, whether or not the special role has been decided as the internal winning role can be inferred not only by the production content of the continuous production but also by the combination of the displayed symbols, so it shifts to an advantageous state. It is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in the notification regarding whether or not to do so and the mode of transition to an advantageous state itself.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player regarding a transition to a state advantageous to the player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stopping operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, the stop in favor of the player. A gaming machine characterized by performing an effect that can notify the operation procedure.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
In the specific combination, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed when the stop operation is in a specific mode, and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed when the stop operation is not in the specific mode. It ’s the winning role,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is asked until the first advantageous state is completed. It is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the advantageous procedure of the stop operation, and when the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player until the first advantageous state is completed.
When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination when the first advantageous state is not the gaming state of either the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, the predetermined winning combination is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player only for the number of times (for example, once).

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, a first advantageous state (for example, a high probability 2 in a normal advantageous section) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, between 9 games). When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), a second advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state is possible. ), And an advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101).
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stopping operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case where the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, the effect is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
The advantageous state control means is when the special gaming state ends.
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the game is controlled to a third advantageous state (for example, a high accuracy 4 state of a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games). Machine.

It is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) for different degrees of advantage of the player.
The special combination includes a first special combination having a different winning probability among the plurality of set values and a second special combination having the same winning probability among the plurality of set values.
The predetermined advantageous conditions are
When any of the first advantageous state and the third advantageous state is in the advantageous state, the special role of either the first special role or the second special role is determined as the internal winning combination. It is decided whether or not it holds,
When neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is advantageous, it is not determined whether or not the first special combination is established when the internal winning combination is determined. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The advantageous state control means can determine whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special gaming state is controlled in the second advantageous state and any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure for the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a production that can notify
When the special gaming state is controlled in the first advantageous state and any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure for the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not make it possible to execute a production that can notify.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) and a predetermined combination. When the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), it is possible to control the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section), and a specific combination of symbols (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed. When this is done, it is possible to change the gaming state to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the gaming state. Can be transferred to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). It has become so.

As a result, in the first advantageous state, there is a high possibility that the number of gaming media to be given will increase as compared with the normal state, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the special gaming state will also increase. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a favorable state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, at an appropriate timing), the specific combination of symbols is displayed and the specific combination is not performed in the specific mode. In this case, it is an internal winning combination in which a specific combination of symbols is not displayed, and in the case of the first advantageous state and the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player for the predetermined combination until the first advantageous state is completed. When the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified and the first advantageous state is not the first normal state and the second normal gaming state, the player is notified of the predetermined combination only for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). The procedure of advantageous stop operation is notified.

As a result, when the specific combination is won, the degree of advantage and the content of the first advantageous state vary depending on whether or not the special combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the special gaming state (for example, the bonus state) ends, if the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the second advantageous state, and the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. If not, the game shifts to a third advantageous state (for example, a high-accuracy 4 state in a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the gaming state is either the first advantageous state or the third advantageous state, the winning probability is the same among the plurality of set values (for example, "F_BB3 + F_watermelon"). 2 ”and“ internal winning combination including bonus combinations other than “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”), and the first special combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”) having different winning probabilities among a plurality of set values. Regardless of which case is won, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, but when neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is in the gaming state, the first special role is assigned. In the case of winning, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent gaming state (advantageous state) can be made more diverse depending on the gaming state and its type when the special role is won. Can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state of the first advantageous state in which it can be determined whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination. , Even when controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state) in the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination, but in the first advantageous state, the special gaming state is set. When controlled, it is not possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination.

As a result, it is possible to provide a first advantageous state, which is a gaming section in which the expectation of shifting to the second advantageous state is increased and the possibility that the number of game media to be given increases is also increased, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the game, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is enhanced. It is also possible to suppress excessive fanning.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol variation means (for example, a reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101) for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation of the player.
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, advantageous state control that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a high accuracy 2 state in a normal advantageous section) for a predetermined period. Means (eg, main CPU 101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. Makes it feasible and
In the case of the advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. Makes it feasible and
The normal game state change control means is a case where the specific combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as the special combination, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, the specific period (for example, 8). (Between games), the gaming state is changed to the first normal gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a period longer than the specific period (for example, between 9 games).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high accuracy 2 state of a normal advantageous section). When a specific combination of symbols (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and a special role (for example, RT3 state) can be changed. When the bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to shift the gaming state to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the advantageous state of the first normal game state and the second normal game state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). The period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, between 9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the first normal gaming state can be continued (for example, between 8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player regardless of whether or not the specific game state (first normal game state) ends, so that the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player is interesting. It can be improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following twelfth configuration.

When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus combination is won), an advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, a display device 11) and
A gaming machine provided with a detection means (for example, a touch sensor 19) capable of detecting a player's operation.
The display means can display a specific image for notifying whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.
The specific image is a first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied. Includes a second specific image to be displayed (eg, the same image as the base image),
The first specific image and the second specific image are different in a specific part and are images common to other parts other than the specific part.
When the detection means detects that the player has performed an operation for designating the specific portion when the first specific image is displayed, it notifies that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Is displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is notified whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) advantageous to the player is satisfied. Therefore, when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the second specific image is displayed. It is possible to display an image (for example, the same image as the base image), and when the first specific image is displayed, the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image. In this case, it is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is involved, so that the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

[Game machine with thirteenth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, the time during which a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) is pressed (time counted by the on-edge timer) is monitored on the gaming control device side, and that time is sent to the effect control circuit side. As a result, it is known that the content of the production can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233278).

However, since it is necessary to mount many effects in recent gaming machines that require diversification of effects, it is required to devise ways to reduce the control load of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load related to the effect even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of a specific operation means. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the thirteenth configuration as follows.

Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stop button),
An operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch) capable of detecting the operation of the operating means, and
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
When the operation detecting means detects the operation of the operating means (for example, on-edge), the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time measurement, the first effect (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Control to generate "Direction 1")
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, control is performed to generate a second effect (for example, "effect 2").
A gaming machine characterized in that if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping, the control for generating the first effect is not performed.

The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation detecting means detects that the operation of the operating means has been completed (for example, when an off-edge is detected).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, timing is started when an operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the timing, the first time is taken. Control to execute one effect (for example, "effect 1"), and control to execute a second effect (for example, "effect 2") when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected). If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping, it is possible not to control the execution of the first effect.

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

[14th configuration gaming machine]
There is known a conventional gaming machine that makes it possible to perform an effect such as notifying an internal winning combination by a light emitting mode of a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) (for example, 2010-82034). reference).

However, it is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in such production.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in directing and enhancing the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration.

A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that generates an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
Prior to the occurrence of the advantageous state, a predetermining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to grant the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state (for example, winning a bonus combination) and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a game value display unit (VL)) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
When the pre-determining means determines that the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state is granted, the effect executing means notifies that the decision has been made (for example, "number of sheets ahead". "Display effect") is feasible, and a predetermined value (for example, the end of the combination as the number of planned acquisitions) regarding the game value that can be acquired in the advantageous state generated based on the right given by the decision in the specific notification effect. A gaming machine characterized by displaying (value of the number counter).

When the effect executing means displays the predetermined value in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and the game value is acquired in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired gaming value value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when it is decided that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, the winning combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted is determined. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of specifically notifying the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that the interest in the effect can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the predetermined value is continuously displayed at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the game value is acquired. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the acquired game value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

[Game machines with 15th to 18th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, if it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) which is an advantageous game period (advantageous section) for the player, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state. In some cases, it is known that it is possible to perform a lottery as to whether or not to continue the advantageous state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming period, which is an advantageous section, varies depending on the setting conditions such as the transition probability of the advantageous state and the high or low of the continuation probability. It has become.

By the way, in such a gaming machine, since the amount of the game value given in the predetermined period is within the range of the predetermined payout rate, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (the amount of increase in the game value). It is designed so that the indicated slope value) becomes a constant value.

Therefore, when the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state is set to a relatively high value, if the above setting conditions are also set to be advantageous to the player, the game There is a problem that the gambling of is excessively high.

On the other hand, in order to suppress the gambling of the game, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state is set to a relatively low value, and the above setting conditions are disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to set it, but in this case, there is a problem that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest of a game while maintaining an appropriate degree of gambling.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of the player to play a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) smaller than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
An advantageous state start determining means capable of determining whether or not to start the advantageous state when the advantageous state is not present,
Including the advantageous state continuation determining means capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state when the advantageous state is present.
The first expected value control means controls so that the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value for at least a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started.
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state including the predetermined period is the second expected value for at least a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled in such a manner.

The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state continuation determining means does not determine to continue the advantageous state for at least the specific period after the advantageous state is continued.

When the advantageous state continuation determining means decides to continue the advantageous state, the advantageous state started based on the determination that the advantageous state start determining means decides to start the advantageous state ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, and a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. Makes it possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. By doing so, it is possible to manage the ball output rate more appropriately.

Further, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated and the advantageous state is continued after the predetermined waiting period has elapsed. You may try to (restart). By doing so, not only can the payout rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 16th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of the player to play a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A predetermining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is provided.
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to terminate the advantageous state when the combination of the special symbols is displayed before the predetermined termination condition is satisfied.
The specific notification executing means can display the combination of the special symbols in the game when the predetermined combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermined means in the advantageous state. If this is the case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed.

A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. With the main CPU 101),
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

The predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game has been played for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, or that the game value given after the advantageous state is started has reached a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state ends when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or when the special gaming state is entered before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, the specific notification indicating to that effect is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state as long as it is within the specified predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the gaming value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it may be possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. In this way, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or the special game. It is also possible to shift to a state, end the advantageous state, and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Can improve the interest of.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the predetermined termination condition may be terminated when a certain privilege is given (or is assumed to be given) to the player. By doing so, it is possible to manage the payout rate more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 17th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of the player to play a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermined means between the time when the advantageous state is started and the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermined means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , The gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified to be a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of a per game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the gaming value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and try to obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the gaming value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the gaming value in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to manage the payout rate more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of the player to play a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. Control to be
Further provided with a special privilege granting means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of granting a special privilege not related to the granting of the game value when the advantageous state ends in response to the display of the combination of the special symbols. A gaming machine featuring.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermined means between the time when the advantageous state is started and the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermined means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , The gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified to be a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of a per game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the gaming value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special gaming state, it is possible to grant a special privilege not related to the granting of the gaming value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and try to obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not given when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling moderate.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the gaming value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the gaming value in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to manage the payout rate more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Game machine of the 19th configuration]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is in a state in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) that is advantageous to the player every predetermined number of games (that is, every predetermined cycle). (For example, see JP-A-2010-167197).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the expectation of transition to an advantageous state at predetermined intervals, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the period until the transition to the advantageous state is reached is constant, and the change in the playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making the period until a state in which a transition to an advantageous state can be made variable, the playability can be made rich in change. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the 19th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 2)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 2)), and a predetermined role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in another example (No. 2), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation of the player.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example of the game property (No. 2)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) 1st special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 2) and end the first special gaming state when the first special ending condition is satisfied. When,
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example of the game property (No. 2)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) 2nd special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 2) and end the second special game state when the second special end condition is satisfied. When,
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (for example, the BB1 permission state in another example of playability (No. 2)) in which is permitted.
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (for example, the BB2 permission state in another example of playability (No. 2)) in which is permitted.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special permission state, the second special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special permission state, the first special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In a normal gaming state that is neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state (for example, the general gaming state (CZ state) in another example of gaming (No. 2)), the first special role or The second special role can be determined as an internal winning role.
The first special end condition is satisfied when a specified number (for example, more than 285) of game values are given in the first special game state.
In the first special gaming state, when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of gaming value is given when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the predetermined number of game values are not given.
At least in the first special gaming state, the period during which the notification means does not notify the operation information regarding the specific aspect functions as a reduction period in which the game value decreases.
The second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the first special gaming state can be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

A gaming machine characterized in that a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first special gaming state functions as the increase period.

In the first special gaming state, when the symbol display means displays a combination of the first specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB1 in another example of gaming (No. 2)), the first specific game A first specific gaming state that can be controlled to start a state (for example, the RB1 state in another example of gaming (No. 2)) and end the first specific gaming state when the first specific end condition is satisfied. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
In the second special gaming state, when the symbol display means displays a combination of the second specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB2 in another example of gaming (No. 2)), the second specific game A second specific gaming state that can be controlled to start a state (for example, the RB2 state in another example of gaming (No. 2)) and end the second specific gaming state when the second specific end condition is satisfied. Further equipped with a control means (for example, main CPU 101),
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special gaming state, the first specific combination (for example, RB1 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special gaming state, the second specific combination (for example, RB2 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as an internal winning combination.
When the first specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the first special gaming state, the first specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The first specific permission state (for example, the RB1 permission state in another example of playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
When the second specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the second special gaming state, the second specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The second specific permission state (for example, the RB2 permission state in another example of playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
In the first special gaming state, the period during which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as the reduction period regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is set.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second special gaming state, the period in which the second specific permission state is set functions as the increase period.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, if the second special role is won before the first special role is won, the game shifts to the second special gaming state, and the second special gaming state is the gaming value. Serves as an increasing period of increase. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the game shifts to the first special game state and the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified in the first special game state. , The first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the normal game state is changed.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the first special gaming state, there is operation information regarding a stop operation in which a predetermined number of gaming values are given when a predetermined winning combination is won. You will be notified. Since the first special gaming state ends when a predetermined number of gaming values are given, the end time of the first special gaming state can be accelerated by being notified of such information. That is, the period until the normal gaming state in which the second special gaming state can be entered can be changed depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state. Therefore, by making the period until the transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in change.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increasing period. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state, and in the second special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the second specific permission state, and the first special gaming state is possible. Then, regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is set, the period during which the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified is made to function as a decrease period, and in the second special gaming state, the period during which the second specific permission state is set is an increase period. May function as. By doing so, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Game machines with the 20th to 22nd configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the conventional gaming machine has a predetermined state which shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

However, in such a gaming machine, when the predetermined state is changed to the disadvantageous state, the player is not in an advantageous state until the predetermined state is changed again. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the motivation and interest in playing games.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Internal winning from a plurality of roles including a special role (for example, BB in another example of playability (No. 3)) and a specific role (for example, a push order small role in another example of playability (No. 3)). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining a combination, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation of the player.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gameplay (No. 3)), a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming property (No. 3)), and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific gaming state). For example, having another example of playability (RT1 state in Part 3),
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
The specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell spill in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the specific game state, and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example of playability (No. 3)) is continued, and the state is continued.
The specific game state control means starts the specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the normal game state which is not the special permission state.
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are played.
The stop control means is
In the specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and the specific combination is used. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means enables the addition of a specific number of game values when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the above-mentioned specific number of game values, and
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state and the specific period in the specific gaming state may be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if a special role is won, a special permission state is set, and if it is a normal gaming state, it is possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. In the case of the specific gaming state, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state until the specific gaming state ends. In addition, when a specific combination is won in a normal game state that is not a special permission state, the game shifts to the specific game state based on the fact that the combination of the specific symbols is displayed without the stop operation being performed in a specific mode. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period in the specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the stop operation is performed. The combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when the specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific role is won. The game value given to is increased. Further, even when the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the above-mentioned aspect is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state that does not shift to the special game state.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 21st gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of playability (No. 4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of playability (No. 4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of playability (eg, No. 4)). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation of the player.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming property (No. 4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming property (No. 4)), and the like. It has a first specific gaming state (eg, RT1 state in another example of gameplay (4)) and a second specific gaming state (eg, RT2 state in another example of gameplay (4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game play (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific gaming state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific gaming state when the special gaming state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued, and the state is continued.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB permission state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued, and the state is continued.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state which is not the special permission state. Let's get started
The stop control means is
In the second specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and the specific combination is used. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means enables the addition of a specific number of game values when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the above-mentioned specific number of game values, and
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is defined as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by being able to do.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if you win a special role, you will be in a special permission state, but the game state will not change, and if it is the first specific game state, the combination of special symbols will be displayed until the first specific game state ends. It is difficult to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period in the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special role or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific gaming state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state or the special gaming state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if the special role is won and the special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when the specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state, for example, if it is a special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state via the special gaming state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. Further, even if the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, and in what order the special role, the special role or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. Regarding the order in which the special role or the special role wins in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified in a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified at least in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state where it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 22nd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of playability (No. 4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of playability (No. 4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of playability (eg, No. 4)). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation of the player.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming property (No. 4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming property (No. 4)), and the like. It has a first specific gaming state (eg, RT1 state in another example of gameplay (4)) and a second specific gaming state (eg, RT2 state in another example of gameplay (4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game play (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific gaming state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific gaming state when the special gaming state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued, and the state is continued.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB permission state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued, and the state is continued.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state which is not the special permission state. Let's get started
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played, and is not satisfied when the special game state is started.
The stop control means is
In the second specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and the specific combination is used. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means enables the addition of a specific number of game values when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the above-mentioned specific number of game values, and
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is defined as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by being able to do.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if a special combination is won, the special permission state is set, but the gaming state does not shift, and if it is the first specific gaming state, a specified number of games are played and the first specific gaming state ends. It is difficult to display the combination of special symbols up to and to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period in the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special role or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific gaming state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state or the special gaming state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if a special combination is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when the specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state, for example, if it is a special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state via the special gaming state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. Further, even if the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, and in what order the special role, the special role or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. Regarding the order in which the special role or the special role wins in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified in a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified at least in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state where it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Game machines of the 23rd and 24th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific condition is satisfied during the carry-over state of a special role (for example, a bonus role). (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, the amount of the gaming value given per unit game in the advantageous state (inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the gaming value) is designed to be a constant value. Therefore, there is a problem that the change in playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to make the game playability rich in change by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value during the advantageous state. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 23rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 5)), a second special role (eg, BB3 in another example of playability (No. 5)), a first predetermined role (eg, game). Pushing order small winning combination 1, 3, 5 in another example of sex (No. 5) and second predetermined winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination 2, 4, 6 in another example of gameplay (No. 5)). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation of the player.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example of the game property (No. 5)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 5), and
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB3 in another example of the game property (No. 5)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB3 state in the example (No. 5), and
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continues the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continues the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB3 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
The internal winning combination determining means overlaps each of the first special winning combination and the second special winning combination with the other internal winning combination when neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is obtained. It can be decided as an internal winning role without doing it,
The stop control means is
In a game in which the first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, or in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means.
In a game in which the second special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, or in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game values are displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of the player's stop operations. Is displayed, and the combination of predetermined symbols to which is given is displayed.
In the first special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols regardless of the order of the stop operation of the player.
In the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
In the second special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means displays the combination of the predetermined symbols when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When a specific advantageous condition is satisfied, the advantageous state control means can set the advantageous state at least for a specific period in the second special permission state.
In the advantageous state, when either the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the order is notified.

The means for determining the internal winning combination is
The first special role is determined as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, 1/100).
The second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, 1/450) lower than the first probability.
The probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state (for example, 1/4000) is higher than the probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state (for example, 1/65536). A gaming machine characterized by being expensive.

The timing of the stop operation of the player who can display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means is the timing of the player who can display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not overlap with the timing of the stop operation.

In a game in which the first special role or the second special role is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to notify that either the first special role or the second special role has been determined as the internal winning combination. However, a predetermined notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a bonus winning notification) that does not enable the notification of the type, and
In the first special permission state, it is possible to notify the symbol display means that the combination of the first special symbols is permitted to be displayed, and in the second special permission state, the symbol display means is described. Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, bonus type notification) that enables notification that the combination of the second special symbols is permitted to be displayed. A game machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special combination or the second special combination is won, the other internal winning combination is determined in the game, or in the first special permission state or the second special permission state after the winning. The combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol cannot be displayed unless the game is played (so-called lost). Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, and when the second predetermined combination is won, the predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order. Not granted. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control the player to an advantageous state in which the information on the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, then the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit is in an advantageous state, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in change.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the probability of winning the first special role is higher than the probability of winning the second special role, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. The probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed may be higher than the probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed in the special permission state. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and finish than the first special permission state. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. By doing so, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified, and the first special permission state and the first special permission state and In the second special permission state, the type may be notified. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player's desired information while making the game playability more varied.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 24th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 6)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 6)), and a specific role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including "F_lip B" in another example (No. 6), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation of the player.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example of the game property (No. 6)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 6), and
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example of the game property (No. 6)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 6), and
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continues the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continues the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB2 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. It is possible to determine as a combination, and when the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means is
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, in the case of the first special permission state, the combination of the specific symbol with the symbol display means (for example, the chance eye in another example of game playability (No. 6)). ) Is not allowed to be displayed, and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means is
The advantage when the bet game value is the first amount, at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. It is possible to decide whether or not to give a state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to grant the advantageous state.

The stop control means is
When the bet game value is the first amount, in the case of the first special permission state, it is possible to make the symbol display means display the combination of the first special symbols, and the second In the case of the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the bet game value is the second amount, in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means, and the first A gaming machine characterized in that it is not possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means in the case of a special permission state.

The internal winning combination determining means further includes a first predetermined combination (for example, push order bell A in another example of playability (No. 6)) and a second predetermined combination (for example, another example of playability (No. 6)). The push order bell B) in can be determined as the internal winning combination,
The stop control means is
When the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the player's stop operation mode is appropriate, the symbol display means is displayed with a combination of predetermined symbols to which a predetermined number of game values are given. If the mode of the stop operation of the player is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the bet game value is the first amount and the first special permission state is set, the player is not concerned with the mode of the stop operation. Instead, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the predetermined symbols, and the bet game value is the first amount and the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second. In the case of the amount of, if the mode of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed, while if the mode of the stop operation of the player is not appropriate, the symbol display means is described. Without displaying the combination of predetermined symbols,
In the advantageous state, the gaming machine is characterized in that information indicating the mode of the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is notified.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the first special role can be won, but the second special role cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. Further, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state, and the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed in the second special permission state. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, whether or not to give an advantageous state when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. Is decidable, and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed, but the combination of the second special symbols cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, as a state in which the game is played, for example, in the first special permission state, the game is played with the first amount of the game value bet, and the second special permission state. A state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played in a first special permission state, and a second special permission state. It is possible to create a plurality of states, that is, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played.

Then, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of the game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in change.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first predetermined combination is won, for example, if the push order is correct, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of which state it is in, and the push order is irregular. If the answer is correct, a predetermined number of game values will not be given, and if the second predetermined combination is won, the game will be played with the first amount of game value bet in the first special permission state. For example, a predetermined number of game values may be given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the same control as in the first predetermined combination may be performed. In this way, the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first amount can be set to the state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

[Game machine with the 25th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition performance of a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order or appropriate pressing of the stop button. An advantageous section or an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function (instruction information can be notified) for notifying the instruction information for identifying or guessing the winning combination that causes a difference in the acquisition performance such as the position on the liquid crystal display device or the like, and such. A setting difference that does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the acquired medal in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by setting a normal section or a normal state that disables the operation of the instruction function (indication information cannot be notified). There are known gaming machines that seek the requirement to win the first hit in connection with the winning of the winning combination without a winning combination (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

Then, during the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART (the one in the document is AT at RT1), when the correct answer is given in the order in which the stop button is pressed, the specified number of medals, for example, more than 3 medals, for example, the push order bell role of paying out 8 medals, etc. When you win, you can easily increase the number of medals you have by notifying the corresponding correct answer pressing order on the liquid crystal display device etc., and you can acquire medals gathered to some extent during the advantageous section by ART that continues for a predetermined number of games. When the remaining number of continuous games of ART is exhausted, the game is returned to the normal section, and the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is expected again (paragraph 0070, etc.).

However, with the above gaming machines, when the advantageous section by ART ends, it is necessary to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section again under the same requirements as at the time of the first hit, so the risk of reducing the number of medals on hand in the normal section is tolerated. However, it is difficult to find a reason to continue playing the game, and there is room for improvement in order for the player to continue playing the game for a longer period of time.

In other words, the motivation to continue playing games even after returning from the advantageous section to the normal section often arises from the regret that the number of medals on hand did not increase more than expected, but revenge always involves risks. In addition, the end of the advantageous section informs the player who is satisfied by winning a sufficiently large number of medals when the game is stopped.

Therefore, neither the regrettable player can be expected to recover under more favorable conditions than the first hit, nor the satisfied player can be expected to further increase the number of medals won. There was a limit to letting the game continue for a longer time.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to continue playing a game for a long time. A gaming machine having a 25th configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
Advantageous state control means 101a provided in the main CPU 101 to generate an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) that enables the operation of an instruction function for notifying information regarding a player's stop operation. Etc.) and
The first game point is given on condition that the advantageous state continues for the predetermined number of reached games (for example, 500 games, etc.), and the predetermined internal winning combination (for example, bonus combination BB1 to BB4) is awarded. A game point giving means (for example, a game point giving means 101b provided in the main CPU 101) for giving a second game point under predetermined conditions (for example, a winning of 100 games or less) based on the winning is provided.
If a predetermined high point evaluation (for example, the total reaches a predetermined value 100, etc.) is obtained based on the first game point and the second game point, a low point evaluation (for example, the total is a predetermined value). A gaming machine characterized in that it is easier to return to the game in which the instruction function is activated than in the case where 100 is not reached, etc.).

As a result, the first game point is given on the condition that the advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function continues for the number of reached games or more determined in advance, and the predetermined condition is based on the winning of the predetermined internal winning combination. A second game point is given below, and if a high point evaluation is obtained based on these points, it is easy to return to the game in which the instruction function is activated. Therefore, if the advantageous state continues to some extent, it is worth continuing the game.

In the above gaming machines
Whether or not the first game point (for example, 99 points or 50 points) is returned to the game that activates the instruction function when the second game point (for example, 1 point or more) is given. A gaming machine characterized by including a numerical value (for example, 99 points) that satisfies a condition (for example, 100 points or more) for receiving the lottery process (for example, a lottery process for returning to ART at 50%).

As a result, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue the game in anticipation of the grant of the second game point after expecting the grant of the first game point.

Instead of the above gaming machines
In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
Advantageous state control means 101a provided in the main CPU 101 to generate an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART or the like) that enables the operation of an instruction function for notifying information regarding a player's stop operation. Etc.) and
A game point awarding means (for example, a game point awarding means 101b provided in the main CPU 101) for awarding predetermined game points that can be accumulated under predetermined conditions is provided.
When the cumulative value of the game points becomes a predetermined high point evaluation (for example, reaching a predetermined value 100, reaching a full point 256, etc.), a low point evaluation (for example, the predetermined value 100 has not been reached, the full point 256 has been reached). The expected value of increasing the number of games that enable the operation of the instruction function within the range that does not exceed the maximum number of continuous games in the advantageous state (for example, 1500 games) is higher than in the case of non-achievement, etc.). A gaming machine characterized by the fact that it is playing.

As a result, when the cumulative value of game points is a high point evaluation, the expected value of increasing the number of games that enable the operation of the instruction function within the range that does not exceed the maximum number of continuous games in an advantageous state increases. .. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to increase the cumulative value of the game points, and the game can be continued for a longer time.

According to the 25th configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to continue playing a game for a long time.

[Game machine of the 26th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition performance of a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order or appropriate pressing of the stop button. An advantageous section or an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function (instruction information can be notified) for notifying the instruction information for identifying or guessing the winning combination that causes a difference in the acquisition performance such as the position on the liquid crystal display device or the like, and such. A setting difference that does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the acquired medal in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by setting a normal section or a normal state that disables the operation of the instruction function (indication information cannot be notified). There are known gaming machines that seek the requirement to win the first hit in connection with the winning of the winning combination without a winning combination (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

In addition, as a method to substantially set the superiority or inferiority difference due to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the period of the bonus game that prohibits the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section (the period in the literature is the period during RBB1 operation) is low. The lower the setting, the longer the period, the lower the setting, the longer the period until the transition lottery to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus game is received, and the lower the setting, the more difficult it is to shift to the advantageous section, and conversely, the higher. The setting makes it easier to shift to an advantageous section (paragraphs 0014 to 0016, etc.).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, even if it is possible to give superiority or inferiority by setting to the first hit to the advantageous section, it has already shifted to the advantageous section, and the big bonus BB (RBB1) during the advantageous section. In the case of winning the prize, there is basically no idea of continuing the advantageous section even during the operation of the BB and after the operation of the BB ends, and the advantageous section is uniformly terminated by the winning of the big bonus BB (RBB1). Even if the section is shifted to the normal section or the advantageous section is maintained, it is possible to fall to the normal section during the BB operation (paragraph 0094, etc.).

Therefore, if the big bonus BB is won during the advantageous section, it is basically necessary to win the first hit from the normal section to the advantageous section again after the operation of the BB ends, and the big bonus BB becomes the big bonus BB during the advantageous section. If you win, there is a risk that your interest in playing games will decline.

Moreover, regardless of whether it is in the advantageous section or the normal section, if the big bonus BB is won, the game during the BB operation does not shift to the advantageous section or add the instruction function during the advantageous section, so that the BB is in operation. The game is positioned as a digestive game that only expects to win medals, and may be uninteresting.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively setting out superiority or inferiority depending on the setting without deteriorating the entertainment interest of the gaming machine by taking the opportunity of winning a bonus. In order to solve this problem, a gaming machine having the following 26th configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
An advantageous state control means that enables an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) that enables the operation of an instruction function that notifies information regarding a player's stop operation, and an advantageous state control means.
It is equipped with a setting changing means (for example, a key-type switch 54 for setting) that makes it possible to change the setting that sets the ball ejection rate, which is the ratio of the total number of acquired game media to the total number of input game media, in a plurality of high and low stages.
The internal winning combination has a first bonus combination (for example, MB0, etc.) that performs a predetermined process for increasing the game that activates the instruction function, and the low setting has a larger number of games that are in operation than the high setting. Including the second bonus role (for example, BB0 etc.)
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance of increasing the game for activating the instruction function is different depending on the number of winnings between the first bonus combination and the second bonus combination.

As a result, in the low setting where the number of games during which the second bonus combination is operating is large, the number of games in which the first bonus combination that performs a predetermined process for activating the instruction function is deprived of the chance to win is deprived. The number increases, and the ability to increase the game that activates the instruction function decreases. On the other hand, in the high setting where the number of games during which the second bonus combination is operating is small, the number of games in which the first bonus combination that performs a predetermined process for activating the instruction function is deprived of the chance to win is small. Therefore, the performance of increasing the game that activates the instruction function is improved.

In the above gaming machines
The second bonus combination is a gaming machine characterized in that the low setting makes it possible to lengthen the number of games until the end of operation as compared with the high setting.

As a result, for each operation of the second bonus combination, the low setting takes more chances of winning the first bonus combination than the high setting, so that the superiority or inferiority due to the setting difference can be effectively set out.

Instead of the above gaming machines
In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
An advantageous state control means that enables an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) that enables the operation of an instruction function that notifies information regarding a player's stop operation, and an advantageous state control means.
It is equipped with a setting changing means (for example, a key-type switch 54 for setting) that makes it possible to change the setting that sets the ball ejection rate, which is the ratio of the total number of acquired game media to the total number of input game media, in a plurality of high and low stages.
The internal winning combination includes a bonus combination (for example, BB0, etc.) in which the number of games in operation is larger in the low setting than in the high setting.
When comparing the operating of the bonus combination and the non-activating of the bonus combination, the non-operating bonus combination is characterized in that the performance of increasing the game for activating the instruction function is higher. A gaming machine.

As a result, in the low setting where the number of games in which the bonus role is active is large, more games in which the bonus role is not activated, which has a high performance of increasing the games in which the instruction function is activated, will be deprived. The ability to increase the game that activates is reduced. On the other hand, in the high setting where the number of games in which the bonus role is active is small, the number of games in which the high-performance bonus role is not activated is reduced to increase the game in which the instruction function is activated, and the instruction function is activated. The performance to increase the game is increased.

According to the twenty-sixth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively setting out superiority or inferiority depending on the setting without deteriorating the game interest, triggered by the winning of the bonus.

[Game machine with the 27th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition performance of a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order or appropriate pressing of the stop button. An advantageous section or an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function (instruction information can be notified) for notifying the instruction information for identifying or guessing the winning combination in which the acquisition performance such as the position is different in the liquid crystal display device or the like, and such. A setting difference that does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the acquired medal in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by setting a normal section or a normal state that disables the operation of the instruction function (indication information cannot be notified). There are known gaming machines that require a requirement to win the first hit in connection with the winning of a specific role, which is generally called a rare role, such as a chance role with a relatively low probability of winning (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.). ).

Then, during the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART (the one in the document is AT at RT1), when the correct answer is given in the order in which the stop button is pressed, the specified number of medals, for example, more than 3 medals, for example, the push order bell role of paying out 8 medals, etc. When you win, you can easily increase the number of medals you have by notifying the corresponding correct answer pressing order on the liquid crystal display device etc., and you can acquire medals gathered to some extent during the advantageous section by ART that continues for a predetermined number of games. When the remaining number of continuous games of ART is exhausted, the game is returned to the normal section, and the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is expected again (paragraph 0070, etc.).

However, in the above gaming machines, when the advantageous section by ART ends, it is necessary to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section again under the same requirements as at the time of the first hit, and the winning role of the rare role that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section. It is easy to fall into the monotonous playability that waits for.

That is, both when expecting the first hit to the advantageous section and when expecting the advantageous section again after the advantageous section ends, in the normal section, it becomes an opportunity for internal lottery while expecting the winning of each game and rare role. All you have to do is hit the start lever, and there is no point in hitting something like "now is your chance" or "hit at this time", and there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline throughout the game.

In the above gaming machines, a section display lamp is provided to turn off the lights during the normal section and turn them on during the advantageous section (paragraph 0029), but such an explicit function is expected by the player during the normal section. There is no function to inform you of hot scenes and non-hot scenes, such as fanning, and you can always think "light up" during the normal section, which may emphasize the playability of one pattern.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of gaming throughout the game. Provide a gaming machine with a configuration.

In a gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means that enables an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) that enables the operation of an instruction function that notifies information regarding a player's stop operation, and an advantageous state control means.
It is equipped with a replay time transition means for shifting a plurality of replay times having different lottery modes of the replay.
At least one replay time (for example, RT1 etc.) and another one replay time (for example, RT2 or RT3 etc.) serve as a trigger for shifting from the non-advantageous state which is not the advantageous state to the advantageous state. The lottery mode is the same, but the lottery mode for executing the process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, which is not executed in the non-advantageous state, is different, and the chances of the game to activate the instruction function are increased. A gaming machine characterized by having a difference between advantages and disadvantages in the expected value.

As a result, there is a difference in the expected value of increasing the chances of the game in which the instruction function is activated, depending on whether the game is played in one replay time or another game in one replay time. For this reason, the player is interested in which replay time the game is played.

In the above gaming machines
The other one replay time (for example, RT2 or RT3, etc.) is more advantageous than the one replay time (for example, RT1 etc.) due to the assist replay time for operating the instruction function under the high probability of replay. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability.

As a result, it is possible to create a hot situation in which the player's expectation is increased in the other one replay time as compared with the one replay time.

In addition, in each of the above gaming machines,
The one replay time (for example, RT1 etc.) is more advantageous than the other one replay time (for example, RT2 or RT3 etc.) due to the assist replay time for operating the instruction function under the high probability of replay. A gaming machine that has a low probability, but is characterized by being able to generate a longer assist replay time.

As a result, one replay time can create a thrilling situation as compared with the other one replay time.

According to the 27th configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the gaming interest throughout the gaming.

[Game machine with the 28th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in the patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-55071), the first symbol A (bell 1) having different bell 1 and bell 2 etc. is placed on each of the left, middle, and right reels. And the second symbol B (bell 2) are arranged, and the combination of "left symbol-middle symbol-right symbol" is "AA", "AA", "ABA". , "ABB", "BAA", "BAB", "BBA", "BB", for example, the number of common payouts A gaming machine that defines eight types of small winning combinations (NML4 to 11) that pay out nine medals, creates multiple pairs that do not overlap each other, and uses them as duplicate winning winning combinations when composing multiple push order-dependent combinations. Is known (Fig. 11, Fig. 12, etc.).

By the way, the above eight types of small winning combinations can be used to form a plurality of push order-dependent winning combinations as separate ones, and for example, a winning search to be executed when the result of one game is obtained. In processing, etc., using the concept of A / B indicating A or B, the combination of eight types of symbols is combined into one data notation "A / B-A / B-A / B" and compressed into, for example, 1-byte data. Then, when it is determined that "A / B-A / B-A / B" are aligned on the valid line, 9 medals are paid out, thereby saving the program capacity and / or the data capacity. It is thought that it can be done.

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, when the number of payouts of "BB" is different from that of other machines, or even if the number of payouts is the same, the game shifts to an advantageous state such as a chance zone, AT, or ART. In the case of functioning as a chance role that can be expected in the game or as a preferential role in which the granting of game points is given preferential treatment, even if the processing is performed when the result of one game is obtained, "A / B-A" It is not appropriate to treat it as one data of "/ B-A / B".

That is, in this case, since "BB" is treated as an exception, at least "AA / B-A / B", "BAA / B", and "BB". , "BB" 4 types (4 bytes) of data are required.

Therefore, the data compression effect is limited, and the program capacity and / or the data capacity of the ROM / RAM on the main side of the limited capacity cannot be saved as expected.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of saving the program capacity and / or the data capacity of the ROM / RAM on the main side. In order to solve the problem, a gaming machine having the following 28th configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation to derive the result of one game.
A combination of symbols of the first group having a combination of a plurality of symbols that give a predetermined benefit to the player based on the result of one game (for example, "AA", "AA", "AAB", ""ABA","ABB","BAA","BAB","BBA", etc.) and the symbols included in the first group. A second group of symbols that is different from the combination and has fewer symbol combinations than the symbol combinations included in the first group, and that gives a profit different from the profit given when the combination of the symbols of the first group is displayed. Have a combination (eg, "BB", etc.) and
A combination of virtual group symbols (for example, "A / B-A / B-A / B", etc.), which is a combination of a combination of symbols of the first group and a combination of symbols of the second group, is combined with one symbol. Each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel constituting the combination of symbols as shown in the column of "data" of the display combination of FIGS. Any of 00000001,0000,1000,100,100,100,000, 001, 000, 001, 000, 10,000, which distinguishes the constituent symbols from other combinations of symbols defined in one storage area by combining them with "/" (or). It can be identified by 1-byte data, etc.)
In the process of determining the combination of the symbols of the first group and the second group, after determining whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group (for example, "BB" or the like), the symbol of the virtual group is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not it is a combination (for example, "A / B-A / B-A / B", etc.).

As a result, after determining whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group has a combination of a small number of symbols, the virtual group including the combination of the symbols of the first group having a combination of a large number of symbols is identifiable by the data of a predetermined capacity. Whether or not it is a combination of symbols of the second group and whether or not it is a combination of symbols of the first group while reducing the program capacity and / or the data capacity required for the determination process by determining whether or not it is a combination of symbols of , Can be determined.

In the above gaming machines
When the combination of the symbols of the second group (for example, "BB" or the like) is determined, in the process that does not require the determination of the combination of the symbols of the first group, whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group is used. If it is determined by the determination that it is a combination of symbols of the second group, it is not determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols of the virtual group (for example, "A / B-A / B-A / B" etc.). A gaming machine characterized by that.

As a result, if it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the second group is a combination of the symbols of the second group by determining whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group has a small number of combinations of symbols, it is not determined whether or not the combination of the symbols of the virtual group is used. Therefore, the program capacity and / or the data capacity required for the determination process can be further reduced.

Instead of each of the above gaming machines
In a gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation to derive the result of one game.
A combination of symbols of the first group having a combination of a plurality of symbols that give a predetermined benefit to the player based on the result of one game (for example, "AA", "AA", "AAB", ""ABA","ABB","BAA","BAB","BBA", etc.) and the symbols included in the first group. A second group of symbols that is different from the combination and has fewer symbol combinations than the symbol combinations included in the first group, and that gives a profit different from the profit given when the combination of the symbols of the first group is displayed. Have a combination (eg, "BB", etc.) and
A combination of virtual group symbols (for example, "A / B-A / B-A / B", etc.), which is a combination of a combination of symbols of the first group and a combination of symbols of the second group, is combined with one symbol. Each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel constituting the combination of symbols as shown in the column of "data" of the display combination of FIGS. Any of 00000001,0000,1000,100,100,100,000, 001, 000, 001, 000, 10,000, which distinguishes the constituent symbols from other combinations of symbols defined in one storage area by combining them with "/" (or). It can be identified by 1-byte data, etc.)
In the process of determining the combination of the symbols of the first group, it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the second group is not a combination of the symbols of the second group (for example, "BB" or the like). After that, a gaming machine characterized in that it is determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols of a virtual group (for example, "A / B-A / B-A / B" or the like).

As a result, after the determination as to whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group has a small number of symbols is not the combination of the symbols of the second group, the combination of the symbols of the first group having many combinations of symbols is determined. Whether or not it is a combination of symbols of the first group while reducing the program capacity and / or the data capacity required for the determination process by determining whether or not it is a combination of symbols of a virtual group that is included and can be identified by data of a predetermined capacity. Can be determined.

According to the 28th configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of saving the program capacity and / or the data capacity of the ROM / RAM on the main side.

[Game machine with the 29th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in the patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-179100), the number of medals to be paid out is the largest as to which symbol is stopped by the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. It is done according to the two major principles of priority on the number of symbols to be preferentially drawn in, or priority on the number of symbols to be preferentially drawn in the number of types of combinations of symbols that can be displayed (the number of winning flags). Before one stop operation is performed, 1-byte priority pull-in order data (stop candidate search data in the literature) is assigned to all the symbols of the unstopped reel, and 0 to 4 of these are assigned based on the position where the stop button is pressed. The data for 5 frames to be searched, which is a frame slip, has the highest priority by performing the maximum value search process and / or the table reference process, and if the data has the same order, it is not won by a predetermined specific method. It is performed by deciding the only symbol whose combination does not match as a stop symbol and stopping the determined symbol at the stop reference position (paragraphs 0045 to 0051, FIG. 5, etc.).

In this way, for example, if one type of 9-card combination and multiple types of 1-card combination are won in duplicate, if the 1st stop bell combination is won, and if the correct answer is the 1st stop, the number of cards is prioritized and the priority is 9 cards. The composition symbol of the combination (in the literature, the symbol assigned 49H with the payout number 9 added) has priority over the composition symbol of the one-card combination with a low priority (the symbol assigned 41H with the same payout number 1 added). It stops, and 9 cards can be won, and if it is not the first stop among incorrect answers, the composition symbols of the 1-card combination with high priority according to the number priority (in the literature, 4 or 3 of the number of combinations of symbols are used. The added 44H or 43H-assigned symbol) has priority over the low-priority 9-card combination configuration symbol (the 41H-assigned symbol to which 1 of the combination types of the same symbol is added) and stops. You can win a prize.

In the above gaming machines, for example, one "Red 7" symbol is drawn on each reel, a "Cherry 1 or Cherry 2" symbol is drawn on the left reel, and a "Cherry 1" symbol is pulled in on the middle and right reels with a maximum of 4 frames. Assuming that multiple reels are arranged as much as possible, it is a chance to have a combination of "Cherry 1 / Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Red 7" and a chance to display an easy-to-understand result. The chance small role 1 including the control one piece role to display the chance eye and the incomprehensible result and the bonus role BB having the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" are duplicated. If there is a role of BB + chance small winning 1 to win, and if you win this, if you stop within the pull-in range of "Red 7" on the right reel, both the number priority and the number priority, It is possible to display the chance 1 card role in the chance small role 1 and make it seem appropriate as if the chance eye is the winning opportunity of the bonus.

However, if you win the chance small role 1 while the winning flag of the bonus role is carried over (inside the BB), you also have a chance if you do not want to display the chance 1 role again. If the small role 1 is displayed with priority over the BB and the stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of "Red 7" on the right reel, the chance 1 card role in the chance small role 1 will be displayed, and the BB winning game will be displayed. The display result does not change depending on the game between BB flags, which may rather confuse the player.

Therefore, in the conventional prioritization according to the two major principles of number priority and number priority, it is not possible to flexibly change the display appearance, and there is a limit to giving diversity to the reel stop control.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further increasing variety by reel stop control. The 29th configuration of the gaming machine as described above is provided.

Based on the operation of a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) having a plurality of symbols, and a stop button (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) corresponding to the winning combination won by the internal lottery. In a gaming machine provided with a reel stop control means for stopping the rotating reel.
The reel stop control means preferentially draws in a symbol corresponding to a combination of symbols having the largest winning range that can be won by the internal lottery among the combinations of symbols included in the winning combination won by the internal lottery. A gaming machine characterized in that stop control according to priority can be executed.

As a result, among the combinations of symbols included in the winning combination, the winning range in which the first symbol combination (for example, NML30, etc.) can be won by internal lottery is the first numerical value (for example, 2122, etc.), and the first value is the first. When the winning range in which the combination of the two symbols (for example, NML14, etc.) can be won by internal lottery is the second numerical value (for example, 1341 etc.) and the first numerical value is larger than the second numerical value, the first numerical value is set. Since the combination of symbols can be stopped with priority over the combination of the second symbols, the variation of stop control is widened.

In the above gaming machines
If there are a plurality of combinations of symbols included in the winning combination won in the internal lottery that have the maximum winning range that can be won in the internal lottery, one predetermined symbol having the maximum winning range A gaming machine characterized by preferentially stopping the symbols corresponding to the combination.

As a result, even when there are a plurality of winning combinations won by the internal lottery having the same and large winning range that can be won by the internal lottery, the stop control according to the range priority becomes possible.

In addition, in each of the above gaming machines,
The reel stop control means preferentially draws in a symbol corresponding to the combination of the stop control according to the range priority and the symbol included in the winning combination won by the internal lottery, in which the number of medals to be paid out is the largest. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to select between stop control according to the number priority to be performed and stop control according to the number priority to preferentially pull in the symbol corresponding to the combination of the symbols having the largest number of winning flags that give the same game result. ..

As a result, by switching between three types of stop control: stop control according to range priority, stop control according to number priority, and stop control according to number priority, a wide variety of stop rolls can be obtained.

According to the 29th configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be further varied by reel stop control.

[Game machine of the thirtieth configuration]
Conventionally, as described in the patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-68526), the replay time state (RT state) in which the lottery mode of the replay (breakdown of the replay combination and / or the lottery value) is different is set. , A gaming machine that provides a low probability replay time (non-RT, RT1, RT3) with a low replay probability and a high probability replay time (RT2) with a high replay probability, and shifts between each RT state according to predetermined transition conditions. It has been known. The transition from non-RT to RT1 or from RT2 to RT1 is made by displaying bell spills (BLK1-4) that are displayed with a predetermined display probability (3/4) when the push order is incorrect when the push order bell role is won, and RT1 To RT2 is made to shift by displaying the combination of promotion trigger symbols (REP4) displayed when the correct answer is given in the push order at the time of winning a specific promotion trigger (paragraphs 0059 to 0062, 0067 to 0072, FIG. 5). etc).

Then, during the game, if the winning of the assist time AT that navigates the pressing order of the stop button that is advantageous to the player according to the internal winning combination can be won, the winning of a specific promotion trigger is waited for in RT1. The correct answer that displays the combination of promotion trigger symbols at the time of winning is shifted to RT2 by navigating on a liquid crystal display device, etc., enabling ART games that operate AT in RT2, which is in a highly accurate RT state, and push order bell. You can get high payout (9 cards, etc.) medals when you win the role. You can increase the number of medals you have by navigating the correct answer push order. By not navigating, the display of bell spilled eyes is induced, and it is made to fall to RT1 in the low accuracy RT state.

However, the high-accuracy replay time RT2 that plays the ART game originally shifts from the low-accuracy replay time RT1 to the navigation that displays the combination of the promotion trigger symbols after obtaining the winning of the AT as described above. However, when the AT is not winning, there is a bias in the push order that a specific push order is advantageous and the others are disadvantageous, or if the stop operation is performed outside the specific push order, a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player is incurred. Since imposition etc. cannot be adopted because it impairs the fairness of the game, it may unintentionally shift to the high-accuracy replay time RT2 even in a situation where there is no navigation that displays the combination of promotion trigger symbols.

In this case, due to the display of the bell spilled eye, it may immediately fall to the low accuracy replay time RT1, but at RT2, wait for the winning of the push order bell role, the answer is incorrect in the push order, and the bell spilled eye has a predetermined display probability. It is necessary to display, and if you happen to answer correctly in the order of pressing, you may spend a considerable number of games, such as waiting for the next winning, and during that time the high probability state of replay continues, so the player unnecessarily It may be profitable. In addition, if the AT is won during a game that has been unintentionally transferred to RT2, the period during which the ART is being prepared to be inserted normally before the winning of the specific promotion trigger is obtained at RT1 and the combination of the promotion trigger symbols is displayed. It is also not possible to provide preferential benefits or special effects when a specific role including a bonus role is won during the preparation for ART.

Here, if the player unintentionally shifts to the high-accuracy replay time, it is conceivable to dare to issue an incorrect push order navigation instead of the original correct push order navigation that is issued during AT when the push order bell role is won. , There is a risk of damaging the fairness of the game and may confuse the player. In addition, it is conceivable to draw a role to shift to a special replay time that falls to a low probability replay time with a small number of games during RT2, but when playing ART with the original RT2, this time it is intended. No new problems arise, such as the need for measures that do not shift to special replay times. After all, the reality is that there is no effective measure to meet the demand for falling to low accuracy replay time as soon as possible when unintentionally shifting to high accuracy replay time.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of appropriately falling to a low accuracy replay time as soon as possible when unintentionally shifting to a high accuracy replay time is provided. It is an object to provide, and in order to solve this problem, a gaming machine having the following thirtieth configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
It is provided with an advantageous state control means that enables an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) to be activated, which enables the operation of an instruction function for notifying information about a player's stop operation.
A replay time state in which the lottery mode of the replay is different includes a low probability replay time (for example, RT0 etc.) having a relatively low replay probability and a relatively high probability replay time (for example, RT1-4 etc.). ,
In the low probability replay time, the first transition trigger for shifting to the first replay time (for example, RT1 etc.) for drawing a specific fall trigger (for example, F_RT3 transition lip etc.) that will fall to the low probability replay time. A combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of NML02 to 13) and a second transition trigger symbol for shifting to a second replay time (for example, RT2) different from the first replay time (for example, a combination of NML01 symbols). , Etc.), and a specific transition distribution role (for example, push order small role, etc.) that can be displayed in a relationship that one is displayed and the other is not displayed according to the player's stop operation is drawn.
The second replay time shall be included in the high accuracy replay time.
Even in the high-accuracy replay time including the second replay time, the specific transition distribution role is drawn.
When the transition to the second replay time is to occur before the occurrence of the advantageous state, the advantageous state is generated based on the winning of the specific transition distribution combination that displays the combination of the second transition trigger symbols. When the specific transition distribution combination is won at the high accuracy replay time including the second replay time, the advantageous state is issued after issuing an instruction (for example, recommended navigation) to display the combination of the first transition trigger symbols. And finish
When the transition to the second replay time occurs during the occurrence of the advantageous state, the second transition trigger occurs when the specific transition distribution combination is won at the high accuracy replay time including the second replay time. A gaming machine characterized by issuing an instruction (for example, correct answer navigation, etc.) to display a combination of symbols.

As a result, even if the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is unintentionally displayed and the transition to the second replay time included in the high accuracy replay time is performed before the occurrence of the advantageous state, the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is displayed. When an advantageous state is generated based on the winning of the specific transition distribution combination to be displayed and the specific transition distribution combination is won at the high accuracy replay time including the second replay time, the combination of the first transition trigger symbols Is issued, so it is possible to prompt the fall to the low accuracy replay time at an early stage. Since the advantageous state is terminated after issuing this instruction, the advantageous state does not become longer than necessary, and the player is not unnecessarily benefited or unnecessarily disadvantaged.
On the other hand, if it is appropriate to shift to the second replay time during the occurrence of an advantageous state and maintain the high accuracy replay time, the high accuracy replay time including the second replay time is used to win the specific transition distribution role. At that time, since the instruction to display the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is issued, it is possible to avoid falling to the low accuracy replay time, and by operating the instruction function at the high accuracy replay time, the player can be appropriately benefited. Can be done.

In the above gaming machines
There is no difference in the profit obtained as a result of one game whether the combination of the first transition trigger symbols is displayed or the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is displayed.
The first replay time is included in the high-accuracy replay time, which is a replay probability that is not different from the replay probability in the second replay time.
Transition from the first replay time to a third replay time (for example, RT3, etc.) that enables a fall to the low probability replay time based on the winning of the specific fall trigger that is drawn at the first replay time. Let me
From the second replay time, a fourth replay time (for example, RT4, etc.) is drawn based on the winning of a predetermined transition trigger (for example, F_RT4 transition lip, etc.) that is drawn with a winning probability that is not different from the winning probability of the specific fall trigger. ),
A gaming machine characterized in that the third replay time and the fourth replay time are included in the high-accuracy replay time.

As a result, the result of one game may be an instruction to display the combination of the first transition trigger symbols or an instruction to display the combination of the second transition trigger symbols based on the winning of the specific transition trigger symbol. There is no difference in the profits obtained as a result, and there is no difference in the replay probability between the first replay time and the second replay time of the transition destination, and the third replay time of the transition destination from the first replay time is also the second replay time. Since both of the 4th replay times of the transition destination from the above are highly accurate replay times, the difference between advantages and disadvantages can be minimized regardless of which instruction is given. Therefore, the intended purpose can be achieved while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In each of the above gaming machines
The specific shift distribution combination relates to the acquisition of gaming media having the same number of acquired gaming media regardless of whether the combination of the first transition trigger symbols is displayed or the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being composed of small roles (pushing order small roles).

As a result, since the specific transition distribution combination is composed of small roles related to the acquisition of the game medium, the specific transition distribution combination can be drawn in each replay time state with a predetermined probability that the probability does not change depending on the replay time state. .. Therefore, regardless of the replay time state, that is, the replay probability, it is easy to secure the lottery value of the specific transition distribution combination for a predetermined value, and it is possible to easily construct the internal lottery table or the like, and achieve the intended purpose.

According to the thirtieth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately falling to a low accuracy replay time as soon as possible when the high accuracy replay time is unintentionally shifted.

[Game machine of the 31st configuration]
Conventionally, as described in the patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-68526), the non-replay in which the lottery mode (breakdown of the replaying combination and / or the lottery value) of the replay is not changed. At least one low probability replay time (RT state with a low replay probability) RT1 in which the lottery mode of the replay is changed with respect to the time (non-RT or RT0) and this non-replay time, and at least. A gaming machine is known in which a plurality of RT states (RT1 to 3, etc.) including one high-accuracy replay time (RT state with high replay probability) RT2 are provided, and each RT state is transferred according to predetermined transition conditions. (Paragraphs 0059-0062, 0067-0072, Fig. 5, etc.).

The non-RT is used as a return destination after the end of the operation of the real bonus (RBB in the literature) and a return destination after the end of the finite RT state (RT3). The non-RT is also a gaming state suitable for a predetermined simulation test performed under a specific condition that the maximum number of sheets to be acquired can be obtained without dropping. The transition from non-RT to RT1 or from RT2 to RT1 is made by displaying bell spills (BLK1-4) that are displayed with a predetermined display probability (3/4) when the push order is incorrect when the push order bell role is won, and RT1 From to RT2, the combination of promotion trigger symbols (REP4) displayed when the correct answer is given in the push order at the time of winning a specific promotion trigger is displayed.

Then, during the game, if the winning of the assist time AT that navigates the pressing order of the stop button that is advantageous to the player according to the internal winning combination can be won, the winning of a specific promotion trigger is waited for in RT1. The correct answer that displays the combination of promotion trigger symbols at the time of winning is shifted to RT2 by navigating on a liquid crystal display device, etc., enabling ART games that operate AT in RT2, which is in a highly accurate RT state, and push order bell. You can get high payout (9 cards, etc.) medals when you win the role. You can increase the number of medals you have by navigating the correct answer push order. By not navigating, the display of bell spilled eyes is induced, and it is made to fall to RT1 in the low accuracy RT state.

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, when the assist time AT is won in the non-replay time (non-RT or RT0) in which the lottery mode of the re-game does not change, the non-RT wins the push order bell role. By not navigating the correct answer push order, the bell spilled eyes are displayed and shifted to RT1, but non-RT waits for the winning of the push order bell role, and the bell spilled eyes are displayed with a predetermined display probability. Because it is necessary, a considerable number of games will be spent even in the stage before waiting for the winning of a specific promotion trigger in RT1. For this reason, the period during ART preparation, which is positioned during promotion until the transition to RT2 and the start of ART games, becomes longer, and the period during which there is no guarantee that the number of medals on hand will increase will be longer, which will reduce the interest in the game. There is a risk of doing it.

In addition, if a real bonus is won during an ART game, it will return to non-RT after the bonus operation ends, so it is necessary to go through long-term ART preparations to return from non-RT to RT2 via RT1. There is a possibility that the medals obtained by the activation of the bonus will be reduced, which may put stress on the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of shortening the preparation period for ART until the assist replay time ART gaming becomes possible. In order to solve the problem, a gaming machine having the following thirty-first configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
It is provided with an advantageous state control means that enables an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) to be activated, which enables the operation of an instruction function for notifying information about a player's stop operation.
A replay time state in which the lottery mode of the replay is different includes a low probability replay time (for example, RT0, etc.) in which the replay probability is relatively low and a high probability replay time (for example, RT2, etc.) in which the replay probability is relatively high.
During the low probability replay time, a first combination (for example, NML41 to 43, etc.) having a relatively high display probability of a combination of corresponding symbols and a second combination (for example, NML44, etc.) having a relatively low display probability are simultaneously won. When a specific special role to be caused (for example, "F_special small role" etc.) is drawn and the specific special role is won, the combination of symbols related to the second role is not displayed under the game played by the player. Under specific conditions where the combination of symbols related to the first role (for example, "watermelon"-"bell"-"replay", etc.) is displayed and the possibility that the combination of symbols related to the second role is not displayed is excluded. The combination of the symbols related to the second combination (for example, "blank"-"blank"-"blank", etc.) is displayed without displaying the combination of the symbols related to the first combination.
When the combination of the symbols related to the second combination is displayed under the specific conditions, the special replay time (for example, RT1 or the like) which is a lottery mode of the replay different from the low probability replay time and the high probability replay time is set. Migrate,
A gaming machine characterized in that it does not go through the special replay time when the assist replay time game in which the instruction function is activated at the high accuracy replay time is enabled.

As a result, in the game played by the player, the ART game can be performed without going through the special replay time, so that the period during ART preparation can be shortened as compared with the conventional one.

In the above gaming machines
A gaming machine characterized in that, under the specific conditions, the transition to the high-accuracy replay time is disabled.

This makes it possible to easily perform a predetermined simulation test under specific conditions without considering a high-accuracy replay time.

In each of the above gaming machines
The low-probability replay time is a non-replay time in which the lottery mode of the re-game has not changed, and is set as a return destination after the operation of a predetermined bonus is completed.

As a result, even if a bonus is won during an ART game, it is possible to shorten the time during ART preparation from the replay time state of the return destination at the end of the operation to the return to the ART game.

According to the thirty-first configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of shortening the ART preparation period until the assist replay time ART gaming becomes possible.

[Game machine with the 32nd configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition performance of a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order or appropriate pressing of the stop button. An advantageous section or an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function (instruction information can be notified) for notifying the instruction information for identifying or guessing the winning combination in which the acquisition performance such as the position is different in the liquid crystal display device or the like, and such. A setting difference that does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the acquired medal in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by setting a normal section or a normal state that disables the operation of the instruction function (indication information cannot be notified). Requirement that the first hit should be won with a predetermined fixed winning probability linked to the winning of a specific role called a rare role, etc., which has a relatively high winning difficulty such as a chance role with a relatively low winning probability. There is a known gaming machine that seeks (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

Then, during the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART (the one described in the document is AT at RT1), when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing the stop button, the specified number of medals, for example, more than 3 medals, for example, 8 medals are paid out as a push order bell. When you win, etc., you can easily increase the number of medals you have by notifying the corresponding correct answer pressing order on the liquid crystal display device etc. It is possible to return to the normal section when the remaining number of continuous games of ART is exhausted, and expect the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section again (paragraph 0070, etc.).

However, in the above gaming machines, when the advantageous section by ART ends, it is necessary to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section again under the same requirements as at the time of the first hit, and the winning role of the rare role that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section. It is easy to fall into the monotonous playability that waits for.

Moreover, if it is the same one rare role, it is required to win with a predetermined fixed winning probability, and there is no choice but to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section according to the probability of one pattern, and the advantageous section during the normal section. It is difficult to change the difficulty of the transition. In addition, it is difficult to raise the expectations of the player by changing the background and stage of the moving image developed on the liquid crystal display device or the like according to the difficulty of the transition.

Therefore, in the normal section or the normal state, which is not in the advantageous section or the advantageous state, the game during the stay period may be uninteresting and the game entertainment may be deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing a gaming interest even in an advantageous section, a normal section not in an advantageous state, or a normal state. In order to solve the problem, a gaming machine having the following 32nd configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
An advantageous state control means that enables an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) that enables the operation of an instruction function that notifies information regarding a player's stop operation, and an advantageous state control means.
It is equipped with a replay time transfer means that transfers multiple types of replay times with different lottery modes for replays.
When winning a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB1 etc.), the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state due to the assist replay time that activates the instruction function with high accuracy replay time is changed according to the type of replay time obtained. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that it is.

As a result, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state due to the assist replay time changes according to the type of replay time that won the bonus role, so it is a high-probability game mode that is advantageous to the player according to the type of replay time. It is possible to create a low-probability game mode that is disadvantageous. For this reason, the transition of the replay time also fulfills the transition function of the game mode, and the player is concerned about which replay time it is in, and the game interest can be enhanced even before the occurrence of the advantageous state.

In the above gaming machines
The at least one replay time (for example, RT1 etc.) and the other one replay time (for example, RT2 or RT3) that can stay before the occurrence of the advantageous state are allowed to stay up to a predetermined finite number of times for each. A gaming machine characterized by being.

As a result, the game mode corresponding to one replay time can be maintained up to the finite number of times set for one replay time, and the game mode corresponding to the other one replay time is about the other one replay time. It is possible to maintain a fixed number of times up to the upper limit, expect to win a bonus role during each maintainable period, and expect an assist replay time according to each game mode.

In addition, in each of the above gaming machines,
The bonus combination can be transferred to the advantageous state if the winning combination is before the occurrence of the advantageous state, and the replay in which the winning combination of the bonus combination is obtained without changing the lottery mode of the re-game depending on the winning and the operation of the bonus combination. A gaming machine characterized by taking over the lottery mode of re-gaming in time.

As a result, the winning of the bonus role shifts to an advantageous state, and as a process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state, a common process of referring to the lottery mode of the replay at the replay time in which the winning of the bonus role is obtained is used. It can be appropriately promoted to an advantageous state by the assist replay time.

According to the thirty-second configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the game entertainment even during an advantageous section, a normal section that is not in an advantageous state, or a normal state.

[Game machine with the 33rd configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition performance of a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order or appropriate pressing of the stop button. An advantageous section or an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function (instruction information can be notified) for notifying the instruction information for identifying or guessing the winning combination in which the acquisition performance such as the position is different in the liquid crystal display device or the like, and such. A setting difference that does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the acquired medal in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by setting a normal section or a normal state that disables the operation of the instruction function (indication information cannot be notified). Difficulty of winning, such as a chance role with a relatively low probability of winning, selected in advance from a limited number of roles that have no role and the lottery value does not change regardless of the type of replay time in which the lottery mode of the replay is different. There are known game machines that require a requirement to win the first hit with a predetermined fixed winning probability linked to the winning of a specific role called a rare role, etc. (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.). ..

In addition, as a method to substantially set the superiority or inferiority difference due to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the period of the bonus game that prohibits the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section (the period described in the literature is the period during RBB1 operation). The lower the setting, the longer the period, the lower the setting, the longer the period until the transition lottery to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus game is received, and the lower the setting, the more difficult it is to shift to the advantageous section, and conversely. The higher the setting, the easier it is to shift to an advantageous section (paragraphs 0014 to 0016, etc.).

However, in the above game machines, it is impossible to shift to the advantageous section during the bonus game period, and the lower the setting, the longer the bonus game period, so that the first hit to the advantageous section is substantially given superiority or inferiority by setting. Even if it is possible, in order to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section after the bonus game, again under the same requirements as at the time of the first hit, and after the bonus game, from the state where the replay probability is low, there is no setting difference and It is necessary to wait for the winning of a limited pre-selected rare role, and the game tends to become monotonous.

Moreover, the combination of symbols that triggers the transition of the replay time state, including the transition from the low replay probability state to the high replay time state, is basically displayed on the premise of winning a role that does not depend on the setting and has no setting difference. Since it should be, there is no difference in the setting as to whether to expect the transition to the advantageous section with the low probability replay time or the transition to the advantageous section with the high probability replay time, and the high setting is better than the low setting. However, it does not mean that the instruction function is activated under a favorable replay time state.

Therefore, with the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is difficult to effectively determine the superiority or inferiority of the settings, and the game due to the setting difference may not be sharpened, and the game interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of sharpening the superiority or inferiority of a game due to a setting difference and enhancing the interest of a game, and solves this problem. In order to do so, the following gaming machine having the 33rd configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of a symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.
An advantageous state control means that enables an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART, etc.) that enables the operation of an instruction function that notifies information regarding a player's stop operation, and an advantageous state control means.
It is equipped with a setting changing means that makes it possible to change the setting that sets the ball ejection rate, which is the ratio of the total number of acquired game media to the total number of input game media, in multiple stages of high and low.
From the high-expected replay time (for example, RTH (RT2), etc.) in which the expected value that increases the chance of the game that activates the instruction function is relatively high in a state where the lottery mode of the re-game is different, and this high-expected replay time. Includes a low expected replay time (eg, RTL (RT1), etc.) with a relatively low expected value that allows migration and increases the chances of a game that activates the instruction function.
The internal winning combination includes a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MBa, etc.) that enables the transition to the high expected replay time based on the specific transition opportunity determined from the winning to the end of operation.
The winning probability of the bonus combination is higher for those with a high setting than for those with a low setting.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

As a result, the high setting with a high winning probability of the bonus role makes it easier to shift to the high expected replay time based on the specific transition opportunity, and increases the chances of the game to activate the instruction function. Expected value is high. Therefore, the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus combination can be exceeded, the range of advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference can be increased, and the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference can be sharpened.

In the above gaming machines
Common processing that does not refer to the value of the setting between the winning of the bonus combination and the end of the operation (for example, a two-step lottery process according to the winning probability common to all settings at the time of winning or non-winning of a specific small winning combination) The game machine is characterized in that it makes it possible to increase the chances of a game in which the instruction function is activated.

As a result, the higher the setting that makes it easier to win the bonus combination, the higher the possibility of increasing the chances of the game in which the instruction function is activated by the common processing that does not refer to the set value from the winning to the end of the operation. Therefore, the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus combination can be exceeded, the range of advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference can be further increased, and the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference can be further sharpened.

In each of the above gaming machines
The bonus combination is composed of a bonus continuous operation device related to the second type special bonus.
While the Type 2 special bonus is in operation, all the small wins related to the acquisition of the game medium are in the winning state, but as a result of the same internal lottery as in the non-operating game of the Type 2 special bonus, the winning is won. Based on the winning of the specified specific small role (for example, "F_watermelon 1", "F_weak rare role A", "F_weak rare role B", "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4", etc.) A gaming machine characterized in that it makes it possible to increase the chances of a game in which the instruction function is activated.

As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the game in which the instruction function is appropriately activated while the bonus combination is being activated, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

According to the thirty-third configuration, it is possible to sharpen the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference, and it is possible to provide a game machine that can enhance the game interest.

[Game machine of the 34th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition performance of a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order or appropriate pressing of the stop button. An advantageous section or an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function (instruction information can be notified) for notifying the instruction information for identifying or guessing the winning combination that causes a difference in the acquisition performance such as the position on the liquid crystal display device or the like, and such. A setting difference that does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the acquired medal in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by setting a normal section or a normal state that disables the operation of the instruction function (indication information cannot be notified). There are known gaming machines that seek the requirement to win the first hit in connection with the winning of the winning combination without a winning combination (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

In addition, a bonus game with a shift type big bonus BB (RBB1 in the literature) that prohibits the lottery for transition to the advantageous section as a method to substantially set the superiority or inferiority difference due to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. The lower the setting, the longer the period of It is difficult, and conversely, the higher the setting, the easier it is to shift to the advantageous section (paragraphs 0014 to 0016, etc.).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, even if it is possible to give superiority or inferiority by setting to the first hit to the advantageous section, it has already shifted to the advantageous section, and the big bonus BB (RBB1) during the advantageous section. In the case of winning the prize, there is basically no idea of continuing the advantageous section even during the operation of the BB and after the operation of the BB ends, and the advantageous section is uniformly terminated by the winning of the big bonus BB (RBB1). Even if the section is shifted to the normal section or the advantageous section is maintained, it is possible to fall to the normal section during the BB operation (paragraph 0094, etc.).

Therefore, if the big bonus BB is won during the advantageous section, it is basically necessary to win the first hit from the normal section to the advantageous section again after the operation of the BB ends, and the big bonus BB becomes the big bonus BB during the advantageous section. If you win, there is a risk that your interest in playing games will decline.

Moreover, regardless of whether it is in the advantageous section or the normal section, if the big bonus BB is won, the game during the BB operation does not shift to the advantageous section or add the instruction function during the advantageous section, so that the BB is in operation. The game is positioned as a digestive game that only expects to win medals, and may be uninteresting.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the gaming interest during a shift type big bonus operation. A gaming machine having a thirty-fourth configuration as described above is provided.

It has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) for stopping the rotating reel.
The winning combination determined by the internal lottery includes the first bonus (for example, BB, MB, etc.), and the winning combination determined by the internal lottery during the operation of the first bonus is displayed by displaying a combination of predetermined operating symbols. In a gaming machine including an operating second bonus (eg, RB1 to RB3, CB1 to CB3).
The combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus can be displayed when the operation mode of the stop button matches a part of the plurality of candidates.
By the time the operation of the first bonus is completed by satisfying the predetermined end condition, the larger the number of games in which the second bonus is operating, the more the player's game is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus. A gaming machine characterized in that it makes it possible to increase the chances of a game in which an instruction function for notifying information about a stop operation is activated.

As a result, by displaying the combination of the operating symbols of the second bonus in a small number of games while the first bonus is operating, the number of games in which the second bonus is operating can be increased by the end of the operation of the first bonus. Since the opportunity of the game to activate the instruction function can be increased, the game entertainment during the operation of the first bonus can be effectively enhanced.

In the above games
When the number of games between the flags of the second bonus from the winning of the second bonus to the display of the combination of the operating symbols is small, the number of games in operation of the second bonus is the same as when the number is large. However, it is a gaming machine characterized by having a high expected value for granting the above benefits.

As a result, the more the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus is displayed at an early stage, the more the privilege can be expected, so that the player's sense of accomplishment can be effectively brought out.

In each of the above gaming machines
During the operation of the first bonus, the smaller the number of game media acquired in the game in which the second bonus is drawn, the larger the number of games in which the second bonus is operating by the end of the operation of the first bonus. A game machine characterized by the fact that it is.

As a result, in the game of drawing the second bonus, by intentionally stopping the acquisition of a small number of game media, it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he / she has obtained the privilege from the game in which the second bonus is in operation, which he / she has increased. You can increase the sense of accomplishment.

According to the thirty-fourth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the gaming interest during the shift type big bonus operation.

1 ... Pachislot, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 6 ... Information display, 11 ... Display device, 17L, 17C, 17R ... Stop button, 18 ... Sub display device, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 90 ... Main control circuit, 91 ... Microprocessor, 101 ... Main CPU, 102 ... Main ROM, 103 ... Main RAM, 107 ... Arithmetic circuit, 114 ... First serial communication circuit, 115 ... Second serial Communication circuit, 200 ... Sub control circuit, 201 ... Sub CPU 201, 301 ... First interface board, 302 ... Second interface board

Claims (2)

A variable display means that can display multiple identification information in a variable manner,
A winning combination can be determined based on a predetermined start condition, and a combination determining means.
A stop operation detecting means capable of detecting an operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and a stop operation detecting means.
A stop control means for stopping the variable display of the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means.
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege according to the stopping mode of the variable display means, and a privilege granting means.
A notification means capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player,
A state control means capable of controlling a non-advantageous state in which the notification by the notification means is not allowed and an advantageous state in which the notification by the notification means can be allowed is provided.
The advantageous state includes at least a normal advantageous state, which is a period in which the game value decreases, and an increased advantageous state, which is a period in which the game value increases.
When the first termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the first termination control means for terminating the advantageous state and
In the increased advantageous state, when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, a second end control means for terminating the advantageous state is further provided.
The first termination condition is that a predetermined number of games is consumed in the advantageous state.
The second termination condition is that the number of increased game values reaches a predetermined predetermined number in the advantageous state.
When both the first end condition and the second end condition can be satisfied in one game, the end of the advantageous state by only one of the first end control means and the second end control means. Process and
Further equipped with a signal control means capable of outputting a predetermined signal to an external device,
When the advantageous state is terminated by the first end control means, the signal control means controls the predetermined signal in an embodiment indicating the end of the advantageous state, and the second end control means causes the advantageous state. Even in the case of termination, the predetermined signal is controlled by the first termination control means in the same manner as in the case where the advantageous state is terminated.
It is possible to suggest to the player that the termination process of the advantageous state is to be performed when the termination process of the advantageous state is to be performed, and the mode of the suggestion is the termination by the first termination control means or the first. 2 It depends on the type of end control, whether it is the end by the end control means or not.
If the first end condition is satisfied during a special game in which the special role in the winning combination is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed, the above-mentioned is performed without waiting for the end of the special game. A gaming machine characterized by outputting the predetermined signal by a signal control means. A variable display means that can display multiple identification information in a variable manner,
A winning combination can be determined based on a predetermined start condition, and a combination determining means.
A stop operation detecting means capable of detecting an operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and a stop operation detecting means.
A stop control means for stopping the variable display of the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means.
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege according to the stopping mode of the variable display means, and a privilege granting means.
A notification means capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player,
A state control means capable of controlling a non-advantageous state in which the notification by the notification means is not allowed and an advantageous state in which the notification by the notification means can be allowed is provided.
The advantageous state includes at least a normal advantageous state, which is a period in which the game value decreases, and an increased advantageous state, which is a period in which the game value increases.
When the first termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the first termination control means for terminating the advantageous state and
In the increased advantageous state, when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, a second end control means for terminating the advantageous state is further provided.
The first termination condition is that a predetermined number of games is consumed in the advantageous state.
The second termination condition is that the number of increased game values reaches a predetermined predetermined number in the advantageous state.
When both the first end condition and the second end condition can be satisfied in one game, the end processing of the advantageous state is performed by the first end control means and the second end control means.
Further equipped with a signal control means capable of outputting a predetermined signal to an external device,
When the advantageous state is terminated by the first end control means, the signal control means controls the predetermined signal in an embodiment indicating the end of the advantageous state, and the second end control means causes the advantageous state. Even in the case of termination, the predetermined signal is controlled by the first termination control means in the same manner as in the case where the advantageous state is terminated.
It is possible to suggest to the player that the termination process of the advantageous state is to be performed when the termination process of the advantageous state is to be performed, and the mode of the suggestion is the termination by the first termination control means or the first. 2 It depends on the type of end control, whether it is the end by the end control means or not.
If the first end condition is satisfied during a special game in which the special role in the winning combination is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed, the above-mentioned is performed without waiting for the end of the special game. A gaming machine characterized by outputting the predetermined signal by a signal control means.

Images